JP6686971B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines move a movable object to a position where the player can see it, as one of the effects for notifying the result of hit determination such as a hit, and give the player a novel impression. There has been proposed a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

JP 2012-130802 A

  By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that a malfunction occurs due to the movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects in the gaming machine described above.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention can execute game control based on main control means capable of executing game control and a control signal output from the main control means. A sub-control means, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a ball entering detecting means capable of detecting that the game ball enters the ball entering means, and a first position. The movable means is movable to a second position different from the first position, and a guiding means capable of guiding a game ball entered in the ball entering means to the movable means. The movable means is an opening means into which the game ball guided by the guiding means can enter, a holding means capable of holding the game ball entered from the opening means, and a game held by the holding means. And a moving means capable of moving a ball, wherein the gaming machine has the opening. The game ball that ball entrance from stage have a discharge control unit that can be executed by the moving means the discharge operation that can be discharged to the outside of the movable means, the main control unit, the entering sphere Based on the fact that the detection means has detected that the game ball has entered, it has an output means for outputting a ball input signal to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means has the game ball from the opening means. Opening detecting means capable of detecting that a ball has entered, movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means, and predetermined for the movable means when the game machine is powered on. Initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute the specified initial operation, and at least a period until the initial operation ends when the ball entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being performed, Opening inspection Based on the game ball it is detected that the ball entrance by means is the discharge operation, those containing an initial discharge operation control means is executed by the discharge control unit.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a main control means capable of executing a game control, and a sub-control means capable of executing a game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, And a ball entrance means capable of entering a game ball , a ball entrance detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means, a first position and a first position thereof. Has a movable means movable to a different second position, and a guiding means capable of guiding the game ball entered in the ball entering means to the movable means, wherein the movable means is Opening means into which the game ball guided by the guiding means can enter, holding means capable of holding the game ball entered from the opening means, and moving the game ball held by the holding means The game machine has a moving means capable of Spheres have a discharge control unit that can be executed by the moving means the discharge operation that can be discharged to the outside of the movable means, the main control unit, game ball by the entering ball detection means Based on the fact that it is detected that the ball has entered, it has an output means for outputting a ball input signal to the sub-control means, the sub-control means, the game ball has entered from the opening means A detectable opening detection means, a movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means, and a predetermined initial operation for the movable means when the game machine is powered on. The initial operation control means to be executed by the movable control means, and, when the ball entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being executed, at least the period until the initial operation is finished, by the opening detection means, the game ball It was ball entrance based on the has been detected is the discharge operation, those containing an initial discharge operation control means is executed by the discharge control unit.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. FIG. 12A is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and FIG. 12B is a sectional view of the general winning opening unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIII-XIII line of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning hole unit. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a 1st unit, (b) is a side view of a 1st unit, (c) is a rear view of a 1st unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 1st unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line of FIG.18 (b). It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIII-XXIII line of FIG.18 (b). 21A is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 21, and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 25A is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in a range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIG. 25B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 21A is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in a range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 25A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 25B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 25C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 25B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 25A. is there. (A) is a front view of a 2nd unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd unit. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29. (A) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a center frame. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 33. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a perspective rear view of the back case and the board box, and (b) is a back view of the back case and the board box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a 1st overhang state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhang state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in a 1st overhang state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the second overhang state. FIG. 6A is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, FIG. 7B in the first extended state, and FIG. 7C in the second extended state. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit in the LIVa-LIVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. 50A is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, FIG. 51B is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. 51, and FIG. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LVc-LVc of 52. (A) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line of FIG. 52, (b) is a front view of the 1st link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in a 2nd protruding state. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. 68A is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXa in FIG. 68B, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXb in FIG. 68A. (A) is a top view of a distribution unit, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a distribution unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the LXXIII-LXXIII line of FIG. 70 (a). (A) And (b) is a partial expanded view of the distribution unit in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged view of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged view of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged view of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 91. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a decoration unit. 89 is a rotary unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and FIG. 89 is a rotary unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and FIG. FIG. 6A is a side view of the decorative unit and the right transmission member in the closed state, the intermediate state, and the open state in FIG. FIG. 7A is a side view of the decorative unit and the right transmission member in an open state, FIG. 8B is an intermediate state, and FIG. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. (A) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc of FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of a rotating body in direction view. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotary body. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a rotating body. (A) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is open. (A) And (b) is a side view of a decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of a ball pedestal, (b) is a front view of a ball pedestal, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball pedestal taken along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108 (a). Is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball pedestal. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a ball pedestal. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the rotation unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is arranged in the projecting position. (A) is a front view of a variable part, (b) is a rear view of the variable part. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position, (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position, (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV of FIG. 131 (a). (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged view of the distribution unit in the range CXXXV of FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. (A) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit when a game ball is held in the displacement member. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit when a game ball is held in the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is a section schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in 10th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 153 (a). FIG. 8 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of a ball receiving part in a 12th embodiment, and (b) is a front view of a ball receiving part. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a CLVIc-CLVIc line of FIG. 156 (a). It is a sectional view of a special winning device. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special winning device. FIG. 15A is a top view of the special winning device, and FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device taken along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb of FIG. 158A. (A) is a rear view of the back case in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the line CLIXb-CLIXb of FIG. 159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 16th Embodiment. 16A is a rear view of the rear case according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161A. (A) is a front view of the back case in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a schematic top view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of a pachinko machine 10. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the engagement member in 19th Embodiment. 16A is a front view of the rear case, and FIG. 16B is a one-way cross-sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of a back case and a rotation unit in a 20th embodiment. (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member. (A) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotation unit according to the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 17A is a rear view of the rotary unit and the engaging member, and FIG. 17B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotary unit taken along the line CLXXIB-CLXXIB in FIG. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotation unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotation unit. It is a perspective front view of an engagement member and a fixed member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a back case. 175 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175 (b). FIG. 177 is a front view of the back case in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 25th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a sectional view of a game board in a 26th embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 27th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the game board in 28th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 29th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the general winning a prize mouth unit in 30th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the general winning a prize mouth unit in 31st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning a prize device in a 32nd embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, (c) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185 (a). Is. FIG. 18A is a sectional view of the special winning device, and FIG. 18B is a sectional view of the special winning device taken along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186A. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the 1st course member in a 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a special winning device. (A) is a front view of the game board in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXCIb-CXCIb in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning device. 19A to 19C are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191B. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view which showed typically the game board in 36th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view which showed typically the game board in 37th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 38th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb of FIG. 197 (a), and (c) of FIG. 197 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in a CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in a 39th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in a 40th embodiment, and Drawing 200 (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in a CCb-CCb line of Drawing 200 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in a 41st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in a CCIb-CCIb line of Drawing 201 (a). 201A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201A, and FIG. 201B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG. 201A. is there. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the back case in 42nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the back case, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of a back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCVb-CCVb in FIG. 205 (a). (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CCVIb-CCVIb in FIG. 206 (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the special winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area | region division | segmentation setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation of 16R probability variation big hit in a 1st control example, (b) is an example of the display mode of a rotation unit at the time of 16R probability variation big hit variation. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the fluctuation | variation of 6R probability variation big hit in a 1st control example, (b) is an example of the display mode of a rotation unit at the time of 6R probability variation big hit variation. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the change during CHARGE production in a 1st control example, (b) is the display content which showed the fluctuation stop during CHARGE production in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the roulette effect after the special symbol stop in the 1st control example, (b) is the display content which showed the result of the roulette effect in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of display contents indicating that a button press effective period has occurred in the first control example, and FIG. 9B is a display content when the button press effective period in the first control example has passed a certain period. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents during button press in the 1st control example, and (b) is a button effect after each button press effective period display in the 1st control example match. It is the figure which showed an example in the case of doing. It is a timing chart showing a period during the button press effect in the first control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the automatic button press production 1 in a 1st control example, (b) showed the example of the display content of the automatic button press production 2 in a 1st control example. It is a figure. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the automatic button press production 3 in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when an attacker wins during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) shows a case where a pseudo attacker is won during the jackpot game in the first control example It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically showing the RAM configuration of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the special symbol big hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal hit random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table, (c) [Fig. 3] is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal / latent accuracy. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for probability changes. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reservation rank selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reservation mode selection table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the treasure box mode selection table. It is the typical figure which shows the contents of the production counter group typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 1 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows other winning prize processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows main processing by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation mode selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the treasure box mode selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the right attacker jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the pseudo attacker production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a stop process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the operation production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the charge production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production execution management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the operation production management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flow chart showing a notice effect display process executed by an MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a fluctuation replacement switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing an operation effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a button fusion display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flow chart which shows pseudo winning a prize display processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer updating process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the point acquisition production start in a 2nd control example, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the point acquisition production end. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the point acquisition effect with the reservation ball in the 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the reach selection change pattern. is there. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the pseudo change in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the point consumption re-change. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the design HOLD selection screen in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the design HOLD screen in the 2nd control example. . (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table with reservation in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table without reservation in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the variation point selection table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the display position in the second control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hitting consumption point selection table in a 2nd control example, (b) shows the content of the deviating consumption point selection table in a 2nd control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the point selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the advance notice setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a special point selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the consumption reach selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A)-(c) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the initial operation data in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the firing operation data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the origin operation data in the third control example. is there. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the 1st operation data in the 3rd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing typically the contents of the 2nd operation data in the 3rd control example. It is a figure. 11 is a flowchart showing an initial operation setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the example of the 3rd control. It is a flowchart which shows the initial discharge operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the operation control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the firing operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the special winning a prize device in the example of the 4th control. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the production performed corresponding to the game state in a 4th control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed the production | production in the latent precision production A mode in a 4th control example, and (b) is the production | presentation in the latent production B mode in a 4th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content which showed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol random number 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the small hit random number 4 table in the fourth control example. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal per random number 4 table in a 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in a 4th control example, (b) is the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in a 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal change 4 table in a 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the latent-certain 4 table in a 4th control example, (b) showed typically the content of the 4 time-saving table in a 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flow chart which showed the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation execution process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flow chart which showed the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation execution process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 1st control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure respectively indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 4 that is openably and closably supported. The outer frame 11 has a front view (in order to support the inner frame 4).
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side, and the inner frame 4 is openably and closably open to the front side with the side provided with the hinges 18 as an opening / closing axis.

On the inner frame 4, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front surface region of the game board 13 and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a.
A firing rail (not shown) or the like for guiding to the front area of No. 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided.
And are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front door 5 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
Two are provided. The frame button 22 is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed by or changing the effect contents of the super reach.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 is provided which can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. (See 2)
A certificate or the like attached to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball, the ball is lent according to the operation. Be seen.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium),
As long as there is a balance on the card or the like, the lending balls are supplied to the upper plate 17. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance, and the like are incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to many nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63, first
The winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). To be The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed with tapping screws from the front side.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
At the inner position of the outer rail 77, an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at a position inside the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided,
The area where the fired sphere flows down).

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the) to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. At the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to give momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). First
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B are to be displayed according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is carried out when a prize is awarded to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also determines the type of big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit are prepared. First symbol display device 37A, 3
7B not only shows whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but in the case of a big hit, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot", after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds,
It is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is not in progress and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability change. In addition, in the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state”, the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is in a game state which is neither a sudden change nor a short time (
It is a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During probability change and shortening of working hours, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the second winning hole 64
The time for which the first electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric auditors product 640a is in the opened state (opened state), as compared to the case where the first electric auditors product 640a is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning hole 640. The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Therefore, the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Further, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric auditors product 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric auditors product per hit. At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time for which the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not changed, Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 64.
With one of the winning openings 640 (starting winning) as a trigger, the first symbol display device 37A,
While synchronizing with the variable display in 37B, the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display of the third symbol, and passage of the sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED for variably displaying the second symbol is provided as a trigger.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays the symbol every time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 (second symbol (
(Not shown)) The variable display is performed by alternately turning on the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, in the second symbol display device, after the variable display of the third symbol, "
The symbol "x" is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is the first electric accessory 64 attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○").
0a is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first electric auditors' product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

It should be noted that during the probability change or shortening of time, the probability of winning is increased, and the first
Even if other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are used to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the shortening of time, the variable display of the second symbol is displayed. The time may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit First against
The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow a part of the balls flowing down the game board to pass through, out of the balls emitted to the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A winning lottery for symbols is carried out. After the winning lottery, the variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device,
If the result of the hit lottery is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display,
If the result of the winning lottery is out, a symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also illuminated. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using 37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also,
The maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times,
It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (because of the turning on of the second winning opening switch). Big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the prize hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize hole 640 are the same, but the ball is won in the first prize hole 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the number of prize balls to be paid is different from the number of prize balls to be paid when the ball is to the second prize hole 640, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid when a ball is to be prized to the first prize hole 64. To 3
The number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 may be set to five.

Further, on the left side in the front view of the first winning opening 64, a third winning opening 82 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins, the third winning opening 82 can send the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 described later via the ball sending unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in communication with the first opening 511 described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13 and can be opened and closed, and normally, the third electric accessory 82a.
a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is in a state in which it is difficult to enter the third winning opening 82.
On the other hand, when there is a jackpot determination triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the third electric auditors object 82a is opened for a predetermined time before, after, or during the jackpot (expansion). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the third winning opening 82. Also, the third winning hole 82
A sensor device SE1 that detects a passing sphere is mounted on the downstream side of.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a is determined by the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 56.
The result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is not necessarily triggered by the winning of 40, and is triggered by the passage of the ball of the first through gate 66 sleeping, is the symbol of "○" is the second symbol display. When displayed on the device, it may be open.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This first electric accessory 64
0a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state).
Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is It is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high during the probability change and during shortening of the working hours, compared to during normal operation.
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
Is easily displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of the working hours, the second winning opening 640 is
It is possible to make the ball easy to win.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. The ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”).
), It is more advantageous for the player to win a lot of chances in the big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or a reduction in working hours, by passing a ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric auditors product 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric auditors product 640a and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). How to
It can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the way the ball is hit can be changed for the player, and the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, it becomes a jackpot stop symbol. While turning on the symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is for a predetermined time (for example, 30
It will be opened until seconds have passed or 10 balls are won.

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.
It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. It The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114, the payout controller 111 and the launch controller 112, the power supply 115, and the card unit connection board 1
16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-
Reference numeral 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are housed therein.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Also,
A seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the seal unit or seal,
It is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. RAM 203
Besides, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, by the MPU201, jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as 7A, 37B and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result on the second symbol display device is executed.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and holds data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B,
A solenoid including a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, a large opening opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side around the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
A RAM erasing switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in No. 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has M
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. The RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10.
Even after the power is shut off, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to retain (backup) data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112, when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, sets the sphere launching unit 112 so that the launching strength of the sphere is set according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
On condition that it is not operated), the firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. .

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and display control device 114 such as notice production
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 2
The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the unit 25. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect contents at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and also corresponding to the display content. Lighting and extinction of the lamp display device 227 are controlled.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 8
It is for controlling the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in 1. In addition, the display control device 1
14 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3).
RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided with the reference). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 which is supplied from the outside.
It takes in a voltage of 4 volts and switches such as various switches 208 and solenoids 20.
Generates a voltage of 12 V for driving solenoids such as 9 and a motor, a voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and generates these 12 V voltage, 5 V voltage and backup voltage. A required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is used by the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 2
No. 51, even after the voltage of DC stable 24V is less than 22V, the output of the voltage of 5V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, becomes a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. Is configured to maintain. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. 7. 9, the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the later-described first extended position from the state shown in FIG. 7 is the state in which it is displaced in FIG. The state of being displaced to the second overhang position, which is the position, is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 30 formed in a box shape.
0, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, the upper displacement unit 900, the lower displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 700, and the distribution unit 500 attached to the rear surface of the game board 13.
And the ball sending unit 600 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front surface. One side (front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side. A rectangular opening 301a in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. Made possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is provided with a base member 910 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, which is provided in an upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and is slidably provided on the base member 910. The upper displacement member 940 and the opening 301a (that is,
On the front side of the third symbol display device 81), the effect of rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding it is formed so as to be executable. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is provided with a base member 410 having a rectangular horizontal shape in a front view, which is disposed in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and slidably disposed on the base member 410. And a lower displacing member 440, which is formed on the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case (that is, the third pattern display device 81) so that the lower displacing member 440 can be slid and rotationally displaced. A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotating unit 700 includes a rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is disposed on the lower side of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in front view (arrow), and in front of the rear base 720. And a rotating body 800 disposed on the right side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A detailed description of the rotary unit 700 will be given later.

The pitching unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is attached.
A path for sending a game ball sent from the rear side of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500 described later is formed.

The distribution unit 500 includes a route forming member 510 attached to the back surface side of the game board 13, and a base plate 520 arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed facing the route forming member 510,
A distribution member 540 which is attached to the base plate 520 and which distributes the game ball flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 facing each other to each ball sending path (the second ball sending path KR2 or the third ball sending path KR3) . The game balls distributed to the distribution member 540 are sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

<The first ornament and the second ornament are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, referring to FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, a general winning opening unit 1 arranged on the game board 13
50 will be described.

First, the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.
11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG. 12 (a) is a general winning opening unit 1
It is a front view of 50, FIG.12 (b) is sectional drawing of the general winning a prize mouth unit 150 in the XIIb-XIIb line of FIG.12 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. And a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a opened in the central portion in a front view and a second opening 60b opened downward in the gravity direction of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . The center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and the second opening 60a
A general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in b. Further, a sticker having a decoration (pattern, pattern, etc.) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is attached to the base plate 60, so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front surface side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the seal, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front surface of the base plate 60.

The general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and the path of the game balls flowing down the game area can be changed. In addition, general prize unit 1
50 is arranged at a position along the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) in the front view (view in the arrow B direction) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. To be done. Note that, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal disposed on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60c. In addition, in the present embodiment, a character (person) is added to the decorative member 60c.
Is drawn.

The general winning opening unit 150 includes a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front,
A first erected portion 152 erected from the end of the main body 151 to the front side (arrow F direction side);
Arranged on the rear side of the main body 151, and a second standing portion 153 extending from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area. Decorative member 15
4 and a plurality (three in the present embodiment) of general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body 151.
And, mainly.

The main body 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the plate thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the opening of the second opening 60b.
0 is arranged on the front side. In addition, the second opening 60b, it is possible to send the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 provided in the main body 151 to the back surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Further, the main body portion 151 has the base plate 6 as it goes from the inner portion toward the outer end portion in a front view.
An inclined surface 151a inclined to the 0 side, a recess 151b recessed in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side), and a back surface portion 151 forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recess 151b.
d is mainly provided.

The inclined surface 151a is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151a to flow down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a and be moved to the front side of the main body 151.

Here, the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body 151, and the side surface of the main body 151 is
When it is formed perpendicularly to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 comes into contact (collision) from the direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body 151, The abutting game ball may bounce back in the direction opposite to the downflow direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 151a can move the game ball contacting the side surface of the main body 151 to the front side of the main body, so that the flow down of the game ball flowing down the game area is temporary. It is possible to suppress stagnation. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front surface side of the base plate 60 to the front surface of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151 as described above, and is the recess 1 in rear view.
It is formed around 51b with a constant width. In addition, the rear surface portion 151d is the general winning opening unit 1
In a state in which 50 is arranged on the base plate 60, it is arranged in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Also, the recess 151b
Has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 which is a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 which is erected from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the rear surface side (arrow B direction side).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface of a decorative member 154, which will be described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decoration member 154 is visually recognized through the main body 151, the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be visually recognized uniformly.

The inner side surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in front view. The shape of the inner surface 151b3 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 described later. Accordingly, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the recess 151b, the decorative member 1
It is possible to prevent 54 from protruding outside the recess 151b. Therefore, the general winning opening unit 1
When 50 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the rear surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, so that a gap is formed between the rear surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 beyond the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front surface side of the base plate 60 to the front surface of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decorative member 154, which will be described later, in the recessed space, and the recess depth (recessed distance to the front side (arrow F side) is greater than the thickness dimension of the decorative member 154). Largely set. In addition, the recess 151b is formed from the end of the main body 151 in a front view.
A recess is provided along the shape of the end of the main body 151 at a position inside the body 51 at a certain distance.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the recess 151b, the rear surface of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from protruding beyond the main body 151 toward the rear surface. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60 are separated from each other. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 beyond the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the body 151 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction) to the front of the body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The first erected portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F side) from the end of the main body 151 on the end side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The standing dimension of the first standing portion 152 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the planting direction of the inner rail 76 that is planted in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the front door 5 covering the front side of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151, the first standing portion 1 at the lower end in the gravity direction of the game area.
52 can be collided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down on the front side of the main body 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and it is possible to prevent the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other is a space for guiding the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13, and the inner rail 7
The space for arranging the reinforcement and the like between the 6 and the outer rail 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to provide reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and a game ball flowing down the game area may collide with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 may bend.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 (which is provided in the game area)
By the first standing portion 152), it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the facing inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 from being changed by bending the inner rail 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second standing portion 153 extends downward from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U side) in a front view toward the center of the game area (first winning opening 64). (See FIG. 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 facing each other (see FIG. 2) is on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U side) of the extending portion of the second standing portion 153 that is inclined downward. When the ball is sent, the game ball can be rolled along the descending inclination of the second standing portion 153 to be sent toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area on the side between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other (on the side of the arrow L) is won (inflow) into the first winning opening 64 arranged in the center of the game area. It can be done easily.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is bonded to the back surface side of the main body 151. Further, the decoration member 154 is formed on the front surface of the main body 151 side with a decoration that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 in a front view. Accordingly, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration of the decoration member 154. In addition,
In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decoration member 154, and the character of the decoration member 60c and the character of the decoration member 154 can be combined and visually recognized as one character.

The decoration member 154 is formed of a light transmissive material. Thereby, the light that has passed through the second opening 60b from the back side of the base plate 60 (the arrow B direction side) is incident from the back side of the decorative member 154 and is emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 154. Can be made. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front surface of the decorative member 154 can be brightened and can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can easily visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154.

Next, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 has an outer shape larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 in a front view. As a result, the general winning opening unit 150
When the base plate 60 is disposed on the base plate 60, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is recessed in the main body 151.
Is disposed between the concave bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Therefore,
When the adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to aging or the like, the decorative member 1
54 can be prevented from falling off the game board 13.

The decorative member 154 has a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 protruding from the rear surface of the main body 151, which will be described later, is inserted, the width dimension of which is overlapped with the base plate 60 in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction). Is set to be larger than the diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). This allows
It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c in a front view due to the positional displacement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or the positional displacement of the decorative member 60c. . As a result, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the three general winning openings 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13,
The game ball that has won the general winning opening 63 is delivered to the fourth delivery route KR4 of the distribution unit 500. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) including a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is arranged on the base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is the base plate. The second opening 60b of 60 is inserted to irradiate the rear surface of the general winning opening unit 150.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a path for the game balls to be won from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and a space for irradiating the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 with light. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form an opening for sending a game ball, an opening for passing light, and two openings, so that the entire rear surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated with light. The main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 can be made easier
The general winning opening 63 can be arranged in the entire area. As a result, the general prize-winning unit 150
The degree of freedom in design can be improved, and light can be emitted from the entire area of the general winning opening unit 150 to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning opening unit 150.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 for decoration, which is continuous with the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13, is provided along the front surface of the base plate 60. Since it is arranged on the back surface of 151, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be arranged at positions adjacent (approaching) in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB).
As a result, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are inclined from the front view (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the gravity direction upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)).
When the c and the decoration member 154 are visually recognized, the decorations of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are visually recognized to be displaced as compared with the case where the decoration of the general winning opening unit is arranged in front of the general winning opening unit. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decorative member 154
The connection portion with the decoration can be made visible to the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection between the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 14, a path of light visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the decorations. However, when forming a decoration on the base plate 60 or arranging the decoration member 154 on the main body 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (the same position each time). Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decoration position of the decoration member 154 is displaced from the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60, so that the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are arranged. There is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it as a single decoration by combining the above decorations.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. Accordingly, the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60 of the base plate 60 are performed.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connecting portion with the decoration of c (the connecting portion is blurred so that the player can visually recognize it). Therefore, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be recognized by the player as one decoration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60c (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14)) is the inclined surface 1 of the main body 151.
It is located on the back side of 51a. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter, referred to as “boundary P2” (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be light reflected at different positions of the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). In addition, it is possible to suppress the formation of the boundary P2).

Therefore, at the boundary P1, the player is likely to recognize the displacement of the arrangement of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 as the displacement of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the displacement of the decoration due to the difference in the refraction direction of the light is the player. However, since the decorations that the player visually recognizes from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be changed to the decorations at different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 is the same. It is possible to suppress the visual recognition by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P2 from being combined and the positional deviation of the decoration becoming large to be recognized by the player. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's point of view, a connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the main body 151 (hereinafter, referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)), The boundary P1 can be arranged between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, when the light is refracted when the light is emitted from the main body 151, the decoration is displaced between positions (boundaries P2, P3).
The boundary P1 can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the region where the decoration is misaligned and recognized to be elongated. That is, the area where the decoration is displaced and visually recognized can be limited to the front surface of the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to reduce the displacement position of the decoration with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In the present embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60,
The decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is decorated with the body of the character decorated by the decorative member 60c. That is, the contour of the decoration is located at the connection portion of the decoration between the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member 6
It is possible to make the player easily recognize the decoration of 0c and the decoration member 154 as the decoration of 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, the decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150, the decoration member 154, and the decoration member 6 thereof.
The clothes worn by the body of the character decorated with 0c are decorated, and the character's face (neck) and the clothes have different colors (in this embodiment, the face is flesh-colored and the clothes are black). Thus, the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is made to be a portion having a different shade, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are divided. You can As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

As described above, the main body 151 is provided with the recess 151b on the back surface side, and the decorative member 154 is provided inside thereof. The shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view. Accordingly, when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body 151, the arrangement of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from being displaced with respect to the main body 151.

Further, on the back surface side of the main body 151, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) are formed (three places (see FIG. 15) in the present embodiment). The projection 155 is a positioning projection for positioning the general winning opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, and is inserted into a recess 60 d provided in the base plate 60. Also, the protrusion 155
Is at least one location (one location in the present embodiment), and the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b.
And is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used as positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be positioned when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, and can be positioned when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body 151. Therefore, since the position for positioning the decoration member 154 on the front side of the decoration member 60c can be the same part, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are not misaligned. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be combined and easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the projection 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 has a range E1 (see FIG.
(Refer to) (region where the adhesive tape 154a is attached). Thereby, the main body 15
When arranging the decorative member 154 on 1, the protrusion 155 is inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154, and one edge portion of the decorative member 154 is aligned with the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. Thus, the two positions of the decorative member 154 can be positioned with respect to the main body 151. Therefore, it is not necessary to position the edge of the decorative member 154 at two positions on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b and dispose the decorative member 154 on the main body 151. As a result, the work of disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 15, the decorative member 1
The range of the adhesive tape 154a attached to 54 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line with a symbol E1. Further, in FIG. 14, the path of light visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed of a light-transmissive double-sided tape and has a range E
Attached to 1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, an adhesive tape 154a for adhering the decorative member 154 and the main body 151 is attached with a constant width along the end of the decorative member 154. As a result, in the area where the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (the portion other than the range E1), the adhesive tape 154a
A gap (space) of a predetermined width is formed between the main body 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front surface of the decorative member) by the thickness of a.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a passes through the boundary P3 from the end of the decorative member 154 and passes through the inclined surface 1
It is adhered to a region beyond a virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to 51a. This allows
Range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154 of the decorative member 154 where light emitted from the inclined surface 151a after passing through the main body 151 is attached to the portion of the decorative member 154 that is affected by the decoration (the wavelength is changed). Part). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction), FIG. As shown, the light L that escapes from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's eyes is repeatedly reflected on the front surface and the back surface of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151. In this case, the decorative member 15
If the entire front surface of No. 4 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 every time it is reflected by the decorative member 154 side. Therefore, the light that passes through the inside of the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151 a is not included in the decoration member 15.
4 cannot be reflected only by the change in wavelength due to the decoration of the end portion. Therefore, the inclined surface 151
Since the decoration recognized by the player from a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a have a problem that the decorations are not continuous. It was

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the adhesion portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body 151 is defined as the range E1.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the light L reflected and passing through the inside of the main body 151 from being influenced by the decoration of the decoration member 154 (the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a has a portion where the decoration of the decoration member 154 is affected (the wavelength is changed) at the adhesive tape 154a.
The area E1 (the end portion of the decoration member 154) attached can be made to be easy for the player to visually recognize as the decoration that is adjacent to the decoration of the inclined surface 151a visually recognized by the player. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method of arranging the special winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape that surrounds the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion that projects radially outward of the base frame 86a. And 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape along the central opening of the base plate 60, a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and the part excluding the part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60a. It is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of overhanging to the front side of the.

The projecting portion 86b is projected on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view with respect to the game area of the game board 13. As a result, the special winning device 550 arranged on the protruding portion 86b can be arranged on the right side in the front view (on the side of the arrow R) with respect to the game area, and when the player is right-handed in the special game state. Part of the ball-sending path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

Further, the protruding portion 86b is located at an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Mainly includes a recessed portion 86b2 that is recessed.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. As a result, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special winning device 550 arranged on the back surface side of the protruding portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recess 86b2 can accommodate a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, inside. Further, in the recess 86b2, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting passage of a game ball.
Is provided. As a result, it is possible to detect the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recess 86b2 of the first unit 551.

The special winning device 550 is provided on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86 and on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the protruding portion 86b. The second unit 552 is mainly provided.

The first unit 551 is provided with a space (path) through which game balls can flow down, and a part of the first unit 551 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 with a screw inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed description of a method of disposing the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18A is a front view of the first unit 551, and FIG.
18C is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18C is a rear view of the first unit 551. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 560. And a third path member 580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570.

The first path member 560 is formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 and a front plate 564, and is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section whose upper side (arrow U direction side) opens. The 1st receiving part 561, the 2nd receiving part 562, and the 3rd receiving part 563, and the 1st receiving part 561, the 2nd receiving part 562, and the 3rd receiving which are provided by protruding from the upper end part of the face plate 564 to the back side. A first wall portion 565, which is formed continuously on the lower side of the portion 563 (on the side of the arrow D direction) and extends along a part of the end portion of the front plate 564, and below the first wall portion 565. And mainly includes two sets of a second wall portion 566 and a third wall portion 567 that are formed in two and project from two locations spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

The front plate 564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 570 and the third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. It As a result, the player plays the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 on the front plate 564.
Can be seen through (through).

Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a that is provided so as to project on the second path member 570 side (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is a front plate 564 by a game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551.
Is a wall portion that suppresses the entire area of the wall surface of the second wall member 570 or the third path member described later.
It is extended along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the path member 580 and the opposite. The guide portion 564a is provided so as to project at a position separated from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 by the radius of the game ball. In other words, the guide portion 564a is provided at a position substantially the same as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. As a result, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball abut can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It is possible to suppress scratches caused by contact with the game ball over the entire area of 64 and transfer of dirt attached to the game ball. As a result, the player can easily recognize the game ball flowing down through the inside of the first path member 560 through the front plate 564.

The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are portions for receiving the game balls flowing down from the game area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of arrow U) inside the first unit 551. , The upper opening is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at the end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. It

The first receiving portion 561 is set to have a wider receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) of the game ball than the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563. This makes it easier for the game balls that flow into the special winning device 550 to flow into the first receiving portion 561 than the second receiving portion 562 or the third receiving portion 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 communicates with the flow-down path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game ball received in the first receiving portion 561 flows down inside the first unit 551. The flow path of the game balls of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are communicated with a flow-down path formed inside the second unit 552 described later. As a result, the game balls received in the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 flow down inside the second unit 552. The second unit 55
The flow-down path of 2 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for sending a game ball between the first wall portion 565 and a fourth wall portion 573 formed on a second path member 570 described later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the above-described first receiving portion 561 and the other end side extends over the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R). Direction), and an upper side wall portion 565a and a curved wall portion 565b that is formed to be curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the rear and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper side of the rolling surface when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fourth wall portion 573 described later, and the fourth wall portion 573. Is formed at a position spaced apart from the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the diameter of the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the upper surface.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. It The curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semi-circular shape centered on the rolling-side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thus, by letting the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 flow down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, it can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 and can be rolled. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space of a path that branches from the main flow path of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions that are provided so as to project from the back surface of the front plate 564. The opposing distance is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the paths through which the first unit 551 flows down.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms an inner surface of a path that branches off from the main ball-sending path (main path SK3) of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and projects from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of opposed wall portions is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to increase the paths of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551.

The second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 have the downstream end portions of the first unit 5 respectively.
It is arranged on the opposite side of 51 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). As a result, it is possible to send the game ball to the left and right sides of the first unit 551 from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 is a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and the fourth wall portion 5 protruding from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downwardly from the fourth wall portion 573 by a predetermined distance, and a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 by a predetermined distance. And a sixth wall portion 575 that is formed.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. In addition, the base plate 571 has a first opening 571 that opens at positions corresponding to the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563.
a, a second opening 571b and a third opening 571c, a fourth opening 571d that opens below the first opening 571a, and an opening above each of the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575. Fifth opening 571e and sixth opening 571f, and fifth wall 574 and sixth wall 575
And a recessed portion 571g that is located between and is recessed on the back side.

The 1st opening part 571a, the 2nd opening part 571b, and the 3rd opening part 571c are game balls which flow into the 1st receiving part 561, the 2nd receiving part 562, and the 3rd receiving part 563 of the above-mentioned 1st route member 560. It is an opening through which the back surface of the base plate 571 passes.

In addition, the base plate 571 includes the first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 5.
The first rolling portion 576, the second rolling portion 577, and the third rolling portion 578 that project from the lower end portion of 71c to the rear surface side are provided. Thereby, the game sphere passing through the first opening 571a, the third path member 580 described later, the game sphere passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c,
The balls are respectively sent to the second unit 552 described later.

The first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d are formed on a rear surface side of a third path member 580 described later.
A part of is covered. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is sent from the fourth opening 571d to the front side of the base plate 571 (the arrow F direction side).

The fourth wall portion 573 is provided so as to project from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening portion 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward as it goes from the fourth opening portion 571d side opened to the left side in the front view of the base plate 571 to the right side in the front view (direction of arrow R). . As a result, a game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is delivered to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the base plate 571 is inclined due to the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. The ball can be thrown to the right side (direction of arrow R).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion that serves as a rolling surface of the game ball sent from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and is a portion of the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. The base plate 571 is provided so as to project downward from the diameter and to extend in the left-right direction of the base plate 571 (arrow L-R direction). The upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion inclines downward as it goes from the curved wall portion 565b side (the arrow R direction side) toward the recessed portion 574g side (the arrow L direction side) described later. Formed. Thereby, the game ball sent from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled to the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the fifth wall 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back surface side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream side end portion (end portion on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 is recessed portion. It can flow into the inside of 574g and can be sent to the upper part of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the recessed portion 574g (direction of arrow D).

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that serves as a rolling surface of the game ball that rolls the fifth wall portion 574 and is fed to the recessed portion 574g, and the game ball moves downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. Of the base plate 571 at a position spaced apart from the diameter of the base plate 571 and extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R) of the base plate 571. The sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-described third wall portion 567 side. Thereby, the recessed portion 574
The game ball sent from g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled to the ball sending path side formed by the third wall portion 567. In addition, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the sixth wall 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set such that the recess width and recess depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b, a sixth opening 571f opening to the base plate 571 is formed. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b pass through the sixth opening 571f and are sent to the back surface side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) and a lower side of the second path member 570 in the direction of gravity (arrow). The second covering member 582, the first covering member 581, and the second covering member 5 which are arranged on the back surface on the D direction side).
The first drive unit 583 arranged between the two 82 and the second drive unit 584 arranged on the back surface of the second covering member 582 are mainly provided.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a arranged on the back side of the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 58 connected to the lower side of the curved portion 581a.
1b and mainly.

The curved portion 581a includes the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 570).
) Side is opened and curved so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside thereof (see FIG. 24A). In addition, the inner wall surface of the curved portion 581 a and the first rolling portion 576.
The distance from the protruding tip of the is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. This makes the first
A game ball rolling on the rolling portion 576 can be made to flow down along the inner wall of the bending portion 581a and can be fed to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a. Therefore, by sending the game ball to the bending portion 581a that curves to the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on the plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, the curved portion 581a is arranged such that the lower end thereof is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball, which has flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and has been fed to the fourth opening portion 571d, from flowing back and flowing into the inside of the curved portion 581a.

The mounting portion 581b is formed with two through holes 581b1 through which a screw for fastening the first covering member 581 to the rear surface of the second path member 570 is inserted. Also, the mounting portion 581b is
A columnar body 551a protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side is provided. The columnar body 551a has a screw hole for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. Accordingly, the screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 can be screwed into the columnar body 551a to fasten the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The second covering member 582 has a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f.
And the rear side wall portion 58 disposed on the rear side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
2b and mainly.

The second curved portion 582a is curved and formed in a U-shaped cross section in which the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is open (see FIG. 24 (c)). In addition, the second bending portion 582a includes a standing wall 582a1 standing upright from the front side toward the back side inside the U-shape. Standing wall 5
Due to 82a1, the internal space of the second bending portion 582a is the first space on the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view.
It is divided into a space 582a2 and a second space 582a3 formed next to the first space 582a2 with the standing wall 582a1 interposed therebetween.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. In addition, the first space 582a2 and the second space 58
2a3 are connected on the back side. In addition, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to incline downward toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to incline downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball sent from the recessed portion 571g to the second curved portion 582a is rolled to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and is second at the back side end.
The ball is sent to the second space 582a3 by the bending of the bending portion 582a, is rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passes through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and is sent to the front side of the base plate 571. .

The back side wall portion 582b is delivered to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b,
It is a wall on the back side of the ball-sending path that guides the game ball passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower side of the special winning device 550. Accordingly, the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 574a
The game balls sent to the receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the first receiving recess 5
74a-the 4th receiving recessed part 575b are sent, the game ball which passed the detecting devices SE3-SE6 mentioned later and gave the game value to the player flows down the game area again, and the game value is given to the player again. Can be prevented.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, and a first variable plate 583b.
Mainly includes a solenoid 583a and a first protection member 583c surrounding the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. .
Further, when the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the tip end of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the above-mentioned fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574a are formed.
It is arranged above the receiving recess 574b. Thus, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protection member 583c is formed in a box shape with the second path member 570 side opened, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed inside the first protection member 583c. In addition, the first protection member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 may be the first cover member 581.
Through the through hole 581b1 of the second covering member 582 or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582,
It is screwed into a hole formed in the path member 570. Therefore, by disposing the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be arranged on the second path member 570. As a result, the screw fastening portions of the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first driving unit 583, the first driving unit 583 is
When it is forcibly removed from the special winning device 550, the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 5
It is easy to make the state in which the game ball cannot pass through the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 because the fastening between 82 and the second path member 570 is incomplete. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing in a fraudulent state.

Like the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a. A second protection member 584c that mainly covers the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is provided.

The second variable plate 584b is formed of a plate-shaped body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and is bent in a crank shape when viewed from the front. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b has the above-mentioned sixth opening 57.
The first receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are disposed above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. Thus, when the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protection member 584c is formed in a box shape whose second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is provided therein. The second protection member 584c also includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the ball-sending path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. Thereby, the rear side wall portion 584c
1 and the second wall portion 566 not only form a ball-sending path, but also the rear side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566.
The second path member 570 can be covered with the wall portion 566. As a result, the first unit 55
The detection device SE3 to which the incorrect member is inserted from the side surface of No. 1 and is disposed on the second path member 570.
It is possible to easily prevent fraud in SE6.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, a ball sending path of the game ball that flows into the inside of the first unit 551 from the first receiving portion 561 will be described. FIG. 21 shows XXI-XX of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in I line. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. FIG. 24A shows XXIVa-XXIV of FIG.
FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line a, and FIG. 24B is XXIVb of FIG. 21.
FIG. 24C is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVb, and FIG. 24C is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 21.

The game ball flowing into the first unit flows down the main routes SK1 to SK6 of the game ball in the order of the main route SK1, the main route SK2, the main route SK3, the main route SK4, the main route SK5, and the main route SK6. Alternatively, the main route SK3 to the main route SK in the middle of flowing down the main routes SK1 to SK6
3 is flowed into the sub route HK1 communicating with 3, and flows down the sub route HK1. Alternatively, the main route SK
1-Sub route HK that communicates with main route SK5 from main route SK5 flowing down main route SK6
2 or the sub route HK3 and flows down either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3.

Further, detection devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting the passage of the game balls are arranged on the sub paths HK1 to HK3, and a predetermined game value is given to the player by the detection of the game balls by the detection devices SE3 to SE6. Granted. In the present embodiment, a game value is given to the player by a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 has a curved portion 581 of the first covering member 581.
a and a space formed by the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24A) of the second path member 570, which communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the bending portion 581a is formed by bending the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side in a U-shaped cross section, and passes through the main path SK1. The ball can be diverted to the back side. Thereby, the space in the front view is limited (when the game ball passes through the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the main route SK1, which makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball that passes through the first unit 551, thereby increasing the interest of the player. it can.

Further, as will be described later, the game ball flowing into the main route SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that the game ball rolls with a possibility of giving a game value to the player. It is easy for the person to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player more entertaining. The main route SK1 is in communication with a main route SK2, which will be described later, and allows game balls that pass through the main route SK1 to flow into the main route SK2.

In addition, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 has the above-described concave portion 86b of the center frame 86.
2 (see FIG. 17). Thereby, when the game ball is blocked in the main path SK1 (the flow is slow), the failure can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and the error can be notified.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main route SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball,
It is set smaller than the opening through which the game balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) pass. As a result, when a game ball (illegal game ball) having a diameter larger than the diameter of the reference game ball (11 mm) is manufactured, and if the ball is fraudulent (game), the main path is the ball. S
Can be fastened inside K1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal game ball from flowing down to the detecting devices SE3 to SE7 arranged on the downstream side of the main route SK1 and being illegally performed. Further, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main route SK1, it is possible to detect the error by the detecting device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify the error (illegal). It should be noted that the fraud in this case means the detection device S.
The illegal game ball is fitted into any one of the openings E3 to SE7, and the detection devices SE3 to SE7 continue the detection to obtain the illegal game ball payout (game value).

The main route SK2 includes the first wall portion 565 of the first route member 560 and the fourth wall portion 570 of the second route member 570.
It is a space formed between the wall portion 573 and the wall portion 573. The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls down on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flows down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 has the left-right direction (
It is extended in the direction of arrow L-R) and is formed so as to descend and incline as it is separated from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, the above-mentioned bending portion 581a (curving path to the back side) is formed at the switching portion of the ball-sending direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can play the main path. It is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball flowing down the SK1. That is, when a curved path on the back side is formed in the middle of a linear ball-sending path (for example, the main path SK2) extending in the left-right direction, a game ball that rolls at a constant acceleration along the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight of the game ball may be ahead of the game ball, and the player may lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path to the back side is formed in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed, the player's line of sight should precede the game ball. It is possible to prevent the player from losing sight of the game ball.

In addition, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is on the left side in the front view (the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551 that is disposed slightly to the right (the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the center of the game board 13 in the left-right direction. Side end). Therefore, a curved path to the back side (main path SK1) is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible from the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path. It is possible to easily prevent losing the game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main path SK2 is communicated with the curved path WK1, and via the curved path WK1,
It is communicated with a main route SK3 described later. Thereby, the game ball passing through the main route SK2 is flown into the main route SK3 via the curved route WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be given later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the fifth wall portion 574 of the second path member 570. The game ball flowing into the main path SK3 rolls down on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flows down. Further, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected to the main path SK3 on the main path SK3 when it is extended. The first variable plate 5 is provided on the main path SK3.
In a state where 83b is projected, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the fifth wall portion 574 is the first variable plate 58.
It rolls on the upper surface of 3b and is sent to the main path SK4.

On the other hand, when the first variable plate 583b is retracted from above the main path SK3, the auxiliary path HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall 574 is provided. A game ball is flowed in. The sub route HK1 is sent to the recovery route formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

In this way, the first unit 551 is provided with the first variable plate 583b that overhangs on the ball-sending path of the game ball or retracts from the ball-sending path, and the displacement of the first variable plate 583b causes the main unit of the first unit 551 to move. When the game ball flowing down the route SK3 is guided to the sub route HK1, and the main route S
Since it can be changed to the case where it is guided to K4, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, the game ball flowing into the sub route HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that the player can watch whether the game ball has flowed into the sub route HK1. In addition, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the ball-sending path formed in the first unit 551 and is displaced in the player's visual recognition direction (arrow FB direction). 583
It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the displacement of b. As a result, the game ball flowing down of the first unit 551 can be watched, and the player can be easily given an interest by the flow down of the game ball.

The sub route HK1 is a main route SK3 that sends the game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view, and the game ball is located below the main route SK3 from the left side. It is formed on the fifth wall portion 574 that forms a space with the main path SK6 that sends the ball to the right side. Therefore,
Since the sub route HK1 is formed by using the space between the game balls to be sent to the left and right, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, it is possible to narrow the range in which the player visually tracks the game ball,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 contacts the protrusion 568 and is recessed 571g.
After being sent to the inside (back side) of the, the ball is rolled around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion and is sent to the outside (front side) of the recessed portion. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Further, the main route SK4 is in communication with the main route SK5, and the game ball passing through the main route SK4 can flow into the main route SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
It is a space formed by a2 and the second space 582a3. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls to the back side inside the first space 582a2 as described above, and then moves to the second space 5
The inside of 82a3 is rolled to the front side. Further, the second variable plate 584b of the above-mentioned second drive unit 584 is projected on the main path SK5 on the main path SK5 when it extends. This main route SK
In a state where the second variable plate 584b projects above 5, the game ball rolling inside the second bending portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the auxiliary path HK2 is a space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall 575. The game ball flows down. The sub route HK2 is sent to the recovery route formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the sixth opening 571f.

In addition, the second bending portion 582a forming the main route SK5 is formed to be curved on the back side as described above, and the game ball passing through the main route SK5 can be detoured to the back side.
As a result, even when the area in front view is set to a predetermined limited space, it is possible to increase the distance over which the game ball can roll.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured so as to be bulged or displaced with respect to a part on the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part on the downstream side of the main path SK5. Since the curved path to the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5,
It is possible to lengthen the time when the game value may be given to the player by the game ball passing through K5. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time that the player is entertained.

The sub route HK3 is communicated with the communicating portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. Sub route H
K3 is the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the rear side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
4c1 is a space formed between the opposing surfaces.

The sub route HK3 is in a direction different from the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (right direction in front view (direction of arrow R) (left direction in front view (direction of arrow L))). Further, the sub path HK3 is set such that the lower inner edge of the inflow port thereof is below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball normally flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (in a state where no external force other than gravity acts), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 or the sub path HK2. It On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, and an external force other than gravity is applied to the game ball. When is acted, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub route HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and is flowed into the sub route HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with the second variable plate 584b that overhangs on the ball-sending path of the game ball or retracts from the ball-sending path, and the displacement of the second variable plate 584b causes the main path SK4 of the first unit 551. Or the game ball flowing down the main route SK5 is the main route SK5, the sub route HK2
Or, since it is guided to either the sub route HK3, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since a predetermined game value is given to the player by the game ball flowing into the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3, the player is closely watching whether or not the game ball has flowed into the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3. Can be made. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the ball sending path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to pay attention to the game ball flowing down, and the player can be easily given an interest by the flow down of the game ball.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side across the main path SK4, the first variable plate 583b switches the path along which the game ball flows down. Therefore, the game ball that does not flow into the upstream side sub route HK1 and is not given a game value to the player is further flowed down to the sub route HK2 or H.
Can be made to flow into K3. Therefore, by passing the game ball, which may have been given a game value to the player once, through the switching part of the flow-down route, the game ball is sub-routes HK2 and H.
The player can again have the desire to flow into K3.

Further, between the main route SK3 and the main route SK5 in which the route through which the game balls flow is switched, a main route SK4 which is curved on the back side is arranged. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in a front view, and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball. That is, after flowing down the main route SK3, by letting the player recognize the position of the game ball through the main route SK4, the player watches the game ball rolling on the main route SK5 connected to the downstream of the main route SK4. It can be done easily. As a result, the player can easily see the game balls that flow into the sub routes HK2 and HK3, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24 (c)) are formed at the left and right ends on the front side of the second variable 584b as they move toward the left and right ends. This allows
When the second variable plate 584b is extended and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b abuts the game ball at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the game ball is caused by the inclined surface 584b1. Can be pushed to the inlet side of the sub route HK3. Therefore, the inclined surface 584b1
By the sub path HK2, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560, and a path in which the flow direction can be switched depending on the difference in the timing at which the game ball flows down. A plurality (three paths in this embodiment) can be formed.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main route SK6 is sent to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, the first receiving unit 5
When the game ball flowing into 61 is not flown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, the game value is not given to the player, and the game ball is sent from the main route SK6 to the game area of the game board 13. , Is collected from the outlet 71 formed in the game board 13.

<Guide means for displacing the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main route SK2 to the main route SK3 will be described. 25 (a) and 26 (a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (b) are shown in FIG.
6 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 27A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 27B is a first cross section taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25A.
27C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, and FIG. 27C is XXVIIc-X of FIG. 25A.
It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit 551 in a XVIIc line. FIG. 28 (a) shows FIG.
28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG.
FIG. 25B is a first unit 55 along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG.
It is a schematic cross section of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main route SK2, the main route SK3, and the curved route WK1 are
First base member 570 of second path member 570 is recessed in an arcuate cross section toward the back side.
The recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i, and the third recessed portion 571j, the first step portion 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and the second stepwise protruding step from the inner wall on the main path SK3. And a step portion 571m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 includes the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571h.
The first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564b are provided at positions facing the concave portion 571j, respectively.
The convex portion 564d is provided so as to project.

The dimension L11 (see FIG. 28A) between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c facing each other is
It is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 facing each other. This allows
The first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, and the second concave portion 571j.
The game ball sent between the facing of the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is the first concave portion 571h,
The rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be slowed by bringing the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.

The facing dimension of the first concave portion 571h and the first convex portion 564b and the facing dimension of the third concave portion 571j and the third convex portion 564d are the facing dimension of the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. The distance is set to be substantially the same as L11.

Furthermore, the projecting tip surfaces of the first protrusion 564b, the second protrusion 564c, and the third protrusion 564d,
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the front surface of the base plate 571 and the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j
It is possible to cause a game ball sent between the facings of the convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d to collide with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.
As a result, the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

In addition, in this case, the game sphere that abuts the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d flows down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game ball flowing down, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 57
It is possible to guide in the concave direction of 1j.

The step portion 571k is projected to the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2. Also, the step 5
71k is formed on the downstream side in the route of the main route SK2. The step portion 571k is set such that the upstream end of the main path SK2 is projected to the front side from the front surface of the base plate 571, and the downstream end is at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Is set. This allows
The game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the step portion 571k and moved to the front side.

In addition, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end projects from the upstream side toward the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the step 571k can be guided downstream while flowing down to the front side.

Further, in the step portion 571k, the upstream end portion has the first convex portion 564 formed on the front plate 564.
It is formed on the upstream side of the main route SK2 with respect to b. As a result, it is possible to easily bring the game ball, which comes into contact with the step portion 571k and is guided to the front side, into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 that forms the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at the position where it is projected to the front side by the step 571k. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center of the first recess 571h in the vertical direction is determined by the step 571.
The height dimension L22 of the front side of k (see FIG. 27B) is set to be substantially the same. As a result, the game ball that is sent along the main path SK2 without going wild can be flown into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessed direction of the first recess 571h (the back side (arrow B direction side)). be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball sent along the main path SK2 in a rough state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k, is guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and is the first protrusion of the front plate 564. It abuts against the portion 564b. As a result, it is possible to send the game ball to the inside of the first recess 571h while suppressing the rampage of the game ball.

Further, the first concave portion 571h is a height dimension Y8 (from the rolling surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface of the fourth wall portion 573 on the arrow U direction side) to the concave bottom surface in the orthogonal direction ( Figure 25
(See (a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the recessed bottom surface in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the game ball on the downstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573). Height dimension up to Y
9 (see FIG. 25A) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the main route S
When sending the game ball flowing down K2 along the first recess 571h, the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U
It is possible to reduce the rolling speed of the game ball by acting on the game ball a resistance in the direction of raising it). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be made to flow smoothly smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is fed inside the first recess 571h, A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact portion of the game ball that comes into contact with the first recess 571h from becoming two, and to suppress an increase in resistance to rolling of the game ball due to an increase in the contact portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main route SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h has the first concave portion 571h.
Is formed at a position away from the upstream end of the main path SK2 in the ball-sending direction (direction of arrow R in FIG. 27 (b)) of the game ball, and the value of the separation is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the game ball. To be done.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b and the first concave portion 5
It is possible to easily throw the ball inside 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1 and has an outer shape in an oval shape that is long in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction) in a front view. In addition, the second recess 5
71i is set at the center position in the vertical direction (direction of arrow U-D) in the front view as an intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Further, the second recessed portion 571i is formed at the center position in the direction orthogonal to the ball-sending direction of the curved path WK1 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view.

The main route SK1, the curved route WK1 and the main route SK2 are set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25 (a)) orthogonal to the ball feeding direction of the game ball in a front view, The width dimension L18 is set to about 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the maximum width dimension of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j in the lateral direction in the front view is set to approximately ½ of the width dimension L18 described above. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j. , It is possible to easily send the game ball to the inside of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571m is projected to the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3. Also, the step 5
71 m is formed on the upstream side in the route of the main route SK3. The step portion 571m is set such that the downstream end of the main path SK3 is projected to the front side of the base plate 571, and
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. As a result, the main route S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down K3 from flowing backward (bounced) to the upstream side beyond the step portion 571m after being sent to the downstream side of the step portion 571m.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 that forms the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view. Further, the third recess 571j is formed on the base plate 571 at the position where it is projected to the front side by the step 571m.
Is formed. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center of the third recess 571j in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L23 of the step 571m to the front side (see FIG. 27 (c)). This makes it easier for the game ball sent along the main route KR3 to flow out from the inside of the third recess 571j to the outside.

Further, the end portion of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 has a sub path H described later.
The first variable plate 583b for switching the path flowing down to K1 is arranged above the end (the end on the arrow R direction side) on the upstream side of the main path SK3 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction). As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b is displaced upward due to the displacement (the variable plate 583b).
b is arranged above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), by sending the game ball passing through the main path SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the first variable plate 583b
You can throw a ball without getting caught in. As a result, in a portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, it is not necessary to arrange the first variable plate 583b downward, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the vertical size of the first unit 551. .

In this case, the third recess 571j has a longitudinal direction in the front view, which is the horizontal direction (arrow L).
It is formed in the −R direction) and is separated upward with respect to the game ball flowing down the main path SK3, so that it is upward with respect to the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. A resistance in the direction of lifting can be applied to the side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught by the first variable plate 583b.

Further, the first unit 551 is one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 13 in front view (
A main path SK2 for sending the game ball to the arrow R direction side), and a main path SK3 for sending the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the main path SK2,
A curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and one side of the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 is a guiding means (first) for sending a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board. Since the two convex portions 564c and the second concave portion 571i are provided on the inner wall on the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is on the front side or the back side (front and rear of the game board 13 in front view). Direction).

Therefore, the flow of the game ball that rolls and accelerates on the main route SK2 (first route) is more than when the ball-sending route of the game ball passing through the curved route WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-back direction in the front view. You can slow it down. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the curved route WK1 returns to the main route SK2 by the amount that the flow velocity of the game ball can be slowed down, or the ball feeding direction of the main route SK2 inside the curved route WK1 (the horizontal direction in the front view ( It is possible to suppress swaying (shaking) in the direction of arrow LR). This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, the player can easily recognize the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 to that extent. There is no need to lengthen the path to prevent the game ball from swinging,
The path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 for the game board 13 can be stored.
The installation space can be secured.

Further, the first recessed portion 571h has a larger recessed width toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction (arrow UD direction) orthogonal to the downflow direction of the main path SK2. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. Further, the first recessed portion 571h is set to have a smaller recessed width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, so that the game ball received in the first recessed portion 571h can easily be pulled out from the same position. That is, the first recess 5
71h can easily accept the game ball on the upstream side of the main route SK2 and can easily exit the game ball from the same position on the downstream side of the main route SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 that is communicated with the downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the recessed end portion of the first recess 571h in the downward direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface of the main path SK2 in the rolling direction of the game ball fed along the main path SK2 (fourth
It is formed at a position beyond the upper surface of the wall portion 573). Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball exiting the first recess 571h less susceptible to the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball that has come out of the first recess 571h to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

The main route SK2 is inside the route from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall 565b side (that is, from the front view left side (arrow L direction side) to the front view right side (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (direction of arrow F)). Also, the main route S
K2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the surface on the upper side in the gravity direction of the fourth wall portion 573) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the main path SK2 is generated by the reaction force that the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 collides with the curved wall portion 565b.
Backflow can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow down stably at a position where the game ball is changed in the ball feeding direction.

The second concave portion 571i has its upper end portion (the end portion on the arrow U direction side) drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25A). As a result, it is possible to easily receive the game ball, which is fed along the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved path WK1, into the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a changed portion (curved path WK1) of the ball-sending direction of the game ball. As described above, the first protrusion 564b, the second protrusion 564c and the third protrusion 564c
The protruding tip surface of the convex portion 564d, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571.
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the front surface of the base plate 571 and j excluding j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. The game ball flowing down can be brought into contact with the second convex portion 564c and pushed into the second concave portion 571i. Therefore, it flows into the main path SK3 (the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c.
A game ball (which escapes from between) can be made to flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the curved route WK1 easily flows down to a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main route SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the region of the right side of the second recess 571i in the front view (the direction of the arrow R) and flows down. Therefore, the ball-sending direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily oriented toward the downward direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow down at a position where the game ball is changed in the ball feeding direction (see FIG. 28).

Furthermore, the main ball path SK is the ball-sending direction of the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.
Since it can be directed in the direction of the downward flow of 3, it is possible to reduce the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collision of the game ball with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first protrusion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and
The recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

Here, a concave portion (second path member 570) is provided in the first path member 560 so as to be recessed toward the front side.
Of the first concave portion 571h of the first path member 56.
It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of 0. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Further, when a recessed portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges on the front surface of the first path member 560, the bulging portion bulges on the front side of the first path member 560, and the game board 13 is accordingly expanded. It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) arranged on the front side of the. Therefore, since the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first protrusion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed on the second path member 570 arranged on the back side. The thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Further, since the part that protrudes partially from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be arranged close to the glass unit 16. As a result, the player can easily recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction) and descends in the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in a front view. It is formed to be inclined. As a result, the game ball that flows down between the facing portions of the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the area on the right side (the arrow R direction side) in front view of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recessed portion 571i is formed so that the recessed surface is curved, so that the game ball that flows in contact with the inside of the region of the second recessed portion 571i on the right side in the front view (the arrow R direction side) flows down. It is possible to send the ball toward the downward direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the curved path WK
It is possible to make the flow of game balls from 1 to the main route SK3 smooth.

Further, the second recessed portion 571i has the main path S at the end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view.
A virtual line IL4 drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling K3 (FIG. 25).
(See (a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is sent toward the downward direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Since it is possible, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is the main path SK3 or the curved path WK.
It is possible to prevent the game ball that comes into contact with the inner surface of 1 and is sent to the main path SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and staying inside those paths.

The flow-down direction of the game balls flowing into the main route SK3 can be directed to the ball-sending direction of the main route SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main route SK3. As a result, the curved route WK1 to the main route S
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into K3 from being sent in a direction orthogonal to the ball sending direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball sent to the main path SK3 is the curved path W
It is possible to suppress stagnation due to collision with the inner wall of K1.

<Arrangement of the first member to which high game value is given on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29B is a second unit 55.
2 is a rear view of FIG. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG.
It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the 2nd unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and the fourth path member 610. A ball-sending path for a game ball is formed between the fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B side) and the fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side of the fifth path member 620. A sixth path member 630 that performs the above and a decoration member 650 that is disposed on the side surface of the second unit 552 are mainly provided.

The fourth path member 610 is provided with the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
Is attached to the back side (direction of arrow B) of the. Further, the fourth path member 610 stands on the mounting plate 611 formed in a plate shape of a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and stands from the end of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). It is provided with a side wall portion 612 provided, and a first communication passage 615 and a second communication passage 616 whose internal spaces are communicated with the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551.

The mounting plate 611 is formed into a circular recess on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a through hole is formed in the recessed bottom surface, and a fifth path member 620. side(
A route-side fastening portion 618 and a decoration-side fastening portion 619, which are provided in a circular shape on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and in which a hole into which a screw is screwed is bored on the protruding tip surface, and a mounting plate 611. An opening 613 opened in the center of the second opening 613, and a second insertion portion 614 opened outside the opening 613.

The insertion portions 617 are portions through which tips of screws for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are inserted, and are formed at a plurality of positions (three positions in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the sixth
The path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in the decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decoration member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. Accordingly, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be arranged inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, the fourth path member 610 can be prevented from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and the surroundings of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be suppressed. Fourth
It can be surrounded by a route member 610.

The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed in a U shape whose upper side (arrow U direction side) is open in a front view and extend in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . Also,
The front end portions of the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are brought into contact with the rear surface sides of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and the rear surface side portions thereof are The ends contact the front side of the ends of the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth passage member 620, which will be described later. Further, the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are arranged in the fifth unit from the first unit 551 side.
The path member 620 is formed so as to be inclined downward. Thereby, the game balls sent from the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are converted into the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage. The communication passage 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620.

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole for inserting a screw that is screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding portion 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Accordingly, the fourth path member 610 can be arranged on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

The side wall portion 612 is a side surface of the first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a that are arranged on the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened. Is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). The standing dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front surface side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length in which the side wall portion 612 abuts on the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, the side wall portion 612 is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal article from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, a first inflow port 625 and a second inflow port 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inflow port 626. To the lower side of the second inflow port 626 from the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side))
A second standing wall 623 standing upright, a first standing wall 624 standing upright on the sixth path member 630 side from around the first inlet 625 to below the first inlet 625, The plate member 621 to the sixth
A fastened portion 627 protrudingly provided on the path member 630 side is mainly provided.

The plate member 621 is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 as viewed from the front, and is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. In addition, the plate member 621 includes a central opening 622 that is opened in the central portion in a front view. The central opening 622 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in a rear view and at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. Thereby, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620) is disposed on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the fourth path member 61
The second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the zero opening 613 can be arranged inside the central opening 622.

The first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 are the first of the fourth path member 610 as described above.
It is a part (opening for letting in) which receives between the 5th path member 620 and the 6th path member 630 the game ball which interlocks the communication path 615 and the 2nd communication path 616.

The fastened portion 627 is a portion into which a tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. As a result, the fifth route member 620 and the sixth route member 630 are fastened. Further, the fastened portion 62
The projecting dimension of 7 toward the sixth route member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap that allows the game ball to flow down is formed between the fifth route member 620 and the sixth route member 630.

The first standing wall 624 is formed from the first inflow port 625 to the fifth route member 620 and the sixth route member 63.
It is a wall that guides the game ball that flows in between the two facing 0, is extended downward, and is connected to the second standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game balls that have flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inflow port, and extends along the vertical direction of the plate member 621. In addition,
The description of the ball feeding path formed by the first standing wall 624 and the second standing wall 623 will be given later.

The sixth path member 630 has a base plate 631 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. And the insertion hole 6 formed to penetrate around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.
32 and a fastening hole 633.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth route member 620 in a front view, and when the fifth route member 620 and the sixth route member 630 are combined, It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. Accordingly, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a ball feeding path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 includes the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620.
And the sub-passage H formed by being surrounded by the second standing wall 623.
And K5.

The sub route HK4 extends downward from the first inflow port 625, is bent toward the sub route HK5 described later, and is communicated with the sub route HK5. Further, the sub route HK4 is provided with a detecting device SE7 for detecting the passage of the game ball in a downward extending portion. Thereby, it can be detected that the game ball has passed the sub route HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball,
A predetermined game value is given to the player (in the present embodiment, a prize ball of a game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, three) awarded to the player as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is set to the detection device SE3 arranged in the first unit 551. ~
Number of game balls awarded to the player as they pass SE6 (for example, 15)
Be less than. That is, the game value given to the player as it passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value that is played. This makes it easier to focus on the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make the player more entertaining.

The sub route HK5 is extended downward from the second inflow port 626, and the second unit 552 is provided.
Is communicated with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the sub route HK5 is collected without giving a game value to the player. Moreover, the game ball detected by the detection device SE7 flowing down the sub route HK4 is sent to the sub route HK5 and is collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the special winning device 550 is a first unit 551 which is made of a light-transmissive material and is arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second unit which is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, and the first unit 551, the first receiving portion 561 capable of entering the game ball
The second unit 552 is provided with a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion 5 capable of receiving a game ball.
63, the gaming ball entering the first receiving portion 561 has a higher gaming value to the player than the gaming balls entering the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 (payout of the gaming ball). Is given.

Therefore, the routing of the ball-sending paths for the game balls of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicatedly formed (for example, the ball-sending path of the first unit 551 and the ball-sending path of the second unit 552 are front-back directions in front view). When the game ball flows down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, it is possible to make the player easily gaze at the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. Therefore, the first receiving section 5 having a high game value
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 provided with 61. As a result, since the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the route that gives the player a high game value, it is easy to improve the player's interest.

Further, the inlet of the ball-sending path for sending the game ball to the first unit 551 (first receiving portion 561).
And, since the inflow ports (the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563) of the ball-sending path for sending the game balls to the second unit 552 are formed at the positions adjacent to each other, the first gaming value is given a high value. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to make a judgment until it flows into the unit 551, the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given, or the game ball flows. As a result, the player can be easily entertained until just before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG. 37, the special winning device 550 for the center frame 86.
The arrangement state of will be described. FIG. 33A is a front view of the center frame 86,
FIG. 33B is a side view of the center frame 86. 34A is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34B is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 36 shows XX of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the center frame 86 in a XVI-XXXVI line. FIG. 37 (a) shows
FIG. 37B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37B is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13.
Note that FIGS. 37A and 37B correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for urging the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIG. 33 to FIG. 37, the special winning device 550 has a center frame 86 sandwiched therebetween, and a removable first unit 551 on the front side of the center frame 86 and a detachable unit on the back side of the center frame 86. And a possible second unit.

The first unit 551 has the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86, and the front side of the protruding portion 86b. Is installed in. Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a protruding in a columnar shape on the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551 a has an insertion portion 61 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552.
7 is formed at a position opposite to 7, and a hole into which a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed is provided at the tip.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted in the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. More specifically, the first unit 551 is arranged in a state of interposing the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86 between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 with the columnar body 551a.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the screw inserted into the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is screwed into the projecting portion 86b to form a screw hole 86b4 ( 35), the protruding portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened. As described above, the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, so that the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b, and thus the first unit 551.
Is fastened to the protruding portion 86b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the vertical opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37B) of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set to be slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). In addition, the first unit 55
The distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37 (b)) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front surface of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the first unit 551 and the second unit 551. 552
When and are fastened, the thickness is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B).

Accordingly, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the first unit 551 can be urged toward the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, the base plate 6
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front surface of 0 and the first unit 551. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 with the screw from the front side of the base plate 60, and accordingly,
Since the screwing margin is not required on the front surface of the first unit 551, the area on the front surface side of the first unit 551 can be used as a ball-sending space for the game ball. As a result, the first
It is possible to secure a space for sending the game balls formed in the unit 551.

Further, the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since the protrusion is formed on the back side of the first unit 551, compared to the case where the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60, it is possible to secure a space for sending the game balls formed in the first unit 551. it can.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (on the front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted between the opposing surfaces of the second unit 552 and the base plate 60, and to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being illegal.

Further, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 by the screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, the fastening margin with the base plate 60 (the screw is inserted through the front surface side of the first unit 551). Need not be formed). As a result, the entire area of the outer shape of the first unit 551 in front view can be used as a ball-sending path, and the ball-sending path of the first unit 551 can be increased.

In addition, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is removed due to fraudulent activity from the front side of the game board 13. Can be suppressed. As a result, cheating on the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, the first
When the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60,
It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The first unit 551 is a fixing means (screw) that is fastened from the back side of the base plate 60.
As a result, since it is disposed on the base plate 60 while being biased to the back side with respect to the base plate 60,
By the biasing force acting on the first unit 551 to the back side, the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be arranged in close contact with each other.

Further, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged in the center frame 86 in a state in which a ball-sending path capable of sending a game ball is formed in each, so that the first unit 5
It is possible to prevent the ball-sending path 51 and the ball-sending path of the second unit 552 from deviating during the assembly of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are the first unit 551 and the second unit 55.
It is possible to suppress stopping on the second ball sending route.

In addition, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (second rolling portion 577 and third rolling portion 578) for causing the game ball sent to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552.
Therefore, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
If it is fastened to the projecting portion 86b of 6, the assembly error of the first unit 551 with respect to the center frame 86 occurs, and the game ball is smoothly sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552. I was afraid not to lose.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is the second unit 5
Since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened to each other, the error in fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be minimized (the place where an error occurs when fastening is minimized). As a result, it is possible to smoothly send the game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620, 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping at least a part of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in rear view. . As a result, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after removing the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 that are fastened to the fourth path member 610. Thereby, the first unit 55 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6
1 can be removed from the center frame 86 to prevent fraud on the main routes SK1 to SK6.

Furthermore, the protruding portion 86b includes an upright portion 86b5 that is upright (folded back) toward the second unit 552 side at the end portion (see FIG. 33B). As a result, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 with the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the upright portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 does not move. The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side are surrounded.

Therefore, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged in the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted between the facing portions of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 arranged in the center frame 86.

Further, the first solenoid 583a is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
A part of the second solenoid 584a on the front side is disposed, and the upright portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, the first solenoid 583a is utilized by utilizing the space in which the upright portion 86b5 is disposed.
Also, a part of the second solenoid 584a on the front side can be disposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 are accommodated.
84a can be suppressed from projecting to the back side. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to surround the peripheries on the back side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a with the second unit 552, and prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from being tampered with from the back side. It can be suppressed by the two units 552.

Further, the first solenoid 583 is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
Since a and a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a are provided, it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a. You can As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in a front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 It can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, which has a higher game value than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to make the player more entertaining.

Further, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86, the decoration member 650 is arranged so as to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86 a of the center frame 86. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special winning device 550 through (through) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 58 arranged in the first unit 551.
3a is inserted inside the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 formed on the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. This allows
It is possible to prevent the second unit 552 from bulging to the back side (arrow B direction side), and
It is possible to prevent an unauthorized object such as a wire or a piano wire from accessing the solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed.
Can be suppressed from bending. As a result, the passage of the game ball of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Further, as described above, the opening 8 of the protruding portion 86b formed on the center frame 86 is formed.
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by 6b1 and are disposed, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a having a relatively large (heavy) load are supported by the opening portion 86b1 (protruding portion 86b). can do. As a result, the protruding portion 86b can be prevented from bending due to the load of the special winning device 550.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress bending (bending) of the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60, so that the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 is arranged in the base plate 60.
It is possible to suppress the positional deviation with respect to. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550) from the game area of the game board 13.

In addition, the second rolling portion 57 that sends the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.
7 and the third rolling portion 578 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the protruding portion 86b. Accordingly, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 arranged inside the opening 86b1.
The electromagnetic force generated by the drive of 84a causes the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.
It can be suppressed that the rolling of the game ball sent to the. In other words, the protruding portion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by the driving of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protruding portion 86b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the sending of the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

As described above, the back surface of the first solenoid 583a is inserted and disposed in the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. Thereby, the wires of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be arranged by inserting the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since these wirings can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to prevent the wirings from being entangled.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protruding portion 86b in which the first unit 551 is arranged is bent. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress bending (bending) of the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60, so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 does not deviate from the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550) from the game area of the game board 13.

<Displacement member for disposing the fixed member of the substrate unit on the back member>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, a connection structure of the rear case 300 and the substrate unit 110 will be described in detail. First, referring to FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 30
The structure of 0 will be described.

FIG. 38A is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 38B is a rear case 30.
It is a rear view of 0. 39 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300. FIG.
(B) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engagement member 310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (a box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and a rear surface. Case 300
Is provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the board box 100 (main controller 110).
) Is mainly provided.

In addition, the rear case 300 includes a protruding portion 30 that is provided on the bottom wall portion 301 from two locations on the front side.
1b, a first opening 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 31.
And a second opening portion 301d that opens at a position facing 0.

The protruding portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engagement member 310 in a slidable state,
It is inserted inside a sliding groove 314 that opens to an engaging member 310 described later. Also, the protruding portion 30
The reference numeral 1b is provided so as to project in an annular shape, and a screw can be screwed into the inside of the annular shape. Therefore, after the protruding portion 301b is inserted inside the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head with a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the protruding portion 301b, thereby engaging the engaging member. 310 to the back case 3
00 can be installed.

The first opening portion 301c is an opening for inserting a part of a fixing member 320 (an engaging portion with the engaging member 310) described below, and an engaging portion of the fixing member 320 (an engaged portion 332 described below). )
Is formed into a shape that can be inserted therethrough. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engagement member 310 arranged on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

In addition, the first opening 301c has a projecting wall 301c1 projecting to the rear side at the end opposite to the engagement side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 (arrow R direction side). Equipped with. The protruding wall 301c1 is formed in a hook shape in which the protruding tip on the back side is bent by about 90 degrees, and the bending direction thereof is set in the direction (arrow R direction) away from the first opening 301c.

The tip of the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320 described later. As a result, the opposite side (arrow R side) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the rear case 300 is moved to the left and right (
The fixing member 320 and the engaging member can be supported (engaged) at both ends in the arrow L-R direction, and the force is prevented from concentrating on the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310. 310
Can be prevented from being damaged. It should be noted that a detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engagement member 310 (operator 315) described later into the rear surface side of the rear case 300, whereby the engagement member 310 is located on the rear surface side of the rear case. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300 to move the fixing member 320 and the engagement member to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The outer shape of the engaging member 310 is formed in a crank shape in a front view, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extending in the directions parallel to each other, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 3 thereof.
It is configured by a third piece 313 that connects the end portions of 12 to each other in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

The above-mentioned second sliding groove 314 is formed in each of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and is long in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. It is opened like a slot. As a result, the engagement member 310 is slidable in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected as an engaging portion with a fixing member 320 described later. The engaging portions 316 that are formed and project outward on both sides in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portions 316 at the two positions. From the approximately middle position toward the recess 317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 311 (arrow L-R direction), and toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of the back case 300 (back side (arrow B direction side)). And a protruding operator 315.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and has one side (arrow R direction side).
The outer surface of the first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface projecting to the outside of the first piece 311 as it goes from the one end to the other side (arrow L direction side). Extension direction (arrow L-R
Direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).

The recess 317 is formed by cutting out in the thickness direction of the first piece 311 and the first piece 311.
It is recessed from one end (arrow R direction side) end toward the other (arrow L direction side). Therefore,
One side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engagement member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixed member 320 will be given later.

The operating element 315 is an operating portion for operating the engaging member 310, is formed on the other end of the first piece 311, and has a projecting dimension larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It is set to a value, and at least a dimension that can be gripped by a finger of an operator is projected to the back side of the back case 300. Thus, the operator 315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be gripped and operated.

The second piece 312 has a fastening hole 318 that is formed in a circular shape on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a portion into which a screw inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) that penetrates the back base 720 of the rotation unit 700 described later is screwed. As a result, the inside of the rear case 300 (the bottom wall portion 301
After arranging the rotating unit 700 on the front side of the rotating unit 700, the engaging member 310 arranged on the rear side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to move the engaging member 310 to a prescribed position (an engagement with a fixing member 320 described later). Can be operated to the engaging position), and a screw can be screwed into the fastening hole 318 to engage the engaging member 31.
0 and the rotation unit 700 (back surface base 720) can be fastened. Therefore, the operator 315 that projects the engagement member 310 arranged at the specified position from the rear surface side of the rear case 300.
The operation can be disabled only by the operation of. As a result, in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (
It is possible to prevent the main controller 110) from being easily replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In this case, the fastening holes 318 are inserted through the holes of the rear base 720 of the rotary unit 700.
The screw fastened to may be operable from the hole in which the first winning opening 64 provided in the game board 13 is removed. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the rear case 300, it is possible to prevent the replacement work for the normal board box 100 from becoming complicated. As a result, the normal replacement work of the board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a member different from the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300, so that the board box 100 can be made smaller than when the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300. It can be easily arranged. As a result, the substrate box 100 can be easily arranged in the rear case 300 in a state where the substrate box 100 is difficult to remove from the fixing member 320.

Further, the back case 300 can be used as a component having the same shape in each model of the pachinko machine. However, since the board box 100 has a different shape and size in each model of the pachinko machine 10, the board box 100 is different. The fixed member 320 on which is provided cannot be used as a miscellaneous item with another pachinko machine. Therefore, as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300, the mold at the time of molding the rear case 300 can be the same mold as that of another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 includes an interposition member 330 that engages with the above-described engagement member 310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposition member 330. Accordingly, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a miscellaneous article having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine.

The interposition member 330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the other side (arrow L).
(A direction side), a locking portion 331 protrudingly provided on a side surface, and a frame-shaped engaged portion 332 protruding from the other side surface (arrow L direction side) to the rear case 300 side (front side). A box-shaped bottom surface is mainly provided with a circular insertion hole 333 and a projection 334 protruding from the rear surface toward the shaft support member 340.

The locking portion 331 includes an opening for engaging the other side (the arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening portion 301c described above. The projecting wall 301c1 that is provided to be inserted into the bottom wall portion 301 is engaged by being inserted. Thus, when the interposition member 330 (fixing member 320) is disposed in the rear case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 331 of the interposition member 330 so that one side of the interposition member 330 (arrow R The direction side) can be locked to the rear case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and a dimension in which the protruding dimension toward the rear case 300 side (arrow F side) exceeds the engaging member 310 arranged in the rear case 300. The distance dimension from the inner surface on the front side (arrow F side) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front surface of the engaging member 310 to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301. Is set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the interposition member 330 to a shaft support member 340, which will be described later, is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip end on the bending side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. To be done.
Accordingly, the insertion portion 3 is provided between the bent-side tip portion of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330.
44 can be inserted and arranged.

The shaft support member 340 has a box-shaped main body 341 whose rear case 300 side (arrow F direction side) is open, and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the main body 341. The support part 342 which bulges out is mainly provided and formed.

The main body 341 includes the insertion portion 3 protruding upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side).
44 and a fastening hole 343 that is recessed from the bottom surface side (arrow D direction side) of the box-shaped main body 341 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The insertion portion 344 is a plate member that is inserted between the tip of the protruding portion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 as described above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper side of the shaft support member 340 from tilting to the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) biased to the end portion on the opposite side to the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39) of the interposition member 330.
(See (b)) This is a hole for fastening a screw which is inserted. Therefore, the shaft support member 340 is located at the upper side (
The insertion portion 344 (on the arrow U direction side) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the interposition member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the interposition member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the interposition member 330 only by fastening the screw on the lower side, the fastening portion can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion to be caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which caulking metal fittings can be arranged. The board box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

Next, referring to FIGS. 40 (a) to 41 (b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
The engagement with and will be described. 40A is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state before engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 40B is before engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of the rear case 300 in this state. Figure 41 (a
41B is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state after the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41B is a rear view in a state after the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. It is a rear view of the case 300. Note that, in FIGS. 40B and 41B, a part of the outer shape of the engagement member 310 that overlaps with the back case 300 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the interposition member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are disposed on the interposition member 330 side (front side (arrow). It is fastened and assembled by a screw inserted from the F direction side)). Thereby, the interposition member 330
Also, it is possible to prevent the shaft support member 340 from being illegally disassembled from the rear surface side of the rear case 300 (the fastened screw is removed). As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

The intermediate member 330 and the shaft supporting member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state are the protruding walls 30 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the intermediate member 330 as described above.
1c1 is inserted. In this case, the intermediate member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (
The fixing member 320) is provided with the first opening 301c from the bent side (the arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.
Is installed in.

When the fixing member 320 is arranged on the rear case 300, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is arranged at a position facing one end (on the engaging portion 316 side) of the engaging member 310. Accordingly, by slidingly displacing the engaging member 310, one end (the arrow R direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) are the openings in the up-down direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portions 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the size. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the concave portion 317 provided on one side (the arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above. Due to the triangular shape of the joint portion 316, the force when the engaging member 310 is slid and abutted against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the recess 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the bifurcated first piece 311 can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slid and displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 moves to the intermediate member 33.
When the first piece 311 elastically deformed is inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 0, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to the shape before deformation. As described above, the side surface of the engaging portion 316 on the other side is the first piece 311.
Is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of. Therefore, the force for elastically deforming the first piece 311 toward the recess 317 side does not act only by the force that causes the engaging member 310 to slide and displace in the opposite direction. That is, the inclined surface of the engaging portion 316 and the concave portion 317 cause the first piece 311 to engage the engaged portion 332.
Can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by the other side of the engaging portion 316 (direction of the arrow L)
The side surface of the first side 311 can prevent the first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 from coming off easily. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the rear case 300 by a player's cheating, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) crimped to the fixing member 320 is an illegal board box. Can be suppressed.

The back case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the facing members of the
The rear case 300 is provided with the engaged portion 332 protruding toward the front side (the arrow F direction side), and the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and are disposed in the rear case 300. With the accessory device (in this example, the rotation unit 700) disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged with each other.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the rear case 300 without the engagement member 310 being interfered by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily arranged on the rear case 300.

Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 arranged on the front surface side (the arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, the engaging portion between the rear case 300 and the fixing member 320 is formed on the base plate. 60 and the rear case 300 can be arranged between the two. As a result, the base plate 6
It is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back side of 0 (direction of arrow B). As a result, from the back side of the base plate 60, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 3
It is possible to prevent the fixed member 320 from being tampered with by being disengaged from the fixed member 320 (for example, being replaced with an illicit fixing member).

Further, the rear case 300 includes a first opening portion 301c opened at a portion where the fixing member 320 is arranged and a second opening portion 301d opened at a portion where the engaging member 310 is arranged, The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300 (direction of arrow F) and from the rear side of the rear case 300 (direction of arrow B) through (inserts) the second opening 301d. Since the engaged member 332 that is operable and has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 and the engaged member 332 of the fixing member 320 are disposed. It is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion with the rear side of the rear case 300. as a result,
The fixing member 320 can be fixed to the rear case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged in the rear case 300, and is operated from the rear side of the game board 13 to be replaced with an unauthorized board box. Can be prevented.

Further, since the engagement member 310 includes the operator 315 which is inserted into the second opening 301d and protrudes to the rear surface side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 300, the front surface side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300. ), The engaging member 310 can be easily operated with the engaging member 310 being provided.
As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be facilitated.

Further, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 moves in the front-back direction with respect to the rear case 300 (arrows). Since it is not displaced in the F-B direction), the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an installation space for the accessory device arranged in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for disposing the accessory device.

Next, an operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is The rear case 300 can be operated from the rear side (arrow B side) through the first opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 to the recessed side of the recess 317 with a dedicated tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 316 and the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310. Is canceled. With this disengaged state, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of drawing out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned. The engagement between the engagement member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

In addition, it is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 and the first opening 301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, from the rear case 300 to the fixing member 3
It is possible to make it impossible to insert the finger of the person who removes 20 and to insert a dedicated tool.
As a result, the board box 100 (main controller 110) can be made replaceable only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42A and 42B, the board box 100 (main controller 110) that is caulked and fastened to the shaft support member 340 will be described. 42 (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110).
b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110). Note that, in FIG. 42B, the outer shape of the engagement member 310 that overlaps with the board box 100 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the board box 100 has one end side (arrow R).
The bearing portion 117 is provided so as to project from the end portion on the direction side). The bearing 117 is arranged in the vertical direction (arrow U
A pair is arranged at a predetermined interval in the (-D direction). The pair of bearing portions 117 are portions that are caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340 as described above, and the size of the support portion 342 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) and the interval between the facing portions are substantially the same. It is set to the same. As a result, in the board box 100, the support portion 342 is arranged between the pair of bearing portions 117 facing each other, and the caulking pin is inserted from above the bearing portion 117 and caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340. To be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as described above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340, and is arranged on the back surface side of the engagement member 310, and thus is described above. As described above, when the operator 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixed member 320, the operator can easily operate the operator 315 by rotating the board box 100. After the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the board box 10
By arranging 0 on the back side of the engaging member 310, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 3
It is possible to prevent the fifteen from being operated and being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

The other end side of the board box 100 (the arrow L direction side) is the bottom wall portion 3 of the rear case 300.
The board box 100 is fixed to the board case 100 by screws that are inserted from the back side (direction of arrow B) and fastened to the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 is disposed on the back surface side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 43 to FIG. 14, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the lowest position with respect to the base member 410) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced according to the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. And a lower displacing member 440 that displaces when the driving force is transmitted from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two plate members each having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a back base 412 arranged on the back side. The transmission member 420 and the link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction in the drawing of FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two cylindrical support pins 411c, 411d protruding rearward, and a curved wall 411e protruding in an arc shape with the support pin 411d as an axis. .

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the rear surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
2, 473 are holes that are respectively inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By displacing 2, 473 along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to be curved in an arc shape, and are upward (from the left side (FIG. 43 left side) end portion to the right side (FIG. 43 right side) end portion of the front base 411 (see FIG. 4).
3 upward). Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different from each other, and the gap between the opposites in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced while moving. That is, the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By changing the distance between the lower displacement member 440 and the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to rotate the lower displacement member 440 with sliding without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The detailed mode of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of the transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to prevent the 11c from breaking (damage).

The shaft support pin 411d has a through hole 431 formed at one end of a first link member 431 described later.
It is a protrusion inserted into a and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. The shaft support pin 411d is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411d from being broken (damaged).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the rear surface side of the front base 411, and the shaft support pin 411
It is formed to be curved around the axis of d. The projecting distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the projecting tip end surface of the plate-like projection 431b of the first link member 431 described later abuts. Therefore, displacement of the first link member 431 to the front side is suppressed. In addition, the curved wall portion 411e
Is curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, and therefore, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, the plate-shaped protrusion 431 of the first link member 431 is formed.
b can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for allowing the sphere emitted from the emission opening 471 to flow into the recovery port 411f and be recovered by the movement of the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to the ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is the front base 41.
1 is a hole formed so as to project to the right end portion of the No. 1 and the opening surface thereof is the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower side in the gravity direction of the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. The surface is located on the side.

Further, the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the sphere emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the recovery port 411f and recovered quickly.

The rear surface base 412 has groove portions 412a and 412b that are recessed from the front surface side (front side in FIG. 44) toward the rear surface, and a locking portion 412c that is formed in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b so as to project toward the front surface side. It is formed mainly for preparation.

The groove portion 412a is a hole into which the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c and faces the shaft support pin 411c. It is recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so as not to fall off the base member 410 by inserting the shaft support pin 411c into the shaft portion 422a and then combining the front base 411 and the back base 412. Further, since the back surface base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 411c forms the front base 411. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole into which the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above is inserted, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d, and faces the shaft support pin 411d. It is recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 has the through hole 431.
The front base 411 and the rear base 412 are combined with each other after the shaft support pin 411d is inserted into a, so that the front base 411 and the back base 412 are held so as not to fall off from the base member 410. Also, the rear base 412
However, since the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411d can be held, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the shaft support pin 411d bends from the connecting portion with the front base 411. Can be prevented from breaking.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end side of a biasing spring SP1 described later, and the biasing spring S1.
It is formed outside P1. Thereby, one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated according to the drive of the transmission gear 421. The member 422 is mainly provided and formed.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having an interlocking surface on the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 to rotate the shaft portion, the transmission gear 421 also rotates.

The cam member 422 is formed in a shape in which one ends of two semicircles having different sizes when viewed from the front are combined, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a small outer shape has a tooth surface 4 which meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface.
22b is engraved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. Cam member 42
A sliding groove 422c, which is recessed on the back side facing a link member 430 described later, is formed in the semicircular portion having a large outer shape.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above.
Since the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the 1c, the cam member 422 is supported by the shaft support pin 411c.
It is held rotatably about the axis of.

The cam member 422 has the tooth surface 422b meshed with the transmission gear 421, and the base member 410.
Since the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 can rotate about the shaft of the shaft portion 422a.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a is increased from the one end side toward the other end side. The sliding groove 422c includes a step portion 422c1 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state described later, and the lower displacement. When the member 440 is located in the second overhang state described later, the step portion 422c3 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 between the retracted state and the second overhang state. And a step portion 422c2 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when positioned in the first overhang state in the intermediate state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. The link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is bent and formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and is also formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced along with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a columnar coupling protrusion 431c that projects rearward on the other end side. , The plate-like projection 431b projecting at a position facing the above-mentioned curved wall portion 411e, and the cylindrical sliding projection 4 projecting to the front side of the bent portion.
31d and mainly.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the shaft support pin 411d is inserted as described above. First
The link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the shaft support pin 411d inserted in the through hole 431a.

The plate-shaped protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in front. It is formed in a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape around the hole 431a as an axis, and the protruding length thereof is set to be larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. This can prevent the rear surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the first link member 431 from colliding with each other.

Further, the projecting size of the plate-shaped projection 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (size in the arrow FB direction) of the cam member 422. Further, there is a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55 (a))) with the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b.
) Are placed apart.

The cam member 422 is arranged such that a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e excluding the plate-shaped projection 431b can be displaced. In addition, the size of the two gaps, the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, is the distance X1 described above.
It is set larger than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9 is moved in the direction in which the distance X14 becomes smaller (the direction of arrow F).
When 431 bends, the protruding tip end surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 422 is provided between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped projection 9431b and the protruding surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to suppress that the displacement is restricted due to being sandwiched between.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion that is connected to a second link member 432 described later, is inserted into the through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and has an outer diameter of the head portion from the back side that is the through hole 4.
A screw or the like larger than 32a is fastened. As a result, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f protruding toward the back side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. Wall 431
f is a wall surface for fitting and holding an urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The link side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the biasing spring SP1 fitted in the wall portion 431f, and is formed so as to project like a hook on the back side on the one end side of the first link member 431. .
Therefore, the biasing spring SP1 has one end engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back base 412 and the other end engaged with the link engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. It Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in the direction in which the other end side of the first link member 431 is rotated upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the drive motor K
The energy consumption of M1 can be suppressed.

The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. The tip of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed such that the size of the outer diameter thereof is smaller than the width dimension between the facing portions of the sliding groove 422c.

Since the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding protrusion 431d slides inside the sliding groove 422c in accordance with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

Further, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the plate-shaped protrusion 431b suppresses forward displacement of the first link member 431. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to deepen the recess depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 42 is not necessary.
The rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of 2 in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed in a rectangular shape in which one side is long when viewed from the front, and is also formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through hole 432a penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction on one end side and a through hole 432b penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction on the other end side.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. As a result, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is provided with a protrusion 48 of a rear case 482, which will be described later.
2a is a hole into which the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip end of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the second link member 432. Held rotatably with respect to. Therefore, the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. It is a front view of 400. FIG. 50 shows the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
0 is a rear view of 0, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. Note that FIG.
In FIGS. 0 to 52, the rear base 412 is shown transparently. Further, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

Further, the retracted state means that the sliding protrusion 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c has the step portion 4
The lower displacing member 440 is disposed between the opposing 42c1 and the lower displacing member 440. In the second overhang state, the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the facing portions of the step portion 442c3, and the lower displacement member 440 is provided.
Is the state in which the tip side of is placed at the top. The first protruding state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the facing portions of the step portion 442c2 and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second protruding state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 at the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and the other end side (step portion 422) of the sliding groove 422c.
The side (c3 side) is positioned to the right side (the right side in FIG. 50) when viewed from the rear of the shaft portion 422a. In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c to be in the state of being located at the step portion 422c1. Therefore, in the first link member 431, the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is positioned on the rear view right side (the right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on the one end side (rotating around the through hole 431a as an axis). The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position)).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, the first link member 4
One end side (through hole 432a side) connected to 31 is positioned to the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 has the front base 4
The protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the slider 11 are located on the right side of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in rear view (see FIG.
0 right side). As described above, the vertical distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is larger on the right side in rear view than on the left side.
0 is arranged with its longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first overhang state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position to be displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (the step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. This rotational displacement causes the first link member 43 to be guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c.
The first sliding protrusion 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is disposed at the third driven position. It should be noted that in the first overhang state, the sliding protrusion 431d does not move into the step portion 422c of the sliding groove 422c.
It is guided between two inner walls facing each other.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated about 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the coupling protrusion 431c side) is in the retracted state from the position in the rear view upper left (FIG. 51). It is displaced to the upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably coupled to the slide grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the slide grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the vertically opposed sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side when viewed from the rear, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, in the first projecting state, the recovery port 411f is located on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacing member 440 transitions from the retracted state to the first bulging state, the distal end side of the lower displacing member 440 is bulged to the right side of the base member 410 in front view by rotationally displacing while slidingly displacing. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable regions of the other displacement accessory. It is possible to suppress collision with another displacement accessory.

Further, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472, 473 side connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later is provided. When the ball is launched and drops downward from the exit opening 471 as it is, the ball can be sent to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 42 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first extended state.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is arranged at the second position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position (third position) in the first projecting state. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the step portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. The sliding of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving protrusion 431d is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is disposed at the second driven position. In the second overhang state, the sliding protrusion 431d.
Are guided between the inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated about 30 degrees about the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the coupling protrusion 431c side) is substantially rear view from the position in the first overhang state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably coupled to the slide grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the slide grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the vertically facing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side when viewed from the rear, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, similarly to the first overhang state, in the second overhang state, the recovery port 41 is provided on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side.
The state 1f is set. That is, when the lower displacing member 440 transitions from the retracted state to the second bulging state, the distal end side of the lower displacing member 440 is bulged to the right side in front view of the base member 410 by rotationally displacing while slidingly displacing. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of the other displacement accessory, and it is possible to suppress collision with the other displacement accessory.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. 53A shows the first link member 431 and the cam member 42 in the retracted state, FIG. 53B shows the first extended state, and FIG. 53C shows the second extended state.
It is a rear view with 2. Note that in FIGS. 53A to 53C, the first cam member 422 is not shown.
A portion overlapping with the link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53A, in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431.
Are arranged between the inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other. Further, as described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a by a distance substantially the same as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force that rotates about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. Therefore, the rotation of the cam member 422 can be suppressed by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431 is inserted via the second link member 432.
The displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the first overhang state, the sliding protrusion 43 of the first link member 431.
1d, it is arranged between the inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force that rotates about the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first projecting state, the force is applied from the sliding protrusion 431d to the cam member 422. Shaft 422a
Can be applied to. Therefore, the cam member 422 is rotated by the rotational force of the first link member 431.
Can be suppressed from rotating. As a result, in the first projecting state, the second link member 432
It is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the displacement.

Here, in the first projecting position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in a stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because it is the intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, if the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhang position (intermediate position of displacement), energy consumption increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 4 of the first link member 431 in the first overhang state.
Since 31d is arranged between the inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed as described above. Therefore, even when the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped during the displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second overhang state, the sliding protrusion 43 of the first link member 431.
1d, it is arranged between the inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, the through hole 4 is formed in the first link member 431 located in the second extended state.
When a force that rotates about the shaft of 31a acts, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. Therefore, the rotation of the cam member 422 can be suppressed by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 in the second projecting state.

Further, each of the step portions 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 has a sliding protrusion 431d and a through hole 43.
Since it is extended in the direction connecting with 1a, the width dimension of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, at the retracted position, the first overhang position, and the second overhang position, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding projection 431d, which allows the first link member 431 to be rotationally displaced around the axis of the through hole 431a, is small. it can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the width in which the lower displacement member 440 swings due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped in each state can be reduced, and the player can easily recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (driving mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 regulate the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 54A shows the lower displacement unit 4 taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG.
54B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. Note that in FIGS. 51 and 52, the rear base 412
54A and 54B are illustrated as being transparent, but FIGS. 54A and 54B are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the transparent displacement is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 54A, the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.
0 is disposed between the back base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, the lower displacement member 44
It is possible to prevent 0 from swinging back and forth. That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, the lower displacement member 440 is loaded in the front-back direction. Where there is a risk of bending, since the cam member 422 is arranged forward, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, since the first link member 431 can be restrained from moving forward, the lower displacement member 44
It is possible to prevent 0 from swinging back and forth.

As shown in FIG. 54B, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

In the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion of the link member 430 between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of two members, its connecting portion needs to be rotatable, and therefore the rigidity is weaker than that of the other portions due to the gap, which makes it easier to bend. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the link member 430 from bending. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulation of Displacement of Displacement Member by Regulation Device for Displacement of Follower Member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55A shows the lower displacement unit 4 taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG.
55 is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. 51, and FIG. 55 (c) is a downward displacement unit of the line LVc-LVc shown in FIG. 52. FIG. 4 is a sectional view of 400.

As shown in FIG. 55A, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e move in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is placed in a different position. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in the resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the displacement start of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhang state (
In the case of the third position), a part of the cam member 422 is arranged at a position where a predetermined gap is provided on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the curved wall portion 411e. Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the displacement of the cam member 422 in the front side can be suppressed.

The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F side) is the front base 41.
It is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface of No. 1 (see FIG. 45). Accordingly, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from partially contacting the curved wall portion 411e and suppress the concentration of force on a part thereof. As a result, damage to the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first projecting state (third position), the tip end side (the protrusion 473 coupled to the front base 411). And the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) are rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component that tilts the lower displacement member 440 in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, in the first extended state (third position), the force in the front-rear direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is larger than in the retracted state (first position). Be made bigger. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 moves from the retracted state (first position) to the first position.
When the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the projecting state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 is curved wall portion 41.
Since it is arranged on the front side of 1e, the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first extended state (third position) and the second extended state (second position), and the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented by the player. Can be easily seen.

The displacement of the link member 430 toward the back side can be restricted by disposing the link member 430 between the back base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings to the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back base 412 to restrict the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front base 411 includes a regulation unit (curved wall portion 411e) that regulates the swing of the link member 430 other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. And a first displacement region displacing the third position that is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position from the first position and a second displacement region displacing the second position from the third position. The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by moving the cam member 422 from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. A first driven region that displaces a third driven position that is an intermediate position between the first driven region and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and a second displacement region and a first driven region. Are partially set in the same area, and the cam member 422 When it is displaced a second displacement area, restricting means (curved wall 4
Since the swing of the cam member 422 in a direction other than the displacement direction is regulated by 11e), the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means (the curved wall portion 411e). be able to.

Therefore, it is only necessary to form the restricting means (the curved wall portion 411e) at one place, and therefore the cam member 42.
The shape of the regulating means can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the regulating means for regulating the displacement is formed in each of the 2 and the link member 430.

Further, the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is regulated by a means (curved wall portion 411e).
Since it can be regulated by using the same portion of the above, one regulating means (curved wall portion 411e)
Since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the restriction portion respectively, the restriction means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced by that amount.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the protrusions 472, 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a, 411b formed in the front base 411. (Collar C disposed on the protrusions 472 and 473 (see FIG. 14)) is displaced by the cam member 422, and the other end side (the step portion 422c3 side) of the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the cam member 422. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (the step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the protrusions 472 and 473 (the collar C disposed on the protrusions 472 and 473), the cam member 422 moves to the shaft portion. There is a risk that the link member 430 may be rotationally displaced about the 422a in the front-rear direction and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be regulated by contacting the curved wall portion 411e, the cam member 422 is prevented from moving toward the shaft portion 422a.
It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-rear direction around the center. As a result, the contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first extended state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 bends during the initial operation. It is possible to prevent the frictional resistance from increasing by coming into contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. FIG. 56A shows L of FIG.
FIG. 56B is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line VIa-LVIa, and FIG. 56B is a front view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second projecting state (second position). Is. Note that, in FIG. 56B, the outer shape of the base member 410 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431. Accordingly, the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displaced state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431, and the transmission can be performed. Gear 421 and tooth surface 42
It is possible to suppress damage to the tooth surface of 2b.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431
The contact surface between the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 is set in the direction orthogonal to the virtual line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the contact portion. Accordingly, when a force that displaces in the direction from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position) acts around the axis of the first link member 431, the force acts on the shaft of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotation around. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force acting on the first link member 431.

Here, as described above, the tip end side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) of the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, since the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the first component that supports the lower displacement member 440
When the force in the rotational direction acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is maximized, the transmission of the force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the second position. It can be easily maintained at the displaced position.

Further, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the lower displacement member 440 is provided.
The force of rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 is applied by the load of. In this case, the force PW1 (see FIG. 56 (b)) in the direction in which the end of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-shaped projection 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a, and the cam member 42.
The inner wall of the second sliding groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding protrusion 431d, and the cam member 422 is moved to the shaft portion 4
The force PW2 (see FIG. 56 (b)) in the direction of rotation around the axis of 22a acts in a direction in which it cancels out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force applied from the first link member 431.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57A is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57B is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60A and 60B show the lower displacement member 4
It is a front view of 40.

It should be noted that FIG. 60A shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 60B, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently. The closed state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, a case member 480, and the base member 470. The transmission mechanism 460 is disposed so as to be displaceable therebetween, and the decoration member 450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 is mainly formed.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding toward the rear surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a standing on the front side from the edge portion on the other end side. , A protruding wall 477 protruding in an upside-down U-shape from the upper end of the central part in the left-right direction (FIG. 57 left-right direction) to the front side, and the upper end of the base member 470 is cut from the end of the protruding wall 477 to the one end side. The rack gear 476 to be installed, the shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, the rectangular wire locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on the one end side of the base member 470, and the vertical center portion of the base member 470. Mainly formed with an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side and recessed.

The protrusions 472 and 473 are formed in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 as described above.
Is a connection portion that is inserted into the lower displacement member 440 to connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470,
The standing dimension is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474, 475 are projections that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462, 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 described later and rotatably hold the transmission gears 462, 463.
Is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides with respect to the base member 470,
The transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

The projecting wall 477 is a lower displacing member 440 when the ball sent from the ball sending unit 600 described later is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450.
Is a wall surface for suppressing falling to the outside, and the space between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470, and has one end of the flexible wiring between itself and the base member 470. It is attached to the back surface side of the base member 470 in a state of being interposed. Accordingly, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress the entanglement of the flexible wiring.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 is provided with a protrusion 478a protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that allows the protrusion 478a to protrude to the rear side from the link member 430 that is connected to the rear side, and is set to a distance that allows the front surface of the rear base 412 to abut. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be restrained from swinging rearward, and the link member 430 can be suppressed.
Can be suppressed from colliding with the back base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the slide displacement direction of the movable rack 464 arranged on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464 described below is inserted therein.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and has a transmission gear 461.
, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461 thereof, and a tooth surface which meshes with the transmission gear 463, and are arranged in front of the base member 470 so as to be slidable and displaceable. A rack 464, a transmission gear 465 that is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and is in mesh with the rack gear 476, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465. A rack 466 arranged so as to be slidable forward,
The rack 466 mainly includes a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side thereof.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the shaft hole, and the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state of being connected to the drive motor KM2. Is installed in.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 have the shaft portion 474 of the base member 470 in the shaft hole.
475 is inserted and rotatably held by the base member. In addition, the transmission gears 461 to 46
Reference numeral 3 denotes a gear train meshed with each other. When the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the final transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular oblong shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface thereof, a shaft portion 464b protruding cylindrically from the front side, and upwardly protruding from one end side of the upper end surface. An abutting plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and a rack guide portion 464e protruding to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d,
It is mainly provided with a collision portion 464f projecting to the other lower end.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, the base member 4
By arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in the state of meshing with each other in 70, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion that rotatably holds the transmission gear 465, and
5 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than that of the shaft hole 5.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that contacts the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 described later to displace the distribution member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The contact mode between the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like member that is inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470 and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 4 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2
64 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479. In this embodiment,
Since the opening 479 is extended in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a projecting wall for restricting the displacement direction of the rack 466 described later, and is provided so as to project from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f comes into contact with a protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, and the displacement member 492.
Is a wall portion for displacing, and is formed so as to project from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed in a state where the other end side is inclined. Accordingly, the protrusion 4 of the displacement member 492
92b can be slid and displaced along the inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a rod-shaped body having a rectangular laterally long shape in a front view, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b protruding from the end portion on the other end side to the rear side in a cylindrical shape, and a front side protrusion. Two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466 that is recessed on the back surface from one end to the other end.
d and is formed mainly.

The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464.
As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced, the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the sliding displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Therefore, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into an opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed of a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, the transmission gear 46 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 5 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464,
The displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the direction in which the opening 481a extends.

The recessed portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464. As a result, the transmission gear 4 is attached to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 65 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced while slidingly displacing in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacing member 440, the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight, and the transmission is performed. Gear 465 to rack 46
There was a fear that the driving force would not be transmitted to 6 well.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion that defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is the sliding plate 46.
6c and the opening 481a, and the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed at two positions, so that when the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440 is changed, the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are changed.
It is possible to suppress changes in the tooth engagement state of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being hindered.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to project from two positions in the left-right direction of the rack 466 (the left-right direction of FIG. 57 (a)), and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (the side opposite to the shaft portion 466b) is At the displacement terminating position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57).

Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiving portion 467 provided on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiving portion provided on one end side of the rack 466 is received. The other end of the rack is easily displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the meshing surface of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466.
Could be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (the side opposite to the shaft portion 466b) is
At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most overhanging with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57), so the ball receiving portion 467 fires ( It is possible to suppress displacement of the rack 466 at a position where the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 mesh with each other when the rotation operation is performed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds the game ball, is formed in a substantially U shape in a front view, and is formed so as to be able to receive the ball in an inner portion of the U shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere. As a result, one ball can be made inside the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 has a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape,
It is mainly provided with a leg portion 467a projecting downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. In addition, after inserting the shaft portion 466b into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. It As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rack 466 in a state of being biased rightward when viewed from the front. A detailed description of the mode of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that biases the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the biasing spring SP2, and the tip end thereof is a front face described later with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward. It is set at a position where it abuts on the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and the base member 47.
0 mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side and a rear case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed in a rectangular laterally long plate shape when viewed from the front, has an opening 481a that spreads in the left-right direction at a substantially middle position in the gravity direction, a bottom wall portion 481b formed to project from a lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. A shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction is mainly provided and formed.

The opening 481a is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, the base member 470.
When the front case 481 is installed in the rack, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front case 481 to the back side and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470.

The back case 482 is a plate member for disposing the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and the outer shape in a front view is formed in a rectangular horizontally long shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470. The back case 482 also includes a protrusion 482a that projects to the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion that is connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the through hole 432b is formed at the tip of the protrusion 482a.
The back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotatably connected to each other by fastening a screw having a head larger than the inner diameter of the back case 482.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape that imitates a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decoration member 450 includes a front side decoration portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decoration portion 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482.
And is mainly formed. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front side decoration portion 451 is formed with an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (the case member 480, the base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front decoration portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back side decoration portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decoration portion 451. Thereby, the member arranged on the back side of the front decoration part 451 from above the back decoration part 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, the displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly by including a shaft portion 492a protruding to the back side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, the shaft portion 492 having the shaft hole 481c inserted therein.
A biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the tip side of a. Accordingly, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force that rotates about the shaft of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 in accordance with the displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. Moreover, since the displacement member 492 is formed so as to be ejectable and can be displaced when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 is moved by the weight of the game ball.
When the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 492 is changed, for example, when the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that cancels the change of the position of the center of gravity accompanying the launch of the game ball, the lower displacement member 440 accompanying the change of the position of the center of gravity is adopted. The occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. Further, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction with the launch of the game ball. For example, the displacement member 492 is moved in a direction to cancel the reaction associated with the launch of the game ball. When the structure for displacing is adopted, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56 (b)). And the force PW2 (see FIG. 56 (b)) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a cancel each other, and the cam member 422 acts from the first link member 431. It is possible to suppress rotation by force. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be stably arranged. Therefore, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertial force generated by the launch of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision of the ball receiving portion 467 and the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is
It can also be used as a drive unit for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the drive means by the drive means, and to reduce the product cost accordingly, and to secure the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. Figure 6
1 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. Is. 64A to 64C are partial enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61) with respect to the base member 470. The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the protruding wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

61 to 64, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 48 are not shown.
1 is seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is sequentially illustrated, and in FIG. 64C, the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, at the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, like the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at the substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 move to the base member 470.
It is supposed to be gathered at the left end of the left and right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while slidingly displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged near the rotating shaft. It is desirable to keep it in the opened state.

According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are overlapped in the front and rear (two-stage rack), so that the center of gravity of the transmission mechanism 460 slides on the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a and 411b side (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position, and the lower displacement member 44 is moved.
The driving force for rotationally displacing 0 can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced rightward with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced, the movable rack 46 is moved along with the slid displacement.
4 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. The transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is similar to the displacement from the first position to the second position, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 46
7, the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is released, and the urging force of the urging spring SP2 arranged on the shaft portion 466b causes the 7 to be rotationally displaced about the shaft of the shaft hole 467b. .

More specifically, in the first and second positions (a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side in front view of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in front. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the clockwise rotation in the front view is restricted about the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2.

On the other hand, the tip end portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, and the bottom wall portion 48 is formed.
The bottom wall 481b and the standing wall 4 of the base member 470 are arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the end of 1b.
It is arranged inside the concave portion 481b1 formed between the portions facing the 71a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46
7 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tips of the leg portions 467a come into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 about the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated about 40 degrees about the shaft hole 467b. In the following, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be described as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is provided with a concave portion 481b1 recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). The recess 4
81b1 is engaged with the leg portion 467a, and the leg portion 467a is engaged with the recessed portion 481b1 so that the posture can be changed. Therefore, the structure for changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is simple. Can be converted.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid to the right side in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the protrusion 492 of the displacement member 492.
Collide with b. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the shaft of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a firing operation, the balls are discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter.
The oscillating force and the inertial force by which the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced can act in opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the ball is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a ball receiving operation into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. Figure 65
(A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. Note that FIG. 65 (a) to (c)
Then, the transition state in which the sphere receiving unit 467 receives the sphere and receives the sphere is sequentially illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the horizontal direction in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the reference numeral of the virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is extended by the first tension. The horizontal direction in the outgoing state is illustrated with the reference numeral of the virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacing member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the first bulged position is illustrated with the sign of the angle θ. The virtual line H1, the virtual line H2 and the angle θ are also shown in the drawings starting from FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is at the first position. By displacing the game ball T1, the game ball T1 is sent from the sorting unit 500 described later to the opening 451a formed in the front decoration portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 sent to the opening 451a is sent to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is fed into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 sent to the inside of the projecting wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can throw a ball. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced along with the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is fed to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. Thereby, in the state where the game ball T1 is arranged in the ball receiving portion 467, the first
The ball receiving portion 467 can be placed at the position.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceably disposed on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the extended position where the base member is extended to the game area and is visible to the player and the retracted position retracted from the game area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the projecting position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and therefore when the displacement member is displaced, the one side is set as a dead point and the base member is loosened. There was a problem that the sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration becomes maximum, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts displacement from the second position, and
A mode in which the displacement starts from a first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410. In the arranged state (for example, the first displacement state in which the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the game area and can be visually recognized by the player), the displacement is started from the first position, and thus the lower displacement member 440 of the base member is started. The rattling can be suppressed. That is, the first position is more than the second position
Since the position is close to one side of the lower displacing member, the weight of the sphere receiving part 467 is set to the base member 410 by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the sphere receiving part 467. On the other hand, it is possible to bring the ball receiving portion 467 closer to the dead point when rattling, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be made difficult to act on the lower displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) while slidingly displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced in a state in which the game ball T1 is arranged far from the rotation axis, a centrifugal force is easily generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. And a collision sound is generated due to the collision between the game ball T1 and
Alternatively, there is a problem that the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position, so that the game ball T1 is set to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be placed (closed) in the vicinity. Therefore, the game ball T on the lower displacement member 440
When the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second bulged states) in the state of receiving 1, it is possible to suppress the generation of centrifugal force in the game ball T1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving portion 467 collide, or the ball receiving portion 467 from being damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 causes the transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiving portion 467.
60 is formed by the movable rack 464, the transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and the rack 466 (rack member), and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466. Therefore, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position. At this time, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 should be close to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). You can As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in the state in which the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding groove 4 of the front base 411 by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position.
It can be easily moved to the 11a, 411b side (the rotation shaft side of the lower displacement member 440). Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the driving force for rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a ball payout operation will be described. 66 (a) to (c)
FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. 66 (a) to 66 (c), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball dispensing operation are sequentially illustrated. 66 (a) to (c
), The decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the payout operation of the ball is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the payout operation of paying out the balls received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position in order. It is done by that.

That is, by accepting the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 by the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 becomes the ball receiving portion 467. Along with the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving section 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving section 467 at the third position, and the ball receiving section 467 receives the ball. It is ejected from the inside of the portion 467. Thereby, the ball can be discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced from one side of the lower displacing member 440 in the direction of separation, the rack 466 requires the transmission gear 465 (the transmission gear 465 (after the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started). Rack gear 466a with which the pinion gear) is meshed
The side portion is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be brought closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved. It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the direction of the third position (first direction), and when the ball reaches the third position, the posture is formed to be changeable. Therefore, up to the third position, one game ball T1 is received. While making it easy to maintain the state held by the part 467, it is possible to prevent the game ball T1 from falling off the ball receiving part 467, while the second
When the position is reached, the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.
It can be easily paid out from inside.

It should be noted that the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the imaginary line H1), and the ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) is dispensed. When performing the operation, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is sent to the inside of the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position of the first projecting state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by the angle θ from the imaginary line H1), the lower displacement member Four
The game ball paid out to the outside of 40 is sent to the upper part of the ball pedestal 710 of the rotation unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a discharging operation when two or more balls are fed into the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67 (a) to (c) and 68 (a) to (c)
8B is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

Note that, in FIGS. 43A to 43C and FIGS. 44A to 44C, transition states of the discharging operation are sequentially illustrated. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is seen. The outline of is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), when two or more spheres are continuously delivered from the sorting unit 500 described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second sphere. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to send the first game ball T1 to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be sent to the first ball. It can be placed in contact with the game ball T1 of and retained inside the protruding wall 477 (see FIG. 67 (b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the game ball T1 of the first ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion in the state of receiving the game ball T1 of the first ball at the ball receiving portion 467. 467 can be displaced to the first position and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in the gaming machine that displaces the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, when the operation of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, is displaced, a malfunction occurs. There is a risk that more than the specified number of game balls will be sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls in excess of the specified number may cause a problem. For example, the transmission mechanism 4 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 for the game balls exceeding the specified number.
There is a risk of damage by being caught in the 60 and being bitten by the movable part. Alternatively, the game balls exceeding the specified number are outside the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the back case 3).
There was a risk of spillage to the inside (00).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable from the second position to the first position which is the direction opposite to the ball feeding direction of the ball. The track area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the distribution member 540 and more than the specified number of game balls are sent, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased because the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is expanded. Acceptable in orbital area. As a result, game balls that exceed the specified number are
It can be moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the game exceeding the specified number is played. It is possible to make troubles caused by balls less likely to occur.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding a game ball T1 of one ball sent from the sorting unit 500 described later at the second position, and also from the second position to the direction of the first position (second direction). ) To at least, it is formed so that it can be displaced by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball,
After receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (
By displacing in the first direction), the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is equal to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (
It is possible to send the ball to a region in the first direction from the ball receiving portion 467). Therefore, the game balls T2 after the second ball can be moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, since the ball receiving section 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving section 467, the first game ball T1 and the second ball Game ball T after the ball
2 can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the first ball game ball T1 is held by the ball receiving member, 2
It is possible to perform the operation of ejecting only the game ball T2 after the ball from the track area.

Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, and then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to discharge the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the second ball is received. Game ball T2
Falls to the upper part of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 is a ball receiving portion 467 and a transmission gear 465.
There is a risk that the game ball T2, which is the second ball, will not be ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 by being sent between the two.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the sphere in the ball receiving portion 467, after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Since it can be displaced to, it can be suppressed that the second game ball T2 cannot be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a game machine provided with a winning accessory that discharges the game balls sent into the winning object, the operation of the member that discharges the balls (the ball receiving portion 467 in the present embodiment) is the position for receiving the balls. (2nd position) and the position to discharge the ball (3rd position) only, when two or more game balls are sent into the accessory, the balls are discharged to the member that discharges the balls. Exit (exit opening 471)
Where there is a risk of discharging the second game ball T2 to the opposite side, in the present embodiment, after the first game ball T1 is received, the ball receiving portion 467 is provided on the opposite side to the emission opening 471. By displacing to the position, the second game ball T2 can be sent between the ball receiving portion 467 and the emission opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to (c), after the game ball T2 of the second ball is sent on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By making 2
The ball sphere T2 can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the emission opening 471.

In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 has a lower end surface of the U-shaped portion located above the center position of the game ball T2 of the second ball sent to the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (upward in FIG. 68 (a)). Is located in. Further, when the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged in a state of being inclined by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the side surface of the U-shaped right side of the ball receiving portion 467 (the right side of FIG. 68 (a)) is arranged at the same position as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a in the vertical direction, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

In addition, the leg portion 467a is tilted approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and thus is the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). Abut.
Thereby, when rolling the game ball T2 of the second ball to the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to generate a force for lifting the game ball T2 of the second ball upward by the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore,
It is possible to reduce the frictional force between the game ball T2 of the second ball and the bottom wall portion 481b when the game ball T2 of the second ball rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg portion 467a is projected from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the projecting tip of the leg portion 467a is the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since it is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface of the game ball sent to the area (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball), the ball receiving portion 467 from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). When the game ball is displaced to, the lower half surface of the game ball can be moved while being pushed by the leg portion 467a. As a result, the game balls T2 after the second ball can be easily discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.

In addition, a leg portion 467a is provided between the game ball T1 of the first ball held in the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (the game ball T2 of the second and subsequent balls). By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the game ball T1 for the first ball, it is possible to easily discharge only the game ball T2 for the second and subsequent balls from the track area.

Further, by engaging with the recess 481b1, the leg portion 467a has a role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and a role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof, so that the number of parts is reduced accordingly. The cost can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 in the first position to the third position direction (first direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the game balls T2 after the second ball can be easily discharged from the track area.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440 is
The recovery port 411f is arranged below the emission opening 471 of the. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is sent to the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first projecting state, the recovery port 411f is located below the emission opening 471. The upper side of the recovery port 411f is opened. Therefore, the discharged game ball T2 is sent to the recovery port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is on the first direction side of the base member 470 (on the standing wall 471a side).
Since it is disposed vertically below the end of the ball and has an opening vertically above, the ball receiving portion 467
Of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) that is moved along with the movement in the third position direction (first direction) and discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is opened at the recovery port 411f. Can be received and collected from

In addition, the opening of the recovery port 411f is a vertical portion of the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (the standing wall 471a side) at least in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. It is disposed below the direction. As a result, the lower displacement unit 400 is discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first overhang state, or the second overhang state (that is, the second ball). The subsequent game ball T2) can be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member.

67 (a) to (c) and 68 (a) to (c) in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the imaginary line H1). When performing the discharge operation of the ball receiving portion 467 shown in, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440,
The ball is delivered to the inside of the recovery port 411f. Further, when the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 is performed at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhang state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by the angle θ from the imaginary line H1), the lower displacement member The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is sent to the recovery port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69A is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68B, and FIG. 69B is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68A. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the launching operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the side of the standing wall 471a, and the exit opening. It can be pushed out of the lower displacement member 440 from 471.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 are brought into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the emission opening 471. Further, the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2 can be used to return the ball receiving portion 467 to the state before the rotational operation. Therefore, when discharging the game ball T2 sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 46
The game ball T1 of the first ball held in 7 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, in the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 has the third position direction (first direction) from the second position.
Is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the orbital area when it is displaced to and is recessed 481b.
1 is provided with the standing wall 471a located on the first direction side, and the game balls after the second ball sent to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 are displaced in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the attitude change of the ball receiving portion 467 can be regulated. It is possible to easily discharge only the game balls after the second ball from the track area while maintaining the state where the ball receiving portion 467 holds.

That is, the erected wall 471a is erected such that the height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erected tip is lower than the radius of the game ball, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs in accordance with, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a,
The game ball can easily climb over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a).
Since the reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467, the posture change of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 can be dropped. Can be suppressed.
As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the game area while maintaining the state where the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball.

On the other hand, when the game ball T2 after the second ball has not been sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, since the game ball is not interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, the leg Part 467a
By engaging with the concave portion 481b1, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 of the first ball (that is, the ball receiving portion 4
It is possible to easily discharge the game ball held by 67) from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70A is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70B is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the distribution unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a space between the base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and facing the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 forming a plurality of flow paths through which spheres can flow, and a base plate 52.
Distribution member 540 rotatably attached to the back side of 0, and extension extending a downward flow path of a sphere attached to the end surface of the base plate 520 and formed between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other. The path member 530 is mainly provided and formed.

The base plate 520 has a cylindrical shaft portion 523 protruding to the rear surface side, a first opening 521 penetratingly formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and having a radius larger than that of the first opening 521. A second opening 522 penetratingly formed in a large arc shape, a rolling portion 525 having a U-shaped cross-section with an open upper end on the side surface of the upper end, and extending in the left-right direction, and protruding like a hook on the back side. And a locking portion 524 which is used.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of a distribution member 540, which will be described later, to distribute the distribution member 54.
0 is a shaft that is attached to the base member in a rotatable state, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540 to be described later are inserted, and have a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. In addition, the distribution member 540 is rotatably supported by the base plate 5
Since it is attached to No. 20, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are formed such that the length of the arc is larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the distributing member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward one end on the left side in rear view (left side in FIG. 70 (b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 from stopping at the rolling part and roll the ball on one end side.

In addition, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525 protruding from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inside of the U-shape.
b, and an opening 525a that opens to the back side at the end on the one end side.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side faces with a certain space therebetween, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions which are staggered in a front view. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be made to collide with the protrusion 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

Here, as described above, the ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position (FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b)). )reference).
Therefore, when the ball-sending speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling unit 525 of the third ball-sending route KR3 is increased, the game ball is sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 before moving the ball receiving unit 467 to the second position. May be

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b projectingly provided on the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending route KR3 are formed, and the game ball passes through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending route KR3. Since resistance can be given, the speed of the game ball passing through the third ball-sending route KR3 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time required when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) by that amount.
It is possible to make 7 receive the game ball reliably. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed down, and the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed so as to be open to the rear surface side at one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape in rear view is formed larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the one end side of the rolling portion 525 is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular vertically long plate shape having a lateral width smaller than that of the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back surface side. By forming the space between the opposite sides larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, the flow-down paths of the plurality of spheres are formed therein.

The route forming member 510 includes a first opening 511 opening at the upper end surface, a first ball sending route KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball sending route connected to the first ball sending route KR1. KR2 and the third ball sending route KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 which are opened to the side surface of the route forming member 510 at the ends of the second ball sending route KR2 and the third ball sending route KR3, and are formed through the front and rear direction. Openings 514, 515, 516 and openings 514, 515, 5
It is mainly provided with a fourth ball-sending path KR4 formed by the wall on the back side of 16, and a fourth opening 517 that opens to the side surface of the path-forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball-sending path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball sent from a ball sending unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the sorting unit, is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510, and has an outer shape that is larger than that of the ball. Largely formed. Further, the first opening 511 is used for the ball sending unit 60.
It is connected to 0 and the ball sent from the ball sending unit 600 can be flowed in.

The first ball-sending path KR1 is a path through which the sphere that has flowed in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path-forming member 510 facing each other, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth ball sending route KR4 is formed by extending approximately one-third in the vertical direction of the route forming member 510, and the downstream end portion is connected to the second ball sending route KR2 and the third ball sending route KR3. To be done. That is,
The sphere flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 is formed to be able to flow down to the second ball sending route KR2 or the third ball sending route KR3.

As described above, the second ball-sending route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball-sending route KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 flows down to the second ball sending path KR2, the second opening 5
It is discharged from 12 to the outside of the sorting unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are collected by the collecting path. Also, inside the second opening 512 (second
At the downstream end of the ball-sending route KR2), a sensor device SE2 that detects passage of a game ball is arranged. Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of balls of the game ball passing through the third winning opening 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of balls of the game ball passing through the second ball sending route KR2. The number of game balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number of balls (one ball) of game balls are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, by the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second ball sending route KR2 (sensor device SE2). If the number is 7,
It can be detected that one game ball worth of balls has flowed down (stored) in the third ball sending route KR3.

As described above, the third ball-sending route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball-sending route KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 flows down to the third ball sending path KR3, the third opening 5
It is discharged from 13.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the balls discharged from the third opening 513 are the rolling parts 525.
Is thrown inside. That is, the ball sent to the third ball sending route KR3 is sent to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are respectively formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed on the game board 13, and the balls that have won the third winning opening 82 are sent. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third winning opening 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball feeding path KR4 is formed by being connected to the openings 514 to 516, and is formed on the downstream side by 1
It is connected to one path and is connected to a fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting spheres. Therefore, the ball that has won the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is discharged to the fourth opening 517 after being sent to the fourth sending path KR4 of the sorting unit 500.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross-section whose lower side is open, and extends in the left-right direction. The U-shaped inner diameter of the extension path member 530 is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being arranged above the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, a ball fed to the upper portion of the rolling portion 525 can be fed inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. The ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 formed at a constant interval at the same position in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced similarly to the protrusion 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view in which one side is formed long, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is a regulation plate 541 that projects as a plate-shaped body to the front side.
The storage plate 542 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 545 penetratingly formed on one end side on the upper side, and a hook-like locking portion 544 formed on the back side.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520.
Is inserted into the shaft hole 545, and a screw having a head larger than that of the shaft hole is attached to the shaft portion 523 from the back side.
By being fastened to the base plate 520, the base plate 520 is rotatably attached.

The regulation plate 541 is arranged at a connecting portion between the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2 via the first opening 521, and a ball flowing down the first ball-sending path KR1 flows into the second ball-sending path KR2. Is a plate member that regulates the axial direction of the shaft hole 545, and is formed so as to project more toward the front side than the front end surface of the shaft hole 545, and the projection distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed by curving in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the shaft of the shaft hole 545, the regulation plate 54
The displacement area of 1 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball sending path KR2 via the second opening 522, and stores the balls flowing down the second ball sending path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed so as to project to the front side from the end surface on the front side, and the projection distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is formed to be larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore,
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. Thereby, the regulation plate 541 can be projected to the connecting portion between the first ball sending route KR1 and the second ball sending route KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball sending route KR2.
Furthermore, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The projecting portion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the distribution member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the above-described lower displacement member 440, and projects toward the other end side of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, the protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 that serves as the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. As a result, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Therefore, since the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Further, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide can be reduced. In addition,
A detailed mode of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges into a circular shape is formed at a contact portion of the protruding tip of the protrusion 543 with the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the distribution member 5
When the 40 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

The locking portion 544 is formed between the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 and the biasing spring SP as described above.
It is a part that locks 4. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotating force to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the sphere flow-down path of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 500 taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second ball sending path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 73, in the first ball-sending path KR1, the lower end side of the downflow path is the base plate 52.
The tilted portion is formed so as to be curved in a gentle S-shape while being tilted toward the center portion in the left-right direction of 0 (left-right direction in FIG. 73). Further, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third ball-sending route KR3, and the second ball-sending route KR2 is tilted at the end of the first ball-sending route KR1 in a direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first ball-sending route KR1. It will be connected in the state of being.

Thereby, by colliding the ball flowing down the first ball feeding path KR1 with the lower surface of the tilted portion,
The downflow direction of the sphere can be directed from the gravity direction to the tilting direction of the first ball sending path KR1.
Therefore, the ball can be made to flow down toward the entrance of the third ball-sending route KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball-sending route KR1 and the third ball-sending route KR3). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 can be sent to the third ball sending route KR3.

Here, a downflow path through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch path branched from the downflow path, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine that distributes them is known.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game balls flowing down the downflow passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage is the first branch. The passages and the second branch passages are evenly distributed (that is, half each). That is, there is a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 that is formed so as to be displaceable and that receives a game ball from the third ball sending route KR3 is provided, and the contact plate 464c that interlocks with the ball receiving portion 467 contacts the distribution member 540. Since the sorting member 540 is displaced by being brought into contact with and displaced, the ball receiving portion 46
According to the displacement of 7, it is possible to change the number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball-sending route KR3 or the second ball-sending route. That is, it is possible to change the number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball sending route KR3.

The distribution member 540 is displaced by utilizing the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
Since it can be displaced, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive unit or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distribution member 540. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in the structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the driving by the driving unit, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is deteriorated due to the malfunction due to the poor detection or the poor control. However, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending route KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is set to the third by synchronizing with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
By switching to the ball-sending route, it is possible for the displacement member to reliably receive the game balls distributed to the third ball-sending route KR3.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the game ball flowing down the downflow path is only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so that it is insufficient to give the player amusement.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (the distribution means) is the third.
In the state where the ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage) is set, the flow down of the game balls in the third is regulated, and the distribution destination by the sorting member 540 is set to the second ball sending route KR2 (second branch passage). Since the storage plate 542 (flow-down state changing means) that allows the flow of the game balls in the third ball-sending route KR3 is provided, the player can be entertained.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the third ball-sending route, the third ball-sending route KR3.
When the game balls are stored in the third ball-sending route KR3 by restricting the flow-down of the game balls that are distributed to the third ball-sending route KR3 when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the second ball-sending route KR2.
It is possible to allow the game balls to flow down in, and to flow down (open) the game balls stored in the third ball sending route KR3. Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 (downflow route) to one of the third ball sending route KR3 or the second ball sending route KR2,
It is possible to form an operation of flowing down (opening) the game ball distributed to the third ball sending route KR3. Further, these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, the player can be provided with an interest.

Further, since the distribution plate 540 (integral member) in which the regulation plate 541 (sorting means) and the storage plate 542 (downflow state changing means) are integrally formed is provided, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are provided.
It is possible to simplify the structure for operating and to improve the reliability of operation, that is, when the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts, This complicates the structure for operating the two parts and reduces the reliability of the operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operational reliability can be improved. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 has a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position).
When the distributing member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulating plate 5 is
41 is arranged in a position where the third ball feeding route KR3 (first branch passage) is a distribution destination, and a storage plate 542 is arranged in a position that regulates the flow down of the game balls in the third ball feeding route KR3, and the distribution member 540 is regulated. In the state of being displaced to the position, since the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the position where the second ball sending route KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at the position which allows the game balls to flow down in the third ball sending path, By displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions (a storage position and a regulation position), the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 (downflow passage) is moved to the third ball sending route KR3.
Or, in addition to the operation of distributing to one of the second ball-sending paths, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow down of the game balls allocated to the third ball-sending path KR3, and the flow-down of the stopped (stored) game balls The operation of causing (opening) can be formed, and the operation of storing and opening can be alternately formed in association with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the operation reliability.

The distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (downflow state changing means) is formed so as to be able to appear in and out of the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage), and the third ball sending route. By projecting to KR3, the flow down of the game ball is regulated, and since it is formed in a curved shape around the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 in the shape of an arc, the third ball feeding route KR3 for the protrusion / retraction of the regulation plate 541. It is possible to reduce the area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the.

Since the storage plate 542 (downflow state changing means) is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third ball sending route KR3 projects. In the initial state started (that is, in the state where only the tip side of the flow-down state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that easily regulates the flow of the game ball, It is possible to easily regulate the flow down of the game balls distributed to the third ball sending route KR3.

Further, in a state where the storage plate 542 is projected to the maximum to the third ball-sending path and regulates the flow down of the game ball, the recess of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be prevented from rampage.

The distribution unit 500 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 (integral member) and biases the regulation plate 541 in the direction in which it projects toward the third ball feeding path (first branch path) (biasing means SP4). ), The distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is
Since the distance is made larger than the distance from the distribution member 540 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, the urging force of the urging spring SP4 is used to cause the distribution plate 542 to project the distribution member 540 to the third emergency path (that is, the storage position). ) Can be easily maintained.

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when the flowing game ball collides, the rotation axis Since the distance from is large, even if the same impact force acts, the storage plate 542
Is liable to sink, the biasing direction of the biasing spring SP4 is such that the storage plate 542 is the third ball sending route KR.
By setting the protruding direction to 3, the storage plate 542 can be prevented from sinking into the recess 519 by the amount of the biasing force.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (downflow state changing means) projects toward the third ball delivery path (first branch passage) due to its own weight, the distribution member 540 (integral member) is utilized. It is possible to easily maintain the distribution member 540 in the posture (that is, the storage position) in which the storage plate 542 projects to the third ball sending path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from being recessed into the recess 519 by its own weight.

Further, even when the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) is dropped, the distribution member 540 is maintained by its own weight in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 is projected to the third ball sending route KR3, and the game is sent to the third ball sending route. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down.

Further, the distribution member 540 is provided with an urging spring SP4 that applies an urging force to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 on one of the third ball sending path KR3 and the second ball sending path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is provided with the ball distributing portion 467. By displacing 540 in a direction that opposes the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball sending route KR3 or the second ball sending route KR2, and by the biasing force of the biasing spring. The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to one of the third ball sending route KR3 and the second ball sending route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent careless switching of the distribution destination by the distribution member 540. In this case, the distribution member 540 is displaced along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, the abutting plate 464c which is interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the distribution member 540.
It is unnecessary to be in contact with. That is, the contact plate 464c that is interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distributing member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, the displacement of the sorting member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 74 (a)
73B are partial enlarged views of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. In addition, in FIG. 74 (a), the state in which the sorting member 540 is located at the storage position is shown in FIG.
) Indicates the state in which the sorting member 540 is located at the regulation position. Further, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position means that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. This is a state in which the restriction plate 541 is rotated and the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the third ball feeding path KR3.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third ball sending route KR3 and the regulation plate 541 is arranged on the route forming member 51.
It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall on the back side of 0.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end portion of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inward of the third ball-sending path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball-sending path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball delivered from the upstream of the third delivery route KR3 (first delivery route KR1) is stopped upstream of the storage plate 542.

In addition, from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542, the first ball sending route KR1 and the third ball sending route KR
The distance dimension L2 to the connecting portion with 3 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This reduces the number of balls stopped upstream of the storage plate 542 to 1
It can be a sphere. In addition, below, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped upstream of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball feeding route KR1 and the third ball feeding route KR3. The storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance dimension L3 between the end portion of the tip of the regulation plate 541 protruding inside the first ball-sending path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-sending path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore,
The ball flowing down the first ball-sending path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is sent to the second ball-sending path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulation position and the storage position, the first ball feeding route K
A state in which the ball to which R1 is delivered is delivered to the third delivery route KR3 and stopped on the third delivery route KR3, and a ball flowing down the first delivery route KR1 cannot be flown into the third delivery route KR3. It is possible to form a state of being sent to the two-ball-sending route KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distributing member 540, it is possible to reliably switch the flow path of the sphere to either one when the flow path of 1 is divided into the flow path of 2 downward.

Further, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on the second ball sending route KR2, so that the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to prevent the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third ball delivery path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (sorting means) is formed so as to be able to appear in and out of the first ball sending route KR1 (downflow passage) or the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage), and its withdrawal position is
Since it is an inner wall on the extension line in the downflow direction at the downstream end of the first ball sending route KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball sending route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the restriction plate 541 starts to be projected to the downflow passage or the third ball feeding route KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the allocation destination by the regulation plate 541.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (sorting means) is projected to the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage), so that the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 (downflow passage) is brought to the second ball sending route ( Since the projecting direction of the regulation plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second ball sending route KR2, the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball-sending path KR along with the protrusion operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball-sending route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is separated from the shaft hole 545 more than the regulation plate 541. May be located at. That is, the shaft hole 545 of the distributing member 540 is shown in FIG.
Further, the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the back surface on the downstream side of the third ball delivery route KR3 shown in FIG. 74 (b). In this case, the regulation plate 54 formed on the distribution member 540
1 and the storage plate 542 are arranged at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

In the state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position as described later, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the downflow path. As a result, at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulation position to the storage position, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 from flowing into the third ball sending route KR3.

In this case, the shapes of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view are the points P.
It is formed in an arc shape centered on. This makes it possible to minimize the displacement region of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or opposite). Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third ball sending path KR3 are formed in a recessed shape along the displacement path of the restriction plate 541 and the restriction plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case where two or more balls are sent from the ball sending path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 75 (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. 76A and 76B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b) sequentially show transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, in FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and (b), when the game ball T1 of the first ball is sent to the first ball sending route KR1 in the state where the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position, as described above. The game ball T1 is sent to the third ball sending route KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located at a position downstream from the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere, a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542. But,
It is in a state of being projected to the first ball sending route KR1 side (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball feeding route KR3 (first branch passage) is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the gravity direction side so that the game ball can roll. The storage plate 542 (downflow state changing means) is formed so as to be retractable from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into and out of the third ball-sending route KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the flow-down can be regulated. as a result,
The distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is from the second ball-sending path KR2 (second branch path) to the third ball-sending path KR.
When the game ball is switched to 3, and the game ball is distributed to the third ball sending route KR3, the protrusion of the storage plate 542 can be easily made in time for regulation of the flow down of the game ball.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the third ball-sending route KR3, and in a state of being projected to the third ball-sending route KR3 at the maximum, a force component in the projecting direction is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when restricting the flow down of the game balls distributed to the third ball-sending route KR3, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 due to the impact when the game balls collide.
Therefore, the flow down of the game ball can be easily regulated.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and (b), when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state and the second game ball T2 is sent to the first ball sending route KR1, the game ball T2 is The ball is thrown in the direction from the first ball sending route KR1 to the upper end of the third ball sending route KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball sending route KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is sent to the second ball sending route KR2.

In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 is in a state of projecting to the first ball sending route KR1 side, and therefore the game ball T2 is not sent to the inside of the third ball sending route KR3, but the second ball sending route KR.
Since it can be guided to 2, the game ball T2 can be sent to the second ball sending route KR2 without staying inside the third ball sending route KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball delivery on the first ball delivery route KR1 and the second ball delivery route KR2.

That is, the second ball-sending path KR2 (second branch path) in the first ball-sending path KR1 (downflow path).
The inner wall on the side that wants to see the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1, the third ball sending route KR3 (first
Of the specified number (1 ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage, the last game ball is the third ball sending route K.
Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of R3, the game ball flowing down the first ball-sending route KR1 is made to collide with the last game ball out of the prescribed number of game balls, and then is flown down to the second ball-sending route KR2. It can be made easier.

Note that, of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Further, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to 1 ball. In this case, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the third ball sending route KR3.

Further, as described above, in the first ball-sending path KR1 (downflow passage), the lower end side of the downflow path is tilted toward the center portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilting thereof is also performed. The part is curved and formed in a gentle S shape. That is, the downstream direction of the downstream end of the first ball-sending route KR1 (downstream passage) is formed in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball-sending route KR3, so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-sending route KR1 is the third If the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the ball sending route is different from the downflow direction of the upstream end of the third ball sending route KR3. Can be made. As a result, due to the repulsive force at the time of collision, the last game ball jumps out from the upstream end of the third ball sending route KR3, and the second ball sending route KR2.
Can be suppressed from flowing into.

Further, since the upper end of the third ball sending route KR3 is formed to be inclined in the tilt direction of the lower end of the first ball sending route KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. In addition to the above, it can be on the second ball sending route KR2 side. Therefore, the bounce direction of the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball sending route KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 colliding with the game ball T1 can be easily sent to the second ball sending route KR2. As a result, stagnation of the balls on the first ball-sending route KR1 and the second ball-sending route KR2 can be suppressed.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball-sending route KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow down of the game balls on the third ball-sending route KR3 is the storage plate 542 (flow-down state changing means).
Is regulated by, and a prescribed number (1 ball) of game balls are stored in the third ball-sending route KR3,
Since the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 (downflow passage) is formed to be able to flow down to the second ball sending route KR2 (second branch passage), when a predetermined number or more of game balls flow down the downflow passage, It is possible to prevent the game balls (the game balls T2 after the second ball) exceeding the specified number from staying on the first ball sending route KR1. Therefore, the displacement of the regulation plate 541 (the operation in which the distribution destination is the second ball sending route KR2)
However, it is possible to suppress the inhibition by the game ball stuck on the first ball sending route KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a case where a ball is delivered to the delivery path when the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position. 77A and 77B show the sorting unit 500.
FIG.

77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 77A and 77B respectively show transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the distribution member 540 is in a state of being arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when a sphere is delivered to the first delivery route KR1 in a state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, the delivered game sphere T1 is the first delivery ball. Route KR
The lower end of 1 collides with the regulation plate 541. Thereby, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball sending route KR2 and flows down the second ball sending route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an operation when the sphere flows down to the downstream side of the third ball sending route KR3 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500.

78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). 78 (a) and 78 (b) respectively show transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state (see FIG.
When the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed at the regulation position when the state shown in FIG.
The game ball T1 stagnant above the storage plate 542 flows down to the downstream side of the third ball sending route KR3.

That is, the spheres flowing down to the third ball sending route KR3 are limited to the spheres stagnant above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, the number of spheres stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so
The balls can flow down to the ball sending route KR3 one by one. Therefore, the third ball sending route KR3
Since it is possible to stabilize the number of spheres that flow down to the downstream side of, the flow of an unintended number of spheres into the third ball delivery route KR3 can be suppressed.

Therefore, the distribution member 540 (the distribution means) is moved to the third position as the distribution member 540 is displaced.
A regulation plate 541 (first projecting / retracting portion) and a storage plate (second projecting / retracting portion) that are formed so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the ball feeding path (first branch passage), and the regulation plate 541 projects to the third ball feeding path. By that, the first
The game ball flowing down the ball sending route KR1 (downflow passage) is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the second ball sending route KR2 (second branch passage), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the regulation plate 541 in the third ball sending route KR3. By being located and protruding to the third ball-sending route KR3, the flow-down of the game balls distributed to the third ball-sending route KR3 is formed so as to be regulated, and the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed.
In the state in which one protrudes into the passage of the third ball delivery route KR3, the other is retracted outside the passage of the third ball delivery route KR3 (inside the recesses 518 and 519), so that the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) By displacing the distribution member 540 in accordance with the displacement, only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 and received by the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the regulation plate 541 is projected, the first state in which the game ball flowing down the first ball feeding route KR1 is distributed to the second ball feeding route and the regulation plate 541 is retracted, and thus the first ball feeding route KR1.
The second state of distributing the game ball flowing down to the third ball sending route and the second projecting portion projecting the flow of the game ball distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 is restricted (the game ball is stored). Third
And a second state in which the second projecting / retracting portion is retracted can form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third ball sending path is made to flow down and is received by the ball receiving section. Each of these states By combining the above, only a prescribed number (1 ball) of game balls are distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 and the ball receiving portion 46
Can be received by 7.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated,
The structure for exerting those functions) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball feeding route KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third ball feeding route KR3. It suffices that the distribution member 540 is also formed to be displaceable in two positions depending on the position (first position and second position). That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions. Therefore, as the structure of the distribution member 540 and the ball receiving portion 467 are displaced, the distribution member 54
The structure for displacing 0 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, referring to FIGS. 79 to 80, the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 40
0 will be described. FIG. 79 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400.
It should be noted that the lower displacement unit 400 is shown in a state in which it is arranged in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the sorting unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440.
And are arranged at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is fed into the lower displacement member 440 via the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is sent to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed on the game board 13 through the ball sending unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes the rolling portion 525 that communicates with the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.
Since the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of the game ball in the rolling portion 525, for example, even if the distribution member 540 malfunctions and the game ball T2 after the second ball is delivered, The game ball T2 after the eye can be reliably sent to the track area of the distribution member 540 via the rolling portion 525. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems due to the game ball T2 after the second ball from occurring.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84 and 86 are sectional views of the distribution unit 500. 81,
83 and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and only the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 arranged on the front side is shown. 82, 84, and 86, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is shown by a chain line.

Further, FIGS. 81 and 82 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, and the lower displacement member 44 is shown.
The state in which 0 is located in the retracted state is illustrated. 83 and 84, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the second position and the sorting member 540 is arranged in the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state. The situation is illustrated. 85 and 86, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position and the sorting member 540 is arranged in the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first projecting state. The state of being located at is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the state where the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, as described above, the ball receiving portion. A rack 466 that drives 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is placed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front) similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side in front view) is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (regulation position) in which the regulation plate 541 is projected to the first ball sending path KR1 by being acted on by the rotational driving force about the axis of the shaft hole 545.

Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position, the ball delivered to the first ball delivery route KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is the third ball delivery route KR3. It is not flown down to the second ball and is sent to the second ball path KR2. Also, as mentioned above,
By displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which the balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulation position, the game balls can be delivered to the downstream side of the third delivery path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). At this time, a game ball can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

The third electric accessory 82a for keeping the game balls stored in the distribution unit 500.
Is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric accessory 82a is brought into a closed state. . As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the flow of the game balls passing through the first ball sending route KR1 is not regulated by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls are Three
It is possible to prevent the ball from being delivered to the downstream side of the ball delivery route KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be operable in association with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the distribution of the game balls to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulated according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, it is possible to switch the regulation or allowance of the sending of the game ball mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, for example, the distribution member according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the distribution member 540. It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving 540 or each of these means, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

Further, in the distribution member 540, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the first position direction (second direction).
Since the game ball T2 is allowed to be sent to the track area of the ball receiving section 467 in conjunction with the displacement to, the track area of the ball receiving section 467 is the first direction than the ball receiving section 467. It is possible to reliably send the game ball to the area on the side.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the sorting member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position), and the ball receiving portion 467 is provided. When the part 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third ball sending route KR3, and when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving part is moved from the third ball sending route. 467 will be able to receive the game ball,
Since the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball sending route KR2, the game balls that exceed the prescribed number (1 ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive the ball are distributed to the third ball sending route KR3. Can be suppressed.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the distribution member 5
Since the ball receiving unit 467 receives the game balls with the distribution destination of 40 being switched to the third ball sending route, the game balls exceed the predetermined number that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive and the game balls are the third ball sending route KR3. There is a risk of being assigned to. When the means for restricting the inflow of the game balls into the third ball sending route KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and the specified number (1 ball in the present embodiment) of game balls is distributed to the third ball sending route KR3, and then the distribution member 540.
When is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second ball sending route KR2, so that it is possible to prevent more than one game ball from flowing down to the third ball sending route. Therefore,
The ball receiving unit 467 can prevent the game balls exceeding the receivable specified number (1 ball) from being distributed to the third ball sending route KR3. Further, it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for restricting the inflow of the game balls into the third ball sending route KR3), so that it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is started from a position where each operation unit turns off (turns off) when the power is turned on (turns on). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control may be reset. In that case, when the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to flow the game ball down to the third ball sending route KR3, The game ball may be sent to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is not located at the predetermined reference position, the pachinko machine is turned off. When the power of the machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to prevent unintended game balls from being sent to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from clogging inside the lower displacement member 440.

Further, when the power supply is turned off in the state where the game ball is left in the track area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving section 467 is left in the track area of the ball receiving section 467 by performing the discharging operation described above. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 are the second
As described above, in the state where the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the third position (the position other than the first position) or the third position (the position other than the first position), the rack 466 is substantially centered in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440. The movable rack 464 is arranged at a position moved to one end side from the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position separated from the end portion on the other end side of the lower displacement member 4440 to the one end side. In this case, the other surface of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side in front view) is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. Accordingly, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 provided between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third position.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected on the ball sending path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is located at the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the first unit of the sorting unit 500 is
The ball sent to the ball sending path KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Also,
As described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball delivered to the first ball delivery route KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is delivered to the second ball delivery route KR2.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the lower displacing member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is in a state of being separated from the protruding portion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 provided between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is delivered to the third ball. It is displaced to the position (storage position) projected on the route KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is brought into the first overhang state or the second overhang state, the ball delivered to the first ball delivery path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. To be done. Further, as described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball delivered to the first ball delivery route KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is delivered to the second ball delivery route KR2. .

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhang state and the second overhang state (states other than the retracted state).
In such a case, since the position of the opening 451a of the decoration member 450 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, the spherical communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. . Therefore, when the sphere flows down into the third ball delivery path KR3, the sphere may be discharged into the rear case 300 from the opening 451a. In the present embodiment, however, the distribution member 540 is set to the storage position to cause the third ball to be delivered. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the downstream side of the route KR3. As a result, the balls of the rear case 300 can be suppressed from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displaced member 440 is located in the retracted state, Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the lower displacement member 440, the mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state and the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first or second overhang state It is possible to form a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhang state, the ball receiving portion 4
67 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending route KR3 (the third ball sending route KR
When the rolling portion 525 of No. 3 and the opening 451a of the lower displacing member 440 are in non-communication state, the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 cannot contact the distributing member 540 in this state. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball (the lower displacing member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state), and the sorting member by the sorting member 540 is the third sending ball. It is possible to suppress switching to the route KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is arranged on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 4 is correspondingly provided.
It is possible to prevent the base member 470 of 40 from increasing in size.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first overhang state to the retracted state is not only rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also rotational displacement, when the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is rotationally displaced. , The protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540
May not be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended position shown in FIG. 85 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at a position other than the first position. (
The second position or the third position) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 that is displaced in the retracted state from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 5
It can suppress that 40 cannot be rotationally displaced.

In addition, since the bulging portion 543a is formed in the distributing member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhang state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c is not moved. Even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c abuts. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from contacting the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and preventing the distribution member 540 from being rotationally displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described. 87 is a front view of the rotary unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotary unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary unit 700, and FIG.
FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, and a ball pedestal 71 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the gravity direction.
0 and a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the ball pedestal 710 and the decoration unit 750.
And a left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right transmission member 740 arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front.

The ball receiving base 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball sent inside the lower displacement member 440 can be sent to the rotary unit 700. In addition, the ball pedestal 71
The detailed configuration of 0 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and a character or a pattern is decorated on the front side. Further, the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of drive described later. The configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The back surface base 720 is a plate member that connects the back surface side of the ball pedestal 710 and the back surface side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view. As described above, the decoration unit 750 is
Since the fastening portion is limited because it is composed of a plurality of movable members, the decoration unit 750 and the ball pedestal 710 are connected on the back side of the position invisible to the player, and thus the decoration unit. The decorative unit 750 and the ball pedestal 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the movable range of 750.

The left transmission member 730 is attached with the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750, the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. The gear cover 7 that covers the motor base 732 and the transmission member 730.
33 and a ball feeding path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750 described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730 described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b that meshes with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b, and the transmission gear 731c. The transmission gear 731d, which is disposed adjacent to the transmission gear 731d and is coaxially arranged by the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d are mainly formed.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 arranged therein, and an inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is coupled to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a rotational driving force to the right side transmission member 740 of the decoration unit 750.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring that is arranged on the inner side and a cam surface is formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring that is arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, which acts as resistance and transmits power to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When rotated to, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller becomes low, and the cam type clutch slips to disconnect the power transmission.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731b,
The rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft portion JB1, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

The one-way clutch OW1 is disposed inside the transmission gear 731c, similarly to the transmission gear 731b. Further, a shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731c,
When the driving force for rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Also,
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and their rotation directions are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
Is the other direction of rotation. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the shaft portion JB1 is rotated or the shaft 735 is rotated.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is connected to the transmission gear 7
31c is rotated only when it is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and is not rotated in the other direction.

The load gear 731e has a shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760.
Connected to. The resistance member 791 is formed by including a shaft portion 791a rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a is required.
Similarly, the force for rotating 1e is required to be a predetermined amount or more.

Accordingly, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it is possible to suppress the rotation by the inertial force. That is,
The resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is coupled to the transmission gear 731d that is arranged coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 is changed to the transmission gear 7
It is possible to rotate only 31d in one direction. That is, the transmission gear 731c is
When rotating in the other direction, the drive transmission between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the action of the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed into a box-shaped body that is open on the decorative unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged outside the bottom of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with its shaft inserted inside the box. As a result, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is attached to the motor base 73.
It can be arranged inside the two. That is, the depth of the box of the motor base 732 is determined by the transmission gear 731a.
It is set larger than the width dimension of. As a result, it is possible to arrange the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a in the motor base 732 in the decorative unit 750 in a mounted state, and it is possible to suppress the transmission gear 731a from colliding with the decorative unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. In addition, a through hole 733 a is formed through the decoration unit 750 at a position facing a shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. As a result, the balls rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged outward through the through holes 733a. The description of the spheres sent to the rotating body 800 will be given later.

The ball feeding path cover 734 is a member arranged on the outer side of the gear cover 733 (left side in FIG. 87), is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion protruding from the edge thereof toward the gear cover 733. Accordingly, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball feeding path cover 734, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotary unit 700. You can The balls discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball-sending path cover facing each other are sent to a collecting path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1 described above,
An arm member 742, one end of which is connected to the rotating member 741, and a crank cover 743, which is disposed in the decoration unit 750 in a state of covering the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742, are mainly provided and formed.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, and the main body portion 741b.
One-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of the decoration unit 750 and the opposite side of the decoration unit 750 (see FIG. 87).
It is mainly provided with a cylindrical protrusion 741a protruding to the right side).

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when a rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed higher than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer wheel of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer wheel is rotated and the rotating member 741 is driven by the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated two or more at different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape in which a C-shape and an I-shape in side view are combined, and an I-shape is provided at one end of the C-shape.
The other ends of the letters are formed by being connected. Further, the arm member 742 has a shaft hole 742a penetratingly formed in a connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetratingly formed in one end of the I-shaped portion, and C It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c penetratingly formed at the other end of the character portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a shaft portion 764a formed in the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760 described later.
Is a hole into which is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, since the arm portion 742 is disposed in the decoration unit 750 by inserting the shaft portion 764a into the shaft hole 742a, the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in an ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore,
The protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

The rotating member 741 has an outer diameter smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft has a distance from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 that is half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. It is arranged at a position more distant from. Accordingly, by rotating the rotating member 741, it is possible to cause the arm member 742 to reciprocate in rotation about the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a protrusion 773a of the right lid 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in an ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a.
Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Also, the right side lid 773
Are formed to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates to rotate, thereby rotating the right lid 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an elliptical portion 743a formed in an ellipse when viewed from the rear and a ball feeding portion 743b continuously formed on the back side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and the outer shape in side view is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 from the edge portion to the decoration unit 750 side. Is formed to project more than the thickness of the wall. Accordingly, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750.

The ball sending part 743b is a path member for sending the ball to the collection path when the ball flowing down in the front flow area of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in the shape of a rod with a space. Further, the ball sending part 743b has an upper end opened and connected to the recovery port of the game board 13, and a lower end connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750. As a result, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be guided to a collection route (not shown) through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball sending unit 743b.

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. 92 (a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (b) is a arrow XCIIb in FIG.
It is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in a direction view. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. 91 (b) and 91 (c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 76 of the box member 760 are shown.
5 is shown transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760, which is a decoration portion outside the decoration unit 750, and a lid arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction of the box member 760 (the upper side in FIG. 91A). The member 770 and the rotating body 80 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.
0 is formed mainly.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, and a bottom plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is mainly provided with a right side surface plate 764 arranged on the right side of the base member 762 in front view and a left side surface plate 765 arranged on the left side of the base member 762 in front view.

The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular laterally longer shape than the rotating body 800 in a top view, and is formed to have a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the gravity direction. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed into a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800, the collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 is mainly provided with a recessed portion 762a that is recessed downward on the upper surface in the left-right direction and a ball delivery portion 762b that is recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The concave portion 762a is a groove in which the above-mentioned shaft portion JB1 is arranged inside, and the decoration unit 75
It is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of 0. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball sending portion 762b is bent in an L shape on the bottom surface and is recessed, and one end side thereof is the right side surface plate 7
While being connected to the 64 openings 764b, the other end side is connected to the rear surface side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. In addition, the recessed width of the ball feeding portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the lower surface plate 763 is disposed on the lower side, so that it is possible to send a ball into the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is also formed on the back surface with a predetermined thickness. In addition, the front plate 761 has a winning opening 761a having a size into which a ball can be inserted on the front side. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball feeding portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning opening 761a is sent to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D-shape whose outer shape in a side view is curved upward. Further, the right side surface plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a protruding to the outside of the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetratingly formed below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape of the same shaft as the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. The curved opening 764d formed in the inner side of the crank cover 743 and the ball feeding portion 762b of the crank cover 743.
It is mainly provided with an opening 764b which is opened at a position facing the lower end of and an engaging portion 764e which is penetratingly formed in a semicircular shape in a side view on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800.

The opening 764b allows the base member 76 to send a ball sent from the ball sending portion of the crank cover 743.
It is a hole for allowing the ball to be delivered to the ball 2, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball sent to the crank cover 743 can be sent to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

The curved opening 764d is an opening into which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side lid 773 is inserted. Further, since the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, the curved opening 764d is provided with the lid member 770.
Is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of. This can prevent the projection 773a and the curved opening 764d from colliding with each other when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced.

The engagement portion 764e is a member that engages with an end portion of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 on the right side in a front view and holds the base plate 810 in a non-rotatable manner. That is, the front end portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted and arranged in the engaging portion 764e. This allows
The base plate 810 cannot be rotated.

The outer shape of the left side plate 765 is substantially the same as that of the right side plate 764 in a side view.
Further, the left side surface plate 765 has a through hole 765a penetratingly formed on the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a through hole into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. The holes 765c are mainly provided and formed.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side in the front view of the rotating body 800 into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732. That is, the through hole 7
65a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and the size of the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening of the rotating body 800 on the left in a front view.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation restricting member 780 described later,
The rotation restricting member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 to form a ball sending path through which the ball can be passed by the ball sending portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763.
Further, the lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. Opening 763a
Is an opening for sending a ball sent inside the ball sending unit 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball that has won the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the game area can be delivered to the ball delivery portion 743b of the right transmission member 740 from the interior of the decoration unit 750.

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to a side surface of the curved lid portion 771 on the right side in a front view, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly provided with the left side lid part 772 fastened to the side surface on the left side of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has an outer shape in a side view formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a larger radius than that of the rotating body 800. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate on a part of the front surface side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern and characters drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, for the player, the rotating body 800 has the lid member 770.
Even in the mode in which the upper end side is covered, the display of the rotating body 800 can be viewed through the transparent portion 771a.

The right lid 773 is formed in a ring shape in a side view, and the radius outside the ring is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the outer size of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 in a side view. As a result, the right lid 773 is
The right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is arranged so as to pass through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the right lid 773 is mainly provided with a protrusion 773a protruding to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (right side when viewed from the front) and a recess 773b recessed radially inward at the outer peripheral edge. . The protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 as described above.

The recess 773b can rotate the opening / closing member 870 by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 described later. Therefore, the recessed width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid 773 where the curved lid 771 is arranged.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in a ring shape in a side view, and the radius outside the ring is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. In addition, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotation portion 880 described later. As a result, the left lid portion 772 is arranged in a state where the left rotation portion 880 of the rotation body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

In addition, the left lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a that projects to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left lid portion 772 by being disposed between two not-shown bifurcated sensors.

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in a state where the rotating body 800 is assembled is such that the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right side lid portion 773 and the left side lid portion 772 before being assembled (separate members). To do. then,
The rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right lid portion 773, the left lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 with respect to the rotating body.

The rotation restricting member 780 is formed by bending into a substantially L shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 781 that penetrates the bent portion, a protrusion 782 that protrudes in the bending direction at one end side, and a contact surface 783 that is formed flat at the tip at the other end side. To be done.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side surface plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. Accordingly, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side surface plate 765. A biasing spring SP5 is inserted in the shaft portion. As a result, a rotation force in one direction acts on the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 engages with an engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotation portion 880, which will be described later, and thus the rotation body 8
The rotational displacement of 00 can be regulated. The contact surface 783 is a surface with which the end portion on the back surface side of the lid member 770 mentioned above comes into contact, and the rotation regulating member 780 can be rotated by coming into contact with the lid member 770. The mode of regulation between the rotation regulating member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, the transmission path of the driving force when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96. 95 (a) and 96 (a) show the rotary unit 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) show the arrow XC in FIG. 89.
The rotation unit 700 at Vb.

Note that in FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is shown by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, in the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731b, the rotation of the outer wheel is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731 is brought into a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer wheel to the inner wheel, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 7 connected to the shaft 735
31d is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731b is brought into a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer wheel to the inner wheel, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 makes a rotational reciprocating motion about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer wheel is not transmitted to the inner wheel, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 73 connected to the shaft 735
The driving force is not transmitted to 1d, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in the non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the negative direction, the drive force to the lid member 770 is transmitted and the drive force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotating body 800.
By disposing the one-way clutch OW1 in the (rotation side driving means) and the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits to the opening / closing member 870 described later through the lid member 770, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged in the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. Accordingly, the rotational force is transmitted to the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b.
It is possible to transmit to one side and to block the transmission to the other side. As a result, the drive motor K
Only by switching the rotation direction of M4, it is possible to switch the drive target driven by the rotation driving force, that is, according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the rotation of the rotating body 800 and the stop of the rotation, and the opening / closing member. 870 displacement and its stop can be switched,
The structure can be simplified while allowing a plurality of modes to be formed.

Here, in the structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the drive target (the rotating body 800 or the opening / closing member 870 (cover member 770) according to the rotation direction of the drive means, the drive force from the drive motor KM4 is transmitted. When it is cut off, it can be freely rotated or displaced in the direction driven by the driving force, so that, for example, the drive target of the drive means is the rotating body 8.
When 00 is switched to the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770) and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 is in a rotatable state, and there is a possibility that the rotating body will continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is cut off. Even when the load gear 731e is rotated, the load (resistance) can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. Fig. 97
(A) and FIG. 98 (c) are in a closed state, FIG. 97 (b) and FIG. 98 (b) are in an intermediate state, and FIG. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in an open state. 7 is a side view of 750 and a right transmission member 740. FIG.

97 (a) to 97 (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the crank cover 743 of the right transmission member 740 is removed. Further, the closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 covers the half surface above the rotating body 800 (upper side in FIG. 97 (a)), and the open state is the lid member 770 being rotated. It is in a state of being displaced and arranged on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 97 (c)) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged at a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c), the states in which the closed state is changed to the open state are sequentially illustrated, and in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the open state is changed to the closed state. The states to be performed are illustrated in order.

First, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The drive force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by the drive motor K as described above.
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the back side (right side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, the arm member 742
The first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the back side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end portion on the opposite side of the first sliding groove 742b is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding to the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741 is rotated.
When a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed.
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 97B) with the displacement of the projection 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end portion on the opposite side of the first sliding groove 742b is placed on the upper side in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (upper side in FIG. 97 (b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where the curved lid portion 771 is rotationally displaced to the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back side with respect to the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the central position of the cylindrical rotating body 800). Therefore, the load of the lid member 770 exerts a rotational force in a direction in which the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. As described above, since the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged in the rotating member 741 and the outer ring is configured to be rotatable ahead of the inner ring, the drive motor KM is driven by the load of the lid member 770.
4 can be stopped and the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position.
That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 97) end of the displacement area of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by the operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and the operation of dropping the lid member 770 under the load.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
Since the section in which 4 is driven can be half the total section, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set according to the load of the lid member 770, respectively. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two steps. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, the control can be simplified and the occurrence of control failure can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section,
A displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and a first section has a D section.
The code of K1 will be described with the code of DK2 added to the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the opened state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is not attached to the arm member 742.
The front side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the cover member 77.
The curved lid 771 of 0 is placed on the back side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741 is rotated.
When a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed.
Is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 98 (b)) along with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end portion on the opposite side of the first sliding groove 742b is placed on the upper side in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (upper side in FIG. 98 (b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c and rotationally displaced approximately 45 degrees upward from the state in which the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is in a state of being placed in the position where it was made.

Further, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (the position of FIG. 97 (a)) is arranged in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and the open position (FIG. 97 (c)). The lid member 770 displaced to the position) is arranged outside the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800. Particularly, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the rotating body 800 is provided with the opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, the gaming machine flowing down the game area collides with the opening / closing member 870, It is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being opened (extended).

Further, since the lid member 770 is arranged outside the area of the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position provides a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area. Can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side by that amount, and the player can easily see the opening / closing member 870.

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is rotatably formed around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, the lid member 770 is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (covering position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and thus the space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, since the lid member 770 is formed to be curved in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area,
It is possible to suppress the staying on the lid member 770 arranged in the closed position, and to make it flow down smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 7
When 1a is displaced to the right of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742 is displaced.
b is displaced to the back side (right side in FIG. 98 (c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end portion on the opposite side of the first sliding groove 742b is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced toward the front side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Therefore, in the middle of the closed state from the intermediate state, the lid member 77
With a load of 0, a rotational force is applied in a direction in which the lid member 770 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770,
The lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, if the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated, the lid member 770 may not be stopped at the normal position. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotating member 741 rotates in one direction, when the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that the stop position of the lid member 770 can be prevented from shifting. it can.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the transmission state of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is always constant, when the drive means is driven at a constant drive speed, the displacement member also becomes constant. It is displaced at a speed, and cannot change the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, but the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to dispose a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the drive unit in accordance with the detection result of the sensor device.
This increases product costs and control costs. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, and the reliability thereof deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742) are
When the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction with respect to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, the rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring. Then, when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring while the driving force is transmitted, the engagement of the roller with the inner ring and the outer ring is released, and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. In the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring, so that the second member is irrespective of the driving state of the rotating member 741. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the cover member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the cover member 770.

Further, since the outer wheel can precede the inner wheel in one direction regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, for example, the drive motor KM4 is driven at a constant drive speed in the entire displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, according to the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the drive unit can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the roller is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacement member is brought into the stopped state (driven state). In this driving state, the driving force of the driving unit (driving motor KM4) can be applied to the rotating body 8.
Can be used as a driving force for driving 00. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4), the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be displaced respectively.

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed, and the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is disposed at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since the lid member 770 is formed so as to be capable of acting in any direction, the outer ring can be displaced in one direction ahead of the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the driving force is transmitted by the main body portion 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
Since it is performed by the arm member 742 and the rotation member 741 (crank member) having the protrusion 741a (pin portion) that is located while being displaced from the rotation center of the body portion 741c while protruding from b and its body portion 741b. Rotating the rotating member 741 by the outer ring, the protrusion 741a
By sliding along the first sliding groove 742b, the other end side (the second sliding groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end of the arm member 742 can reciprocate between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both of the reciprocating motions, when the lid member 770 is reciprocatingly moved, no matter in which direction the lid member 770 is displaced, the displacement is started from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed to enhance the effect produced by the displacement of the lid member.

Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 99 (a
) Is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in a closed state, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in an open state. Note that FIGS. 99A and 99B show a state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is seen transparently.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state in which the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (
In FIG. 99 (a), the shaft is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L4. <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged, and the rotating body 800 is rotatable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has a contact surface 783 that is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is brought into contact with the contact surface 783, and the contact surface 783 is pressed downward (rotated counterclockwise around the shaft of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 99B).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6). <L4).

As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882 in the rotating body 800 in a state where the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotation portion 880 is arranged at the lowest position in the gravity direction. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 8
00 is not rotatable. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800 described later is in the open state. Is set to.

That is, in the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when the rotating body 800 is extended, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 overhanging, and the opening / closing member 87 is attached to another member located on the rotation locus.
It is possible to suppress 0 from interfering with each other. Further, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from rotating due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member that are displaceably formed are provided, and the first member covers the at least part of the second member invisibly and the state where the first member is arranged at the covering position There is known a gaming machine that is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces a region that covers the second member invisible. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by disposing the first member in the cover position and displacing the first member in the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that the player visually recognizes.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, when the second member is exposed, the second member may be displaced. Therefore, there is a problem in that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in the state in which it is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since the rotor 800 is formed, the player can visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state, and the effect can be secured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. It is used as a means for regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800.
The structure can be simplified.

Further, the rotating body 800 has an outer peripheral surface formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation as described later (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotator 800 is rotatably formed, and the center of gravity of the rotator 800 is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotator 800 can be increased. That is, since the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 does not need to be in the shape of being located at the center of rotation, and an asymmetrical shape with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, the effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 is displaced to the closed position due to its gravity rotating around the center of rotation (there is a possibility of rotation). The configuration in which the cover member 770 formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the player can visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state, and the effect effect can be secured.

The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, the rotating body 8
By forming 00 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity thereof can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half surface of a metal material and the remaining half surface of a flexible material, the center of gravity can be located on the side of the metal material that generally has a larger specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. Figure 1
00 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the arrow Cc direction of 100 (a). 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 arranged in the shaft portion, and a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 which are arranged so as to surround the base plate 810 and are combined in an annular shape. The display unit 860, the right rotation unit 89 arranged at one end in the axial direction, the left rotation unit 880 arranged at the other end in the axial direction, and the opening / closing member arranged inside the first display unit 830. And 870 mainly.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section as viewed in the axial direction and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that project outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the right side in FIG. 100A). The right end portion 811 is mainly provided with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b of an annular inner portion.

The tip portion 811a is further projected from the tip portion of the right end portion 811 in the axial direction, and
The projecting region in the right side view (as viewed in the direction of FIG. 100 (c)) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
It is set smaller than the area inside 64e. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side surface plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (lid member 770) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be in a stopped state with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (the first display portion 830, the second display portion 840, the third display portion 850, and the fourth display portion 860) described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820 described later is inserted, and is formed through the side surface of the base plate 810 on the right side in front view. Thereby, the wiring can be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the left side (left side in FIG. 100 (a)) of the base plate 810 as viewed from the front. The left end portion 812 has a tip portion 8 protruding from a lower half circle of the left end portion 812.
12a and a communication hole 812b in the annular inner portion are mainly provided.

The tip portion 812a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and
The protruding shape in the left side view (as viewed in the direction of FIG. 100 (b)) is the lower half circle of the annular shape.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging a ball, which has been sent into the inside of the rotating body 800 by the opening / closing member 870 described later, to the outside of the rotating body 800. The communication hole 812b is set to have an inner diameter larger than that of a sphere and is set to be substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protrusion distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance at which the left end portion 812 abuts the through hole 733a. Further, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be substantially the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (the left transmission member 730) are brought into the engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be in a stopped state with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (the first display portion 830, the second display portion 840, the third display portion 850, and the fourth display portion 860) described later.

A reverse rotation preventing member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810. The reverse rotation preventing member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a top view, and has a protrusion 813a inclined toward one end.
Is formed. Further, the reverse rotation preventing member 813 is provided between the base plate 810 and the biasing spring SP6.
Is provided, so that the protrusion 813a is always left side when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 100 (a)).
It is in a state of being urged to.

The right rotation portion 890 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The right rotating portion 890 is formed such that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810. Accordingly, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is provided inside the right rotation portion 890.
Can be inserted. Further, the right rotation portion 890 has a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and the shaft hole 8 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a sliding groove 892 that is curved around 91 and is opened.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, is inserted, and
It is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of 2. This can prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centering on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 and the shaft portion 872. Accordingly, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is inserted into the sliding groove 892, so that the protrusion 871 can slide inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

The left rotation part 880 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The left rotation portion 880 is formed such that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end portion 81 of the base plate 810 is provided inside the left rotation portion 880.
2 can be inserted. The left rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 that annularly protrudes from the inner edge portion, an engagement protrusion 882 that protrudes from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Prepared to be formed.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to project to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall 881 has a tooth surface 881a of a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the projecting tip, and a communication hole 881b opening inward.
Equipped with. The tooth surface 881a is meshed with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball sent into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening / closing member 870 described later.

The engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged, as described above. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed so as to protrude from the side surface of the left rotation portion 880 on the left side in front view. Further, two engagement protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted between them.

The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth-shaped cross section. The left rotation unit 880 is the base plate 810.
When it is disposed in the above position, the tip of the projection 813a of the above-described reverse rotation preventing member 813 is brought into contact with the locking portion 883. Accordingly, when the rotational force that rotates the left rotation portion 880 in one direction is applied, the protrusion 813a is slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to move the left rotation portion 880.
However, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating body 800 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. It is possible to prevent the rotating body from being reversely rotated due to a collision or the like.

Each of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and their end faces are connected to each other, so that one annular shape can be formed. In addition, the inner diameters of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860, which are formed into one ring, are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating portions 880 and 890. As a result, the display units 830 to 860 are connected to the left and right rotating units 880 and 89.
The first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 can be formed into one columnar shape by arranging them at 0.

In addition, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 are respectively drawn with characters and patterns, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880 to rotate the respective characters and patterns. The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 is mainly provided with an opening 831 that is open to the curved surface thereof and a bearing portion 832 that is opened toward the shaft side and is formed to project in a U shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870 described later is arranged, and the opening / closing member 870 is provided.
Is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size such that the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 can be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830. It should be noted that the description of the displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 is an LED mounted on the LED board 820 when power is supplied.
The light can be turned on. The LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, opening / closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described. Figure 103 (a
8] is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening / closing member 870 is closed. FIG. 103 (b)
FIG. 8 is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening / closing member 870 is open. In FIG. 103, the outer diameter of the opening / closing member 870 when it overlaps other members is shown by a chain line.

Further, the closed state of the opening / closing member 870 means that the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is the first display portion 830.
It is in a state of being arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

As shown in FIG. 103A, in the rotating body 800 in which the opening / closing member 870 is closed, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 has one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (FIG. 103 (a)).
Is located below the shaft portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the rotating body 800 with the opening / closing member 870 in the open state.
The protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890. That is, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 104A and 104B are side views of the decoration unit 750. Note that FIG. 104 (a) and FIG.
In b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, FIG. 104A illustrates a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the closed state. FIG. 104B shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the decoration unit 750 is closed, the right side lid portion 7
The outer edge of 73 is brought into contact with the projection 871. When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 of the lower half surface of the right lid 773 from the rotation axis is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation section 890 to one end of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

The difference in size between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore,
When the outer edge portion of the right lid 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced to the one end side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state when the decoration unit 750 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decoration unit 750 is opened, the right side lid portion 7
With the displacement of 73, the recess 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced. In this case, the recess 773
The protrusion 871 is inserted inside b. As a result, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state according to the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive source for driving the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of different driving means, if the control failure occurs, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other. The lid member 770 and the lid member 770 can be mechanically linked to synchronize their displacements, so that the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be synchronized.
It is possible to suppress the interference between and.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the tip end side of the rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761 a of the box member 760. As a result, the ball sent from the ball sending unit 711c of the ball receiving base 710 described later can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

In this case, the opening / closing member 870 is arranged such that the rotation tip side is higher than the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be rolled to the inner side of the rotating body 800. Rotating body 80
The game ball rolled into the inside of 0 is rolled onto the upper surface of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, a ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end portion 812 side and rotated from the inside. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball delivery path.

Further, as described above, since the rotation restricting member 780 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disposed on the rotating body 800, the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing the effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by further displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to be capable of restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby allows the player to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state. The effect can be secured.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotating member that is rotatably formed and has an outer surface around a rotation axis that is visually recognizable to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface can be made visible to the player while rotating the rotating member or by stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that the rotating member is insufficiently utilized only as a member for holding a display for visual recognition by the player on its outer surface. . That is, since the rotating member needs to hold a display that is visible to the player, it is relatively large. Therefore, while the occupied space increases, the parts other than the outer surface are not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) makes the internal space formed therein communicate with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b through which the game ball can pass. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for the game balls or a ball-sending passage, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form the effect mode in which the player can visually recognize the display of the outer peripheral surface with the stop of the rotating member, the effect mode is not sufficiently changed and the effect effect is insufficient. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) that is displaceably disposed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface can be changed as the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. Since it is possible to form an effect mode in which the opening / closing member 870 is displaced, in addition to an effect mode in which the display of “is displayed” is made visible to the player, the effect can be enhanced by changing the effect mode accordingly.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the space required for rotating the rotating body 800 can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the player can easily recognize the displacement of the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to enhance the effect. In addition, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 disposed at the closed position, and when the rotation is stopped, the opening / closing member 870 is disposed (displaced) at the open position to form an outer surface of the rotating body 800. The visually recognized portion (opening / closing member 870) can be formed so as to project outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, and the interest can be enhanced.

In addition, an LED board 820 that emits light is disposed on the base plate 810 in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is in the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the inner space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and displaceably dispose the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870, which results in a product cost. Grows. Further, when the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, and thus it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced along with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The rotation of the rotating body 800 and the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 can be performed by also using the KM4. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be started or stopped smoothly.

Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for allowing the game ball to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b. Can be used as an outlet through which a game ball flows out from the internal space. That is,
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (while being kept in a stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be utilized as a game ball passage.

Further, since the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end surface in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, the game ball to the inner space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed. The player can easily recognize the inflow, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, when the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is arranged so that it can be visually recognized by the player,
Since the opening 831 (inflow port) is formed, the player can easily see the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotation position where the communication hole 881b is located above, the place where the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space, Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

Further, inside the opening 831 (first communication port), a displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is provided.
When the open / close member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is blocked by the open / close member 870, and the open / close member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position).
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of the game ball through the opening 831 can be switched between the blocked state and the permitted state.

Further, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member) on one side, and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side that is overhangs to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as the inflow port,
By using the opening / closing member 870, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800.

In addition, it is possible to easily stop the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the rotating body 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the inflow port by using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, if the opening / closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the lid member 770 displaced to the position in the open state is not rotated by the rotation regulating member 78.
The configuration in which the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated by displacing 0 is particularly effective, which makes it easy to maintain the state in which the opening / closing member 870 is projected to a predetermined position in the game area.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged on the rotation direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) than the other side. Therefore, even when the opening / closing member 870 interferes with a member arranged around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displaces to the closed position). Can be applied).
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening / closing member 870 interferes with other members and is projected (second part).
It is possible to suppress the displacement to the position). In addition, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is
Since 00 is not rotated with respect to the box member 760 (base member) rotatably arranged,
By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball runs wild in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) may interfere with the members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the communication hole 811b, through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back surface of the base plate 810 is inserted, in the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b.
It is formed on the end face opposite to the 0 end face. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is provided on the LED substrate disposed inside the rotating body 800, the rotating body 8
Since the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800 when the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of 00, it is preferable to wire from the axial end surfaces of the rotating body. If an opening through which the game ball flows out is formed, it becomes difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface thereof, so that one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball and the other is inserted with the wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, a space for inserting the wiring can be easily secured.

As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED substrate 820) can be facilitated. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated from each other to the maximum extent, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball rolling into the communication hole 881b in the internal space of the rotating body 800 and the electrical connection line.

Next, referring to FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 7
00 will be described. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state is shown.
0 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball receiving base 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an aspect of sending a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. In addition, in FIG. 107, a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhang state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhang state, and the lower displacement member 4
When the ball receiving portion 467 arranged inside the ball 40 carries out the firing operation while receiving the ball inside (the state of performing the ball receiving operation), as described above, the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 receives the ball. The balls arranged inside the portion 467 are discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

The sphere ejected from the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely and falls on the sphere pedestal 710 of the rotary unit 700 arranged on the right side in front view. As a result, it is possible to send a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball pedestal 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball pedestal 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball pedestal 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is a CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball receiving stand 710 in a line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball pedestal 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball pedestal 710 includes a dish receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape.
A solenoid 712 disposed inside the dish receiving portion 711, a displacement member 713 connected to the solenoid 712, and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 are mainly formed.

The dish receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright portion 711b standing upright at an edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball sending portion 711c protruding from a part of an outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball sending portion 711c thereof. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 711d penetratingly formed in a standing portion 711b standing upright at the edge portion of the.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that is bent downward toward the ball-sending portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball sent to the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a is deflected (tilted) by the ball sending portion 711c.
Can be rolled to the side.

Further, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material, and the bottom plate 711a has a lower surface (see FIG. 10).
8 (c) lower surface) is subjected to embossing to form fine irregularities on the surface. This allows
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of heat shrinkage is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, so that the bottom plate 711a can be easily bent. That is, the textured bottom surface is less likely to receive a force in a direction in which the bottom plate side is convexly curved when heat-shrinked due to the unevenness. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed into a flat surface, a force pulling in the horizontal direction acts when heat shrinks, and the end portion is likely to change upward (the upper surface side is likely to form a concave curve). Therefore, the ball can be easily bent in a direction in which it easily rolls when it is thermally contracted. As a result, it is possible to prevent defective products when the bottom plate 711a is molded.

The standing portion 711b is on the upper side in the gravity direction from the outer edge portion of the ball sending portion 711c (upper side in FIG. 108 (c)).
It is a wall portion that is erected on. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball sent to the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge thereof. In the present embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing portion 711b is approximately 1.5 of the diameter of the sphere.
Doubled.

Further, the upright portion 711b is a central upright portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two.
Is formed by being connected to the standing portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper area of the bottom plate 711a into one area where the balls are delivered and the other area where the solenoid 712 described later is arranged.

The pitching portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. In the left-right direction (Fig.
The a) position in the left-right direction is arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially central position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the ball sending portion 711c is projected from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. Thereby, the ball sent from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the ball sending portion 711c. A winning opening 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the ball sending portion 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the ball sending portion 711c can be sent into the winning opening 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713 described below is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. This allows
The displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can displace the shaft of the shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later, and has a communication hole 712a1 penetratingly formed at its tip.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shape in cross section, and has a projection 71 protruding outward in the C-shape at one end thereof.
3b, and a shaft portion 713a protruding inward at the both ends of the C-shape are mainly provided and formed.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. This allows the solenoid 7
The 12 displacements are transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. The displacement member 713 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 713a by inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape that is larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, is arranged above the solenoid 712 that is arranged above the bottom plate 711a, and is provided with the dish receiving portion 71.
It is fastened and fixed to 1. As a result, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the sphere falling on the sphere pedestal 710 will be described. Fig. 110 (
110A and 110B are sectional views of the ball pedestal 710. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball pedestal 710 of FIG. 108 (c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the sphere sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 causes the rotation unit 700 side (right side in FIG. 110 (a)). ). That is, it is dropped in the lower right direction in front view with respect to the bottom plate 711a of the ball pedestal 710.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed by bending downward toward the ball sending part 711c, and the ball sending part 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a, so that the top surface of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls. Can be an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be made close to parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the balls falling on the bottom plate 711a are directed upward (see FIG.
Bounce in 10 (b) upward direction) can be suppressed. Therefore, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball receiving base 710 of the rotating unit 700 is the ball receiving base 71.
It is possible to suppress falling from 0.

Furthermore, the ball dropped on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball sending unit 711c by the force of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball to the ball sending unit 711c can be shortened.
As a result, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball pedestal 710 can be smoothly sent.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission of the ball pedestal 710 will be described. FIG. 111 (a)
87 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rotation unit 700 taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. In addition, in FIG. 111 (a), the decoration unit 750 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 111 (b),
The decoration units 750 are shown in the open state and in the respective arranged states.

As shown in FIG. 111A, the LED base 721 disposed on the back side of the back base 720 emits light to the ball pedestal 710 when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the closed state. .

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED substrate 721 is emitted from the lid member 77.
It is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball pedestal 710 by reflecting it toward the back side of 0. In addition, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, it is possible to diffusely reflect the incident light due to the unevenness of the textured processing. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the ball pedestal 710 can be made to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111B, when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, and thus the LED substrate 7 is formed.
The LED 721a of No. 21 is not reflected by the lid member 770 and is transmitted. Since the rotator 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, it can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 800 and incident on the ball pedestal 710.

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display portion 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball pedestal 710 side (upper side in FIG. 111 (b)), the LE of the LED substrate 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810 is LE.
The light emitted from D821 can be reflected on the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display portion 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can more easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to dispose the third display unit 850 on the ball pedestal 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, the structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 shows the upper displacement unit 90.
It is a disassembled perspective front view of 0. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900.
It should be noted that FIGS. 112 to 114 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is disposed inside the base member 910 provided on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and inside the base member 910. A transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 that is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and that is displaced according to the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end that is slidably connected to the base member 410 and that is a rotation member 930. And an upper displacement member 940 which is connected to the rotary member 930 and is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the rotary member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two plate members that are rectangular and oblong in a front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a back base 912 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are disposed between the front base 911 and the back base 912, which face each other.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction in the drawing of FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, 911e, and a shaft support pin 911b projecting to the back side at the circumferential center position,
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 911f protruding to the front on one end side (left side in front view) of the front base and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged in the front base 911 to the rear side. Accordingly, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed in a circular arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft support pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which a shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 to be described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 to the shaft support pin 923a to be described later. Is set. Accordingly, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted in the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin and the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c from colliding with each other.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which shaft support pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940 to be described later are inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pins 951 and 952. To be done.

The sliding groove 911e is linearly formed in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (left-right direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed in a state in which the distance dimension between the vertically facing each other is different. As a result, the inside of the slide grooves 911e and 911d is not supported by the shaft support pin 9
When 51 and 952 are slid, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the vertically opposing members.

The shaft portion 911f is formed so as to project in a cylindrical shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930 described later to hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back surface base 912 is a plate member attached to the back surface side of the front surface base 911 at a predetermined interval. The back base 912 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the base member 91
The overall rigidity of 0 can be improved. As a result, the base member 9 formed in a horizontally long rectangle
It is possible to prevent the base member 910 from being twisted when the upper displacement member 940, which is relatively heavy, is arranged on the base 10.

The transmission member 920 is arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, and the transmission gear 9 thereof.
The transmission gear 922 meshed with the gear 21 and the transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922 are mainly formed.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. As a result, the transmission gear 9
21 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above.
Accordingly, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a shaft support pin 923a protruding to the front side on the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923 a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 is formed in a long rod shape on one side, and mainly includes a through hole 931 penetratingly formed in an end portion on one end side in the front-rear direction and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Prepared to be formed.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and by inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911. Can be held. Further, a biasing spring SP is provided at the tip of the shaft portion 911f.
8 are provided. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in the direction of lifting the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the shaft support pin 923a is displaced, the shaft support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged with one end rotatably supported,
Due to the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a, one end is rotated about the shaft.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 which is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and which is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness is disposed on the back side.

The annular member 933 is formed on the front side with two sliding grooves 933a which are recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940 described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 930.

The protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. it can.

Further, the circular arc axis of the sliding groove 933 a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first opening portion 960 can be displaced. The detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

A shaft cover 913 and a deformation regulation cover 914, which are formed of a plate-like body, are disposed on the one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930. The shaft cover 913 is a rotary member 93.
The rotary member 930 is arranged in front of the rotary shaft portion 0, and the rotary member 930 is prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation regulation cover 914 is arranged at a position separated from the rotation shaft by a predetermined distance, and can prevent the rotation member 930 from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930.
0, and two first opening portions 960 rotatably disposed on the back surface side of the base body 950,
It is mainly provided with two second opening parts 970 rotatably arranged on the front side of the base body 950 and a variable part 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 includes two shaft support pins 951 and 952 that are formed to project from the back surface on one end side.
It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 953 protrudingly formed on the back surface on the other end side.

The shaft support pins 951 and 952 are, as described above, the sliding grooves 911e and 91 of the front base 911.
It is a protrusion inserted into 1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid to the left and right. At the same time, the other end can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Accordingly, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, the rotating member 9
When 30 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the annular member 933
The driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two first opening portions 960 are arranged on the back surface side of the base body 950. The first opening portion 960 is rotatably supported by the other end of the base body 950. In addition, the first opening portion 960 protrudes to the back side, and the annular member 9
The projection 961 is provided inside the sliding groove 933 a of 33. Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 9
61 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotational axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Accordingly, the first opening 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two second opening portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 is rotatably supported by the other end of the base body 950. Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engaging protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, as described above, when the first opening portion 960 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced by a predetermined amount, the first opening portion 960 engages with the second opening portion 970. The second opening portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 shows the upper displacement unit 9 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged in the retracted position.
It is a front view of 00. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the projecting position.

Note that the retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 means that the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are the front base 91.
This is the position in the state of being arranged on the other end side of the first sliding groove 911d, 911e (right side in front view of the front base 911). The overhang position means that the pivot pins 951 and 952 are the front base 911.
It is a position in a state of being arranged on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e (left side in front view of the front base 911). Further, the intermediate position is a position in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is changed from the substantially horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 115) to the substantially vertical direction ( It is rotationally displaced in the vertical direction in FIG. 117).

Further, along with the rotational displacement, the position on the one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is changed to the front base 911.
Is displaced from the position of the right end portion in front view to the substantially central position in front view. That is, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while slidingly displaced when the rotary member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5 as described above.

When the displacement from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the projecting position shown in FIG. 117, the first opening 960 provided in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second opening 970, which is displaced by engaging the rotational displacement of the first opening 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the projecting position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is oriented in the vertical direction, and the first opening 960 and the second opening 970 are displaced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, the first position is displaced from the third position to the first opening 960 and the second position.
By displacing the opening portion 970, it is possible for the player to visually recognize a displacement such that a human arm becomes thicker.

Next, the variable unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 (a) shows
FIG. 118B is a front view of the variable section 980, and FIG. 118B is a rear view of the variable section 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and the main body portion 981 forming the rear part of the hand and the main body portion 981 are formed. It is mainly provided with finger parts 982 to 986 which are connected to form a finger part of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is provided inside the main body 981 and a variable plate (not shown) provided inside can displace the piston in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118 (a)). To be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base portion side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are mainly provided with a first link RB1 arranged on the base side inside thereof and a second link RB2 arranged on the tip side thereof.

The first link RB1 has a distal end side rotatably connected to the second link RB2 and a base side connected to a variable plate of the main body 981. Therefore, when the variable plate of the main body 981 is moved by the piston, the second link RB1 passes through the first link RB1 and the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. Thereby, the finger portions 983-986 can be displaced. In the present embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction in the drawing of FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two cylindrical support pins 411c, 411d protruding rearward, and a curved wall 411e protruding in an arc shape with the support pin 411d as an axis. .

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b have two protrusions 47 protruding from the rear surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
2, 473 are holes that are respectively inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the protrusion 47 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By displacing 2, 473 along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to be curved in an arc shape, and are upward (from the left side (FIG. 43 left side) end portion to the right side (FIG. 43 right side) end portion of the front base 411 (see FIG. 4).
3 upward). Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different from each other, and the gap between the opposites in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 44 can be provided without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.
0 can be rotated along with sliding.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of the transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to prevent the 11c from breaking (damage).

Next, referring to FIGS. 119 to 121, the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment.
Will be described. Although the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 in the first embodiment, the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466 are the same as the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that FIG.
In the figure, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are viewed transparently is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably arranged between the base member 2470 and the case member 480. The decoration member 4 is formed to cover the front and back of the case member 480.
And 50 mainly.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has projections 472 and 473 protruding to the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a standing from the edge portion on the other end side to the front side. A projecting wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central part in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120) to the front side in a U-shape that is opposite in the up-down direction, shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, and the shaft portions 474. It is mainly provided with shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member that rotatably supports a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member that rotatably supports a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As described below, the transmission gear 246
8a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state in which gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are in mesh with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is determined by the transmission gear 2
The distance is set to the radius of 468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470 and has the transmission gears 461, 4
62 and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461 thereof, and a tooth surface which meshes with the transmission gear 463, and a movable rack that is slidably arranged in front of the base member 470. 2464, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a, a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b, and one end of the rack 466 can rotate. And a ball receiving portion 467 disposed in the.

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular oblong shape in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f protruding on the lower end portion. Is formed mainly.

The rack gear 2464g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. Accordingly, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are axially supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470, respectively, in the state of being meshed with each other as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 2
When 468a is rotated, transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Also, the transmission gear 2468b
Is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are arranged at positions that are partially offset in the front-rear direction, and the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b are suppressed from colliding with the rack 466 and the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121
FIG. 16 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that, in FIG. 121, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are illustrated transparently, as in FIG. 120.

As shown in FIG. 121, electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2 to cause the transmission mechanism 24 described above.
When the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the firing position by 60, the movable rack 464 and the rack 46 are moved.
6 are displaced in different directions.

More specifically, as the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440. With this displacement, the transmission gear 24
68a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, it is possible to form a displacement component that is in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The displacement of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to a change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the case in which the ball receiving portion 467 is slid and displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slid and displaced by the link mechanism. The same parts as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are
The same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122A shows the lower displacement member 344 according to the third embodiment.
122 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that, in FIG. 125 (a), the state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is viewed transparently is illustrated, and in FIG. 125 (b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are viewed transparently. The closed state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, the case member 480, and the base. A transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably arranged between the member 3470 and the decorative member 45 formed in a manner to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
0 is formed mainly.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has projections 472 and 473 protruding to the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a standing from the edge portion on the other end side to the front side. The sliding wall 3470c that is formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and is erected on the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 122 (a)). Mainly provided with a projecting wall 477 projecting in a U-shape in the vertical direction opposite to the front side from the front side, and an opening 479 recessed in the vertically central portion of the base member 470 while extending from one end side to the other end side. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulates the position (mode) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, the protrusion is formed to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with its U-shaped opening facing upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c is a recess 3470 that is recessed below the end on the standing wall 471a side.
c1 is formed. The recess 3470c1 is a groove for receiving the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. Accordingly, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid to the standing portion side by the transmission mechanism 3460 to be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the concave portion and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to cause the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a firing operation (an operation of discharging the sphere held inside the U shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480 described later,
A first link member 3468 that is rotatably disposed by being connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, a second link member 3469 that is rotatably connected to the first link member 3468, and a second link member thereof. It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular laterally long plate-shaped body, has a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connection hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and swells at the other end side. It is formed mainly by including the formed load portion 3468c.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole into which a rotation shaft 3469a of the second link member 3469 described later is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469a.

The connection hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the connection hole 3468a and is fastened, so that the first link member 3468 is driven by the drive motor KM.
It can be rotated by a driving force of 2.

The load portion 3468c is formed so as to bulge toward the other end side with respect to the connecting hole 3468a. Load part 3
46c is a member for applying a load for locating the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular laterally long state, and at the same time, the first link member 3469.
It is disposed on the back side of 68. The second link member 3469 has a rotating shaft 3469a protruding from the other end side toward the front in a cylindrical shape, and a through hole 3469b penetratingly formed in one end side in the front-rear direction.
And is mainly formed.

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468 as described above. This allows the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 to be rotatably connected to each other.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. The through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the lateral direction is provided from the rear side of the base member 3470 to the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b. The ball receiving portion 4 by inserting and fastening the through hole 3469b.
67 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and the base member 47.
0 mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side and a rear case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular oblong shape in a front view, an opening 3481d penetrating therethrough at a position facing the drive motor KM2, and a bottom wall portion 481b protrudingly formed on a lower end surface on the back side.
And a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction in the lower edge portion.

The opening 3481d is a hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 into the back side, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Accordingly, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the rear side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and FIG.
b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. 127 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position.

126 (a) to 127 (b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are sequentially illustrated. In addition, FIG. 126 (a) and FIG. 126 (b) or FIG. 127 (a) and FIG.
7B shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, in the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126 (a)).
Is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (left and right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connection portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side of the base member 3470 (left side in FIG. 126A). As a result, the second link member 3469 is arranged on the one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126B, when the drive motor KM2 is rotated and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced from the state of the first position, one end side of the first link member 3468 is a base member 3470. Is displaced with respect to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to the one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
Since one end side of 9 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, one end side of the second link member 3469 is pushed to the other end side of the base member 3470. . As a result, the ball receiving portion 46 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469.
7 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127A, when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated by approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. The connection portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis thereof. Therefore, the second link member 34
One end side of 69 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip end of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1 so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 and is fired.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to the one end side of the base member 3470. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, it is possible to form a displacement component that is in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change of the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacing member 440 changes, so that the lower displacing member 3440 tends to rattle, but the ball receiving portion 467 is quickly retracted. Then, the rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the center of gravity position closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharging operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game balls are discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game balls, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction, By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by a reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts, and the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 3440 is canceled. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be capable of firing is described, but the lower displacement unit 440 in the fourth embodiment is described.
When 0, the firing operation of the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is restricted. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 128 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 facing each other. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g described below is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is provided with a substantially L-shaped engagement wall 4411g continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engagement wall 4411g can regulate that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated (fired) at the third position by inserting the tip end portion 4411g1 that is bent in a substantially L shape into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. Note that FIGS. 129 and 130 show a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently seen, as in FIG. 128, and the front case 48 is shown.
The bottom wall portion 481b of No. 1 is shown by a chain line.

Further, FIG. 129 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the third position. Further, FIG. 130 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first projecting state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tips of the leg portions 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g and the recess 481.
Intrusion into b1 or the opening 4471b is restricted. As a result, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform the payout operation in order to discharge the ball sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the third position. Rotates,
It is possible to suppress the discharge of the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467.

In other words, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position in the first overhang state (the position which is not the retracted position), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first projecting state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position and the firing operation can be performed.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 when the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) are discharged from the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. While being prevented from being changed, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the specified number of game balls, while the lower displacement member 440 is engaged when displaced to the first and second overhang positions. The wall 4411g has an opening 4471b
Of the leg portion 467a as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position.
By engaging with the opening 4471b, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed, and a specified number of game balls can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, referring to FIGS. 131 to 135, the sorting unit 55 in the fifth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides to form the storage state and the regulation state. To do. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. 131A is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131B is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500.
FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 shows CXXXV-C of FIG. 131 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit 5500 in a XXXIV line. Note that, in FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 forming a plurality of flow paths through which spheres can flow, and a distribution member 5540 slidably attached to the back surface side of the base plate 5520.
And an extension path member 530 which is attached to an end surface of the base plate 5520 and extends a downward path of a sphere formed between the base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 has two columnar shaft portions 5526 that project to the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 that are penetratingly formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section in which the upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly provided with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a horizontal shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that projects like a hook on the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed so as to project to the back side, and are respectively inserted into two sliding grooves 5546 described below.

The 1st opening 5521 and the 2nd opening 5522 are the regulation plate 54 of the distribution member 5540 mentioned later.
1 and the storage plate 5542 are inserted therethrough, and the opening is formed with a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is slidably attached to the base plate 5520, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540. Formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view in which one side is formed long and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 is a regulation plate 55 that projects like a plate toward the front side.
41 and the storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole that is long in a direction substantially the same as the extending direction of the restriction plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542, and a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the back side.
And is mainly formed.

The regulation plate 5541 has a first opening 5521 and a first ball sending path KR1 and a second ball sending path K.
The game ball that is disposed in the connecting portion with R2 and flows down the first ball sending route KR1 is the second ball sending route K
It is a plate member that restricts the flow into R2, and the distance projected from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a linear shape in a front view, and its extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Accordingly, when the sorting member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. as a result,
The opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member which is arranged on the second ball sending route KR2 through the second opening 5522 and which flows down the game balls flowing down the second ball sending route KR2 to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.
The distance projected from the second opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a linear shape in a front view, and its extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Accordingly, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. as a result,
The opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is slid into the sliding groove 55.
The sorting member 5540 can be held in a slidable manner with respect to the base plate 5520 by inserting it into the shaft 46 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side.

The sliding groove 5546 is formed at two locations and their longitudinal directions are parallel to each other. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slid and displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, the displacement of the distributing member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135
(A) and FIG. 135 (b) show the distribution unit 550 in the range CXXXV of FIG.
It is a partial enlarged view of 0. Note that FIG. 135 (a) illustrates a state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 135 (b) illustrates a state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the third ball sending route KR3 and the regulation plate 5541 is on the back side of the route formation member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inward of the third ball-sending path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball-sending path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the balls delivered from the upstream of the third delivery route KR3 (the first delivery route KR1) are stored in the storage plate 55.
It is stopped upstream of 42.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in a state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball feeding route KR1 and the third ball feeding route KR3. The regulating plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-sending path KR1 and the third ball-sending path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is formed in the recess 5 formed on the rear wall of the path-forming member 510.
It is arranged inside 19.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end portion of the tip of the regulation plate 5541 protruding inward of the first ball-sending path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-sending path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is sent to the second ball sending route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulation position and the storage position, a state in which the ball to be delivered on the first ball delivery route KR1 is delivered to the third ball delivery route KR3 and stopped on the third ball delivery route KR3, The sphere flowing down the first ball-sending path KR1 cannot be flown into the third ball-sending path KR3,
It is possible to form a state in which the ball is sent to the second ball sending route KR2.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the one distributing member 5540, when the path of one downflow is divided into the path of two downflow, the downflow path of the sphere can be surely switched to either one.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distributor) is formed to be retractable with respect to the first ball delivery route KR1 (downflow passage) or the third ball delivery route KR3 (first branch passage), and its retracted position is
It is an inner wall on the extension line in the downflow direction at the downstream end of the first ball delivery path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball sending route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 5541 starts to be projected to the downflow passage or the third ball feeding route KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the allocation destination by the regulation plate 5541.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (sorting means) is projected to the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage), so that the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 (downflow passage) is brought to the second ball sending route ( Since the projecting direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set to the direction that points the upstream end of the second ball sending route KR2, the game ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of, the game ball is moved to the second position along with the protrusion operation of the regulation plate.
It can be pushed into the ball-sending path KR. As a result, the distribution to the second ball-sending route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, referring to FIGS. 136 to 140, the rotation unit 670 according to the sixth embodiment.
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800 and the operation of the rotating body 800 is restricted by the inertial force is described, but the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment is The gear 731e is removed. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a rotating body 8 that is rotationally displaced.
00, a ball receiving base 710 arranged above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, a back base 720 arranged on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 6750, and a decoration unit 6750. Left transmission member 7 disposed on the left side in front view of the vehicle
30 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front.

The decoration unit 6750 is a box member 760 formed in a box shape whose upper side in the gravity direction is open.
And a rotator 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the decoration unit 750 has the rotating body 800 arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the lid member 770 is removed. It

The left transmission member 730 is attached with the drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 136) of the decoration unit 750, the transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball-sending path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and that is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733 are mainly formed. Prepared to be formed.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshed with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshed with the transmission gear 6731b, and the transmission gear 731c. And a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged by the shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 731c. The first
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed in the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment,
Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the one-way clutch OW1 with respect to the inner wheel. As a result, the outer ring slips (spins) and transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are views in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. 6 is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

Note that FIGS. 139 and 140 show a state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is transparently viewed. In addition, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is
Is sequentially illustrated displacing the second section DK2, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displacing the first section DK1.

As illustrated in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (clockwise) as viewed in the left direction (as viewed in FIG. 139).

The rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis as described above, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When started, the load causes a force to rotate in the rotation direction.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). And is driven. That is, in the second section, it is possible to rotate the rotating body 800 at a higher rotation speed than the drive motor KM4.

In addition, the rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 with the load causes the rotating body 800 to move as shown in FIG.
The center of gravity G shown in 9 (c) is rotated to a position located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the rotating direction. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the rotating body 800, and to enhance the effect of effecting the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased) has been described. The displacement member 7710 in the form uses the weight of the game ball to cause the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, to accelerate the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. It should be noted that in FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the raised position is as shown in FIG.
Then, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the lowered position is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 formed to be slidable, and a rotational driving force of a driving unit (not shown, for example, an electric motor) transmitted to the displacement member 7710. And a load gear 7730 that is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The displacement member 7710 is a member supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the imaginary line L1, and a driven pin 7711 projecting from the side surface of the displacement member 7710.
A rack gear 7712 formed on the lower surface of the displacement member 7710 along the imaginary line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

The virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that descends and descends from the raised position shown in FIG. 141 toward the lowered position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is located above the lowered position in the direction of gravity.

The driven pin 7711 is a driving groove 772 in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720.
3b is a member that is slidably inserted, and is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacing member 7710, and is rotated around the rotating shaft 7713a to bring about the standing state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142. It can be formed. In the upright state, one end side is projected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (not shown) (for example, a torsion spring). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the orbit of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713). When the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the lowered position, the engagement pin 7740 is attached to the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. By engaging 7740, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and brought into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring,
It is returned to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-described driving unit (not shown), and is provided so as to project from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721 and also to rotate the rotating member 77.
21 is a cylindrical drive pin 7722 that is eccentrically located from the center of rotation, and the drive pin 772.
2 is an arm member 77 in which a driven groove 7723a into which one end is slidably inserted is formed.
23 and 23 are mainly provided.

A one-way clutch OW1 is provided between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner wheel is connected to the drive means, the outer wheel is connected to the rotating member 7721, and the inner wheel is rotationally driven in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the drive means, When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the arrow A direction), the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the arrow A direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. , Disconnects power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a drive groove 77 into which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted at the other end side opposite to the one end side where the driven groove 7723a is opened.
23b is formed with an opening, and between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (
The intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft 7723c.

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. In addition, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are provided in the arm member 7
It is formed as a linear groove along the longitudinal direction of 723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 has the structure shown in FIG.
When the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state in which the arm member 7723 is placed in the raised position shown in FIG. 141 is rotated clockwise around the rotation shaft 7723c in FIG. With the clockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing down the driven pin 7711, and the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the imaginary line L1. It is arranged in the descending position shown in.

On the other hand, from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the lowered position shown in FIG.
When 721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 7723c in FIG. To be rotated. With the counterclockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing up the driven pin 7711, whereby the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the imaginary line L1. It is arranged at the raised position 141.

Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 to move the rotating member 7721 in the arrow A direction (see FIG. 141).
By rotating the one-way clutch OW1 in the clockwise direction, it is possible to prevent the outer wheel of the one-way clutch OW1 from preceding the inner wheel in one direction (direction of arrow A). That is, in a state in which the game ball is not held, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position to be increased.

That is, the rotary member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A by the rotational driving force of the driving means (see FIGS. 141 and 1).
While being rotated clockwise (42), the displacement member 7710 is reciprocally displaced (slide displacement) between the ascending position and the descending position at a slide speed according to the rotational drive speed of the rotational drive means.
To be done.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. It should be noted that, in FIG. 143, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the raised position, and in FIG. 144, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the lowered position,
Each is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed on its upper surface so as to be able to hold the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game balls flow down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so that the displacement member 7710 can receive the flowing down game balls. Note that in FIG. 143, the four spheres of the game balls indicated by the symbol T are the displacement members 7
The state of being held on the upper surface of 710 is illustrated.

In this case, in the state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 is increased (weighted) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance due to the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), whereby the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can precede the inner ring in one direction (direction of arrow A). As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the ascending position to the descending position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

Further, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be changed according to the number of game balls held. Accordingly, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be changed (changed) not only depending on whether or not the game ball is held in the displacement member 7710, but also according to the number of the game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the production effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

As described above, the displacing member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (end portion on the lower inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the displacement member 7710 is moved from the game ball.
The force applied to can be applied as a force for sliding displacement toward the lowered position. That is, the force can be applied in a direction in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 precedes the inner ring in one direction (direction of arrow A) via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down, the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 771
When 3) is received, the displacement speed of the slide displacement in the direction toward the lowered position of the displacement member 7710 can be increased by utilizing the kinetic energy of the game ball.

In this case, the flowing down game balls have different downflow directions and downflow speeds. for that reason,
The force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacing member 7710 can be changed in accordance with the difference in the flow-down state (flow-down direction or flow-down velocity) of the game balls received. Thereby, not only whether or not the game balls are held in the displacement member 7710 and the number of game balls held therein,
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is changed (changed) depending on the flow state of the game ball.
be able to. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the production effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotating member 7721 rotates in one direction, it is not necessary to switch the driving direction of the driving unit. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time for switching the driving direction of the driving unit. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that does not require switching of the driving means.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced and is caused by a reaction when the operation of dropping the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is performed. It is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 7710.

That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to a reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 77
By the reaction due to the displacement of No. 13, a force for displacing the displacement member 7710 downward can be applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving along the direction of gravity on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13, and includes a game ball moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the gravity direction, for example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the gravity direction by colliding with a nail, a tulip, or an accessory, or after rolling the stage and jumping out of the stage. As an example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the gravity direction is illustrated.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 does not hold the game ball (see FIG. 141), when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the lowered position. , The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is in one direction with respect to the inner ring (arrow A
Direction), that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase.

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is different from the inner ring. It may be configured to precede in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (see FIG. 1).
Even if the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated clockwise (41), the outer wheel of the one-way clutch OW1 may precede the inner wheel.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. On the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, FIG. 145 shows the overall configuration of the rotary operation unit 8650 according to the eighth embodiment.
1 to 147, description will be made. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. 14
7 is a schematic sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the later-described rotation operation unit 8654 projects to the outside of the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state of

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 86 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 which is fitted in the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, a one-way clutch OW1 in which an inner ring is fitted on the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 in which an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted. And is mainly formed.

The transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6. Therefore, the drive motor KM6
The transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the transmission gear 8651. As mentioned above,
The transmission gear 8652 is arranged in a meshed state with the transmission gear 8652. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 865 is transmitted via the transmission gear 8651.
Can rotate 2.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a cylindrical shape, and the axial length thereof is the rotation operation portion 86.
It is formed longer than the width dimension of 54 in the left-right direction. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652 and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Accordingly, the driving force when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of the inner ring, the outer ring, and the roller engaged therebetween, and when the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring while the inner ring is rotated in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be made non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation portion 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is arranged with a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protruding from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted into the inner circle portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operating portion 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the outer wheel of one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651 and 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation portion 8654 is obtained. Is rotated. Meanwhile, the drive motor KM6
When is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner wheel and the outer wheel of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of the rotation drive to the rotation operation portion 8654 is cut off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section of FIG.
Corresponds to.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the drive motor KM6, whereby the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates, and the rotation operation unit 8654 does not rotate the rotation operation unit 8654. A mode in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction, and the rotation operation unit 8
When the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation portion 8654 when 654 is rotated in the A direction and causes the rotation operation portion 8654 to generate a rotational force in the same direction as the rotation A direction, the one-way clutch O
The outer peripheral surface of W1 and the rotation operation portion 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 865
4 can be operated at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the player's operation.

Further, when the rotation operating portion 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotating), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operating portion 8654 in the rotation A direction to rotationally displace the rotation operating portion 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operating portion 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operating portion 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the player's operation. It is possible to form a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the player's operation.

As a result, since it is possible to form a plurality of modes for allowing the player to visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654, it is possible to provide the player with interest. Moreover, since a plurality of effect modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, the player can be entertained by the amount of the effect.

Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations of the rotation operation unit 8654 is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and an effect that is changed based on the number of rotations or the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The plate-shaped projection 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. It should be noted that the same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149 (b)
Corresponds to the schematic sectional view of FIG.

The lower displacement unit 400 according to the ninth embodiment is similar to the lower displacement unit 400 according to the first embodiment in that the base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and its base member 410 are provided. Transmission member 420 disposed on base member 410, and transmission member 4 thereof
And a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that displaces when the driving force is transmitted from 20. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced by driving the transmission member 420.
30 and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by the displacement of the link member 9430.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment is bent and formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and is also formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 projects to the through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the arrow D direction side in FIG. 149 (a)) and the rear surface side on the other end side (arrow U direction side in FIG. 149 (a)). Columnar connecting protrusion 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped protrusion 9431b protruding to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding protrusion 431d protruding to the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b extends in a curved shape around the axis of the through hole 431a and protrudes toward the front side (front side base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). In addition, the plate-shaped protrusion 94
The protruding dimension of 31b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow FB direction) of the cam member 422. Furthermore, a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))) is arranged with the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding front end surface of the plate-shaped projection 9431b.

The cam member 422 is arranged such that a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e excluding the plate-shaped projection 9431b can be displaced. Further, the size of the two gaps, which is the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, is larger than the distance X14 described above. Largely set.

As a result, the first link member 9 is moved in the direction in which the distance X14 becomes smaller (the direction of arrow F).
When 431 bends, the protruding tip end surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 42 is provided between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped projection 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It can suppress that 2 is pinched and displacement is controlled.

Further, the plate-shaped projection 9431b is provided with an inclined surface 9431b1 protruding toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the circumferential side surface on the cam member 422 side (arrow L direction side in FIG. 149 (b)). As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is on the projecting side (arrow F direction side).
It is formed with an inclination of approximately 45 degrees toward the.

Accordingly, when the lower displacement unit 400 is brought into the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped projection 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved to the rear surface of the first link member 9431 (in the direction of arrow F). The first link member 94 can be pressed (displaced) against the surface)
The protruding tip end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the plate-shaped projection 9431b of 31 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 at the position in the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at an end portion of the cam member 422 that is in contact with the inclined surface 9431b1. Thereby, the cam member 422
The cam member 422 can be easily displaced to the back surface side (arrow B direction side) when the inclined surface 9431b1 and the inclined surface 9431b1 contact each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 is the adhesive tape 1
Although the case where 54a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154 has been described, in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the inside of the decorative member 10154, which is separated from the end of the decorative member 10154 by a predetermined width. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG.
It corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, the general winning opening unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment
Like the general winning opening unit 150 in the first embodiment, 0 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and the path of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. . In addition, the general winning opening unit 10150 is an end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) in a front view (as viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is arranged at a position along the section.

Furthermore, the general winning opening unit 10150 has a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and a first standing portion 152 that is erected from the end of the main body 151 to the front side (arrow F direction side). (See FIG. 12), and a second standing portion 153 (FIG. 12 (see FIG. 12) that extends from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area. a)), and a plurality of (generally three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body 10151. The decorative member 10154 has an adhesive tape 10154a that is adhered to the main body 151 attached to the inside of the decorative member 10154 with a predetermined width from the end of the decorative member 10154. By this, the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a,
A predetermined gap (space) is formed between the main body 151 and the decorative member 10154 at the end of the decorative member 10154. As a result, the player has an angle (for example, the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 10154 when the general winning opening unit 10150 is viewed from the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction (see). .

More specifically, by forming an air layer between the main body 151 and the end of the decorative member 10154, the interior of the main body 151 is reflected and the end of the main body 151 (the inclined surface 151a) is directed toward the player side. It is possible to prevent the light L that is emitted to (1) from being affected by the decoration at the end portion of the decoration member 10154 (making the wavelength of the light L difficult to change). In addition, the light passing through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and being influenced by the decoration of the decoration member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and is emitted to the outside of the main body 151. It is possible to reduce the influence of the decoration of the decoration member 10154 when reflected toward the viewpoint.

Therefore, the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player can be reduced, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 10154 are decorated. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary of. As a result, the decoration member 60c from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the middle position in the gravity direction of the game board 13)
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decoration member 10154 and the decoration of the decoration member 10154, the decoration member 60c of the base plate and the decoration of the decoration member 10154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration and a predetermined angle (for example, pachinko (A viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity)
When viewed from above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the decoration at the boundary so that the decoration is divided.

Next, referring to FIGS. 151 to 153, the lower displacement member 114 according to the eleventh embodiment.
40 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 disposed on the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described. However, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is a control board. The light emitted from 491 allows the player to recognize the position of the internal game ball. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower displacement member 114 according to the eleventh embodiment.
The overall configuration of 40 will be described. FIG. 151 shows the lower displacement member 11 according to the eleventh embodiment.
It is a disassembled perspective front view of 440. 152 (a) and 152 (b) show the lower displacement member 11
It is a front view of 440. Note that in FIG. 152 (a), the outer shape of the light-emitting body 11491a arranged on the control board 491 is shown by a chain line, and in FIG. 152 (b), the state where the decorative member 11450 is removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment is a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear of the base member 470. Case member 480 that covers the case member 480 and the base member 4
Mainly includes a transmission mechanism 11460 displaceably disposed between the case 70 and a decorative member 11450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (direction of arrow FB).

The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or a character, and a picture of the pattern or the character is drawn on the surface. The decoration member 11450 includes a front side decoration portion 11451 disposed on the front side of the front case 481 (arrow F direction side) and a back side decoration portion disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 482. And 452 mainly. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front side decoration portion 11451 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (the case member 480, the base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back surface side of the front decoration portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Further, the front side decoration portion 11451 includes a transmission portion 11451b formed of a light transmissive material inside when viewed from the front.

The transmissive portion 11451b includes a plurality of light emitting bodies 11491 arranged on a control board 491 described later.
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a can be guided to the player side because it is formed in the entire area facing the position a. The transparent portion 11451b is on the front side (arrow F direction side).
Is curved toward the outer side in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) toward the back side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the light incident from the back side of the transmissive portion 11451b is transmitted to the transmissive portion 1151b.
When it passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, it is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member arranged on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462 and 463, and a drive motor KM2 having a shaft portion connected to the transmission gear 461. A movable rack 464 that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is slidably disposed on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 that is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, and a base. A rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and having a tooth surface with which the transmission gear 465 meshes, and a movable rack 46 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465.
4, a rack 11466 arranged so as to be slidable on the front side, and the rack 11466.
And a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably disposed on one end side thereof.

The rack 11466 is formed by a rod-shaped body having a rectangular oblong shape in a front view, and a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface and the other end side (arrow L direction side) in the longitudinal direction from the rear side (arrow B direction side). A cylindrical shaft portion 466b, two sliding plates 466c protruding to the front side (arrow F direction side), and a recess on the back surface from one end (arrow R direction side) in the longitudinal direction to the other end. The recessed portion 466d (see FIG. 59) and a shield plate 11466e that protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a are provided.

The shield plate 11466e is made of a non-light transmissive material, and can shield the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a. Further, the shielding plate 11466e has a protruding height (
The height (direction of arrow U) is higher than that of the light-emitting body 11491a provided on the back side (position on the side of arrow U). As a result, the shield plate 1146 is displaced as the rack 11466 is displaced.
The light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked by displacing 6e in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The control board 491 is disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470 and includes a plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a capable of irradiating light on the front surface side. The plurality of light-emitting bodies 11491a are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440 and are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. It is arranged above 467 (direction of arrow U). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the light emitting unit 11491a from being blocked by the ball receiving unit 467.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state in which the game ball is fed inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153 (a), and FIG. ) Is a schematic sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 153 (a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the received game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a. Thus, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a to the player side. As a result, the player can recognize the position of the game ball sent inside the lower displacement member 11440 by the shadow formed by the light being blocked.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, a control board 491 that is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and that can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiving portion 467 is provided.
The light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the back surface side of the light emitting element 11450 to reduce the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450. Since they are partially different, the amount of light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the decoration member 11450 located on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 and the decoration member 11450 at other positions. The amount of light to be emitted is different (darkened to form a shadow) so that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion having the different light amount. It can be recognized by the player.

More specifically, when the control board 491 is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving portion 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. Thereby, the light amount of the light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the decoration member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than other portions of the decoration member 11450. As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the light amount emitted from the decoration member 11450 is small (dark).

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape that receives the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 1149.
1a is arranged at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467,
It is possible to make it difficult for the light received from the light emitting body 11491a to be applied to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46 that receives the game ball by the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a.
It is possible to prevent the outer shape of the rack 11466 for slidingly displacing the ball 7 and the ball receiving portion 467 from forming a shadow and forming a shadow on the transmitting portion 11451b. As a result, since the shadow can be formed on the transparent portion 11451b only with the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the game ball is not received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from paying attention to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, referring to FIGS. 154 and 155, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment.
Will be described. In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the ball receiving portion 12467 is arranged. The light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the three pieces 12467e. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In addition, in FIG.
), A part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated by a chain line.

Note that the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment described above in that it includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470. Case member 480 for covering the
And a decoration member 11450 formed so as to cover the front and rear (in the direction of arrow F-B) of. Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the case member 480.
The transmission mechanism 12460 is provided between the base member 470 and the base member 470 so as to be displaceable, and has a ball receiving portion 12467c that is deformable by receiving a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 according to the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c formed by bending into a substantially L shape in front view, and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. And a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and arranged on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions that hold the game ball sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, and the first piece 12467c.
When the game ball is sent between the second piece 12467d and the second piece 12467d facing each other, the second piece 12467d is displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12 are displaced.
467d and U are arranged in a U shape in a front view, and a game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 that forms one extended side formed in an L shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a that forms the other extended side, and a receiving piece 12467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 that protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 interposed therebetween. And

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) that is formed in a U shape in a front view by the one piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front, It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 is provided so as to project from two locations at a predetermined distance in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. The connecting portion 12467c1 is the second piece 1 described later.
The connecting hole 12467c2 is a portion that connects the 2467d and the third piece 12467e and that extends along the axial direction of the axial hole 467b and that has a circular cross-section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is provided with a shaft portion 12467e which is provided on a third piece 12467e which will be described later.
3 is an opening to be inserted. In the connecting hole 12467c2, the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 formed in the second piece 12467d described later is on the back side (arrow B direction side).
Inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the coupling hole 12467c2 (front side (direction of arrow F)). As a result, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c includes a recess 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom part) of the bottom surface on which the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. Thereby, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
The game ball held by is rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d includes the receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 124.
67d is a portion forming a side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape in a front view, and is formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and is concave in a direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. It is formed in a curved shape. Also, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
A through hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B) in the connecting portion of
It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross-section from the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d has a shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e in the insertion hole 12467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is also displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d has the connecting portion 12 protruding from two locations on the first piece 12467c.
The first piece 12467c is connected to the first piece 12467c and is disposed between the opposite sides of the 467c1. This allows the second
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
It is possible to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from being broken by bringing the second piece 12467d into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of 1.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of a third piece 12467e, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a plate shape having a substantially semicircular shape in front view,
A shaft portion 124 protruding from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (direction of arrow F).
67e3 and the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shield plate 12467e1 is made of a non-light-transmissive material, and has a luminous body 11491a.
The light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be shielded when the light emitting body 11491a is arranged on the front side of the. The shielding of the light of the light emitting body 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 12467e3 is a columnar body that is inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d as described above. Also, the shaft 1
The protruding end surface of 2467e3 has a connecting hole 124 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
A hole into which a screw inserted in 67c2 can be screwed is formed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted in the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, the shaft portion 12467e3 is
The first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e can be connected by fastening a screw to the insertion tip end surface of the first piece 12467e.
It can be made rotatable with respect to 7c.

The connecting shaft 12467e4 is, as described above, the recessed portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
Inserted in 2. As a result, the second piece 12467d is moved toward the shaft portion 1 with respect to the first piece 12467c.
When rotationally displaced about 2467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e is replaced by the second piece 12467e.
It can be displaced along with the displacement of d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 taken along the line CLVc-CLVc of FIG. 155 (b). is there. Note that in FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are shown by a chain line. Also, FIG.
In (a), the state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467 (before being held) is shown, and in FIG. 155 (b), the game ball is received (held by the ball receiving portion 12467). Was)
The situation is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the ball receiving portion 12467, in the state before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d facing each other, the second piece 12467d is the first piece due to the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467e is brought closer to the side of the piece 12467c.
Is located below the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d facing each other, the received game ball is formed into a receiving surface of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d (a U-shape when viewed from the front). The inner side surface) is rolled to form the recess 12 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface.
You will be guided to 467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is attached to the shaft portion 124 on the outer surface of the game ball.
67e3 can be rotated in the direction away from the first piece 12467c. As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, is moved to the ball receiving portion 1246.
7 can be arranged on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the light-emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of 7.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is shielded from the shield plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
It can be shielded by 7e1. As a result, it is possible to easily shield the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 is set to the light emitting body 11491a. It is possible for the player to recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, in the second piece 12467d, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (see FIG.
54 (b)) is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e with the shaft portion 12467e3 interposed therebetween. Accordingly, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated toward the first piece 12467c4 side by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the third piece 124
The second piece 12467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c by the load of 67e.

Further, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated about the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 to emit the lower displacement member 12440. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game balls received in the ball receiving portion 12467, the ball receiving portion 12
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the slide movement of 467 is performed, the ball receiving portion 12 centered around the shaft hole 467b is moved by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the second piece 12467e is loaded by the load of the third piece 12467e.
Since the rotating direction of d and the rotating direction of the ball receiving portion 12467 centered on the shaft hole 467b when the game sphere is emitted are set to be substantially the same, the game sphere emitted from the emission opening 471 is set. A driving force can be applied when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 124
Even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when the game ball is discharged from the exit opening 471 by displacing 67, the speed of the game ball to be ejected can be maintained. As a result, the discharge speed of the game balls emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156 to FIG. 158, the special winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment
550 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special winning device 550.
The case of switching the ball-sending path of the game ball that has flown into the inside of 51 by the first and second drive units 583, 584 of the third path member 580 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the ball-sending path of the special winning device 13550 By changing the facing interval, the flow path of the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the special winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment
The overall configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 156 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is FIG. 156 ( It is sectional drawing of the special winning device 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment.
Includes a first path member 13560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 13570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 13560.

The first path member 13560 is a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and projecting from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the rear surface side (base plate 60 side). And a first wall portion 13565 that is formed.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 13570 and the second path member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 has a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c that project toward the second path member 13570, and the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564b.
A third convex portion 135 that is located below the convex portion 13564c and that is provided to project toward the second path member 13570 side.
64d.

The 1st convex part 13564b and the 2nd convex part 13564c are projections for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are outside the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow L).
It is formed to be inclined downward from the outer side in the −R direction) toward the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction.

The third convex portion 13564d is located in the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the ball-sending paths of the game balls flowing down from the special winning device 13550 are different between the left and right substantially central positions of the special winning device 13550 (arrow LR direction). , Special prize device 1
The game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of 3550 is sent to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2),
A specific game value is given to the player by the sent game balls (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 in front view is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, below the left side (the arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (
The first winning opening 64 is arranged on the arrow D side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down from the left side in the front view of the special winning device 13550 can be caused to flow into the first winning opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and the connecting plate 13565a that protrudes to the left and right outside at the protruding tip portion is provided on each of the left and right first wall portions 13565. Prepare two places each.

The connecting plate 13565a is formed with a through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13. This through hole 13
The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 with the screws inserted through the 565a1.

The second path member 13570 is a plate-shaped base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and the first path member 13560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) end portions of the base plate 13571. And a fourth wall portion 13573 protruding from the front plate 13564 side.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a ball sending path of the game ball in the gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564 facing each other, and the outer shape in front view is formed smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. This allows the front side of the base plate 13571 to be attached to the front plate 1356.
Since it can be covered with 4, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the base plate 13571.

In addition, the base plate 13571 has a fourth protrusion 1357 protruding toward the first path member 13560.
1b, the fifth convex portion 13571c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c
And a sixth convex portion 13571d which is located below the front surface and protrudes toward the front plate 13564 side.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are projections for guiding a game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are located on the outer side in the left-right direction of the base plate 13571 (from the arrow (outer side in the LR direction)). The base plate 13571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the above-described third convex portion 13564d, and has a length having a predetermined gap with the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. The third
The gap between the convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d facing each other is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The fourth wall portion 13573 has two fastening holes 13573a for fastening the screws inserted through the first path member 13560 in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, the first path member 13560 is provided around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573.
A shim member SI that adjusts a gap between the second path member 13570 and the second path member 13570 is disposed.

The shim member SI is formed of a thin plate-shaped transparent material, and is hard to be visually recognized by the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the shim member SI is arranged at the end portion on the left side in front view, and the interval between the facing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side in front view is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special winning a prize device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 taken along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb of FIG. 158 (a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI on the left end when viewed from the front.
Is arranged, and the distance L14 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 facing each other on the left side in front view is the front plate 13564 and the base plate 1 on the right side in front view.
It is set to be larger than the interval L15 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the parts facing the 3571 (L1).
4> L15).

The distance L14 is the distance between the left side (arrow L side) ends at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. The distance L15 is the distance between the right side (arrow R direction side) end portions at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the special winning device 1355.
The game ball flowing down from above 0 can be made to flow into the inside of the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left-right direction (L14>L15> diameter of the game ball).

Further, in the special winning device 13550, the downstream side is divided into left and right by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main route SK1 (see FIG. 158 (b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550, the main route SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 in front view, and the right side in the front direction of the special winning device 13550 It flows into either one of the formed sub route HK1. As described above, the game area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is
Different ball-sending paths are formed at the substantially central position of the special winning device 13550 in the left-right direction.
Therefore, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the game area is sent to a specific winning port, and the game ball sent to the game area from the sub route HK1 is sent to the outlet 71 of the game board 13.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above.
And the protruding dimensions of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the protrusion dimensions of the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the rear side are set to be the same. Also,
Fourth convex portion 13571b and fifth convex portion 13 protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side
571c has the same protrusion size. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion
The protrusion size of the convex portion 13571b is set to be the same.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at positions having different vertical heights. That is, the front plate 13
The first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from 564 toward the back side are projected from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c that project from the base plate 13571 toward the front side project from the same height. Furthermore, the 1st convex part 13565b and the 4th convex part 13571b are arrange | positioned at a different height, and the 4th convex part 13571b is arrange | positioned below the 1st convex part 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first convex portion 13565b protruding from two points in the gravity direction is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b protruding from the two points in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550 is the first convex portion 13564b.
The fourth convex portion 13571b or the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c can be caused to flow in sequence while colliding with each other. As a result, the game ball is the first convex portion 13564b and the second.
The protrusion 13564c, the fourth protrusion 13571b, and the fifth protrusion 13571c can be made to flow down along the extending direction.

The front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 1357 on the front view left side of the special winning device 13550.
1b or the distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the facing of the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the special winning device 13550 Front plate 13564 and fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side in front view.
1c or the distance dimension L17 between the opposing sides of the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The interval L16 is equal to the fifth protrusion 13 of the fourth protrusion 13571b and the first protrusion 13564b.
571c and the 2nd convex part 13564c side (arrow R direction side) front plate 13564 in the edge part
Alternatively, it is a distance dimension between facing the base plate 13571. The interval L17 is equal to the fifth convex portion 1
3571c and 4th convex part 13571b and 1st convex part 13564b of the 2nd convex part 13564c.
It is the distance dimension between the end on the side (the arrow L direction side) facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning port 64 is arranged below (on the side of arrow D) the left side (on the side of arrow L) of the special winning device 13550. As a result, from the left side of the special winning device 13550 in front view. The game ball flowing down can be made to flow into the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, from the right side in the front view of the special winning device 13550 (the arrow R side), the special winning device 13
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of 550 is the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135.
71c, and the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c are easily made to flow down and guided to the sub route HK1 side. On the other hand, special winning device 1355
The game ball that flows into the main route SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side (the direction of the arrow L direction) in front view of 0 is made difficult to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, and is directly routed to the sub route HK1. It is easy to be thrown. As a result, it is possible to change the downward direction of the game balls that have flown into the special winning device 13550.

In the present embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c, the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
It is formed above (in the direction of the arrow U) above (the inlet of the game ball of the main route HK1 and the sub route SK6). Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can be made to flow down to the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls can be made to flow down to the main route SK6 than the sub route HK1.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is adjusted by the shim member SI and is made non-parallel, and the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13560 are
It is possible to adjust the position of the game ball flowing down between the passage member 13570 and the facing member (direction in which the game ball flows down).

Therefore, as compared with the case where the angle of the nails hit on the front surface of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is changed to adjust the direction in which the game ball easily flows down, the special winning device 13550.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the direction in which the inside of the is easily flowed down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the game machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

In addition, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 only by changing the two opposing directions of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 (front-back direction (arrow FB direction)). Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than with a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

The direction intended by the coordinator is, for example, the direction between the first route member 13560 and the second route member 13570 on the side of the sub route HK1 (on the side of arrow L) on the side of the main route SK6 (on the side of arrow R). A game ball that is larger than the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other and flows down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the sub path HK1 or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ) Between the first route member 13560 and the second route member 13570 facing each other, the first route member 13560 and the second route member 135 on the sub route HK1 side (arrow L direction side).
That is, the gaming balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flow down to the main route SK6 by making them larger than between the facing 70.

Further, with respect to the first path member 13560 arranged on the front side, the second path member 13570 arranged on the rear side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 arranged on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, compared with the case where the first path member 13560 close to the player is displaced, the first path member 13560 and Second path member 1357
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between 0s facing each other. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the engagement member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engagement member 310 is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of the rear case 300 (rear surface side (arrow B direction side)) has been described. The operator 14315 according to the fourteenth embodiment is formed such that the protruding tip end surface is inclined toward the base end side. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 159 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 according to the fourteenth embodiment.
9B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159A.

The rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment is similar to the rear case 300 in the first embodiment in that a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 are directed from the front to the front. An outer wall portion 302 that is erected is provided, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) being open. A rectangular opening 301a in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. Made possible.

Further, the rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 14310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (a box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 14300. The board box 100 (main controller 11 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).
0) and a fixing member 320 for fixing.

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first pieces 143 extending in directions parallel to each other.
11 and the second piece 312, and the end portions of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 of the first piece 1
4311 and a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 is one side opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected (arrow R direction side).
Is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (a)) of the fixing member 320, and is a vertical direction that is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311. (Arrow U-
Engaging portion 316 protruding outward on both sides in the D direction) and recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of first piece 14311 from substantially intermediate positions of engaging portions 316 at the two positions. And an operator 143 projecting toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of the rear case 300 (rear surface side (arrow B direction side)).
15 and.

The operator 14315 is formed at the other end (the arrow L direction side) of the end of the first piece 14311, and the protruding dimension thereof is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and at least It is projected to the rear surface side of the rear case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be gripped by a finger of an operator. Accordingly, the operator 14315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip end surface of the operator 14315 is on the engagement portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (
It is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that is closer to the base end side of the operator 14315 toward the arrow L direction side). Thereby, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction (the arrow L direction side) for releasing the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixed member 320, the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixed member 320 is performed. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

That is, the inclined surface 14315a can disperse the force with which the operator operates the operator 14315. This makes it difficult to operate the operating element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to release the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320. as a result,
It is possible to prevent an operator who illegally replaces the substrate box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 from operating the operating element 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300. .

Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engagement portion 316 side is the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 300.
1 is arranged on the front side (the arrow F direction side) with respect to the back surface. Thereby, the engaging member 14310
It is possible to bring the hand of the operator who operates the operator 14315 into contact with the inclined surface 14315a for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who makes it difficult to operate the operator 14315 and illegally replaces the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300, It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back case 300.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is the rear case 3
The case where the operation element 15315 is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of 00 (the back surface side (arrow B direction side)) has been described. Is pivotally supported. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 159 (b).

The rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment is similar to the rear case 300 in the first embodiment in that a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 are directed from the front to the front. An outer wall portion 302 that is erected is provided, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) being open. A rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the bottom wall portion 30 passes through the opening 301a.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of 1 is visible.

Further, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 15310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (a box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 15300. The board box 100 (main controller 11 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).
0) and a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engagement member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 15311 and the first piece 15311 extending in directions parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), and a first piece 14311 and a second piece 312 thereof.
And a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction.

The end of the first piece 15311 on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. 41 (a)), which is formed as an engaging portion with respect to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 15311 from substantially intermediate positions of the two engaging portions 316. It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300, and a bearing portion 15319 on which the operator 15315 is axially supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is provided so as to project from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. In addition, the bearing portion 15319 is an operator 1 described later.
A recess is formed in which the cylindrical shaft member 15315c, which is inserted through the 5315 in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction), is inserted.

The operator 15315 is formed in a rod shape, has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 1531 inserted into the through hole 15315b.
5c, and.

Therefore, the manipulator 15315 is held in a state of being rotationally displaceable with respect to the first piece 15311 by the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b being inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotary shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operator 15315 is the first
It is arranged on the front side of the piece 15311. Accordingly, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) as viewed from above can be brought into contact with the other end of the first piece 15311 to be restricted, and Rotation in the left direction (counterclockwise) can be allowed.

Therefore, when the operator operates the manipulator 15315 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engagement member 15310 and the fixed member 320 (arrow L direction side) (the manipulator 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160A).
When rotating 15 counterclockwise), the force acting in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (direction of arrow L) can be reduced. As a result, the operator 15315 is operated from the rear surface side of the rear case 300 to operate the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 3.
The engagement with 20 can be made difficult to release. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160 (b), the engagement member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the sliding operation of the engagement member 310 is performed by the operator 315 is described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the first operation of the engagement member 16310 is performed.
This is performed by operating the end portion of the piece 16311. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160 (a). Further, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment in that a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 are directed from the front to the front. An outer wall portion 302 that is erected is provided, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) being open. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see FIG.
An opening is formed, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a.

Further, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 16310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (a box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 16300. The board box 100 (main controller 1 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).
A fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) for fixing 10) is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 16311 and the first piece 16311 extending in directions parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), and a first piece 16311 and a second piece 312 thereof.
And a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) connecting the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction. Further, the engagement member 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment
The 6310 can be slid and displaced by a finger that is inserted from the back side into the second opening 301d formed in the back case 300.

The end of the first piece 16311 on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. 41), and an engaging portion 316 (FIG. 41) protruding outward on both sides in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from the substantially intermediate position of the two engaging portions 316. Prepare

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (the arrow L direction side). Of the second opening 301d is arranged horizontally outside the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, the engaging member 16
The operator engages the engaging member 1 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L side).
When operating the 6310, with a finger inserted from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300,
It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction in which the engagement between the engaging member 16310 and the fixed member 320 is released. As a result, the board box 1 disposed on the fixing member 320
The operator who is trying to replace 00 from the rear side of the rear case 300 has an engaging member 1631.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 300 by operating the 0 illegally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engagement member 310 projects from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300 has been described. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the rear case 17300 is described. An operator 315 protruding from is covered by a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 (a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161 (b) is a rear case 173 taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb of FIG. 161 (a).
It is sectional drawing of 00.

As shown in FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. And the wall portions 17301 and 302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 in a front view in the center thereof.
The opening a is formed, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a.

Further, the rear case 17300 includes a protruding portion 301 b protruding from two locations on the front surface of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening portion 301 c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening portion 301d that opens at a facing position and a covering portion 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening portion 301d on the side of the first opening portion 301c (direction of arrow R) are provided.

The covering portion 17301e is on the first opening 301c side of the second opening 301d (arrow R direction side).
Is erected from the end portion toward the back side (arrow B direction side). In addition, the covering portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 in which the standing tip portion bends toward the inside of the opening of the second opening 301d in rear view. As a result, the covering portion 17301e is located at the side of the first opening portion 301c (
It is formed in a box shape having an opening on the side opposite to the arrow R direction side and on the arrow L direction side.

Further, the standing distance of the covering portion 17301e (from the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the bending portion 1730c).
The distance from the front surface of 1e1) is set to be larger than the protruding size of the operator 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c. Furthermore, the covering portion 17301e serves as the bent portion 17 in the rear view.
The dimension of 301e1 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is set to be larger than the dimension of the operator 315 in the left-right direction in rear view.

As a result, in a state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the operator 315 is located inside the covering member 17301e. Is located in. Therefore, the direction (the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixed member 320 is released)
When the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult to grip the operating element 315 from the rear surface side of the rear case 17300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixed member 320 is released (arrow L direction side). As a result, an operator (player) who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 receives the engaging member 31 from the rear side of the rear case 17300.
By operating 0, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 17300.

Next, referring to FIGS. 162 to 164, the back case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the engaging member 310 moves in the linear direction (arrow L-
The case where the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is slidably displaced in the R direction) is rotationally displaced with respect to the rear case 18300. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 183 of the eighteenth embodiment is described.
00 and operation of the engaging member 18310 will be described. FIG. 162 (a) and FIG.
63 (a) is a front view of the back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 16B and FIG. 163B are rear views of the rear case 18300. Note that FIG.
a) and FIG. 162 (b) show a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, and in FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b), the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are shown. Is disengaged.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided so as to stand from the bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each of the wall portions 18301 and 18302 is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) open. Further, the rear case 18300 is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (on the open side formed in a box shape (on the side of arrow F)) and on the rear side of the rear case 18300. And a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 has a rectangular opening 301a formed in a front view at the center thereof, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that Further, the bottom wall portion 18301 includes a first opening portion 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a projecting portion that is located below the first opening portion 18301c (direction of arrow D) and projects to the front side. 18301b.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 in a front view. Thus, after the accessory device (rotating unit 700) is arranged inside the rear case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged from the rear side of the rear case 18300 to the front side of the rear case 18300. it can.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310 described below, and the bottom wall portion 1
It is provided in a cylindrical shape from the front of 8301b. In addition, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is attached to the rear case 183.
00, the engaging member 1831 is screwed into the protruding portion 18301b.
It is possible to restrict 0 from slipping out of the protruding portion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 has a right-side direction (arrow L direction side) in the left-right direction (arrow L direction) in a front view.
An opening 18302a that opens in the (-R direction) is provided. The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of the engagement member 18310 described later. Accordingly, after the engagement member 18310 is arranged inside the rear case 18300, the engagement member 18310 can be rotated to project the engagement member 18310 to the outside of the back case 18300.

The fixing member 18320 includes an interposition member 18330 that engages with an engagement member 18310 described below, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposition member 18330.

The interposition member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and the locking portion 18331 protrudingly provided on the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) and the side case on one side (arrow R direction side) from the rear case. 300
From the rear side, the engaged portion 18332 formed in a frame shape projecting to the side, the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39 (b)) opening in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side), and from the back surface. Protruding part 33
4 and mainly.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (the arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening portion 18301c described above. The projecting wall 18301c1 that is projectingly inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301 is engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301.

Thus, when the interposing member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is arranged in the rear case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposing member 18330 so that the other side of the interposing member 18330 (arrow L Direction side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and the rear case 183.
00 (the direction of the arrow F) has a protrusion dimension that is set in the rear case 18300.
The distance dimension from the inner surface on the front side (arrow F side) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is set to a dimension exceeding 8310, and the distance dimension from the front surface of the engagement member 18310 to the bottom wall portion 1830.
It is set larger than the distance to the front of 1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at a position that overlaps with each other in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB).

The engagement member 18310 is formed in a substantially L shape in a front view, and is bent from a second piece 18312 pivotally supported by the protruding portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 and one end of the second piece 18312. And a first piece 18311 formed as described above.

The second piece 18312 includes a shaft support hole 18312a that is circularly opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. Shaft support hole 18312a
Is a hole into which the projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 described above is inserted, whereby the engaging member 18310 can be disposed in a state of being axially supported inside the rear case 18300.

The first piece 18311 is extended in an arc shape around the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. This can minimize the displacement region of the first piece 18311 when the engagement member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. In addition, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 that protrudes from the shaft supporting hole 18312a to both sides in the radial direction at the end portion on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two positions. From the approximately middle position of the first piece 18
And a recess 18317 recessed in the extending direction of 311.

The outer shape of the two engaging portions 18316 is substantially triangular when viewed from the front. Also,
One of the engaging portions 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 that increases from the end portion on the opposite side of the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312. The outer shape is formed so as to project outward in the direction. The other engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316
Is formed to have an outer shape that protrudes radially inward of the first piece 18311 from the end portion on the opposite side of the connection portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connection portion side with the second piece 18312.

The concave portion 18317 is formed by cutting out in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311, and
A recess is provided from the end of the piece 18311 on the side opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312, toward the side connected to the second piece 18312 along the extending direction of the first piece 18311. Therefore, the first piece 18
The end of 311 is divided into two. Accordingly, the end portion of the first piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 can be elastically deformed more easily than the connection side with the second piece 18312, and the engagement member 18310 can be connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 will be described. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3, the interposition member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened and assembled by a screw inserted from the side of the interposition member 18330 before engaging with the engagement member 18310.

Further, the engagement member 18310 is provided on the protruding portion 1830 of the rear case 18300 as described above.
It is arranged in a state of being axially supported by 1b, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is
The rear case 18300 is provided so as to project from the opening 18302a.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 is the rear case 1.
8300 is located closer to the opening 18302a than the projecting portion 18301b, and in a state where no external force is applied, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is opened by the gravity of the rear case 18300. A force that rotates in a direction projecting from the portion 18302a is applied to the engagement member 18310. Accordingly, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is projected to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixed member 18320. It is possible to prevent forgetting.

The interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 18320) in the fastened state are
The protruding wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposition member 18330, and the left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 18320 in front view is locked to the rear case 18300. To be done. In this case, the engaged portion 1833 of the fixing member 18320
2 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is arranged at a position facing the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310.

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 is the rear case 1
The engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the 8300 is pushed into the inside of the rear case 18300 (arrow R1 direction side) (see FIG. 163). The coupling member 18310 is rotated around the protruding portion 18301b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 is connected to the engaged portion 1833.
Can be inserted into the inner space of 2. In this case, the distance between the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but the concave portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 makes it possible. Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed to the inside of the recess 18317, and the distance between the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is adjusted to The end portion of the first piece 18311 can be inserted into the engaged portion 18332 by making the inner space of the engaging portion 18332 smaller than the vertical opening size.

Further, since the connecting portion of the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310.
However, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300 in the engaged state. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is illegally operated and the fixing member 183 is operated.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the board 20 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, the release of the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening 18301c is opened in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it can be operated from the back side (the direction of the arrow B) of the back case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 is recessed with a dedicated tool or the like.
By elastically deforming to the concave side of 317, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 and the engaged portion 18332 of the engaging member 18310 is released. With this engagement released, the engagement member 18310
Is displaced in a direction (arrow L direction) to be pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332, and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned, whereby the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 1833 are returned.
The engagement with 2 can be released.

In addition, it is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the rear case 300 can be made impossible to insert, and the exclusive tool can be inserted. As a result, the board box 100 (main controller 110) can be made replaceable only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a case where the engaging member 18310 is left unengaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG.
64 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that FIG. 164 (a) and FIG.
In (b), a state in which the engagement member 18310 has forgotten to be engaged with the engaged portion 18332 is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b) show a state in which one piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in a front view is removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the engaging member 183 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13
Distance dimension LR from the end of 10 to the end of the rear case 18300 on the right side (arrow R side)
1 (see FIG. 164 (a)) is set to be larger than the left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) of the inner side of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the game board 13 is inserted into the outer frame 11 when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged with each other, the rear surface of the engaging member 18310 contacts the front surface of the outer frame 11. Can be contacted. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged,
The engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18 are restrained by disposing the game board 13 on the outer frame 11.
Forgetting to engage with 320 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 165 and 166, the engaging member 1931 in the nineteenth embodiment.
0 will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated, but in the nineteenth embodiment, the releasing direction of the engaging member 19310. To prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. 166 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed in a substantially L shape in a front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the rear case 19300, and the second piece. The first piece 18311 is formed by bending from one end of 19312.

The second piece 19312 includes a fitting hole 19312b that is circularly opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which a one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and the outer ring 1 of the one-way 19350 is fitted.
It is formed to have the same inner diameter as the 9351.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface and an inner ring 1352.
An outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outside of 9352, and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 arranged between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 (see FIG. 166 (b)), the outer ring. When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 increases, which acts as resistance and transmits power to the outer ring, and the inner ring moves in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351. When rotating, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 becomes low, and the cam type clutch slips to cut off power transmission.
A detailed description of the one way 19350 will be given later.

In addition, an operator 19360 is inserted in the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 includes an operation portion 19361 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 19300 and an insertion portion 19362 projecting on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation portion 19361. Prepare mainly.

The operation portion 19361 is a portion where the operator operates the operator 19360 from the rear surface side of the rear case 19300, is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is formed larger than an opening through which an insertion portion 19362 described below is inserted. . As a result, the operator 19360 is attached to the rear case 1930.
When arranged from the rear side of 0, the operation portion 19361 can be prevented from slipping out to the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the rear case 19300.

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and is provided so as to project on the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the insertion portion 19362 includes a projecting wall 19362a that is provided on the outer peripheral surface thereof so as to project in the radial direction.

The projecting wall 19362a has an inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 with respect to the insertion portion 19362.
2 is an engaging portion that prevents the wheel from idling, and is a concave portion 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352.
2a is inserted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the operating element 19360 from being not transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion that is concavely formed in a circular shape in a front view is formed on the protruding front end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and a screw is screwed into the concave portion from the front side to the rear side, so that the one-way 19350 is formed. The operator 19360 can be connected to the.

Next, the arrangement of the rear case 19300 and the engagement member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front, and the respective wall portions 19301, 302. With this, one side (front side) is formed into a box shape with an open side.
Further, the rear case 19300 has a front side of the bottom wall portion 19301 (a box-shaped open side (
An engaging member 19310 provided on the rear side of the rear case 19300, and a fixing member 18320 provided on the rear side of the rear case 19300 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110),
Equipped with.

In the bottom wall portion 19301, an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed in the center, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that Further, in the bottom wall portion 19301, a first opening portion 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and below the first opening portion 18301c (arrow D
Direction), opened in the front-rear direction, and inserted into the inside of the above-mentioned operator 19360.
2 into which an opening (not shown) is inserted.

The above-mentioned engaging member 19310 is provided with the one-way 19350 inside the fitting hole 19312 b, and the engaging member 19310 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301. The insertion part 19362 of the rear case 1930
By being inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of 0, the one-way 19350 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 19301.

Next, the operation of the one way 19350 will be described. One way 1 as described above
9350 is switched between a case where the transmission of power to outer ring 19351 is permitted and a case where the transmission is blocked in one rotation direction of inner ring 19352 and the other rotation direction.

First, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. FIG. 166 (
As shown in b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 193 is interposed between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
54 is pinched, the contact of the roller 19354 becomes a resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 becomes the outer ring 1.
9351 is transmitted. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to the direction in which the engagement member 19310 is engaged with the fixed member 18320.

Next, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced inward in the radial direction of the inner ring 19352 by the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. As a result, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 becomes low, and the roller 19354 slides on the outer ring 19351 to interrupt power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction of the other direction is set to the direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixed member 18320.

Accordingly, with the engagement member 19310 arranged in the rear case 19300, the operator 1
The 9360 can be rotated to engage the engagement member 19310 with the fixed member 18320. Furthermore, from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, the operator 19
It is restricted that 360 is rotated to release the engagement between the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320. As a result, the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360) is illegally operated,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, referring to FIGS. 167 to 169, the engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment.
0 will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is caused by the rotation unit 70.
The case of being restricted by the screw inserted into the rear base 720 of No. 0 has been described.
In the 0th embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
The movement of 310 causes the engaging portion 20 formed on the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700.
It is regulated by being engaged with 724a. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment.
0 and the rotation unit 20700 will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 20300 and the rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 168 (a)
FIG. 168 is a front view of the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310.

The back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment in that a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 are directed from the front to the front. An outer wall portion 302 that is erected is provided, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) being open. A rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the bottom wall portion 30 passes through the opening 301a.
The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of 1 is visible.

In addition, the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment includes an engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (a box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) and the rear case 20300. The board box 100 (main controller 11 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).
0) and a fixing member 320 for fixing. Further, in the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, the rotation unit 20700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engagement member 20310 arranged on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank shape in a front view. And the first pieces 31 that are formed in the same and extend in directions parallel to each other.
1 and 2nd piece 20312, and the 3rd piece 313 which connects the edge parts of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312 to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the 1st piece 311 and the 2nd piece 20312. To be done.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 having an elongated hole in the extending direction thereof, whereby the engagement member 20310 is provided with the first piece 311 and the second piece 232.
It is slidable in the extension direction of 0312 (arrow LR direction).

The second piece 20312 also includes a recess 20312c that is recessed on a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the tip of the engaging portion 20724a of the back base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted.
It is formed in a shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of 24a.

More specifically, the concave portion 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) up to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the side connected to the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side). Dimension SH2 (FIG. 168 (
It is set to be substantially the same as in (b)). Further, the recess 20312c is provided in a triangular shape whose angle in the front view is a right angle, and the right angle portion is set on the connection side (the arrow R direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

The rotation unit 20700 has the opening 301 of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300.
a rear side base 20720 having a rectangular shape as viewed from the front, which is disposed on the right side of the lower portion of a (the arrow R direction side), and a rotating body 800 disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the rear side base 20720 (see FIG. 9
3)), the player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the light-transmissive center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13.

The back surface base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball pedestal 710 and the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball pedestal 710 and the decoration unit 750. The back base 20720 also includes a standing wall 20724 that stands from the back surface.

The standing wall 20724 extends in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 arranged in the rear case 20300. In addition, the standing wall 20724 is provided in the recess 20 of the engaging member 20310.
An engaging portion 20724a that is formed at a position facing the 312c and has a tip inserted into the inside of the recess 20312c is provided.

The engaging portion 20724a is provided so as to project from the standing wall 20724 in the direction (the arrow R direction) in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, and stands upright in the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed with a predetermined gap from the wall 20724. Thereby, the engaging portion 2
The rigidity of 0724a can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation of the engaging portion 20724a. Also,
An area in which the engaging portion 20724a can elastically deform can be ensured by the amount of the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

In addition, the engaging portion 20724a includes a bent portion 2 that bends toward the engaging member 20310 side at the protruding tip portion.
0724a1 and the bent portion 20724a1 has a front view shape of the recessed portion 2031 described above.
It is formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same shape as 2c. As a result, the engaging member 20310 is bent inside the concave portion 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before engaging with the fixing member 320.
0724a1 is arranged. Therefore, the engaging member 20310 is moved in the displacement direction (arrow L-R).
It is possible to make it difficult to slide in the direction) (see FIG. 168 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from vibrating against the rear case 20300 by a force such as vibration or shaking and moving in the engagement direction (the arrow R direction) with the fixing member 320. Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is arranged on the rear case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is arranged on the rear case 20300, the fixing member 32 is arranged.
It is possible to prevent the engaged portion 332 of 0 from contacting the engaging member 20310. In other words,
When disposing the fixing member 320 on the rear case 20300, the engaged portion 33 of the fixing member 320
It is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from being located in the displacement region when the second member (see FIG. 167) is arranged. As a result, it is not necessary to operate the engagement member 20310 in the direction to release the engagement with the fixed member 320, and thus workability at the time of engaging the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 320 can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and the rotation unit 20700 in a state where the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 320 are engaged with each other will be described. FIG. 169
FIG. 169A is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310, and FIG.
b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. 169 (a) and 169 (b)
In (), a state in which the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 20320 are engaged is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 169 (b), the outer shapes of a part of the engaging member 20310 and the standing wall 20724 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, from the rear surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the rear case 20300, the operator 3
15 is operated so that the engaging member 20310 is arranged on the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) in front view with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300.
When it is displaced to the right in the front view (the arrow R direction side) with respect to 1, the recess 20 of the engaging member 20310 is formed.
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed inside the 312c is extruded into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recessed portion 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the side connected to the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side) (see FIG. 168 (a)). However, the dimension SH2 (where the protruding portion 301b is slidable inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310 (
168 (b)), the engagement member 20310 is fixed to the fixing member 320.
The third piece 31 of the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310 is displaced to a position where it engages with
The end portion on the opposite side (the arrow L direction side) of the connection side with 3 and the bent portion 20724a1 and the engaging member 20.
They are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the displacement direction of 310 (arrow LR direction). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being illegally displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the fixing member 320 is released (the arrow L direction).

As in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 includes the engaging portion 316 and the fixing member 3.
By being hooked (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of 20, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 is regulated. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 3
The engagement between 32 and the engaging portion 316 may be unlawfully released via the first opening 301c.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engagement member 20310 in the direction in which the engagement with the fixing member 320 is released, the engagement portion 316 of the engagement member 20310 engaging with the fixing member 320.
Since the end portion on the opposite side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 and regulated, an illegal article is inserted from the first opening portion 301c, and the end portion of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a.
It is possible to prevent the engagement with 1 from being released. As a result, the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 3
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally released from being engaged with the board 20 and being replaced with an illegal board.

It should be noted that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are separated from the rear case 20300 by removing the rotary unit 20700 disposed inside the rear case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301), and the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After the engagement with the 20724a1 is released, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end portion of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332 so that both The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotary unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300.
It is possible to prevent the engagement between 0310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 to be exchanged for an illegal substrate.

Further, since the engagement member 20310 is formed by bending the crank member in a shape of a crank as viewed from the front as described above, an illegal object such as a wire or a wire inserted from the first piece 311 side is linearly formed into a second shape. It can be regulated that the piece 20312 is fed to the end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal article inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately fed to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released, and the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being exchanged for an illegal substrate. .

Then, referring to FIGS. 170 to 173, the rotation unit 21 in the twenty-first embodiment.
700 will be described. In the first embodiment, the back base 72 of the rotary unit 700 is used.
The case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted through 0 has been described.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed on the back base 21720 of the rotation unit 21700. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engagement member 310 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700 according to the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 171 (a
) Is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG. 171 (b) is
FIG. 172 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171 (a).

The back case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment in that a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 are directed from the front to the front. An outer wall portion 302 that is erected is provided, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) being open. A rectangular opening 301a in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. Made possible.

Further, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment includes an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (a box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)), and the rear case 21.
The board box 100 (main controller 110) is provided on the back surface side (direction of arrow B) of the 300.
And a fixing member 320 for fixing. Further, in the rear case 21300 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the rotation unit 21700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotation unit 21700 according to the twenty-first embodiment.
Is a rear base 21720 having a rectangular shape in a front view, which is arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and its rear surface. With the rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) arranged on the front side of the base 21720, an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the light-transmissive center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13 is provided. It can be visually recognized by the player.

The back surface base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball receiving base 710 and the back surface side of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 750. In addition, the back surface base 21720 is provided with a standing wall 21724 standing upright on the back surface thereof.

The standing wall 21724 is extended to a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 310 arranged in the rear case 300. In the standing wall 21724, the engaging member 310 is attached to the rear case 30.
The state (engagement member 310 and fixing member 320) positioned at the left end (on the side of arrow L) with respect to 0
In the state where the engagement with the is released, toward the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 (arrow L
The insert portion 21724b is provided so as to project (in the direction).

The insertion portion 21724b is moved in the displacement direction (arrow L-R) of the engagement member 310 from the standing wall 21724.
Direction) and extends in a direction parallel to the fixed member 320 and overlaps with the engaging member 310 in the state of being engaged with the fixing member 320 in the gravity direction (arrow U-B direction). In addition, the insertion portion 21
A bent portion 21724b1 that bends to the back side (engagement member 310 side) is formed at the tip of 724b, and the bent tip of the bent portion 21742b1 is in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10 (arrow FB direction). The length is set to overlap with the engaging member 310.

Further, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is set to be smaller than the width dimension of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the insertion portion 21724b is provided with the engagement member 310 in the state in which the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixed member 320.
The bent portion 21724b1 is in a state of being inserted inside the recess 317. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recessed portion 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310
It is possible to prevent the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 to be replaced with an illegal substrate.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described. 172 (a) and 173 (
a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. Note that FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) show a state in which the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released, and in FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b), the engagement Composite material 3
The state where 10 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, in the engagement member 310, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixation member 320 from the state in which the engagement with the fixation member 320 is released. Part 3
When inserted into the inner space of 32, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) is made smaller than the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the up-down direction.

Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (in the position shown in FIG. 173 (a)), the end of the first piece 311 is located at the protruding tip of the insertion portion 21724b. It is placed in a position that exceeds. In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is determined by the insertion portion 21.
It is set to be larger than the facing dimension from the protruding tip of 724b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engagement portion 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion of the engagement member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. . In this case, the distal end of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is removed from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 is larger than the width dimension of the concave portion 317. Also, since the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction is increased, the recess 317
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess 317. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main controller 1 is connected to the fixed member 320.
It is possible to prevent 10) from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate.

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disposed inside the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301).
) Is removed from the rear case 21300 to release the engagement between the end of the engaging member 310 and the rear case 20300, and then the first of the engaging member 310 is removed.
By elastically deforming the end portion of the piece 311, and pulling out the end portion of the engaging member 310 from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the engagement between the both can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotary unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300.
The engagement between 10 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released from the back side of the back case 21300,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Then, referring to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engaging member 2231 according to the twenty-second embodiment.
0 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the fixing member 22 is provided in the recess 22311a provided in the engaging member 22310.
The bent portion 22332a1 formed at 320 is engaged. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

174 to 176 (a), the engaging member 22310 in the 22nd embodiment.
The configuration of the fixing member 22320 will be described. FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175 (a) and 175 (b) are front views of the rear case 22300. 176 (a) shows CLXXVIa- of FIG. 175 (b).
It is a schematic cross section of the back case 22300 on the line CLXXVIa. Note that FIG.
In a), the state before engagement between the engagement member 22310 and the fixed member 22320 is shown, and FIG.
75 (b) shows the state in which the engagement member 22310 and the fixed member 22320 are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the back case 223 in the twenty-second embodiment.
00 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front surface. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. Further, the rear case 22300 includes an engagement member 22310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F side) and the bottom wall 3.
01 and a fixing member 22320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The outer shape of the engaging member 22310 is formed in a crank shape in a front view, and the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 extending in directions parallel to each other and the first piece 2231 thereof.
It is configured by a third piece 313 that connects the end portions of the first and second pieces 312 to each other in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

In addition, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 have sliding slots 31 that are long holes that are long in the extending direction.
4 are formed respectively, whereby the engaging member 22310 is slidable in the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction side) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

The recessed portion 22311a has a bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320 described later.
Is a portion where the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged with each other. As described later, the end of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 on one side (arrow R direction side) is fixed. The fixed member 223 when housed in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the member 22320
20 is formed at a position facing 22332a.

In addition, the internal shape of the concave portion 22311a is formed in a substantially right-angled triangular shape in cross section, the right-angled portion is set on the end portion side (arrow R side) of the first piece 22311, and the concave bottom surface is the first. It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back side (direction of arrow B) toward the end side of the one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 includes an interposition member 22330 that engages with the above-described engagement member 22310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back surface side of the interposition member 22330.

The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and has a locking portion 331 protruding to one side surface (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). From the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)) and the engaged portion 22332 formed in a frame shape, and the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side). Mainly includes a circular insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) and a protrusion 334 protruding from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 has a first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in the enclosed internal space.
1 is a portion into which the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) is inserted, and the inner edge shape thereof is the first piece 22.
It is set to be slightly larger than the outer shape of 311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is the engaged portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310 from one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) formed in the frame shape.
The protrusion 22332a is provided so as to protrude in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side).

The protruding portion 22332a has a bent portion 2233 that is bent toward the front side (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip.
2a1 and the bent portion 22332a1 thereof has the concave portion 223 of the engaging member 22310 described above.
By being inserted into 11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged. That is, in the bent portion 22332a1, the engaging member 22310 is the engaged portion 22332.
It is formed at a position facing the concave portion 22311a in the state of being inserted into.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side with the engaging member 22310 sandwiched with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300. To be done. Therefore, the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening portion 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, so that the first
It is possible to prevent an illegal member such as a wire or a wire from being inserted from the opening 301c and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be illegally released.

Further, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be arranged between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the bottom wall portion 301.
It is possible to prevent a wire, a wire, or the like, which is illegally inserted from the opening such as the first opening 301c formed in the above, from linearly reaching the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized members (wires, wires, etc.) from being inserted from the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided so as to protrude in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223
The engaging portion with 20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, the bottom wall portion 3
When an unauthorized member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of 01, the bottom wall portion 3 is set to the insertion direction of the unauthorized member that reaches the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.
01 can be tilted with respect to the front. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit the force in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from the tip of the incorrect member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from being inserted from the first opening portion 301c of the bottom wall portion 301, and thus the engagement between the engagement member 22310 and the fixed member 22320 to be unlawfully released.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176 (b), the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment described above, the case where the protrusion 22332a that engages the engaging member 22310 is provided in a protruding manner in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 to the engaged portion 22332, but in the 23rd embodiment, The engaged portion 23 of the engaging member 23310
A protruding portion 23332a is provided so as to protrude in a direction opposite to the inserting direction of 332. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (a). Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as described above, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223 in the 22nd embodiment.
20 and the engaging position is different, except for the engaging portion between the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320, the description is omitted because it is the same as the twenty-second embodiment.

The rear case 22300 according to the twenty-third embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 that is substantially rectangular in a front view.
01 and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 23301, 302 forms a box shape with one surface side (front side) open. It is formed. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

In addition, the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment is a front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (
The engaging member 23310 provided on the open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape and the back side of the rear case 23300 (arrow B direction side) are provided, and the board box 100 (main controller) is provided. 110) and a fixing member 23320 for fixing the same.

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the twenty-third embodiment, the engaged portion 2333 as described above.
The protruding direction of the protruding portion 23332a protruding from 2 is the protruding portion 22332a of the twenty-second embodiment (
176 (a) (see arrow L direction), and a bent portion 23332a1 that is bent toward the back surface (arrow B direction side) is formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 23332a.

The engaging member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1.
A rectangular opening 23310b that is larger than the outer shape is formed. Thereby, the engaging member 23
When 310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged with each other.

Further, a third opening 23301e is formed in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment at a position facing the fixing member 23320. The third opening 23301e allows the operator to release the engaging portion between the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back surface side of the bottom wall portion 23301. As a result, the rear case 23300
Therefore, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 can be simplified.

Next, referring to FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 243 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment.
00 will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is attached to the bottom wall portion 1830.
The case where the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the engagement member 18310 is released when the fixing member 24320 is removed from the first embodiment has been described. However, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the fixation member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301, the engagement member 24310. Then, the insertion part of the above into the fixing member 24320 is cut.
The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

177 (a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 shows CLXXVIII-C of FIG. 177 (b).
FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 taken along the line LXXVIII.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, a rear case 24300 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment.
Includes a bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front, and one wall side by the respective wall portions 24301, 302. (Front side) is formed in an open box shape. In addition, the rear case 24300 has the bottom wall portion 2
The engaging member 2 disposed on the front side of the 4301 (the open side formed in a box shape (the arrow F direction side))
4310 and the rear side of the bottom wall 24301, and the board box 100 (main controller 1
10) and a fixing member 24320 for fixing the same.

In the bottom wall portion 24301, an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed in the center, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 through the opening 301a.
(See) is visible. Further, in the bottom wall portion 24301, a first opening portion 24301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening portion 24301c, and a front-back direction (arrow F- An operator 24, which will be described later, opened in the B direction)
And an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front and the second piece 2 thereof.
Mainly includes a first piece 24311 that is bent from an end portion of 4312 and extends in an arc shape. The second piece 24312 has a through hole 24 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a connecting portion of two extending portions that intersect at right angles.
The distance distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extending portion of the second piece 24312 is set to be substantially the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operator 24360, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed into a circular shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, the operating member 24360 is rotationally operated, whereby the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape with the through hole 24312d as the center, and the second piece 2
Each end of 4312 is projected in one direction of rotation (left rotation in front view). Also,
Each of the first pieces 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 that protrudes to both sides in the radial direction around the axis of the through hole 24312d at the projecting tip portion, and from the projecting tip surface toward the connecting side of the second piece 24312. And a recessed portion 24317 that is recessed.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320, which will be described later, and is the recess 24.
317 makes it possible to elastically deform the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 to engage with the engaged portion 24332 formed in the fixing member 24320. A detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recess 24317 will be described later.

The operator 24360 is an operation member that transmits an operation from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engagement member 24310 arranged on the front surface side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. The operation portion 24361 formed in a column shape and the insertion portion 24362 that is coaxially projected with the operation portion 24361 are provided. The operation portion 24361 is formed on the bottom wall portion 24301 and has an outer diameter set to a size larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. This can prevent the entire operator 24360 from being displaced to the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion that is inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engaging member 24310 as described above, and thereby the rotational force input from the operating portion 24361 is applied to the engaging member 24.
Can be transmitted to 310.

The fixing member 24320 includes an interposition member 24330 that engages with the above-described engagement member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 that is disposed on the back side of the interposition member 24330.

The interposition member 24330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Also,
The interposition member 24330 is provided with a housing portion 24335 that is formed in a box shape with the lower side (the arrow D direction side) being opened while protruding from the front surface. The housing portion 24335 has the engaging member 2 inside.
4310 is a portion into which the engaging portion (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the open portion on the lower side is arranged on the displacement locus of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. Accordingly, the engagement member 24310 can be rotated to accommodate the end portion of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 in the internal space of the accommodation portion 24335.

Further, the housing portion 24335 is formed such that the internal space thereof is larger than the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 at one place. Thereby, when the engagement member 24310 is cut as described later, the cut portion of the engagement member 24310 can be housed in the internal space of the housing portion 24335. In addition, in the present embodiment, the size of the internal space of the housing portion 24335 is determined by the size of the engaging member 243.
It is set to be approximately three times as large as the engaging portion of 10 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311).
At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be housed in the internal space of 335.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 has an opening on the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a projects in a stepwise manner at the opening portion, and the engaging member 24310 accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335 in the stepped portion 24335a. Engaging portion 24316 is engaged. Accordingly, when the engagement member 24310 is rotated, the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the accommodation portion 24335 and can be engaged with the engagement member 24310 and the fixing member 24320.

Further, in this case, the recessed depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recessed portion 24317 is determined by the accommodation portion 243.
The distance dimension SH4 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension SH4 from the end of the first piece 24311 accommodated and engaged with the housing 35 to the lower end of the housing 24335. Therefore, the engaged first piece 24311
The recessed portion 24317 formed in the above is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 24335. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24.
It is possible to prevent the engagement with 320 from being released.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted inside the housing portion 24335.
By cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the housing portion 24335 of the bottom wall portion 24301.
The fixing member 24320 can be removed from the.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the housing portion 24335 to the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 is set to be larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. Accordingly, the cut portion of the first piece 24311 can be moved to above the housing portion 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the housing portion 24335 to insert the step portion 24335a. Can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is detached from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined by
The determination can be made based on the number of the remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodation portion 24335. As a result, the fixing member 2432
0 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board, the engaging member 24
Depending on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335, it is possible for an operator to recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been illicitly removed.

Further, as described above, in the engaging member 24310, the second piece 24312 is formed in a T shape in a front view, and the region on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T shape) is used, The first member 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated by using the cut region of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is fixed to the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. As a result, the accommodating portion 2433 of the first piece 24311.
The order in which they are housed in 5 can be determined. Therefore, the worker is the first uncut
Since it is possible to visually check the position of the piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been released illegitimately, it is possible to determine that the number of the first piece 24311 is illegitimate as compared with the case where the operator counts the number. It is possible to prevent the operator from overlooking the trace.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is the main body 1
Although the case where the decorative member 154 is bonded to the base plate 60 has been described, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is bonded to the front surface side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179 (a) and 179 (b) is sectional drawing of the game board 25013 in 25th Embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Further, FIG. 179 (b) shows a state where the general winning opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60.

The game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is a game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly to, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60.
In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening. Winning mouth 6
4, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Mounted on the side. Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the second opening 60b (see FIG.
The general winning opening unit 25150 is disposed in the opening portion (see 1).

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning opening unit 25150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is provided with a main body section 151 arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. A first standing portion 152 that stands on the end of the body 151, and a second standing portion that stands from the front of the body 141 and has one end connected to the first standing portion 152. 1
53, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back side of the main body 151, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed in the main body 151 are mainly provided.

The decoration member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material, and is decorated with a pattern or characters (pattern) that is continuous with the decoration member 60c arranged on the front side of the base plate 60. Also,
The decorative member 25154 is formed such that the shape of the outer edge thereof is slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body 151.

Further, the decorative member 25154 is provided with an adhesive tape 25154a which is adhered to the front surface of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60c) at the rear end portion of the decorative member 25154. As a result, the decorative member 25154 can be bonded and disposed on the base plate 60. Therefore, when disposing the decoration member 25154 on the base plate 60, the operator can attach the decoration member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60. Therefore,
The decorative positions of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily aligned. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decoration positions of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 from being displaced, and to give the player the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. You can make it easier to see.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60c), the front-back direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is greater than that in the case where the front side of the main body 151 is decorated. The arrangement in (the arrow FB direction) can be brought closer. As a result, the decorative members 25154, 6 when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 25154 from an angle.
It is possible to suppress an increase in the positional deviation of the decoration of 0c. As a result, the decorative member 25 is provided to the player.
154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized by the player as a single decoration.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the recessed dimension X1 of the recess 151b of the main body 151 is set to be smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction) in which the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a are combined. To be done. Accordingly, when the main body 151 is arranged from the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is recessed in the concave portion 151b.
It is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the recessed bottom surface 151b2.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recess 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust or the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60 and making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.

Next, a game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the main body 26 is formed.
An inclined surface 26151a formed at the end of 151 is formed in an arcuate cross section that bulges outward. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

180 (a) and 180 (b) are sectional views of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Also, in FIG. 180 (a), the player sets the game board 26013 at a position higher than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from the viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity is shown by a chain double-dashed line. In FIG. 180 (b), the player normally uses the game board 26013. The line of sight when viewed from the position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction substantially intermediate position of the game board 26013) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is a game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare Also, the game board 26013 is a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (See) back side. Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 26150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening portion 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning hole unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 26151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and The decoration member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

The main body portion 26151 is made of a transparent resin material and is disposed on the back surface side of the decorative member 15.
The decorations such as the pattern 4 and the characters (pattern) of 4 are visible from the player side. In addition, the main body 261
Reference numeral 51 denotes an inclined surface 26151a that has an end portion in the front view that is inclined toward the rear surface side and swells in an arcuate cross section, and a recessed portion 1 that is recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front surface side.
51b, and is formed mainly.

In the inclined surface 26151a, the inclination angle θ1 of the virtual line IL1 connecting the connection point with the front surface of the main body portion 26151 and the rear end portion with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. To be done. As a result, light propagating in the horizontal direction in the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body portion 2615 more than when the inclination angle θ1 is set to be larger than 45 degrees.
The incident angle when the light is incident on the outside of 1 is increased. Therefore, when the light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, the player wins the general winning opening unit 2615 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013.
When 0 is visually recognized, the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c in the front-rear direction, and thus the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150.
Together with the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, it can be easily visually recognized as one decoration.
In this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in an arcuate cross-section that bulges outward, the main body portion 2615 becomes closer to the center side (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)) of the main body portion 26151.
The incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction 1 enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, the light that travels in the horizontal direction in the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a toward the center side of the main body portion 26151 (the lower side in FIG. 180 (a)).
The incident angle when entering the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through which the player passes the intermediate position between the connection point with the front surface of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back surface via the inclined surface 26151a. When the decoration on the side is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the inside of the main body portion 26151 can be easily approximated to the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the concave portion 151b has a horizontal end H that passes through an intermediate position between the connection point with the front surface of the main body 26151 and the rear surface end.
It is set below R1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player visually recognizes the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151. Can be easily approached in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the higher position than normal on the game board 26013, the inclined surface 26
The decoration of the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 through the 151a, and the general winning opening unit 2615
It can be easily made visible to the player by combining with the decoration of the decoration member 154 of 0. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily combined and visually recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 26013, the main body is formed by the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction in the portion 26151 is incident from the inclined surface 26151a to the outside of the main body portion 26151 is close to a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151 can be hardly refracted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from bending when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the decorative member 15 of the general winning opening unit 26150.
4 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be made difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily combined and visually recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the main body 2 is formed.
An inclined surface 27151a formed at the end of 6151 is formed in an arcuate cross section that is recessed inside the main body 27151. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

181 (a) and 181 (b) is sectional drawing of the game board 27013 in 27th Embodiment. 181 (a) and 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Further, in FIG. 181 (a), the player sets the game board 27013 at a position higher than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from the viewpoint of the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity is shown by a chain double-dashed line. In FIG. 181 (b), the player normally uses the game board 27013. The line of sight when viewed from the position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction substantially intermediate position of the game board 27013) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare In addition, the game board 27013 is a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (See) back side. Further, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the general winning opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening portion 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning hole unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is a plate-shaped main body portion 27151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and its The decoration member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 27151.

The main body 27151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided on the back side of the decorative member 15.
The decorations such as the pattern 4 and the characters (pattern) of 4 are visible from the player side. Also, the main body 271
51 is an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross section in which an end portion in a front view is inclined toward the rear surface side and is recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151, and the rear surface of the main body portion 27151 is concave toward the front surface side. The recess 151b to be provided is mainly provided.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 of the virtual line IL2 that connects the connection point with the front surface of the main body portion 27151 and the end portion on the rear surface side with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than 45 degrees. To be done. Thereby, the protrusion distance of the inclined surface 2751a to the outside can be reduced, and the outer shape of the main body 27151 can be prevented from increasing.

Further, as described above, the inclined surface 27151a is formed in an arcuate cross-section that is recessed inside the main body 27151, so that the player can use the inclined surface 27151a to insert each decorative member 60c.
, 154, it is possible to widen the area in which the decoration of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be viewed through the inclined surface 27151a due to the recessed shape. That is, the main body 27151
Due to the arcuate cross-section that is recessed toward the inner side of each of the decorative members 60c and 154, the inclined surface 2
The light incident on the 7151a can be refracted and condensed toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, the pattern or characters (pattern) visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a can be reduced to make it difficult for the player to connect the decorative members 60c and 154. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the positional deviation of the decorative members 60c and 154, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal end H that passes through an intermediate position between the connection point with the front surface of the main body 27151 and the rear end.
It is set above R2 and on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are The incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction in the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion of is incident from the inclined surface 26151a to the outside of the main body portion 26151 is increased. Therefore, the light traveling in the horizontal direction in the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decoration member 154 is easily refracted toward the player's viewpoint side, so that the player moves from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning opening unit 27150 is viewed from a higher position, the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the front-back direction positions of the connecting portions of 4, 60c, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60.
Together with 0c, it can be easily seen as a decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 27013, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a causes the decoration. The light that travels horizontally in the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 enters the outside of the main body portion 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a, and therefore, the incident angle approximates to a right angle, so that the light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 27151. It is possible to make refracted light difficult to refract. Therefore,
By suppressing the direction of the line of sight of the player from bending when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, the front and rear misalignment of the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is played. It is possible to make it difficult for the person to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily combined to be visually recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body 151 has been described. In the embodiment, the inner surface of the end of the recess 28151b is the recessed bottom surface 151.
It is inclined inward toward the b2 side. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction substantially intermediate position of the game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare In addition, the game board 28013 is a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (See) back side. Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 28150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening portion 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 28151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 28151. .

The main body portion 28151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided on the back surface side of the decorative member 15.
The decorations such as the pattern 4 and the characters (pattern) of 4 are visible from the player side. Also, the main body 281
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the rear surface side, and a concave portion 28151b which is recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 28151 toward the front surface side.

The inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is, as described above, outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) to the main body portion 2.
It is formed to be inclined toward the end side of 8151. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 of the inner surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recess 28151b with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 182).
(Refer to (a)) is the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (
(See FIG. 182 (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), the player has the inclined surface 2815 of the main body portion 28151.
When visually recognizing the decorative member 60c through the 1a, the decorative position of the virtual image that is bent by passing through the main body portion 28151 and visually recognized by the player and the decorative member 60c without the main body portion 28151.
Can be brought close to the decoration position of the real image when recognizing. That is, the decorative member 60 that is visually recognized by being refracted by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner side surface 28151b3 of the concave portion.
The position of c can be located on an extension of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the main body portion 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the decoration caused by the refraction of light and prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (b), a game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner side surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is shown.
The case where the inclination angle θ3 of 1b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60 has been described, but in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b. The inclination angle θ5 of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface is set to be larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction substantially intermediate position of the game board 29013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare In addition, the game board 29013 is a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (See) back side. Further, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 29150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening portion 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body 29151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 29151. .

The main body 29151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided on the back side of the decorative member 15.
The decorations such as the pattern 4 and the characters (pattern) of 4 are visible from the player side. Also, the main body 291
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the rear surface side, and a concave portion 29151b which is recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 29151 toward the front surface side.

The inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b is, as described above, outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side).
It is formed to be inclined toward the end portion side of 9151. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 182).
(Refer to (b)) is the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (
182 (b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), the player can move the inclined surface 151a of the main body 29151.
When the decorative member 60c is visually recognized through the inside of the concave portion 29151b, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the player's viewpoint through the inclined surface 151a is used.
The light can be emitted in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of 1b3. Therefore, when light is incident on the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154, refraction of light can be suppressed. As a result, the inner surface 291 of the recess 29151b is
When light is incident on 51b3, the light is refracted, so that the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are
It is possible to suppress the connection portion of the above from being visually recognized from the upper side in the gravity direction, and it is possible to make the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 easily visible to the player as one decoration.

In addition, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, the gap can absorb a dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed.

Next, referring to FIG. 183 (a), the general winning opening unit 30 in the thirtieth embodiment
150 will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, the inner side surface 2815 of the recess 28151b is formed.
Although the case where 1b3 is formed to be inclined has been described, in the thirtieth embodiment, the recess 301 is formed.
The inner side surface 30151b3 of 51b is formed so as to bulge inward of the recess 28151b and be curved in an arc shape in cross section. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare In addition, the game board 30013 is a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63,
The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (See) back side. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 30150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening portion 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 183 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction substantially intermediate position of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated by.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 30151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the rear surface side of the main body portion 30151. .

The main body portion 30151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided on the back surface side of the decorative member 15.
The decorations such as the pattern 4 and the characters (pattern) of 4 are visible from the player side. Also, the main body 301
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the rear surface side, and a concave portion 30151b which is recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 30151 toward the front surface side.

The inner side surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed so as to be inclined outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, it bulges toward the inside of the recess 30151b in an arcuate cross section.
Accordingly, it is possible to easily direct the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b in the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, the recess 30
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized through the 151b, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the decoration member 154 from being visually recognized, and the player can easily recognize the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration. .

Next, referring to FIG. 183 (b), a general winning opening unit 311 in the thirty-first embodiment.
50 will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the inclined surface 151a is formed as a surface having a linear cross section has been described, but the inclined surface 31151a in the thirty-first embodiment includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment in the game board 31013.
Includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Also, game board 3
1013 includes rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, in addition to a number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, on a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2).
(Refer to FIG. 1), and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Further, in the thirty-first embodiment, the general winning opening unit 31150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening portion 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment.
The general winning opening unit 31150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body 31151 along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 31151.

The main body 31151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided on the back side of the decorative member 15.
The decorations such as the pattern 4 and the characters (pattern) of 4 are visible from the player side. Also, the main body 311
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the rear surface side, and a concave portion 151b which is recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 31151 toward the front surface side.

The inclined surface 31151a has a plurality of recessed portions 311 recessed in a direction orthogonal to the inclined direction.
51a1 is provided. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the inclination direction of the inclined surface 31151a, and extend along the end of the main body portion 31151 in a front view. As a result, the light is made incident on the inside of the main body portion 31151 and the end portion (the inclined surface 311) of the main body portion 31151.
The light emitted from 51a) can be diffusely reflected. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the decoration that is visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 provided in the main body portion 31151 is provided on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60 are performed.
It is possible for the player to visually recognize the connected portion of the decoration of c in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the respective decorative members, and it is possible for the player to easily recognize the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjusting means for adjusting the interval between the facings to change the downflow direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment.
550 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. Although described, in the 32nd embodiment,
A case will be described in which the facing interval between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the screw fastening position. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment.
The configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 184 is a special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment.
It is a disassembled perspective front view of 550. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185 (c) is
It is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 taken along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment.
Includes a first path member 32560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 32570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 32560.

The first path member 32560 is formed of a non-light transmissive material. In addition, the first path member 32
Reference numeral 560 denotes a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion protruding from the left and right end portions of the front plate 32564 to the rear side (base plate 60 side). 3256
5 and.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 32570 and the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it possible for the player to make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game balls inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the second wall portion 32565 of the two.
A plurality of side projections 32565d that are arranged in parallel on the opposing surfaces of the above and project in a triangular shape in section,
Mainly includes an upright portion 32565e that is upright from the upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565 on the opposing surface side of the second wall portion 32566.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole into which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed in each of the first wall portions 32565 one by one.

The one-side protruding portion 32565d is a portion that is inserted into the other-side concave portion 32573c of the second path member 32570, which will be described later, to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is in the front-back direction (arrow F They are installed side by side in the (-B direction) and in the vertical direction (arrow U-D).
Is extended in the direction.

The upright portion 32565e covers the one-side protrusion 32565d, so that the one-side protrusion 325 from the player.
This is a portion that makes 65d invisible, and is set to be larger than the projecting distance of the one-side projecting portion 32565d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 while suppressing the visual recognition of the position where the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side concave portion 32573c. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the pachinko machine 10 because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

The second path member 32570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 32571 facing the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and the first path member 32560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) end portions of the base plate 32571. And a fourth wall portion 32573 protrudingly provided on the front plate 32564 side.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a ball-sending path for the game ball in the gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564 facing each other, and in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 in a front view. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the base plate 32571. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 has a fourth protrusion 3257 protruding toward the first path member 32560.
1b and the 5th convex part 32571c, and those 4th convex part 32571b and these 5th convex part 32571.
and a sixth convex portion 32571d which is located below c and projects toward the front plate 32564 side.

The 4th convex part 32571b and the 5th convex part 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are the base from the outer side in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571 (the outer side in the arrow LR direction). The plate 32571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center.
As a result, the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 flow down between the opposing surfaces, and the fourth convex portion 3
2571b or the game ball that collides with the fifth convex portion 32571c, the fourth convex portion 32571b
Alternatively, it is possible to facilitate the flow down in the inclination direction of the fifth convex portion 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the above-described fourth convex portion 32571b and fifth convex portion 32571c, and is formed at the substantially central position of the base plate 32571 in the left-right direction. The sixth convex portion 32571d is extended in the gravity direction. As a result, the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 flow down between the opposing surfaces, and the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571.
The game ball guided to c is distributed to either the left or right of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

The two fourth wall portions 32573 facing each other have a plurality of other recesses 32573c recessed toward the inner side in the facing direction on the outer side surfaces in the facing direction, and the adjustment holes 32573 penetrating in the facing direction.
b and the adjustment holes 32573 formed on the inner side in the facing direction of the four wall portions 32573 at two locations.
and a housing portion 32573d surrounding b.

The other-side recessed portions 32573c are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction of the fourth wall portion 32573 (arrow FB direction) and extend in the gravity direction. The other-side recess 32573c is formed by recessing in a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross-sectional shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as that of the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side concave portion 32573c, and the first path member 3 is inserted.
2560 can be positioned.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted into the accommodation portion 32573d side. Also, the adjustment hole 3257
3b is formed in a long hole that is long in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), which allows movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570.

The housing portion 32573d is formed to have a U-shaped cross section in a front view, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. The housing portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the end portion on the front surface side of the fourth wall portion 32573. As a result, the storage unit 3
In the space surrounded by 2573d, a screwing plate 32590 into which the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjusting hole 32573b is screwed can be housed.

The screwing plate 32590 is set to a size that can be inserted into the space formed by the housing portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is the front-back direction dimension of the space formed by the housing portion 32573d ( It is set to be smaller than the projecting dimension of the fourth wall portion 32573 to the front side. Thereby, the screwing plate 32590 can be inserted inside the housing portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

Further, the screwing plate 32590 is a screwing hole 32591 into which the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjusting hole 32573b is screwed, and the front-back direction of the screwing hole 32591 (direction of arrow FB).
Guide projections 3259 projecting from opposite ends of the two toward the facing surface of the fourth wall portion 32573 at two locations.
2 and.

The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Also, 2
The screwing holes 32591 at some locations are formed at positions where the distance dimension of one screwing hole 32591 from the upper end and the distance dimension of the other screwing hole 32591 from the lower end are the same. Thus, when the screw groove of either one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with a predetermined amount on both outer sides in the left-right direction from both front and rear portions, and includes an inclined surface inclined toward the screw hole 32591 side. Thereby, the through hole 325
The tip of the screw inserted through 65c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to the screw hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screwing hole 32591 is damaged, the screwing hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the screw hole 32 for the tip of the screw
Since the position of 591 is likely to be out of alignment, the tip of the screw is screwed into the screw hole 32 as in the present embodiment.
The configuration of guiding to 591 is particularly effective.

In the method of adjusting the first route member 32560 with respect to the second route member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as above, first, the through hole 3256 of the first route member 32560.
Loosen the screw inserted into 5c and screwed into the screwing plate 32590. This allows the second
The movement of the first route member 32560 is allowed with respect to the route member 32570.

Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 to the outside in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, the first route member 32 inserted in the other side recessed portion 32573c of the second route member 32570.
After pulling out the one-side protrusion 32565d from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted to return the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 at the adjusted position and the one-side protrusion 3 again.
2565d is inserted into the other side concave portion 32573c. Accordingly, the second path member 32570
On the other hand, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned).

Finally, the threaded plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and
By re-tightening the screw screwed to the 590, the first path to the second path member 32570
The adjustment of the path member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, since the one side protrusion 32565d and the other side recess 32573c are formed in the corresponding shapes, the one side protrusion 3256 can be obtained by temporarily fixing and then fastening the screw.
5d can be pushed into the other side concave portion 32573c. Therefore, the one side protrusion 32565d can be adjusted so as to be always in the same position at each position where the other side recess 32573c can be inserted. As a result, it is possible to suppress variations in the flow of the game balls depending on the operator who makes the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550,
186 (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 32550 taken along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb of FIG. 186 (a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. 185. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 on the left side and the base plate 32571 facing each other is made wider than that on the right side. In this case, since the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other is less likely to collide with the left fourth convex portion 32571b, the game ball can be easily flowed down between the left facing parts by that amount. . Thereby, the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571
It is possible to easily discharge the game ball flowing down between the opposing parts from the lower left side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment will be described. In the 32nd embodiment, the case where the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted while the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed has been described. In the configuration, the first wall portion 33565 is attached to the front plate 32.
564 is variably connected. Regarding the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments,
The same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first route member 33560 in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 33550. Note that FIG.
b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment has a first route member 33560 arranged on the front side and a second route member arranged on the back side of the first route member 33560. 32570, and.

The first path member 33560 is a front plate 33 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area.
564 and the 1st wall part 33565 pivotally supported by the left and right end parts of the front plate 33564 thereof.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 32570 and the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it possible for the player to make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game balls inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size such that the rod RD can be inserted into an inner portion formed in an annular shape. In addition, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two positions that are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side of the holding portions 33564e at the two positions is the front plate 33564.
It is formed at the lower end portion and the lower end side is closed. As a result, the rod RD is held by the holding portion 3
When the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding portion 33564e from above the 3564e, it is possible to prevent the rod RD from falling off (leaving out) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 325.
One side projection 32565d which is provided in parallel with each other on the opposing surface of 65 and projects in a triangular shape in cross section
And a standing portion 32565e which is erected from the upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565 (in the direction of the arrow U-D) on the facing surface side of the second wall portion 32566, and a circular cross section on the front plate 33564 side. Mainly includes a shaft-supported portion 33565f that protrudes to the.

The shaft-supported portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD to be inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and an inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size capable of inserting the rod RD. . Further, the shaft-supported portions 33565f are formed at two positions vertically spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance, and the axes of the annular portions of the shaft-supported portions 33565f are coaxial with each other in the vertical direction. Further, the two pivotally supported portions 33565f have the above-mentioned holding portions 335 between them.
A holding portion 33564e formed above the 64e is disposed.

Accordingly, the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 are connected to each other by the holding portion 33564.
By arranging e and the shaft-supported portion 33565f on the same axis, and inserting the rod RD from the upper side inside the holding portions 33564e and the shaft-supported portion 33565f, the front plate 3356.
4, the first wall portion 33565 is rotatably arranged.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570 is formed.
When the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is arranged non-parallel to 71, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed with respect to the front plate 33564.

That is, in the thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is arranged non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 325 is arranged.
It is necessary to hold the first wall portion 33565 in an elastically deformed state with respect to 64. In addition, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, and the second path member 3
2570 One side protrusion 325 of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c
It is necessary to pull out 65d from the other side concave portion 32573c. Therefore, the front plate 32564
There is a possibility that the connecting portion between the first wall portion 32565 and the first wall portion may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall are not necessary. It is possible to suppress damage to the connection portion with the portion 33565.

In the method of adjusting the first route member 33560 with respect to the second route member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as described above, first, the through hole 3256 of the first route member 33560.
Loosen the screw inserted into 5c and screwed into the screwing plate 32590. This allows the second
The movement of the first route member 33560 is permitted with respect to the route member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 to the outside in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the first route member 3356 inserted into the other side recessed portion 32573c of the second route member 32570.
After pulling out the one side protrusion 32565d of 0 from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted and the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 is returned at the position after the adjustment to again rotate the one side protrusion 32565.
The d is inserted into the other side concave portion 32573c. Accordingly, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the screw plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560, and
By re-tightening the screw screwed to the 590, the first path to the second path member 32570
The adjustment of the route member 33560 is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188 to FIG. 190, the special winning device 345 according to the 34th embodiment.
50 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the game ball flows down is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550 has been described.
In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down can be adjusted by changing the position of the protrusion projecting toward the inside of the flow-down path. Regarding the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments,
The same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188 (b) is a CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the game board 34013 in a line. FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment.
Is arranged above the first winning opening 64 arranged on the game board 34013. Further, in the special winning device 34550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning port 64 in a front view. .

Furthermore, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning opening 64 are in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction).
Are arranged at positions separated by the diameter of the game ball. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 345 arranged on the front side (arrow F side).
60, a second route member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first route member 34560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back side of the second route member 34570. Prepare

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the downflow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 34570 and the second path member 34570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material.
This makes it possible for the player to make the game ball flowing through the inside of the special winning device 34550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game balls inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape, and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and the front side plate 34564 and the rear side (arrow direction) from the left and right end portions of the front plate 34564. A first wall portion 34565 that is provided upright on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 32570 and the second path member 32570, which will be described later. Also has a large outer shape when viewed from the front. As a result, the second path member 34570 disposed on the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 is attached to the front plate 3.
4564 makes it difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, from the player side, the second path member 3457
It is possible to suppress that 0 is visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the change from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. The standing dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the rear surface side is the front plate 345.
64 and the dimension X3 between the opposing portions of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571 described later (see FIG. 18).
8 (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the standing tip portion, and a through hole 34565g1 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. It The through hole 34565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 is screwed into the base plate 34060, whereby the first hole is formed.
The path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 that faces the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 provided in a cylindrical shape from the back surface side of the base plate 34571.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a ball-sending path for the game ball in the gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564 facing each other, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 34571 has the fourth protrusion 345 protruding toward the front plate 34564 side.
71b. As a result, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 facing each other collides against the fourth convex portion 34571b and flows down.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and the cylindrical shaft is
It is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). In addition, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579 on the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and the support portion 34 is provided inside the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. As a result, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at the protruding tip thereof. Fastening hole 345
The reference numeral 79a is provided coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579 and has an inner peripheral surface with female threads. Accordingly, the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back surface side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-mentioned second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and has a columnar operation portion 34553a and a front surface side of the operation portion 34553a. And a screw portion 34553b provided.

The operation portion 34553a is a portion gripped by an operator who disposes the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and has an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed on the base plate 34060. In addition, the operation portion 34553a is provided in the through hole 34 of the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

Accordingly, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553 is provided.
Can be prevented from slipping out to the front side of the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d.

The screw portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 34553a, and
The outer peripheral surface is machined with a male screw. As described above, the screw portion 34553b is a portion screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, has an outer diameter smaller than that of the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. And is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game balls discharged from the special winning device 34550, the worker is the base plate 34 of the game board 13.
Insert the hand (arm) from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060 through the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in 060. Then, the operating portion 34553a of the fixture 34553 is accessed.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to fasten the fastening holes 34579 of the second path member 34570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed to a. As a result, the second path member 34570 can be rotationally displaced about the support portion 34579, the second path member 34570 is rotated, and the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570 is changed. Fourth convex portion 345
When the position of 71b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so that the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 is changed. Can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof, so that the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in the front view can be suppressed from changing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 is rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the game is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. FIG. 190 (a) to FIG.
90 (d) is a sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along the line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the protruding shape of the fourth convex portion 34571b in a front view is formed in a substantially V shape. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is sent to the central portion along the slope of the V-shape. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 provided below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are arranged on the left and right ends along the inclination of the V-shape. It is easy to send a ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 190 (c) and FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged at one of the left and right ends, a game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550. It is possible to easily send a ball along the upper slope of the V-shape, and to send a game ball that is sent to the lower side of the V-shape without colliding with the upper side of the V-shape along the lower-side slope of the V-shape. You can Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is delivered can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V-shape and the lower side of the V-shape.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is possible to dispose the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d). For example, in FIG.
When the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right in the front view from the position shown in 0 (a), the game ball flowing from above the special winning device 34550 is caused to flow down along the V-shaped inclination. Thus, it is possible to easily discharge the game ball from a position slightly shifted to the left side (arrow L side) from the upper side of the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193, the special winning device 355 in the thirty-fifth embodiment.
50 will be described. In the 34th embodiment, the case where the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b has been described, but in the 35th embodiment,
The position of the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed by sliding the second path member 35570. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, the special winning device 35 in the 35th embodiment
550 will be described. FIG. 191 (a) shows a game board 35013 according to the 35th embodiment.
191 (b) is a sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIb-CXCIb in FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special winning device 35550.

As shown in FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, a special winning device 35550 in the thirty-fifth embodiment.
Is arranged on the upper side (the arrow U side) of the first winning opening 64 arranged on the game board 35013. In addition, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same line in the front view as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning port 64. Are arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning opening 64 are in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction).
Are arranged at positions separated by the diameter of the game ball. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 355 arranged on the front side (the arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 35570 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560, and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back surface side of the second path member 35570. Prepare

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the downflow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 35570 and the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is made of a non-light-transmitting material.
As a result, it is possible for the player to make the flow direction of the game balls inside the special winning device 35550 invisible. As a result, the player can be prevented from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and the player can be prevented from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape, and is arranged on the front side of the front side of the game area and the rear side (arrow B side) from the left and right ends of the front side 34564. And a first wall portion 35565 that is provided.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 35570 described later and the second path member described later. The outer shape of the 35570 in front view is formed to be larger than that of the base plate 35571. As a result, the second path member 35 disposed on the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560.
The front plate 35564 can make the 570 less visible. Therefore, the second from the player side
It is possible to prevent the route member 35570 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the change from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion that is fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the standing dimension of the first wall portion 34565 having a substantially L-shaped cross section on the back side is the front plate 3556.
4 and a fourth convex portion 35571b of the base plate 35571 described later (see FIG. 191).
(See (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the standing tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565g1 and a recessed portion 35565g2 that is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (arrow F direction side) are formed.

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion for accommodating both left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of a base plate 35571 of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. The bent portion 35565g is recessed in the central portion in the vertical direction. Accordingly, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are housed inside the recessed portion 35565g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portions 35365g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the game is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

Further, the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the distance X5 between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g (see FIG. 191).
(See (b)) is set to be larger than the width dimension X6 of the base plate 35571 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 191 (b)). This allows the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) to be displaced in the left-right direction. The base plate 35571 (second path member 3557)
The displacement method of 0) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 is provided with a plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and a rectangular shape in a rear view from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. And a support portion 35579.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a ball sending path of the game ball in the gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564 facing each other, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b protruding toward the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the base plate 35571 and the front plate 3556 are
It is possible to change the flowing direction by colliding the game ball flowing down between the four facings with the fourth convex portion 35571b.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and is a base plate 345.
A cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the shaft of 71 (center of the base plate 34571).
In addition, in the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 35060e that is long in the left-right direction is opened at a position corresponding to the supporting portion 35579, and the supporting portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. It As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

In the sliding hole 35060e, the width dimension in the lateral direction (arrow U-D direction) is set to be substantially the same as the vertical dimension (arrow U-D direction) of the support portion 35579, and the left and right sides of the support portion 35579 are set. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) is set to be larger than the dimension in the direction (arrow L-R direction). Accordingly, the support portion 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 has a fastening hole 35579a recessed at the protruding tip thereof. The fastening hole 35579a can be internally threaded on the inner peripheral surface, and the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. The projecting size of the support portion 34579 is
The thickness of the base plate 60 is set smaller than that of the base plate 60.
By screwing the screw portion 34553b of 553, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base plate 6
It can be fixed at 0.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the worker is the first formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. Game board 3501 through one opening 60a (center frame 86)
The hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of 3 into the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to access the operation portion 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to fasten the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed to a. As a result, the second path member 35570 is slidable in the left-right direction, the second path member 35570 is slidably displaced, and the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570 is changed. 4th convex part 3557
When the position of 1b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so that the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 is changed. Can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. FIG. 193 (a) to FIG.
93 (c) is a game board 3501 in the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b).
3 is a sectional view of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is used as a reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is in front of the reference position. A state where the second path member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right side in the front view (arrow R direction side) is illustrated in FIG. 193 (c).

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped projecting shape in a front view, and a game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 is centered along the V-shaped inclination. Guided to the part (V-shaped bent part).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is disposed above the first winning port 64, the fourth convex portion 35571b is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. It is possible to make it easy to let the game ball that flows into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b is increased.
Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position displaced to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, as compared with the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position, the special winning device 3555.
It is difficult for the game balls discharged from below 0 to flow into the first winning opening 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60.
The case where 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and is held in a state of being urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the form, the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551 urges the first unit 36551 toward the rear surface side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the game board 36013. Note that FIG.
Reference numeral 94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is slid from the inside of the first opening portion 60a in which the center frame 86 is disposed, and the base plate 6 is removed.
It is formed from the first unit 36551 which is disposed at zero.

The first unit 36551 is provided with a space in which game balls can be sent, and the space is arranged on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be flown into the first unit 36551. Also, the first
The unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b that is provided so as to project from the side surface (rear surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the rear surface side (arrow B direction side).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted. The fastening portion 36551b is provided so as to protrude toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and the base plate 60.
The protruding tip is bent in a direction parallel to the back surface of the.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 bulging toward the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB) toward the bending tip end side with respect to the bulging portion 36551b2. Through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction).

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)). Is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.
Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194). (See (b)) is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

When the screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 is a force for pressing (biasing) the force with which the screw is fastened to the back surface side (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. And is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

Accordingly, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, and thus the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60 is reduced. The force for pushing the bent tip side toward the base plate 60 side by the screw can be converted into the force for pulling out the bent portion at the base end side to the back side (arrow B side). As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw having the first unit 36551 inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and it is possible to easily form the first unit 36551 large by the fastening margin. In addition, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened, so that the first unit 3551
The 6551 can be slid and displaced to be easily attached to the first opening 60a of the base plate 60.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 in the 37th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60.
The case where 51 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 has been described. In the form, the first unit 37551 is fastened by the screw inserted from the rear surface side of the base plate 60, and is held in a state of being urged toward the rear surface side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the game board 37013. Note that FIG.
Reference numeral 95 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed of a first unit 37551 arranged in front of the base plate 60.

The 1st unit 37551 is provided with the space which can send a game ball inside, and the space is arrange | positioned at the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be flown into the inside of the first unit 37551. Also, the first
The unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular projections 3 that are provided on the back side (the direction of the arrow B) in an annular shape.
7551b.

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and an inner peripheral surface of which is internally threaded. In addition, in this embodiment, the annular convex portion 37551b is formed at four positions on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b is formed with a concave portion 37060d which is concavely formed in a circular shape. The concave portion 37060d is a portion into which the circular ring convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the circular ring convex portion 37551b. The recess depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protruding size of the annular protrusion 37551b.

Further, a through hole 37060d1 is formed in the concave bottom surface of the concave portion 37060d so as to penetrate the concave portion 37060 in a circular shape on the same axis. The through hole 37060d1 has an annular convex portion 3755.
It is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into 1b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d. Thereby, a screw can be fastened from the back side of the base plate 60 (direction of arrow B) to the first unit 37551 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (direction of arrow F).

In this case, as described above, the recess depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b. Therefore, by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, The first unit 37551 can be arranged on the base plate 60 in a state in which the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) is biased toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and it is possible to easily form the first unit 37551 large by the fastening margin. Further, in the 37th embodiment, the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be housed inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, and accordingly, the first unit 37551 can be accommodated accordingly.
It is possible to increase the space for sending the game balls formed in.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side with a game ball>
Next, referring to FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
40 will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball housed in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light emitted from the control board 491 and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position of the shadow will be described. However, the lower displacement member 11 in the 38th embodiment
440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game sphere, and recognizes the position of the game sphere at the position where the amount of light is increased. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197 (b) is FIG.
FIG. 197 is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in FIG. 197A, and FIG. 197C is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc in FIG. 197A. Note that in FIG. 197 (a), the front decoration member 384
51 and the front case 38481 are removed, and the front case 38
The LED 38483b arranged at 481 is shown by a chain double-dashed line. Also, FIG. 197 (b)
Also, in FIG. 197 (c), a state in which the front decoration portion 451 is attached is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and the base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers both sides of the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) of 70, a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and the front and rear of the case member 38480. It is mainly provided with the decorative member 11450 formed in the aspect.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is disposed on the front surface side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470.
It mainly includes 8481 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side (direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed in a plate shape that is rectangular and oblong in a front view. Also, the front case 38
Reference numeral 481 denotes an opening 481a that spreads in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction), and a bottom wall portion formed to project from a lower end surface on the back side (arrow B-direction side). 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end, and an LED substrate 38 arranged on the back side.
483 and the like.

The LED substrate 38483 is a member that causes the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481) to emit light, and has a plate-shaped main body 38483a and the main body 38483a.
And a plurality of LEDs 38483b that emit light.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 (arrow L-R direction). Multiple LEDs 384
83b are arrange | positioned at a predetermined space | interval in the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the main-body part 38483a.

In addition, each LED38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (the arrow B direction side) of each LED38483b. As a result, each LED 38
When the game ball is located on the back side of the 483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball to irradiate the front side decoration portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, the front decoration portion 11451 includes the transmission portion 11451b that can transmit light, so that the light reflected by the outer surface of the game ball and applied to the front decoration portion 11451 is transmitted through the transmission portion 11451b. It can be emitted to the player side (direction of the arrow F direction) through. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized from the player side via the transmission part 11451b can be made larger in the part reflected by the game ball than in the other parts. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, it is possible for the player to recognize the position of the game ball sent inside the lower displacement member 38440.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED38483b can be constantly applied to the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, it is preferable that the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the rear case 482 disposed on the rear side (arrow B side) of the LED 38483b have a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, LED
The light emitted from the 38483b can be suppressed from being reflected from the inside of the case member 38480 (the lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmission portion 11451b of the front decoration portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the light emission amount between the front surface on which the game ball is arranged and the other front surface, and the player can recognize the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easier.

Next, referring to FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the 39th embodiment.
0 will be described. In the 38th embodiment described above, the case where the light is reflected by the game ball to make the player recognize the position where the game ball is arranged has been described, but in the 39th embodiment, the ball receiving portion 3
The reflecting member provided on the 9467 reflects light to recognize the position of the game ball. In addition,
The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment.
FIG. 199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIG. 199 (b) and FIG.
FIG. 13C is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 39440. 199 (b) and 199 (
c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment is a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and the base member 4 thereof.
A case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of the case 70; a transmission mechanism 39460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470; and a decorative member 11450 that is disposed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480. , Is provided.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member arranged on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462 and 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461.
And a movable rack 464 that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is slidably disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and the rack gear 476. Of the transmission gear 465 brought into mesh with the transmission gear 465, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and slidably arranged on the front side of the movable rack 464, and the rack 39466. Ball receiving portion 39467 rotatably arranged at one end side
And is mainly formed.

The rack 39466 is formed of a rod-shaped member having a rectangular oblong shape in a front view, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b protruding from the other end to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a front side projection. It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 4
67 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving section 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c formed by bending into a substantially L shape in a front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d, and And a third piece 39467e disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions that hold the game balls sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, and the first piece 39467c.
When the game ball is sent between the second and the third piece 39467d facing each other, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction in which the second piece 39467d is separated from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39.
467d and U are arranged in a U shape in a front view, and a game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U shape.

The first piece 39467c includes an L-shaped receiving piece 39467c4 that forms one extended side, a leg portion 467a that forms the other extended side, and a receiving piece 39467c4 and a leg portion 467a when viewed from the front. A ring-shaped bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 that protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 interposed therebetween. And

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) that is formed in a U shape in a front view by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front, It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 is provided so as to project from two locations at a predetermined distance in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. Further, the connecting portion 39467c1 is the second piece 3 described later.
A portion that connects 9467d and the third piece 39467e is provided with a connection hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and that has a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 has a shaft portion 39467e protruding from a third piece 39467e described later.
3 is an opening to be inserted. In the connecting hole 39467c2, the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d described later has a front surface side (arrow F direction side).
Inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the connection hole 39467c2 (direction of arrow B). As a result, the first piece 39467
The second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

Further, the first piece 39467c includes a recess 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost portion) of the side surfaces on which the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. As a result, the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d
The game ball held by is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c by the load of the game ball.

The second piece 39467d includes a receiving portion 39467c4 and a second piece 394 of the first piece 39467c.
67d is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) that is formed in a U shape in a front view, is formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and is concave in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. Is formed into a curved shape. The second piece 39467d is the first piece 39467c.
An insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and a recessed portion 39467d2 that is formed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) toward the back side (arrow B direction side) from the front side (arrow F direction side). Prepare mainly.

The second piece 39467d has a shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e in the insertion hole 39467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is also displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the second piece 39467d has a connecting portion 39 protruding from two places of the first piece 39467c.
It is arranged between the opposing portions of 467c1 and is connected to the first piece 39467c. This allows the second
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
It is possible to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from being broken by bringing the second piece 39467d into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of 1.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of a third piece 39467e, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in a shape substantially the same as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e is a reflection plate 39467e1 formed in a plate shape that is substantially semicircular in front view,
A shaft portion 394 provided so as to project from the reflection plate 39467e1 toward the rear surface side (arrow B direction side).
67e3 and the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflection plate 39467e1 is made of a resin material and has an outer surface coated with plating. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the LED 38483b is applied to the reflection plate 39467e1, the light can be reflected on the outer surface thereof. In addition, the reflection plate 39467e1 is
The whole is curved and formed in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, when the light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. The shielding of the light of the light emitting body 11491a by the reflecting plate 39467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 39467e3 is a columnar body that is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d as described above. Also, the shaft portion 3
On the protruding front end surface of the 9467e3, the connecting hole 394 is formed from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3.
A hole into which a screw inserted in 67c2 can be screwed is formed. Therefore, in the state in which the shaft portion 39467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the shaft portion 39467e3 is
The first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e can be connected to each other by fastening the screw to the insertion tip end surface of the first piece 3946e.
It can be made rotatable with respect to 7c.

The connecting shaft 39467e4 is, as described above, the concave portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
Inserted in 2. As a result, the second piece 39467d is displaced from the first piece 39467c by the shaft portion 3
When rotationally displaced about 9467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e is replaced with the second piece 39467e.
It can be displaced along with the displacement of d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when the game ball is received between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d facing each other in the ball receiving portion 39467, the received game ball is the first piece 3
9467c and the receiving surface (the inner side surface formed in a U shape in a front view) of the second piece 39467d rolls and is guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. This allows
On the outer surface of the game ball, the second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and arranged on the irradiation of the light of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected by the reflection plate 394 of the third piece 39467e.
67e1 causes the lower displacement member 39440 to reflect on the front surface side (the arrow F direction side), and the transmission unit 1
It can be emitted from 1451b. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the transmissive portion 11451b can be partially increased to allow the player to recognize the position of the game ball sent inside the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, in the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e with the shaft portion 394673e interposed therebetween. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467d.
467e can be rotated toward the first piece 39467c4 side.

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the third piece 394.
The second piece 39467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c by the load of 67e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 39467, it is possible to partially increase the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 and the like.

Further, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated about the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 to emit the lower displacement member 39440. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game balls received in the ball receiving portion 39467, the ball receiving portion 39
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the slide movement of 467 is performed, the ball receiving portion 39 centered around the shaft hole 467b is moved by the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467.
The rotation speed of 467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game balls from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the second piece 39467 is loaded by the load of the third piece 39467e.
Since the direction in which d rotates and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 39467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game sphere is emitted are set to be substantially the same, the game sphere emitted from the emission opening 471 is set. A driving force can be applied when the second piece 39467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 394
Even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 when the game ball is discharged from the exit opening 471 by displacing 67 is small, the speed of the game ball to be ejected can be maintained. As a result, the discharge speed of the game balls emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the problem is notified when the game ball is clogged in the curved portion 581a of the main route SK1 has been described, but in the 40th embodiment, the game ball other than the prescribed size is the main route. An irregularity can be notified when passing through SK1. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is the first unit 405 along the CCb-CCb line in FIG. 200 (a).
It is a schematic cross section of 51. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 200 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 according to the 40th embodiment has a front side (
A first route member 560 disposed on the arrow F side), a second route member 570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first route member 560, and a second route member 570 thereof. And a third path member 40580 disposed on the back surface of the.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) and a lower side of the second path member 570 (arrow D direction side). A second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the first covering member 40581 and the second covering member 582.
Mainly a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) arranged between the covering members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back surface of the second covering member 582. Be prepared for.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a ball-sending path for a game ball that is curved in a substantially U shape on the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is on the back surface side of the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d. 40581a that connects the curved portion 40581a and the plate-shaped mounting portion 4 that is continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a.
0581b and mainly.

The curved portion 40581a includes the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 5).
70) side is formed to be curved in a U shape in cross section, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside thereof. Further, the curved portion 40581a is formed such that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) becomes smaller toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed in a size 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter 1.1 times or more than the specified game ball is sent, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the bending portion 40
The game ball stopped inside 581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (incorrect).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is provided with an opening 40581a1 opening to a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a housing portion 4 projecting in the shape of a box whose upper side is opened from the rear end of the opening 404811a1.
And 0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging a ball having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the specified game ball from the main path SK1, and the opening dimension X15 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) (see FIG. 200 (
a)) is formed with a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. The opening 40
581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581 which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and can send the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. . As a result, when a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified game ball by 0.9% or more is fed, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main route SK1.

The housing portion 40581a2 is a box for housing the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the opening 40
The game ball discharged from 581a1 can be stored in the storage section 40581a2, and the stored game ball can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (incorrect).

In the 40th embodiment, the case where the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are different in size from each other by 0.1 times the game ball having the specified diameter (11 millimeters) has been described, but this is not always the case. However, the magnification of the size with respect to the game ball may be changed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, a first unit 415 according to the forty-first embodiment.
51 will be described. In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the main route SK2, the curved route WK1, and the main route SK3 are vertically (arrows) around the curved portion of the curved route WK1. Although the description has been given of the case where the first concave portion 41571h and the second concave portion 41571i in the forty-first embodiment are formed substantially in the U-D direction).
The third recess 41571j and the third recess 41571j are formed in different shapes. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 of the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201 (b) is a first unit 4 of the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a).
It is a schematic cross section of 1551. FIG. 202 (a) shows the CCIIa-CCI of FIG. 201 (a).
FIG. 202B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along the line Ia, and FIG.
It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit 41551 in CCIIb-CCIIb line of 1 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment.
Is disposed on the front side, the first route member 41560, the second route member 41570 disposed on the back side of the first route member 41560, and the rear face of the second route member 41570. The third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) is mainly provided and formed.

The first path member 41560 is a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross-section that is opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). And a first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563, which are formed on the front plate 41564 and project from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end portion to the rear side (arrow B direction side). (See FIG. 21),
Below the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 (arrow D direction side)
And a first wall portion 41565 extending in a row along the end of a part of the front plate 41564 and formed below the first wall portion 565 at a predetermined interval. It mainly includes two sets of a second wall portion 566 and a third wall portion 567 (see FIG. 21) protruding from two locations.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the facing second path member 41570 and third path member 580 described later,
It is formed of a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 via (through) the front plate 41564.

Further, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b and a second convex portion 415, respectively, at positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later.
64c and the 3rd convex part 41564d are protrudingly provided.

The second path member 41570 is provided with a plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 and the first path member 41560 side protruding from the front surface (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571. And the fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21).
A fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) protruding downward from the fifth wall portion 574 and a sixth wall portion 574 protruding downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. The wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) is mainly provided and formed.

The base plate 41571 is a ball-sending path for game balls formed between facing the front plate 41564 (
A first recess 41571h recessed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3),
The second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j are provided.

The first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j are formed by being provided in a curved shape toward the back surface side. In addition, the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 4
The facing dimension of 1564b, the facing dimension of the second concave portion 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the facing dimension of the third concave portion 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are the same facing dimension L19 (see FIG. b)).

Further, the facing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than the facing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201 (b)) on the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571. Is set to. As a result, the first recess 41571h and the second recess 4157 are formed.
1i and the third concave portion 41571j, the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d between the game ball sent to the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 4
1571i and third concave portion 41571j, first convex portion 41564b, second convex portion 41564c.
And, by contacting the third convex portion 41564d, the rolling (flowing down) speed of the game ball can be reduced.

Further, the protrusion sizes of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 side are set to be the same. In addition, the projecting tip surfaces of the first convex portions 41564b, the second convex portions 41564c, and the third convex portions 41564d, the first concave portions 41571h,
A distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201 (b)) between the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j.
And, a game ball sent between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d facing each other, the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 415.
64d. As a result, the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is long recessed along the ball-sending direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. Accordingly, the first recess 41571
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h when the game ball sent inside h is sent inside the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b protrudingly provided on the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h is the first concave portion 41.
It is extended in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of 571h. Thereby, when the game ball sent along the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is moved to the first concave portion 41571h.
You can easily throw the ball inside the.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1 and is recessed long along the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). Further, the second recess 41571i is formed in an ellipse whose shape in a front view is long in the up-down direction, and the middle position in the left-right direction of the ellipse is set to the middle position in the left-right direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the up-down direction. In addition, the curved center of the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i is arranged on the ball-sending locus of the center of the game ball that is ball-sent on the main path SK2. Therefore, the second concave portion 41571i is recessed above the ball-sending locus of the game ball sent from the main path SK2. Therefore, even when the game ball is sent along the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed, The center of the game ball is the second recess 41571
The front side of i can be passed. As a result, the second game ball that passes through the main route SK2
It is possible to easily send the ball to the inside of the concave portion 41571i to slow down the speed of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c protrudingly provided on the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is formed by bending in a substantially L shape in a front view. The bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is set on the front side of the center of curvature of the upper side of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in the front view. In addition, one bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is extended in a direction orthogonal to the ball-sending direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the other bent portion is a ball sent on the main path SK2. It extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction. As a result, the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and sent to the inside of the second concave portion 41571i, and at the same time to the second convex portion 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily lower the ball sending speed of the game ball that is brought into contact and sent along the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the curved path WK1 from going wild and to smoothly send the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed on the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is provided in an elliptical shape that is long in the ball-sending direction of the game ball on the main path SK3. Accordingly, the third recess 415
When the game ball sent to the inside of 71j is sent to the inside of the third recess 41571j, the third
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, the third concave portion 41571j is set such that the center of curvature of the upstream end of the ball-sending path of the game ball is below the lateral center of the second concave portion 41571i. As a result, the curved path WK1
The game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 41571i can be easily received in the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d that is provided so as to project from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is formed by bending in a substantially L shape in a front view. The bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the center of curvature of the upstream end of the third concave portion 41571j in front view. A bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d is extended in a direction orthogonal to the ball feeding direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and a bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the ball feeding direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. Is extended in the direction. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and sent to the inside of the third concave portion 41571j, and to the third convex portion 41564d on the one side. It is possible to reduce the ball-sending speed of the game ball that abuts and sends the main path SK3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 from going wild and to smoothly send the game ball.

Next, referring to FIGS. 203 to 206, a game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment.
Will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the other end side of the board box 100 (main controller 110) arranged in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by a screw inserted from the back side of the board box 100 Although described, in the 42nd embodiment,
A case where the second engagement member 42370 arranged on the rear case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100 will be described.

First, referring to FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 423 according to the 42nd embodiment.
The overall configuration of 00 will be described. FIG. 203 is a rear case 42 according to the 42nd embodiment.
It is a disassembled perspective front view of 300. FIG. 204 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb of FIG. 204 (a). The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, a rear case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment is erected from the bottom wall portion 42301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. An outer wall portion 42302 is provided, and each of the wall portions 42301 and 42302 is formed into a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is open.

Further, the rear case 42300 is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the box-shaped open side (the arrow F side) and the rear side of the rear case 42300). And a fixing member 320 for fixing one end side of the substrate box 42100, and a bottom wall portion 4230.
The second engaging member 423 which is arranged on the front side of the No. 1 and fixes the other end side of the substrate box 42100.
And 70.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has a rectangular opening 301a formed in a front view in the center thereof, and the third pattern display device 81 (FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 through the opening 301a.
(See) is visible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 42301 is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front side,
The protruding portion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310, the first opening portion 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and the second opening portion opening at a position facing the engaging member 310.
A second projecting portion 42301f that is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front surface side (the arrow F direction side) of the opening portion 301d and the bottom wall portion 42301 and is inserted into a sliding groove 42372 of a second engaging member 42370 described later.
And a third opening 42301g penetratingly formed in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) above the second protruding portion 42301f (arrow U direction).

The second protruding portion 42301f is a protrusion that defines the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and is formed side by side at two positions in the gravity direction. The outer diameter of the second protruding portion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Further, the second protruding portions 42301f at two locations are set to have a dimension such that the distance between their centers is smaller than the groove width of the sliding groove 42372 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the sliding groove 4
Two second protruding portions 42301f can be inserted and arranged inside the 2372.

The third opening 42301g is provided inside with a protrusion 4211 of a board box 42100, which will be described later.
8 is an opening into which 8 is inserted, and has a size larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 42118 in a front view. Further, the third opening 42301g holds the engaging member 310 in place when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)).
Are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the direction for releasing the engagement with (direction of arrow L). This makes it impossible to disengage the engagement member 310 from the fixing member 320 in a state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the protruding portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening 42302b that opens in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front. The second opening 42302b is
It is an opening for inserting an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, and is formed in the displacement region of the second engaging member 42370. Thereby, the second engagement member 4
The 2370 can be displaced.

The board box 42100 has a laterally elongated rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is arranged inside. The board box 42100 includes a bearing 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) protruding from one end (arrow R direction side) and a projecting portion protruding from one surface of the board bock 42100 on the front side. 42118.

As described above, the protruding portion 42118 is provided with the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
g, which is a portion to be inserted into g, and in a state where the front surface of the substrate box 42100 and the back surface of the back case 42300 are parallel to each other, a length in which an opening 42118a described later is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 of the back case 42300. Is set to In addition, the protruding portion 42118 is
An opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity is provided, and a second engagement member 42370, which will be described later, is arranged inside the opening 42118a. Accordingly, the substrate box 42100 is prevented from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 4210 is suppressed.
It is possible to dispose 0 on the rear side of the rear case 42300 (on the side of the arrow B) in a non-displaceable state.

In addition, the third opening 42301g into which the protruding portion 42118 is inserted is engaged in the state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)) as described above. Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the direction in which the engagement with the fixing member 320 is released (direction of arrow L), the protruding portion 42118 is disposed at a position adjacent to the engagement member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is the distance Y7 between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 (FIG. 204 (b)).
) See) is set larger than. As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the protruding portion 42118 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) position.

Therefore, in a state in which the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the engaging member 310 releases the engagement with the fixing member 320 (the protruding portion 42118).
Displacement in the direction in which 118 is arranged is restricted. As a result, the second portion is formed in the opening 42118a.
With the engagement member 42370 inserted, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 310 from being illegally released from the engagement with the fixing member 320, and the board box 42100 (main control device 110) is replaced with an unauthorized base. Can be suppressed.

Further, the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 is opened in the gravity direction, and the second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the gravity direction and inserted. Therefore, the displacement direction (gravitational direction) of the second engagement member 42370 and the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310 are set to be orthogonal to each other, so that the engagement member 310 is unreasonable by the player's fraud. The force when it is operated to the second engagement member 423 inserted into the opening 42118a.
It can be easily received at 70. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement with the fixing member 320 from being released when the engagement member 310 is forcibly operated by the player's injustice.

The second engaging member 42370 is a plate member 42371 formed in a plate shape of a vertically long rectangular rectangle in a front view, and extends downward (direction of arrow D) from an end portion of the plate member 42371 on the upper side (direction of arrow U). And a second engaging portion 42373 protruding outwardly in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper side (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371. Installation part 4237
4, a sliding groove 42372 that is opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is provided below the position 4.

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for disposing the second engaging member 42370 so as to be displaceable, and is opened long in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). In addition, the sliding groove 423
The width dimension of 72 in the lateral direction (arrow L-R direction) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second protruding portion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as described above, the sliding groove 4
When the second projecting portion 42301f is inserted into the 2372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined by the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for elastically deforming the upper end of the plate member 42371 easily, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be reduced, and the elastic deformation can be facilitated.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the above-mentioned protruding portion 42118, and is protruded from both side surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the cutout direction of the recessed portion 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) at the ends of the projecting destinations on both sides is equal to the opening 421.
It is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 of the horizontal direction of 18a (see FIG. 204 (b)). Accordingly, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engaging portion 42373 opens. You can suppress getting out of.

The second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape protruding from the upper side of the plate member 42371 toward the lower side in the horizontal direction. As a result, the second engaging member 42370 is opened in the opening 4
When inserted into the 2118a, the second engaging portion 42373 can be brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a to facilitate elastic deformation of the upper side of the plate member 42371.

Further, the second engaging member 42370 is in a state of being inserted into the opening 42118a (the engaging portion 42).
In a state in which 373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118), the lower end portion has the outer wall portion 4230.
It is arranged inside the second opening 42302b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second engagement portion 42370 from being operated from the outside of the back case 42300. As a result, the second engaging portion 4
It is possible to prevent the engagement between the 2373 and the protruding portion 42118 from being illegally released and the substrate box 42100 (main controller 110) from being exchanged with an illegal base.

Then, referring to FIGS. 204 and 205, the board box 4 to the rear case 42300 is shown.
A method of disposing the 2100 will be described. 205 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the line CCVb-CCVb of FIG. 205 (a). Note that, in FIGS. 204A and 204B, a state after the substrate box 42100 is provided in the rear case 42300 is illustrated, and FIG.
In (a) and FIG. 205 (b), a state before the substrate box 42100 is arranged in the rear case 42300 is illustrated.

The board box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment is similar to the above-described first embodiment in that
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310, and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), the engaging member 310 is the fixing member 3.
In the state before engaging with 20 (before displacement), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side of the third opening 42301g. Accordingly, before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the projecting portion 42118 of the board box 42100 has the third opening portion 42301.
It is possible to suppress the insertion into the inside of g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 42100 from being disposed in the rear case 42300 only by the engagement of the protruding portion 42118 and the second engagement portion 42370.

Next, in the board box 42100, the other side is rotated about the connecting portion of the one side fixing member and 320, and the protruding portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g of the rear case 42300. As a result, the protruding portion 42118 is arranged at a position where it can be engaged with the second engaging member 42370.

Note that the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the third opening 42301g before being inserted into the second opening 42302b and is arranged outside the rear case 42300 (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). As a result, the board box 42100 is attached to the rear case 42.
The operator who arranges in 300 can operate the 2nd engaging member 42370 from the outside of back case 42300, and can insert the 2nd engaging member 42370 in the inside of the 3rd opening 42301g.

Further, since the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 is set to the direction of gravity, the second engagement member 42370 is disposed at the lower end portion by the action of gravity before being inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301g. . As a result, the protruding portion 42118 is connected to the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
Collision with the second engagement member 42370 can be suppressed when it is inserted inside g. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In addition, when the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the protruding portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be arranged outside the rear case 42300, so that it is not in a normal state for the operator. Can be easily recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the second engagement member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described. FIG. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206 (b) is FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in CCVIb-CCVIb line of a).

As shown in FIG. 206, a standing member 42060f is provided on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the 42nd embodiment. The upright member 42060f is upright toward the back surface side (the arrow B side) of the base plate 42060, and the upright end position of the upright member 42060f is the back case 4230.
The bottom wall portion 42301 of 0 is set in the same plane. In addition, the standing member 42060f is the second
It is arranged below the engagement member 42370 and outside the rear case 42300. Accordingly, when the rear case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 in a state where the second engagement member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 are left unengaged, the upright portion 42060f of the second engagement member 42370 is provided. It can be made to collide on the lower side. As a result, the second engaging member 42
It is possible to prevent the rear case 42300 from being disposed on the base plate 42060 when the 370 and the protruding portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged with each other, or the substrate box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed on the rear case 42300.

In the present embodiment, a light emitting substrate that illuminates the inside of the rear case 42300 is provided on the upright portion 42060f. Accordingly, the standing portion 42060f can be used as both a portion for irradiating light and a portion for suppressing the rear case 42300 and the base plate 42060 from being engaged with each other in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the base plate 42060 from increasing.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the above-described first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, the driving motor KM2 is driven. However, from the third position to the second position or the first position. The drive for retracting to the 1 position may be driven by an urging spring. For example, an urging spring is arranged between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, and an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and the dispensing operation is performed, the drive motor K
By turning off the drive of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the second position or the first position side by the urging force of the urging spring.

Therefore, using the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched to the third position,
Since the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced, the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the discharging operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to a reaction, Immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467 causes a reaction force due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to exert a force for displacing the base member 470 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the engagement protrusion 882 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is the rotating body 800.
Although the case where two side walls are formed at a predetermined interval has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of side walls of the rotating body 800 may be consecutively arranged at a predetermined interval. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotating body 800 can be restricted from rotating by an external force when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is fed from the opening 831 has been described, but the opening 831 is the communication hole 881 of the rotating body 800.
It may be formed on the side surface opposite to b. That is, openings may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which serves as a ball inlet and the other serves as a ball outlet. In this case, since a ball ball-sending path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as a ball-sending path especially when there is no space for arrangement on the back side of the game board 13. It is possible to secure the ball-sending route without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has been described as having a cylindrical outer shape, but the outer shape is not limited to this. For example, the shape may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect has been switched by the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654 is formed so that it can be operated by the player has been described, but a push-down button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654. In this case, the player can perform not only an operation of applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654 but also an operation of pressing a push button, or an operation in which a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 8654 and a pressing operation are combined. . As a result, a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, and the player can be entertained.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, transmission gear 8651
A torque limiter or the like that interrupts the transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be provided between the transmission gear 8652 and the transmission gear 8652.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotating operation unit 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6 is interrupted, and the rotation of the rotating operation unit 8654 can be suppressed. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs a rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction to the rotation operation unit 8654.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's finger or clothes is caught between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper plate 8017 on the rotation direction side, the rotation is stopped,
It is possible to suppress further pinching of the player's fingers or clothes. Therefore, the player operates the rotation operation unit 8
It is possible to prevent being injured by being sandwiched between 654 and the upper plate 8017.

In the above eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 8654 is the A direction, but the rotation direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be caused to perform an action associated with the effect of the game machine, and the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, by hitting and operating the rotating operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction, it is possible to produce an effect such as hitting (blunting) the character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the board box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310, so that the board box 100 is prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third pattern) can be provided as long as they are arranged on the fixing member 320 and have an effect of being able to suppress unauthorized removal. The display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting an unauthorized input such as an unauthorized radio wave or vibration) may be used.

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 5 are formed.
Although the case where 64d is formed at a position facing each other has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564.
d is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, and the game balls flowing down to the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. It may be formed so as to be received by the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j after being brought into contact with each other.

In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 has a thickness dimension of the concave portion 151 of the main body 151.
The case where the depth is smaller than the recess depth of b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decoration member 154 is made of an elastically deformable material, and the main body 15
It may be formed thicker than the recess depth of the first recess 151b. In this case, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, it is compressed and elastically deformed, so that the main body 151 can be arranged in contact with the base plate 60.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 act in the directions canceling each other. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b contact may be set to the direction from the contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force in the direction of rotating the shaft portion 422a from acting on the cam member 422.

In the first embodiment, the other end of the board box 100 is attached to the rear case 300 by screws.
Although the case where it is arranged on the back side of the above has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end of the board box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when the back case 300 is engaged. More specifically, a cylindrical sealing tool having openings formed at a plurality of positions on the other end side of the back case 300 is inserted into insertion portions provided at a plurality of positions on the back side of the back case 300, By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the rear surface side of the rear case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

When removing the substrate box 100, the other end of the substrate box 100 can be removed from the rear case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Further, when the other end side of the substrate box 100 is again arranged in the rear case 300, a new sealing tool is inserted into an unused opening of the substrate box 100 to insert an unused insertion portion of the rear case 300. The other end side of the board box 100 can be disposed in the rear case 300 by engaging with the back case 300.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 has the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
Although the case where they are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60.
By forming 0c and the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed of a single sheet, and the decorative member 154 is cut from the sheet to form the decorative member 154.
And the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate step, and the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the second opening 60b, and the decorative member 15 is provided.
4 and the front surface of the decorative member 60c are preferably arranged on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is provided on the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game ball feeding path of the first unit 551 so as to project toward the back side (arrow B side direction side). , The second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k are formed, and the first concave portion 571h and the second concave portion 571i are formed on the inner surface on the back side of the ball-sending path of the game ball of the first unit 511 and are recessed toward the back side. And the third
Although the case where the concave portion 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 571.
The h, the second convex portion 571i, and the third convex portion 571k may be formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-back direction in a front view.

In addition, a recessed portion that is recessed toward the front view may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recessed portion 571i. In this case, since the concave portion is provided in the ball-sending space of the curved path WK1,
The pitching space can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down too late on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed so as to be inclined so that the amount of protrusion toward the front side decreases toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is brought into the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped projection 9531a, the cam member 422 is moved to the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
Can be pressed against. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction, and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitter 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 (direction of arrow U) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting body 11491a may be arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, the transmission part 11451
It is preferable that the height position of b is formed from the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game sphere, the shadow of the game sphere formed in the transmission part 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game sphere. it can. As a result, since the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transparent portion 11451b, the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, the case where the displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e is performed by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor for detecting that the game ball has passed through the ball-sending path for sending the game ball to the ball receiving portions 12467, 39467 is attached, and the third piece 12467e due to the fact that the game ball has been detected by the sensor, The 39467e may be displaced independently. According to this, the second piece 12
Since it is not necessary to displace 467d and 39467d by the load of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 12
The reliability of displacement of 467 and 39467 can be improved. In this case, the third piece 12467e
, 39467e are independently arranged to the ball receiving portions 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the rotation shafts when the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced are formed on the first pieces 12467c and 39467c has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by inserting the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e into the openings formed in the rack 466, the third piece 1
The 2467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased, and thus the third pieces 12467e and 394 relative to the displacement amount of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d.
The amount of displacement of 67e can be easily increased. As a result, the shielding plate 124 of the third piece 12467e
67e1 can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed as an elongated hole in which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the second path member 13570. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from recognizing the gap between the first member and the second member facing each other. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the said 1st, 10th, and 25th embodiment, although the decoration member 154, 10154, 25154 demonstrated the case affixed by the adhesive tape 154a, 10154a, 25154a, it is not necessarily limited to this, For example, You may use the adhesive agent which consists of liquid materials.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first element arranged on the front side.
The path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 are formed of a non-light-transmissive material to form the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35.
The case where the gap between the facing portions of 560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 is hard to be recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560.
The first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357 are formed by forming an opening in a slit shape having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
The player may visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the facing portions of 0, 32570, 34570 through the opening. In this case, the plurality of slit-shaped openings are set such that the distance to the adjacent openings is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Thereby, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 355.
It is possible to let the player recognize the game ball flowing down between the facing portions of 60 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

Further, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 is formed with an opening that is opened in a circle smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and second path members 13570, 3257
The player may visually recognize the game ball flowing down between 0 and 34570 facing through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimension of the plurality of openings is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the opening of the opening can be made smaller than that in the case where the opening is formed in a slit shape, and therefore the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34 are provided through the opening.
It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the gap between the facing portions of 560, 35560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, a portion (engaged portion 18332) with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, in a state where the board box 100 is not arranged in the rear case 18300,
Since the displacement member 18310 cannot be disposed inside the rear case 18300, the displacement member 1
The 8310 can be in a state of protruding to the outside of the rear case 18300 by its own weight.

As a result, when the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the back case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). As a result, the operator can be made aware of forgetting to attach the substrate box 100.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the front surface side (the arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300.
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotating unit 21700 disposed in the
The case of preventing the engagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixed member 320 from being illegally released by being inserted inside 7 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the insertion portion 21724b, which is inserted inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310, may be formed in the substrate box 100 arranged in the fixed member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 via the opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed in a portion into which the shaft for crimping and fixing the fixing member 320 is inserted. Accordingly, when the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21
724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

Therefore, when the fixing member 320 is replaced, it is necessary to correct the caulked portion between the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulked portion). Thereby, the fixing member 32
Since it is difficult to illegally remove 0 from the back member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the forty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting substrate for irradiating light is provided in the standing portion 42060f has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the drive member provided in the base plate 42060. It may be formed as a control board for controlling the or a passage for sending game balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. It should be noted that the first control example is to explain the control example by partially modifying the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, and a detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be given. Is omitted. In addition, in the configuration used in this control example, there are some configurations in which different reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the above-mentioned respective embodiments, but this is for explaining the invention of this control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific content of the configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Conventionally, when you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, you can execute the jackpot game, and during the jackpot game, you can easily win the ball to the winning device (for example, the variable winning device). There is a pachinko machine 10 for playing a game aiming at a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the player struggles to win the jackpot and the jackpot game is executed, the player's willingness to play is reduced if the proportion of balls to be won in the winning device (variable winning device) is low. There was the problem of letting it go.

  Such a problem is that when the sphere flows down the game area formed on the game board 13, the sphere flows down by colliding with a plurality of obstacles (for example, nails) provided on the game board 13. This is an unavoidable problem in the pachinko machine 10 because it is caused by the fact that the number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 increases or decreases due to being changed.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the pseudo attacker (production attacker) 165 (see FIG. 208) is driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65 that is opened during the big hit game. Moreover, in addition to the balls that have won the variable winning device 65, the balls that have entered the right general winning opening 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific outlet 166 (see FIG. 208) also flow into the pseudo attacker 165. I am configuring. The pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be easier for the player to visually recognize than the variable winning a prize device 65.

  With this configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the player executes the jackpot game while watching the ball winning the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that more balls than the balls that actually win the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game are winning the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game.

  In addition, among the balls launched in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, the balls which have not been won in the variable winning device 65 (by winning the other winning (ball) mouth until reaching the variable winning device 65 ( The sphere) is made to win the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, when the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of winning balls (balls) to other winning (ball) openings (hereinafter referred to as winning openings, etc.) is likely to increase. A predetermined number of balls can be stably won in the pseudo attacker 165 regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of balls won in the device 65.

  Further, in the first control example, in accordance with the timing at which a ball winning (winning ball) in each winning port or the like (specific winning port 65a, right general winning port 163, specific out port 166) wins the pseudo attacker 165, It is configured to execute a winning effect.

  This makes it possible to execute the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 at the timing when the ball has won the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the pseudo attacker 165 is provided to the player as a real attacker (variable winning device). 65). The winning effect executed based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is, for example, a winning sound notification effect for notifying the player that the ball has won the variable winning device 65, or a third prize. In the prize sphere number display effect or the like, the symbol display device 81 displays information (acquisition information) for indicating the amount of the privilege (prize sphere) given to the player based on the fact that the sphere has won the variable winning device 65. is there.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to cause the balls that have won in a plurality of different winning openings and the like to win in the pseudo attacker 165, the guiding passages so that the balls that have passed through the respective winning openings and the like are guided above the pseudo attacker 165. 690 (see FIG. 208) is provided, but since the distance from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the balls are won in each winning opening and the order in which the balls are won in the pseudo attacker 165 are different. There is. Therefore, in the first control example, the order in which the pseudo attacker 165 is won can be determined based on the type of the winning opening in which the ball is won and the winning timing. Then, when the number exceeds a predetermined number (the number of conditions for closing the variable winning device 65 (for example, 10)) during the period in which the pseudo attacker 165 is continuously opened, a specific winning effect (overflow effect). Is configured to run.

  In this way, in the configuration in which the balls that have won the prize holes and the like flow down the guide flow path 690, the order in which the pseudo attacker 165 is won is calculated instead of the order in which the balls are won in the prize holes and the like, and based on the calculation result. By configuring so as to execute a specific winning effect (overflow effect), it is possible to execute the winning effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In this control example, the above-described winning effect is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that a ball has won in each winning opening or the like. Since it is configured as described above, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection sensor for executing a winning effect using a ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, so that the design cost can be suppressed.

  Next, the characteristic effect contents used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be briefly described. Conventionally, a special symbol lottery right has a configuration capable of being reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), and a period from when the lottery right is reserved and stored until the special symbol lottery is actually executed. Inside, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of preliminarily determining (predicting) the jackpot lottery result using the information (winning information) included in the lottery right that has been stored on hold is performed, and the effect based on the pre-determination result There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes (so-called prefetching effect).

  In the conventional gaming machine using such a configuration, for example, by changing the display mode of the identification information (so-called reserved symbol) for indicating the lottery right that is held and stored, the lottery result for the player There may be a case where a pre-reading effect for notifying the user is executed. By performing such prefetching effect, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol, and the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol. Until the execution of (special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding reserved symbol), it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  However, in the case of the prefetch effect described above, when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol (variable reserved symbol) whose display mode is changed is executed, the display of the variable reserved symbol disappears, so that it is currently being executed. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponds to the variable hold symbol. On the other hand, in the present control example, it is configured to display the in-execution display mode based on the variable display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the currently executed special symbol lottery (variation). This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) that is being executed corresponds to the variable reserved symbol.

  Further, by varying the display mode of the reserved symbols as described above, in the pre-reading effect that notifies the player in advance of the special symbol lottery result, in the case of being configured to notify a plurality of types of effect results, (For example, in the case of being configured to notify a plurality of effect results with different expectation of jackpot winning), it is necessary to make the variable display mode different so that each effect result can be easily identified. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify a lot of information in advance.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in addition to the above-described prefetching effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the effect device (treasure box accessory 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Is configured as follows. Then, of the plurality of information acquired by the prefetching process, the information to be notified to the player in advance by changing the display mode of the pending symbol (for example, the prefetching information for indicating the result of the jackpot judgment) and the treasure box combination By changing the display mode of the object 750, the information notified in advance to the player (for example, the pre-reading information for indicating the type of the jackpot won) is configured to be different.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of target objects to be used for pre-reading effect and differentiating the type of information to be notified in advance by each target object, it is easy to notify the player of a lot of information in advance. be able to. In addition, in the present control example, since an effect device other than the third symbol display device 81 is used, it is possible to easily continuously notify the effect result of the prefetch effect.

  Further, conventionally, a variation effect is performed in which the identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and then stopped. There is something to do. According to such a pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit by the variation effect mode of the third symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. It was However, since the variation effect mode of the third symbol is determined only based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is changed by the variation effect mode to be executed for the player who plays the game for a long time. There was a problem that it was easily identified.

  In addition, in order to execute a specific variation effect mode (third symbol stop display mode) that indicates that the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot), the special symbol lottery Since the condition is that the result is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit), there is a problem that the frequency of executing the variation effect mode becomes low.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the lottery result of symbols other than the special symbol (for example, normal symbol) can be notified by using the variation effect mode of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, it is possible to set the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on information other than the special symbol lottery result (for example, the ordinary symbol lottery result). It is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery result from being easily determined.

  Furthermore, since the specific variation effect mode can be executed even when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a lottery result (for example, a win) that is advantageous to the player, the execution frequency of the specific variation effect mode can be increased. .

  Further, in the first control example, in order to show the result of the normal symbol by using the variation effect set based on the variation time (special symbol variation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, normally The third symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped (actually moving (swinging), but almost stopped) at the timing when the variation time of the symbol elapses. Thereby, it is possible to make the third symbol appear to be stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

  In addition, in the present control example, during the fluctuation production corresponding to the variation time (special figure variation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop timing of the normal symbol On the basis of the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (time from the temporary stop timing until the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect mode of the remaining time effect executed during the remaining time is configured to be different. That is, for example, when the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, the remaining time effect that the temporary stop display of the third symbol continues is executed, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, the third symbol in the temporary stop is displayed. The display is changed again.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the third symbol that is temporarily stopped from changing again even though the remaining time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and to execute an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. You can Further, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game by continuing the temporary stop display despite the remaining time being long (for example, 10 seconds).

  Further, in the first control example, the remaining time length is roughly divided (for example, divided into 3 second intervals), and the re-variation effect corresponding to the division is executed. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the re-variation effect corresponding to the length of the remaining time. In addition, the production mode that can be set as the re-variation production is such that the production period is preset at 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, ... At 3 second intervals, and after the production period corresponding to the remaining time is set. In order to correspond to the detailed remaining time, the re-fluctuation effect in which the first half of the effect mode is deleted for a predetermined time is executed.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation effect corresponding to the remaining time that is randomly calculated by using the preset effect period at regular intervals, the effect data used for the re-variation can be changed. The capacity can be reduced. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, an effect in which the third symbol swings is set as the first half portion (for one second) of the effect mode preset corresponding to the remaining time. . As a result, even if a part of the first half of the effect mode is deleted corresponding to the actual remaining time, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the big hit, and when the player wins the small hit which is the lottery result that can give the player a smaller amount of privilege (prize ball) than the big hit game, Also, the above-described specific variation effect is configured to be executed.

  Then, as a small hit game executed when the small hit is won, a winning game executed in the initial period (the first round game period) of the large hit game executed when the large hit described above is won. The same game contents are configured to be executed.

  As a result, even if the winning game is executed after the specific variation effect is executed, at this point it is possible for the player to determine whether the winning game this time is a winning game based on a jackpot win or a winning game based on a small win. Since it is difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot winning for a long time.

  In the first control example, a player determines whether the hit game being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game by using a period in which the same game content is executed in the big hit game and the small hit game. It is configured to execute a notification effect for informing. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information which is difficult to be identified only by the content of the winning game by the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Conventionally, as an effect (preliminary effect) for suggesting a player a lottery result of a special symbol, an effect (operation effect) for displaying an advance notice content by operating the operation means (frame button 22) by the player is executed. There is something to do. When performing such an operation effect, a period during which the operation of the operation means can be effectively discriminated (operation effective period) is set, and the notice content is displayed when the operation means is operated within the operation effective period. It is generally configured to do so. Then, in order to inform the player that the above-described operation valid period is set, for example, a display mode simulating the operation means (button display) and a display mode indicating the operation valid period (for example, time gauge display) ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in one operation effect, there is one in which a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of a plurality of button displays is displayed in order to allow the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp a plurality of advance notice contents by operating the operation means within the operation valid period corresponding to each button display, I was able to actively participate in the production. However, if a plurality of button displays for which the operation effective period is set are displayed at the same time and the operation of the frame button 22 is temporarily neglected, each of the operation effective periods set individually is Therefore, it becomes difficult to operate the operation means appropriately and accordingly, there is a problem that the willingness to participate in the production is lowered while the operation effective period is set.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of operation effects having overlapping operation effective periods are configured to be executable, and when the operation effective period of each operation effect satisfies a predetermined condition, each operation effect is generated. It is configured to execute a fusion operation effect that fuses. Specifically, when the display form of the time gauge indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is the same among a plurality of operation effects, the fusion operation effect is executed.

  With this configuration, a plurality of operation effects can be changed into one fusion operation effect, so that it is possible to leave the possibility of completing the operation effects to the end. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to participate in the operation effect during the operation effect.

  Further, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are configured to display specific notice contents even when the operation means is not operated within the operation valid period set for the operation effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, since the specific notice contents can be displayed even when the player does not operate the operating means, the player's willingness to play that cannot operate the operating means within the operation valid period is reduced. It can be suppressed. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that the relation between the operation of the operation means within the operation valid period and the display of the advance notice content is low, and the effect of the production is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, when the operation means is not operated at the time when the predetermined period of the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect (automatic press effect) is automatically operated. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between operating the operation means within the operation valid period and displaying the notice contents, and it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

  Further, in the first control example, when the player operates the operation means during the automatic press effect, the effect mode of the automatic press effect can be changed corresponding to the operation of the player. There is. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means until the end of the period when the operation valid period is set.

  Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment described above in the left side area of the game board 13 (of the variable display device unit 80). It is different in that a through gate 67 is provided in the game area formed on the left side), and is otherwise the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left side area, and the player left-hands the game (a game for letting the ball flow down to the left side area of the game board 13). All the balls that are fired when the game is played pass through the through gate 67. With this configuration, the player performs a left-handed game (a game for letting the ball flow down to the left side area of the game board 13), wins the ball in the first winning opening 64, and draws the first special symbol. It is possible to carry out a lottery for ordinary symbols even while performing. Thereby, the lottery for normal symbols is performed by using the variable effect (special figure 1 variable effect) in which the identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The results can be shown.

  Although the detailed contents of the special figure 1 variation effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, in the first control example, the dynamic display period of the special symbol is matched with the timing at which the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. During (while changing the third symbol), the third symbol is displayed as a temporary stop (the third symbol is swung to an extent that makes the player think that the third symbol is stopped and displayed). I am configuring. Thereby, since the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified using the third symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

  In addition, in the first control example, an effect (charge effect (charge effect (charge effect) that causes the third symbol to be displayed in the same hit display mode in the same winning display mode as in the case of winning the normal symbol and in the case of winning the special symbol) 212))) is executed. With this, the player is allowed to determine whether the hit display mode stopped and displayed to the player is a display mode for showing the lottery result of the special symbol or a display mode for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. Can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of expectation to the hit game executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Furthermore, since it is configured to execute the above-described charge effect in either the case of winning the normal symbol or the case of winning the special symbol, the chart effect only when the winning of the special symbol is achieved. The execution frequency of the charging effect can be increased as compared with the case where is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. In the right side area of the game board 13, a game area (lower right game area) covered with a resin outer edge member 73 (73b) is formed. This lower right game area is covered by the outer edge member 73b which is transparent and is surface-treated (for example, textured) to diffusely reflect light, so that the player is more likely to play the game than other game areas. It becomes a game area that is difficult to see.

  Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 208, a special winning device 550 having a flow path for letting the ball flow down and various winning openings into which the ball can be won is provided in the lower right game area. In addition, a discharge flow path is formed for using the balls that have won prizes in various winning openings for a simulated effect. Then, the ball flowing down the lower right game area is configured to enter an out opening (not shown) and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the types of the entrances (prize openings) provided in the special winning device 550 and the flow-down paths of the game balls entering each entrance will be described. It should be noted that the flow-down paths (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game balls that have flown into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 have been described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. Then, the details are omitted. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 550. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning opening 166 is provided on the upper right side in the front view of the special winning device 550, and the specific general winning opening 163 is provided on the left side in the front view with respect to the specific out opening 166. The specific general winning opening 163 corresponds to the second receiving portion 562 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment described above, and makes the description easy to understand (in order to clarify that it is a ball entrance. ), The name has been changed. Similarly, the specific outlet 166 is the name of the third receiving portion 563 (see FIG. 22) changed in the above description of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific general winning opening 163 and the out opening 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out winning sensor 166s capable of detecting the entrance of a game ball. The specific general winning opening 163 is configured as a winning opening in which three winning balls are given to one gaming ball (winning), and the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the general winning sensor 163s. Each time it is played, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, the specific outlet port 166 is configured as an inlet port to which a prize ball is not given even if a game ball enters (only to discharge the entered game ball to the outside), and an out-ball sensor. Even if the entry of the game ball is detected by 166s, the prize ball is not paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 208, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can enter is provided at a substantially central portion of the special winning device 550. The variable winning device 65 is composed of the first variable plate 583b, the first receiving recess 574a, and the second receiving recess 574b in the above description of the first embodiment, and has a winning opening (ball entrance). In order to clarify a certain point, in the description of the first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as an opening / closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as the specific winning opening 65a. Is called. When it becomes a big hit by the big hit lottery, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (displaced from a state of being projected to the front side to a state of being retracted to the back side) to the specific winning opening 65a. And the game ball is ready to enter.

  As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning opening 65a is provided with specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (detection devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball. ing. The specific winning opening 65a is configured as a winning opening in which 15 winning balls are given to one game ball winning (winning), and the winning of the gaming ball is determined by the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2. Each time it is detected, 15 prize balls are paid out. In each round of jackpots, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 game balls are won) (the opening / closing door 65f1 retracts to the back side) A large amount of prize balls are paid out by shooting game balls aiming at the specific winning opening 65a (shooting game balls toward the flow path on the right side in front view of the variable display device unit 80). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in playing the jackpot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, in the lower left of the variable winning device 65 in the special winning device 550, the second winning opening (second winning opening) 640 (the third receiving recess 575a in the description of the first embodiment, 4 receiving recess 575b, see FIG. 22) and a first electric accessory 640a (the second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) that opens and closes the second ball entrance (second prize hole) 640. ing. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a jackpot lottery (lottery for special symbols) is executed, and when a jackpot is reached, a jackpot game in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed a plurality of times is executed. In addition, as described above, the first electric auditors product 640a is activated only for a predetermined time when the ordinary symbol lottery executed on the basis of the game ball passing through the first through gate 66 is hit. .

  The game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 (the second receiving portion 562) rolls on the second rolling portion 577 (see FIG. 20) so as to be viewed from the front side (back side of the base plate 60). Be guided to. The game ball guided to the inner side in the front view flows into the guide flow path 690 indicated by the broken line in FIG. Similarly, the game ball that has entered the specific outlet 166 is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 by rolling the third rolling portion 578 (see FIG. 20) and flows into the guide flow path 690. To do. In addition, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a rolls along the sub route HK1 (see FIG. 22), is guided to the back side of the base plate 60, and flows into the guide flow path 690. That is, the game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163, the game ball that has entered the specific outlet 166, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a are all in the guide flow path 690. Run down.

  As shown in FIG. 208, the guide flow path 690 enters the specific general winning opening 163 into the specific outlet port 166 and a general ball sending unit 690a for flowing the game ball into the guide flow path 690. Of the out-ball sending unit 690b for flowing the game ball into the guide flow path 690, the specific ball sending unit 690c for flowing the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a into the guide flow path 690, and the specific flow path 690. At least a merging path 690d that is provided on the most downstream side and that allows the game balls to flow down (merge) from the rear surface side of the base plate 60 to the production flow path 691 (the sub path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). Has been done. The game ball that has flown into the specific flow path 690 via any one of the general ball sending unit 690a, the out ball sending unit 690b, and the specific ball sending unit 690c is guided to the production flow path 691 via the merging path 690d. . The game ball guided to the production flow path 691 drops from the discharge portion 691a at the lower end of the production flow path 691 toward the pseudo attacker 165 (the decoration unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). To do. The pseudo attacker 165 has a pseudo winning opening 165a into which a game ball can enter, an open state in which the gaming ball can enter the pseudo winning opening 165a, and a possibility to enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. At least a pseudo door 165f1 (opening / closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104 (b)) variably configured to the closed state. Further, on the front side of the pseudo attacker 165, an out port 167 for discharging the game ball reaching the pseudo attacker 165 to the outside with the pseudo door 165f1 being closed (the prize in the description of the first embodiment Mouth 761a) is provided.

  Although details will be described later, in the first control example, in each round of the jackpot game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed, and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed. Then, in the first control example, an effect (pseudo-winning effect) that suggests payout of the prize ball is executed in synchronization with the ball-entering timing of the game ball to the pseudo winning port 165a. In other words, instead of executing the effect of notifying the payout of the prize ball based on the detection of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, the pseudo winning effect is made in accordance with the timing of entering the pseudo winning opening 165a. It is configured to execute. In other words, by using the pseudo-attacker 165 that is easier to see than the specific winning opening 65a covered by the first path member 560 to suggest whether or not the prize ball is paid out, the prize ball is hit in the jackpot. It is possible to make the player understand more clearly the opportunity to be paid out.

  In addition, after the winning ball is detected by one of the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2, the detected gaming ball flows down the guidance flow path 690 and the effect flow path 691 and enters the pseudo winning opening 165a. It takes about 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first control example, the timing for opening and closing the pseudo winning port 165a is 0. The delay is 5 seconds. As a result, all the game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning opening 65a can be entered into the pseudo winning opening 165a.

  Further, in the first control example, as described above, the game balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 are also configured to be able to reach the pseudo attacker 165. From the appearance of the player, it becomes difficult to distinguish which of the entrances the game ball has entered and the pseudo attacker 165 has arrived. Therefore, regardless of the type of the entrance, the pseudo prize hole 165a The pseudo winning award effect is executed for all the entered balls. As a result, as the number of game balls entering the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific outlet 166 increases during the jackpot round period, the number of executions of the pseudo winning effect increases, and thus more prizes than actually exist. You can make the illusion of winning a sphere. Therefore, the player's satisfaction in the jackpot game can be further increased. In addition, as described above, each round of the jackpot is finished by entering the game ball 10 times into the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, for the pseudo winning port 165a, in addition to the game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a, a game ball that has entered the specific general winning port 163 and the specific out port 166 can also be entered. Therefore, in each round of jackpots, it becomes easy for 10 or more game balls to enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. Therefore, in each round of jackpots, it is possible to make the player feel as if more game balls than usual win the specific winning opening 65a, which makes the player more satisfied. be able to. Here, in the first control example, the pseudo winning effect mode is determined by whether or not the number of times the player has entered the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the one pseudo door 165f1 exceeds the specified number (10 times). (Pseudo winning sound) is different. Accordingly, when the pseudo winning sound is changed, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the player exceeded the specified number and entered the specific winning opening 65a (overwinning). It can make you feel more satisfied.

  Further, in the first control example, whether or not to execute the pseudo winning effect and the execution timing are timings at which the entrance to each of the entrance openings (specific general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, specific winning opening 65a) is detected. It is configured to be determined by. That is, at the timing of detecting the entrance to each entrance, it is predicted whether or not the timing at which the game ball in which the entrance is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 is during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1. Then, when it is during the opening period (that is, when it is predicted that the game ball that has detected the entering ball enters the pseudo winning port 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1), the execution of the pseudo winning effect is determined. It is configured to do. In other words, the pseudo winning opening 165a is not provided with any structure for detecting the entry of the game ball, and whether or not the pseudo winning effect can be executed only by the winning sensor originally provided in each entrance. And the execution timing is determined. With this configuration, the number of sensors for detecting a ball entering can be reduced, so that the cost ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  In the first control example, a period of about 1.5 seconds from the detection of a ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 to the arrival of the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165. It takes about 1 second from the detection of a ball entering the specific outlet 166 until the gaming ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165. The specific winning opening 65a It takes a period of about 0.5 seconds until the game ball in which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 after the ball is detected in. Therefore, when a ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that the gaming ball that has detected a ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a, the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed after 1.5 seconds. Similarly, when a ball entering the specific outlet 166 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1 second, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened ( If it is predicted that the game ball that has detected a ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed 1 second later. When the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 0.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (the entering ball If it is predicted that the detected game ball will enter the pseudo winning opening 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed after 0.5 seconds. As a result, since the pseudo winning effect can be executed in synchronization with the timing at which the game ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a, the winning ball can be more reliably received in the pseudo attacker 165 in the jackpot. It is possible to make the player illusion as if the player is granted. Therefore, in the jackpot, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the pseudo attacker 165, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, not only the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, but also the game balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 can reach the pseudo attacker 165. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the game ball that has entered at least one of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific outlet 166 may not be able to reach the pseudo attacker 165. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the deviation between the number of prize balls estimated from the number of times of the pseudo winning effect and the number of prize balls actually paid out.

  In the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is provided on the downstream side of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific outlet 166, but the arrangement of the respective winning openings may be arbitrarily determined.

  Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. In the variable display device unit 80 provided in the substantially central portion of the game board 13, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 by projecting to the front side of the game board 13, and prevents the game ball from contacting the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, left, middle and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (variation). Is displayed). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 209. 209 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 209 (b) is the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the display content typically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The symbol row is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The lower one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9", respectively. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, “777”), variable display is performed, The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery by the main controller 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol columns L1, L2, L3 are displayed for each of left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom of the symbol columns L1 to L3 for variable display.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the activated line V1. If the third symbol is stopped together on the activated line V1 with a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the first control example), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, each symbol The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and, for example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character and numbers are combined may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be varied, and for example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. By reducing or moving the variable display area to a position where the player cannot easily see it (for example, a corner of the display screen), it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changing. You may do it. Further, during the period when the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop) and then changed again.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree at which the player is difficult to identify). However, the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the changing type of the special symbol.

  In addition, in the first control example, it is possible to stop and display the specific symbol as the third symbol that is variably displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. Although the details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, it is configured in a display mode with identification information different from the numbers (for example, “charge”), and this specific symbol is on the effective line V1. It is configured to be able to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result by displaying the stop symbol at.

  In this control example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the left symbol row L1 and the third symbol showing the same number in the right symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed, the middle symbol row L2 that is changing is identified. It is configured such that a specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a portion (for example, a portion between the numbers “0” and “9”). Thereby, since the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the variable display of the third symbol has passed the predetermined period, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variable effect.

  In addition, the conditions for displaying the specific symbol may be other than the above-mentioned conditions, for example, the numbers indicated by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3 are a predetermined combination. It may be a condition, or it may be a condition that the player operates the operation means during the variable display of the third symbol. Further, it may be a condition that is satisfied based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the variation effect in which the specific symbol is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the variation display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance when the variation effect is set (when the variation is started).

  Further, when displaying the specific symbol, a method other than the method of interrupting the preset symbol sequence and displaying it may be used, for example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol sequence. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when the specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols that indicates the special jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. If the state is done, that is, if it is a reach state, it may be configured to display the specific symbol by replacing it with the third symbol that is set before and after the specific third symbol. As a result, even if any of a plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is shown, so that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuating effect while having an expectation. .

  In this control example, as a lottery result of special symbols, three types of "big hit", "small hit", "out" are configured to be settable as the lottery result of special symbols, and when a big hit is won, One jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types in which the contents of the jackpot game to be executed and the game state set after the jackpot game are different. Then, by a combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol lottery result and the jackpot type at the time of jackpot winning are suggested (notified) to the player.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is a "big hit D" in which the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, one of the main symbols of the odd number "3, 7" is a square. The variable display is displayed in which the display is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit E", a variable display in which any of the main symbols of "0 to 9" are aligned with each other is performed. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “small hit”, it is configured to display a chance chance constituted by a combination of “341”. It should be noted that this combination of chances is configured not to be selected when the result of the lottery is out. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed with a specific combination of the third symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 (for example, a gold fish symbol). ) May be configured to be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or a character such as “chance” may be displayed to notify.

  The sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas, and on the display screen capable of executing the variable display of the special symbol, the information (execution) for indicating the winning information of the special symbol currently being executed in the small area Ds1. Medium symbol m0) is displayed, and information for indicating winning information of the special symbol which is reserved and stored in the small area Ds2 (special figure 1 first reserved symbol m1 to special figure 1 4th reserved symbol m4, special symbol 2) The first reserved symbol m5 to the special symbol 2 fourth reserved symbol m8) are configured to be displayed. Further, the information (content) displayed in the sub display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the game state. For example, if a jackpot game is being played, a guide display mode for guiding the game content during the jackpot game. Is displayed, and even during the variation display of the third symbol, if the variation effect in which the expectation degree of winning the jackpot is set to high is being executed, the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect is given to the player. A display mode for indicating is displayed. Further, when the variation effect is executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub display area Ds is erased.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 209 (b). As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1a for displaying the fourth symbol in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second special area A special figure 2 display area Dm1b for variably displaying the fourth symbol in association with the variable display of the symbol is formed, and in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm, it is variably displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the normal symbol. The public figure display area Dm2 is displayed so as to be stopped.

  Note that, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the general figure display area Dm2 are shown in a size that is visible to the player. In reality, it is formed in such a size that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a variation effect of the third symbol, or an effect movable accessory (for example, the lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9) provided in the vicinity of the third symbol display device 81. )) Is movable, and the size of the display areas of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the general figure display area Dm2 is reduced in correspondence with the case where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered. The display position may be changed, or the display position may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful production without a feeling of strangeness.

  Furthermore, in place of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the general figure display area Dm2, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 are interlocked with the variable display. Then, the fourth symbol which is dynamically displayed may be displayed. In this case, it is advisable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbols corresponding to the respective symbols at the same locations as the decorative LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to execute the dynamic display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol which is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding effect contents in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 218, the content of various effects executed in the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, a pre-reading effect using a holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a treasure box accessory 750, which is an effect feature provided outside the third symbol display device. Will be explained.

  In the first control example, when the ball enters the special symbol starting opening (first entrance 64, second entrance 640) during the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol lottery right (the ball is The value of various counters obtained when entering the ball (winning information) is used to perform a lottery for special symbols, so that a predetermined number (4 for each special symbol) is stored (reserved) It is configured. Then, as a display mode for indicating the number of lottery rights stored and stored, the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, the contents of the winning information stored on hold are pre-determined before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, and the display mode of the reserved symbols and the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 are determined based on the determination result. It is configured to execute a variable effect (prefetch effect).

  When this prefetching effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Then, when performing the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the symbol being executed in the display mode corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1. That is, the in-execution symbol m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 informs the player of the display mode of the reserved symbol that is changed by the look-ahead effect even while the special symbol variation based on the reserved symbol is being executed. It is configured to be able to.

  In addition, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 can be changed by the look-ahead effect in addition to the reserved symbol. Furthermore, even when executing the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol for the same winning information and the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the result of the pre-reading effect Are configured to be different.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 210, during the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is the jackpot D (16 round jackpot), it shows that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high for the currently-executed symbol m0. By displaying the display mode of "green" (in FIG. 210 (a), the display mode of the checkerboard pattern), it is possible to suggest to the player that the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation. Then, in the treasure box accessory 750, a display mode of "red" (a display mode of a diagonal line pattern in FIG. 210 (b)) indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot D and the degree of expectation is high is displayed.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 211, during the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is the jackpot A (6 round jackpot), it is highly expected that the currently-executed symbol m0 has won the jackpot. By displaying the display mode of "green" shown (in FIG. 211 (a), the display mode of the lattice pattern), it is possible to suggest to the player that the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a "green" display mode (a check pattern display mode in FIG. 211 (b)) indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot A and the degree of expectation is high.

  In other words, in the first control example, in the prefetching effect in which the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed, the information indicating the result of jackpot judgment in the target winning information is mainly set as the effect mode of the prefetching effect. In the pre-reading effect in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed, information indicating the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the target winning information is mainly configured to set the effect mode of the pre-reading effect. ing.

  Thereby, the player can make various judgments in order to predict the special symbol lottery result based on the target winning information by comprehensively discriminating the display manners of the plurality of objects whose display manners are changed by the look-ahead effect. You will watch the production carefully. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, even if the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is delayed, a part of the third symbol that is variably displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Is configured so that the prefetch effect is executed so that it can be changed forward. That is, as described above, the numbers of the third symbol and the jackpot type are related to each other, and when the jackpot is actually hit, each third symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination (for example, a square). Since it is displayed, the number of the third symbol is a more direct indication of the result of this special symbol lottery (big hit type) to the player, so the treasure box role before the third symbol is stopped and displayed The display mode of the object 750 is made variable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to sequentially suggest the lottery result of the special symbol to the player, and it is possible to keep the player interested in various effects to be performed.

  In this control example, when the prefetch effect is executed, the display pattern of the holding symbol or the treasure chest accessory 750 is configured to be changed to the display mode indicating the effect result of the prefetch effect, but finally the prefetch effect. It suffices to change the display mode showing the effect result of (3), and for example, the display mode may be changed stepwise with the effect result of the prefetching effect as the final stage. In this case, it is advisable to configure the pre-reading effect so that it can be set in multiple stages in correspondence with the size of the privilege to be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the effect while expecting more display modes to be changed.

  Further, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols, and to determine whether to execute the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750. Therefore, it is possible to know at which timing in which the display mode of the effected object is changed during the period from the storage of the winning information to the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information. Since it can be made difficult, it can be expected that the display mode can be further changed even when the effect result of the look-ahead effect is already displayed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the pre-reading effect is configured such that the display modes of a plurality of target objects can be randomly variably displayed, but the pre-reading effect variably displays the display mode. The order of the objects may be determined in advance. As a result, it is possible to easily tell the player which target object the display mode of which can be changed next is. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine that the display mode has changed.

  In the case of randomly variably displaying the display modes of a plurality of effect target objects as in the present control example, which effect target object display mode is changed immediately before the timing when the display mode is actually changed. The same effect can be obtained by configuring so as to notify.

  Further, in the present control example, the timing for variably displaying the display mode of the effect-produced object is set at random, but the display mode may be varied at a predetermined specific timing, or the game may be performed. The display mode may be changed based on the person operating the operation means.

  Further, in the present control example, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbols, the player can be informed easily of the prize information to be the target of the prefetching effect this time, and the target prize information is difficult to understand. The pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of is executed. As a result, for example, when the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is changed before the display mode of the reserved symbol, the player is expected to predict which winning information the prefetching effect is being executed for. Can be provided.

  In addition, in the present control example, the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the prefetch effect is configured to be variable, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol before and after the variable is changed. You may comprise so that it may be made. As a result, even when the look-ahead effect using the hold design is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hold design (winning information) the pre-read effect is being executed. In addition, in the look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is changed, the player may be informed of the target reserved symbol (winning information).

  In addition, in the present control example, as the prefetch effect, it is configured to execute a plurality of variable display effects by using a plurality of target objects for one winning information, but is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute pre-reading effect for different winning information for each of a plurality of target objects, for example, pre-reading effect using a plurality of target objects for one winning information. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute, and as a result of the determination, only the effected object determined not to execute the prefetching effect is set as the effected object of the prefetching effect for other winning information. You may. Thereby, when the display mode of a plurality of target objects is changed, the player may be a look-ahead effect executed for one piece of winning information, or a plurality of cases executed for a plurality of winning information. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a look-ahead production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the prefetching effect from getting tired early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212 and FIG. 213, the content of the charge effect for displaying the specific symbol (charge symbol) as the third symbol will be described. FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the charging effect, and FIG. 212 (b) shows an example of a case where the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charging effect. It is a schematic diagram.

  This charge effect is a state where the third symbol showing the same number on the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 is stopped (that is, the reach state). (a)) is a presentation in which a specific symbol (charge symbol) Z4 is interrupted and displayed. Then, when the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, it becomes a combination of the third symbols indicating that the special symbol big hit or small hit is won. Furthermore, during this charge effect, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the hit, the effect of temporarily stopping the specific symbol Z4 at the stop timing is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing "7", and the middle symbol column L2 is being variably displayed, that is, "7". In the reach state of "," the specific symbol Z4 is displayed in the middle symbol row L2 by being interrupted in the normal middle symbol row L2. In this state, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol 1 display region Dm1a is executed, and the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display region Dm2. The variable display mode indicating that the user is present is displayed.

  Then, from the state shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed is reached, as shown in FIG. 212 (b), the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2. . The provisional stop display is a display state in which the specific symbol Z4 is rocked to such an extent that the player can recognize that the specific symbol Z4 is stopped, but is not actually completely stopped and displayed. In this state, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1a is executed, and the normal symbol display area Dm2 is a display indicating that the normal symbol is a hit. A variable display mode indicating that the display is stopped in the mode is displayed. And since FIG. 212 (b) shows an example of a case where the winning of the normal symbol is won, after the temporary stop of the specific symbol Z4 (after the variation stop of the normal symbol), the first electric accessory 640a is opened. To be done.

  With such a configuration, when the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol hit (big hit, small hit) is won for the player. It is possible to give an unintelligible notification as to whether or not the player has won the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make the game contents executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped) interested.

  Furthermore, since the charge effect (effect in which the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed) can be executed depending on whether the special symbol is won or the normal symbol is won, the charge is performed. The effect frequency can be increased by increasing the execution frequency of the effect.

  Next, the charge effect described above is configured to be executed in the case where the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, so the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the special symbol lottery result. If it is, it is possible to expect the player to be a more advantageous lottery result (big hit), for example, the jackpot game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed. If the game content of and the game content of the small hit game are completely different (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) that is operated to open is different), if the player draws the special symbol lottery result this time Since the judgment is made immediately, it becomes difficult for the player to continue to have a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial game content of the big hit game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed and the game content of the small hit game are configured to be the same. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining what the hit game is being executed immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game is executed. Furthermore, using the period in which the same game content is set (common game period), the effect (roulette effect) of informing the player of the result of the present winning is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is configured.

  Here, the contents of the roulette effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 213. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213 (b) displays the effect result of the roulette effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the roulette effect is executed, in the main display area Dm, a character 811b imitating a boy who is the main character of the roulette effect, and the special symbol lottery result (big hit or small hit) ) 811c for indicating), and a sword 811k for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the roulette 811c are displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 212 (a) is a roulette effect that is executed when a small hit of a special symbol is won, and therefore a display mode “triangle” in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a indicates that the small hit is won. The fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, this roulette effect is executed during the small hit game.

  In the roulette 811c, a jackpot area 811c1 indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol this time was a jackpot (area marked with a circle) and a jackpot area indicating that it was a jackpot ( 811c2) is formed so as to have the same size, and is rotated and displayed in the right direction at a speed at which the player can identify each area. After that, the roulette 811c is rotated and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which the player cannot easily identify each area), and the sword 811k is thrown toward the roulette 811c.

  When the sword 811k pierces the roulette 811c, the rotation speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this state, the player is informed that the area where the sword 811k is stuck is the result of the special symbol lottery this time. In FIG. 213 (b), since the roulette effect is executed after the small hit is won (the roulette effect executed during the small hit game), the effect that the sword 811k is stuck in the small hit area 811c2 is executed. .

  Note that the roulette effect described above is executed during the same period (common game period) as the game content of the small hit game and the game content of the big hit game, and thus the game content of the win game during the roulette effect. From this, it is not possible to determine the result of the special symbol lottery this time. Therefore, the player who wants to know the result of the lottery for the special symbol as early as possible will pay attention to the effect mode of the roulette effect that is being executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the example described above, the big hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2 formed on the roulette 811c are formed to have the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol is drawn. It is preferable that the size of each region be changed according to the result. With this, at the start of the roulette effect (before the roulette 811c rotates at a high speed), the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol by grasping the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c. You can Further, in the above-described example, the display mode in which one big hit area 811c1 and one small hit area 811c2 are formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of big hit areas 811c1 and small hit areas 811c2. And may be formed alternately.

  In addition, in the above-described example, an example in which two types of a big hit area 811c1 and a small hit area 811c2 are formed as an area showing the lottery result of the special symbol is shown, but not limited to this, for example, a big hit area 811c1. It may be further subdivided according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

  In addition, the rotation display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, and the display mode of the character 811b may be varied to suggest the lottery result of this special symbol.

  In the first control example, when the winning game is started, the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed and the effect result is automatically displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, The roulette effect may be started based on the start of the game, and the result of the roulette effect may be displayed based on the fact that the ball has won the attacker that is opened during the common game period. The effect result of the roulette effect may be displayed based on a predetermined operation performed on the operation means during the period. As a result, the player can be actively involved in the production.

  Further, in the first control example, it is configured to execute the roulette effect during the winning game, but is not limited to this, for example, configured to execute the roulette effect during the change of the special symbol Is also good. That is, for example, when the effect period of the roulette effect is 10 seconds and the effect period of the charge effect is 15 seconds, the charge effect is started 25 seconds before the variation stop timing of the special symbol, and the variation stop timing is 10 seconds. The variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation may be set so as to execute the roulette effect two seconds ago.

  In this way, not during the winning game, when the roulette effect can be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, the above-described roulette effect is also executed in the charge effect executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. It becomes possible. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the normal symbol which is won during the variation period of the special symbol is stopped, the stop timing is calculated, and the roulette effect is executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing. (The specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect), the effect mode of the charge effect may be set. Further, in the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect, in addition to the big hit area 811c1 and the small hit area 811c2, it may be set so as to form an ordinary figure hit area showing hits of ordinary symbols. As a result, it is possible to execute the roulette effect even when the normal symbol is won, so that the execution frequency of the roulette effect can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the contents of the first operation effect (button fusion effect), which is one of the operation effects for the player to operate the operation means, will be described. FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents at the time when the first operation effect (button fusion effect) is started, and FIG. 214 (b) is after that, after a certain period has elapsed. FIG. 215 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents, and FIG. 215 (a) shows the effect contents when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) once in the first operation effect (button fusion effect). FIG. 215 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 215 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect contents after button fusion in the first operation effect (button fusion effect).

  Here, the effect contents of the first operation effect (button fusion effect) will be described. In this first operation effect (button fusion effect), the player operates the operation means, whereby the result of the special symbol lottery this time is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the operation means is operated a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of the third symbols (three in the present control example) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

  The operation valid period is set for the operation of each operation means, and if the operation means is not operated within the operation valid period, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not displayed. Further, when the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the operation valid period set for the operation of each operation means satisfies a predetermined condition (when the display mode is the same), each operation means A plurality of third symbols are displayed based on one operation of the operation means by combining the operations of. Thereby, even when the remaining period of the operation valid period is small, it is possible to display all the third symbols, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means to the end.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the left display area 81a, the middle display area 81b, and the right display area 81c are formed so as to cover up the left symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the right symbol row L3 that are being variably displayed. It Then, in the left display area 81a, a first button 822a and a time gauge t1 for indicating the operation valid period of the first button 822a are displayed, and in the middle display area 81b, a second button 822b and its second button. A time gauge t2 for indicating the operation valid period of 822b is displayed, and a third button 822c and a time gauge t3 for indicating the operation valid period of the third button 822c are displayed in the right display area 81c.

  When the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) in this state, the display mode of the first button 822a is changed to the display mode indicating that the operation means is operated, and the left display area 81a displays the left first area. The three symbols Z1 are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  The operation valid periods corresponding to the buttons 822a to 822c are all the same length (5 seconds), and the start timings of the operation valid periods are also the same, but in FIG. On the display screen, the remaining time displays t1a to t3a of the time gauges t1 to t3 are displayed in a display mode showing different remaining times. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 4 seconds, and the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds. The time display t3a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

  Further, in the present control example, the moving speeds of the gauges of the time gauges t1 to t3 (the lengths of the arrows in FIG. 214A) are the same. That is, the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to be different when the same operation valid period is set.

  In the case of executing a plurality of operation effects in which the same operation effective period is set in this way, the order of the operation effects can be visually displayed to the player by displaying with different apparent remaining times. Can be determined. Further, it is possible to make the operator think that the operating means should be operated promptly according to the reduction (subtraction) of the remaining time, and to operate the operating means eagerly.

  Here, in the main production in which the same operation valid period is set and the moving speeds of the gauges of the time gauges t1 to t3 (the lengths of the arrows in FIG. 214A) are the same, If the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are made different, the timing at which the remaining time becomes 0 may be different. Therefore, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), the effect of blinking the time gauge is executed, and the remaining time is not reduced during the period when the time gauge is off (hidden). is doing. This makes it possible to easily unify the timings when the remaining time of each time gauge t1 to t3 becomes 0 without preparing a plurality of timing movement speeds. In this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is 1 second.

  In FIG. 214 (b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the operation valid period of the first button 822a is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode shown by a broken line) indicating 2.5 seconds, and the second button 822b is displayed. The remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the operation valid period is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line) indicating 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time t3b of the time gauge t3 indicating the operation valid period of the third button 822c. Is displayed in a display mode indicating 4.5 seconds. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), the moving speeds of the time gauges t1 and t2 are displayed so as to be lower than the moving speeds of the time gauge t3.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 once in the state shown in FIG. 214 (b), as shown in FIG. 215 (a), the left display area 81a displays the left third symbol Z1 showing "7". It is displayed in a manner. Also in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in a blinking display mode and the time gauge t3 is displayed in a normal display mode, as in FIG. 214 (b).

  Then, when the predetermined period elapses in the state of FIG. 215 (a), since the moving speed of the time gauge t3 is faster than the moving speed of the time gauge t2, the remaining time displays of the time gauge t2 and the time gauge t3 are the same. . When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 are the same, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), a fusion button 822d in which the second button 822b and the third button 822c are fused is displayed, and the time gauge is displayed. The fusion operation effect in which the fusion time gauge t4 in which t2 and the time gauge t3 are fused is executed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the remaining time display of the time gauges t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is 1 second. In the fusion time gauge t4, the remaining time display t4a is displayed in a display mode showing the remaining time of 1 second. When the player operates the operating means while the fusion button 822d is displayed, the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in the middle display region 81b and the right symbol Z3 is displayed in the right display region 81c at once.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the example in which the fusion button 822d is displayed in the state where the left symbol Z1 is already displayed has been shown, but the operation means is never performed during the first operation effect. When is not operated and the remaining time of the operation valid period is 1 second, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to the right display area 81c.

  In this way, since the display area in which the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of the effect (effect in which the third symbol is displayed) executed when the operation means is operated, an operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. Can be provided.

  In the present control example, when the fusion operation effect is set, the fusion button 822d is displayed to execute the easy-to-understand effect for the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even after the fusion operation effect is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 214A is continuously displayed, and the fusion operation effect is executed based on the fact that the player operates the operation means. It may be configured to. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the fusion operation effect is configured to be executed when the display mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is the same, but other conditions May be configured to execute the fusion operation effect, for example, when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of a plurality of operation effects, the fusion operation effect is executed. Alternatively, the remaining time of the operation valid period set for a plurality of operation effects may be all predetermined timing conditions (for example, all remaining times are odd numbers, the value of a specific digit indicating the remaining time is 0, and the remaining time is The fusion operation effect may be executed when the added value obtained by adding the values of the respective digits of the indicated numerical value satisfies 10). Thereby, it is possible to provide an unexpected operation effect.

  In this control example, the case where a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation valid periods set for the plurality of operation effects may overlap, and the start timing of each operation effect may be set. May be different, or the length of each operation valid period may be different.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the effect contents of the second operation effect (automatic press effect) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed in the second operation effect, and FIG. 217 (a) schematically shows the effect contents executed in the initial period (first period) of the automatic press effect. 217 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic pressing effect, and FIG. [Fig. 8] is a schematic diagram schematically showing effect contents executed in a final period (third period) of automatic press effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the content of the automatic press effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, an operation effective period of 10 seconds is set as an operation effect for which the automatic press effect is executed, and an effect result display period of 2 seconds is set after the operation effective period has elapsed. Then, of the operation valid period of 10 seconds, the first 8 seconds is set as the button operation immediate response period in which the effect result is immediately displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means), and the remaining For 2 seconds, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operating means) is operated within a predetermined period at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed, and if the button is operated, the effect result is displayed. It is set as a period.

  During the button operation immediate response period, the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and when the button operation immediate response period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 216, The automatic press effect is executed. This automatic pressing effect is an effect that is executed in the remaining 2 seconds of the operation valid period (2 seconds from 8 seconds after the operation valid period is set to 10 seconds elapse), and detailed description As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, the effect of the character appearing in the main display area Dm depressing the button display Z8 is executed.

  In this control example, the automatic press effect is set by dividing into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and the automatic effect 1 (button automatic press effect 1) is executed during the first period. The automatic effect 2 (automatic button press effect 2) is executed during the second period, and the automatic effect 3 (automatic button press effect 3) is executed during the third period.

  In the second operation effect thus configured, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (Example 1) in FIG. 216), the effect result is displayed immediately after the button operation is executed. Until the period ends, a display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. When the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (Example 2) in FIG. 216), the effect result display period ends from the timing of the second period after the waiting period until the first period elapses. Until then, a display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (Example 3) in FIG. 216), the main display area is the display mode showing the same effect result as when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

  In this way, by setting the time during which the automatic press effect is being executed as the button operation periodical correspondence period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, the effect being executed is suddenly interrupted. It is possible to suppress the execution of a discomforting effect, and it is possible to cancel the automatic pressing effect by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically involved in the operation effect.

  In the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the automatic press effect is continuously executed during the standby period that occurs when the frame button 22 during the automatic press effect is being operated. It is configured such that an effect mode indicating that the light emitting means is in the standby period is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the frame button 22 has been operated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, the effect contents during the automatic press effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the automatic pressing effect is executed and the automatic button pressing effect 1 is executed, a character 811a imitating a bird appears in the main display area Dm and tries to land on the button display Z8. The effect to be performed is executed. In this state, the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 is 2 seconds (first period).

  Then, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1.5 seconds (second period), the automatic button press effect 2 shown in FIG. 217 (b) is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 2, an effect is performed in which the character 811a is placed on the button display Z8 and looks around. In this state, the remaining time display t5b of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation valid period of the button display Z8 indicates that it is 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1 second (third period), the automatic button press effect 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. This automatic button press effect 3 is an effect in which the character 811a riding on the button display Z8 presses a button.

  As described above, in the present control example, the character 811a appears as the automatic press effect, the effect of pressing the button is executed, and the operation result display period is set at the timing when the automatic press effect is completed (the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed). Since the effect result of the set operation effect is displayed, the player can be associated with the operation effect and the effect result.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, the effect result display is executed at the timing when the currently set period (first period to third period) has elapsed. However, in this case, the start mode of the effect result display (the effect mode that is executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is changed according to the period in which the frame button 22 is operated. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, a presentation mode in which the character 811a flying in the sky falls and presses the button display Z8 is set, and the frame button during the second period. When 22 is pressed, a presentation mode in which another character simulating a bird is placed on the button display Z8 and the button display Z8 is pressed with the weight is set.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to display the effect result without changing the effect mode of the automatic press effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 and without giving a feeling of strangeness. In this control example, the effect mode of the automatic press effect executed in each period is configured not to be changed depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured such that only easy elements (for example, color change and comment addition) are made variable, and in this case, the effect content may be changed only when the effect result is an effect result that is advantageous to the player. . As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the frame button 22 during the automatic push-down effect, thereby increasing the motivation for the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the effect contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 will be described. FIG. 219 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the time when a ball wins the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen at the time of a ball winning in the attacker 165.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (a), the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 wins the jackpot (jackpot D) that is opened, and when the jackpot game is executed, the third symbol display device At 81, the jackpot playing screen is displayed. On the jackpot playing screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that the jackpot is being played is displayed in the main display area Dm, and acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and a comment of "Right hit right" indicating the game method during the big hit game is displayed.

  In FIG. 219 (a), a ball shot by a right-handed game has won a specific winning opening 65a (a winning opening that allows the ball to win when the variable winning device 65 is opened) in the special winning device 550. Although the display content at this time is shown, the acquisition information 831 is displayed in a state in which the number of prize balls given based on the fact that a ball has been won in the specific winning opening 65a is not added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), in the state shown in FIG. 219 (a), the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a has won in the specific winning opening 65a at the same timing as winning in the pseudo attacker 165. The number of prize balls awarded based on the above is configured to be added. Specifically, when the specific winning sensors 65s1, 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detect that a ball has won the specific winning opening 65a, the timing at which 0.5 seconds has elapsed from that point, that is, the specific winning opening 65a The display mode indicating that the award ball has been awarded is displayed at the timing when the period (0.5 seconds) required for the award winning ball to reach the pseudo attacker 165 has elapsed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the prize ball is awarded based on that the ball has won the pseudo attacker 165. In addition, since the winning sound for notifying by voice that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 is also configured to be delayed in accordance with the update timing of the acquisition information 831 described above, FIG. The winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the timing shown.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 4, the main control device 110 is equipped with the MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main controller 110, the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and display setting on the second symbol display device 83 are executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 220, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the first control example. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  For the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of the special symbol and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, and stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (reach hit type, out of reach (outside length A, outside short A), out-of-reach type), fluctuation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 are used. In addition, the random symbol counter C4 is usually used for lottery of ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 253). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the holding ball of the first special symbol, and a holding ball of the second special symbol. Special symbol 2 reservation sphere storage area 203b consisting of four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas) for doing is provided respectively, and a special symbol reservation common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selecting counter C3, and a changing type counter are matched with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

  The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that is a jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and when the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is higher than that at a high probability (special). It is divided into two types, that is, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability of the special symbol (see FIG. 222 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability of the special symbol (see FIG. 222 (a)) Provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , Reaches a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then returns to 0. The value of the special win type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is dislodged. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is dislodged.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. . In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is set to five types of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit D", and "big hit E", and by the special hit type counter C2, Either is decided. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. In this special hit random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are five random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random value "0 to 4" is a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. It is stored in 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 500, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 5, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are six random number values that are jackpots for the special symbol, and the values “4 to 9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. . In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 500, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6, so the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "6/500".

  In this control example, a random number value that is a big hit stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Then, the random numbers that are big jackpots are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And as shown in FIG. 223 (a), in the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 referred to corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and the The special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 referred to corresponding to the lottery of the 2 special symbols is set respectively.

  Special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, if the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot, the special symbol reserved ball execution area is set (acquired and stored) special A determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 223 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special map 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, the jackpot type when the random number value in the acquired bonus hit type counter is "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". Moreover, the jackpot type when the value was "50 to 68" was "bonus B", and the jackpot type when it was "69 to 98" was the value of "jackpot C" and "99". In this case, "big hit D" is set as the big hit type.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example determines four types of hit types by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2 when the big hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is configured to be.

  Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot, it is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 that is stored is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 223 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, the jackpot type when the random number value in the acquired jackpot type counter is "0 to 49" is "jackpot D". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", "big hit E" is set as the big hit type.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured such that five types of hits are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Moreover, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can get interested in which one of the lottery is executed. Moreover, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot in which the probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (100%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation ratio is not constant as a whole. Moreover, since the selection ratio of the jackpot D in the second special symbol is set to be high, the probability that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is selected is set to be higher than that of the first special symbol, which is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured so that it is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed reach of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 253) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores the random number value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, for normal / latent probability used in the gaming state (normal state, latent probability state) when the winning / probability determination probability of the ordinary symbol is low probability. The variation pattern selection table 202b1 and the probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (probability variation state) in the case where the hit determination probability of the normal symbol is high probability are set respectively.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the normal state as a gaming state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), It is configured to be able to set three game states with latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols), and at the end of the jackpot game, the type of jackpot that was won, or the jackpot is won. The gaming state is set according to the gaming state that was set at the time.

  The details of selection of the variation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later will be described in more detail. In the main control device 110, the win / fail judgment result, the number of holding balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type Based on the value of the counter CS1, the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super-reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are decided, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the decision contents is set.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal / latent probability variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal / latent probability variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each of the variation patterns, The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned. Further, when the hit / no hit determination result is a win, the variation patterns are respectively associated with the determined jackpot types (the jackpot types determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special jackpot type counter C2). Is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The values and are assigned. Further, when the hit / no hit determination result is a win, the variation patterns are respectively associated with the determined jackpot types (the jackpot types determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special jackpot type counter C2). Is set.

  The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the ordinary symbol storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is When it matches with the value of the random number which is a hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a probability of hitting a normal symbol from that low probability. It is divided into two types, one for high high probability time (the period when the symbol is in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. Furthermore, the type of hit of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the present control example, it is configured such that the long hit can be won only during the low probability state of the normal symbol, and when the long hit is won, the electric accessory 640a is released in the opening time of 4 seconds. Long hit is executed. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be temporarily executed in the normal state. Normal hits (short hits) other than the above-mentioned long hits are hits in which the electric accessory 640a is actuated in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds once.

  In addition, in the present control example, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed in the probability variation period and the opening operation in the long time are set to be the same during the time saving in the normal hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the long time hit is different. May be opened. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter a ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 more during a long time, and during the normal game, the variable display with the second special symbol is displayed. Can be made to be executed easily, and the variation display of the second special symbol in which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 222 (c), when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, if the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the ordinary symbol is the normal hit, If "6", it is determined that the long hit. On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal hit is the normal hit.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated, and reduce the frequency with which the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is entered. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game balls by the player and increase the profit on the game shop side. On the other hand, during the time saving and the probability variation period, which have a high probability, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 640a can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 can be provided. It is possible to increase the opportunity to enter the. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game balls of the player and set a game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game with a high probability of aiming to play a game for a longer time.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 255) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 251). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (a), in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), and the ordinary random number as described above are provided. In addition to the table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)) and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), a small hit random number table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202f, and a small hit scenario table 202g are set. Further, although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, and the like in addition to the above.

  The small hit random number table 202e is a table that is referred to in the special symbol lottery when it is determined whether or not a small bonus that can be given to the player has been won as compared with the case where the big hit is won. Here, the contents of the small hit random number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (b). As shown in FIG. 222 (b), in the present control example, only the lottery of special figure 1 is configured to win the small hit.

  The jackpot scenario table 202f and the jackpot scenario table 202g are data tables in which the game operation content during the jackpot game and the game operation content during the jackpot game are stored in association with the determined hit type, respectively. , The game operation during each hit is executed based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table.

  Further, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203j, probability variation counter 203m, other memory area It has 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and in each of these areas, The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored are shifted. The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal hit random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of), they are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the holding area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  Special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d, variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize) (third symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first entrance 64, and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed.

  The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a holding sphere number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the holding balls based on winning in the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control device by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the variable display reserved sphere number itself, which is reserved in 110. As a result, the special display 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display holding ball number managed by the special design 2 holding ball number counter 223b is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of held balls displayed in the actual variable display has deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and holds the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere count notified by the display reserved sphere count command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and 1 is added to the maximum value 4 each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding spheres for variable display increases. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

  When the sphere passes through either the right or left through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c.

  The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to ON while the small hit game is being executed. The probability variation counter 203m is a counter for measuring a period during which the probability variation state continues, and a predetermined value is set when the probability variation state is set. Then, the value of the counter is updated at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in the probability changing state, and when the updated value reaches a predetermined value, the process of ending the probability changing state is executed. To be done.

  The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. This time saving medium counter 203j, the initial value is set to zero, the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value according to the big hit type is set. To be done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour-shortening medium counter 203j.

  In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, etc. necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 are set, but the details are omitted.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) under the condition. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a reservation rank selection table 222b, a reservation mode selection table 222c, and a treasure box mode selection table 222d.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set respectively corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a fluctuation value of 1 is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection not shown.

  The reserved rank selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (reserved rank) regarding whether or not to execute the prefetching effect based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110. In this control example, it is configured to set the hold rank for all of the winning information corresponding to the received winning command, whether to execute the prefetch effect according to the set hold rank, or It is configured to set an effect mode when executing an effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 228 (a), the contents defined in the reserved rank selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 228 (a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the pending rank selection table 222b is associated with the types of winning / decision determination results included in the received winning command and the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 included in the effect counter group 223p. A plurality of reserved ranks (rank 1 to rank 4) are defined.

  Specifically, when the win / no determination result is "big hit D" that is most advantageous to the player, "rank 2" is "70-" when the value of the holding rank counter 223p1 is "0-69". "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "89", "Rank 1" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and if the result of the judgment is "big hit A, B, E", it is for the reserved rank. "Rank 3" is defined in the range of the value of the counter 223p1 of "0 to 69", "Rank 2" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". .

  When the result of the hit / miss determination is “big hit C, small hit”, the value of the holding rank counter 223p1 is “0 to 69”, “rank 3” is “70 to 89”, and the like. When "rank 4" is defined as "rank 2" in the range of "90 to 99", and the result of judgment is "missing" which is the most disadvantageous to the player, the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 is "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

  That is, in this control example, four types of "rank 1" to "rank 4" can be selected as the types of pending ranks selected for each winning information, and the result of winning / judging is advantageous to the player. What is more, the advantageous rank (rank having a small value) is set so as to be easily selected.

  In this way, when executing a plurality of pre-reading effects, rather than setting the effect mode of each pre-reading effect based on the winning / non-winning judgment result of the winning information, the holding rank is set based on the winning / winning judgment result of the winning information. By configuring so as to set the effect mode of each look-ahead effect based on the holding rank, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect mode of the look-ahead effect performed. .

  In other words, when the look-ahead effect is executed when the result of the hit determination is out, in order to make the player have an expectation, it is possible to set an effect mode with a high expectation of hit, but the player is excessive. In order to prevent the expectation from being held and the desire to play the game to be reduced, it is common to configure a production mode with a low winning expectation degree, for example, if the result of winning / disapproval determination is incorrect. When performing the prefetching effect, the effect mode having a low hit expectancy is set at a rate of about 90%, and the effect mode having a high hit expectancy is set at a rate of about 10%. The look-ahead effect is executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the effect mode of each prefetching effect is set based on the hit determination result, the effect mode with a low degree of expectation is set as the effect mode of one prefetching effect, There is a problem in that a production mode with a high expectation is set as the production mode of the other pre-reading production, and the production effect of the pre-reading production cannot be enhanced.

  On the other hand, by setting the holding rank in advance based on the hit determination result, by configuring to configure the effect mode of each look-ahead effect according to the set hold rank, for example, the hit determination result of In this case, the low-expectation-level pre-reading effect that selects the performance mode of each pre-reading effect from the low-expectation effect mode and the high-expectation-level pre-reading effect that selects from the high-expectation level effect mode are executed separately. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode for each prefetch effect without causing the above-mentioned problem.

  Further, for example, by configuring so that a larger number of holding ranks can be set than the types of the hit / miss determination result, it is possible to execute more various look-ahead effects without a feeling of strangeness.

  The hold mode selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the hold symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbols can be changed at the timing when the winning command is received from the main control device 110, or at the timing when a new special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is started. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 228 (b), the contents defined in the hold mode selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the hold mode selection table 222c is associated with the hold rank selected using the hold rank selection table 222b and the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 included in the effect counter group 223p. , A plurality of holding modes are defined.

  In this control example, it is configured to change the color of the holding design as a holding mode, and the colors of the holding design normally displayed in "white" are "rainbow" and "red" in descending order of expectation. , “Green”, “yellow”, and “blue”.

  Specifically, when the winning expectation level is the highest (set only when the big hit D is won) "holding rank 1", the value of the holding mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". “Red” in the range, “-(no change)” in the range 70 to 89, “green” in the range 90 to 93, “yellow” in the range 94 to 96, When "rainbow" is defined in the range of "97 to 99" and "reserve rank 2", "green" is displayed in the range of "0 to 69" when the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is " "Yellow" in the range of 70 to 79, "-(no change)" in the range of "80 to 89", "Red" in the range of "90 to 96", and "97 to 99" "Blue" is specified.

  In the case of "holding rank 3", the value of the holding mode counter 223p2 is "-(no change)" in the range of "0 to 69", and "yellow" is in the range of "70 to 79". , “Green” is defined in the range of “80 to 89”, “Blue” is defined in the range of “90 to 96”, and “Red” is defined in the range of “97 to 99”. In some cases, the value of the holding mode counter 223p2 is "-(no change)" in the range of "0 to 89", "blue" in the range of "90 to 93", and "94 to 96". "Yellow", "97" to "98" are defined as "green", and "99" is defined as "red".

  In addition, in the present control example, the mode in which the color of the holding symbol is changed is selected as the holding state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the holding symbol may be changed. The display mode may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved symbol (the range in which the player can identify the target reserved symbol) to show the effect result of the prefetching effect.

  The treasure box mode selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when the display mode (color) of the treasure box accessory 750 is selected, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information. is there.

  Here, the contents defined in the treasure box mode selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure box mode selection table 222d shows whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the jackpot type information (winning / absence determination result) included in the winning information and the corresponding winning information (the holding mode is already variable). A plurality of treasure box modes are defined in correspondence with the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 of the effect counter group 223p.

  Specifically, in the case where the result of the hit determination is "big hit D" and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "red" in the range of "0 to 69". , "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", "-(no change)" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is variable, “Red” is defined in the range of “0 to 89” and “rainbow” is defined in the range of “90 to 99” as the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3.

  In other words, in the present control example, in the case where the display mode of the reserved symbols has already been changed with respect to the reserved symbols corresponding to the winning information indicating that the “big hit D” has been won, the treasure box accessory 750 The display mode is also always changed, while the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 may not be changed in the state where the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed. As a result, it is possible to set the effect pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed without changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750.

  In addition, it is configured such that the display mode of “rainbow” having the highest hit expectation rate is selected when the hold mode is not changed, compared to when the hold mode is changed. As a result, the display mode (holding mode) of the reserved symbol is not changed by the look-ahead effect, and the treasure chest accessory 750 is easily changed to the display mode “rainbow” with the highest expected degree of hitting. Therefore, for the player, It is possible to execute an unexpected effect while providing the enjoyment of predicting which of the reserved symbols the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 has changed.

  Next, in the case where the hit / miss determination result is “big hit B” and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not variable, “blue” is in the range of the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “0 to 69”, In the case where "-(no change)" is defined in the range of "70 to 89" and "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbols is variable, for the treasure box mode In the range of the value of the counter 223p3, "blue" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", and "red" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

  Then, in the case where the result of the hit determination is “big hit A, C, E, or small hit” and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “0 to 69”. "-(No change)" in the range of, "blue" in the range of "70 ~ 89", "-(no change)" in the range of "90 ~ 99" is defined, the display of the corresponding pending symbols When the mode is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 89" and "red" in the range of "90 to 99".

  Finally, in the case where the winning / disapproval determination result is “out” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is “− (no change) in the range of“ 0 to 89 ”. ) ”Is defined as“ blue ”in the range of“ 90 to 99 ”and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of“ 0 to 69 ”. “Blue” is defined as “− (no change)” in the range of “70 to 99”.

  Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b, the ordinary holding sphere number counter 223c, the fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, operation effect flag 223h, operation effect type storage area 223i, pressed flag 223k, hold effect information storage area 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect The counter group 223p, the pending production flag 223q, the treasure box production flag 223r, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the general figure variation start flag 223t, the general figure production prohibition flag 223u, the general figure production flag 223v, and the other memory area 223z. At least provided.

  The special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the first is held in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of holding balls such as when a prize information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the second special symbol suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, when a prize information command is received, or It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b. Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of holding balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted. When it is done, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or a holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball The value of the number counter 203e is acquired, and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b are updated, The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b in response to receiving the holding ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223a after storing, or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b, a display holding sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved sphere number symbol corresponding to the value of the sphere number counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223a is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b is the main. The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  Normally reserved sphere number counter 223c is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b, except that the target is changed from the special symbol to the ordinary symbol. However, since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2302 of FIG. 259), the third symbol. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform the variable display of the third symbol, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special type stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is turned off when turning off (see S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to first area). 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to ordinary symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a starting prize for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special-winning random number counter C1 acquired according to the starting prize, From each value of the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn (whether winning, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and various predicted information is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In addition, when the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 is detected, from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in accordance with the passage, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the passage is drawn by lottery. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information notified by the prize information command (in the case of prize information of special symbols, win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern, ordinary symbol) In the case of the winning information of No. 2), the winning or winning) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas corresponding to the type of the entrance (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) in which the entrance is detected, or the normal symbol ( Among the vacant areas of the first area to the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information (whether winning, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn Although a configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the voice lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning occurs, various information predicted corresponding to the starting prize, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b In addition to the setting means for setting the prize information command, when the prize information command is received, various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223f and the received prize information command are included. A configuration may be provided in which a determination unit that determines whether or not various pieces of information (winning information) match. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

  In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing at which the prize information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the prize information command is provided, and in addition to the timing at which the starting prize is won, a periodical notification is given. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from a time saving state to a normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (or A configuration may be used in which the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the winning information command stored in the storage means at the time of stop). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetching effect) using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f.

  In the present control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a prefetching effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (prefetching effect) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player is given to each reserved ball before the variable display is started. It can make you expect a big hit. It is also possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  The state setting area 223g has a current game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and a game state before a predetermined period (for example, if the present is a big jackpot game, a game state at the time of winning the jackpot). This is a storage area that is set (stored).

  In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received by the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the game state included in the received state commands is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. In addition, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), when it is determined that the command indicating that the jackpot game is to be executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is set immediately before. It is configured to be set (stored) as the set game state. As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode of the variable effect executed after the jackpot game is finished, according to the game state set at the time of jackpot winning. Further, for example, even in the case of a jackpot of the same jackpot type, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning, if the game state executed after the jackpot game ends can be changed, during the jackpot game It is possible to predict the game state set after the jackpot game on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and execute the effect during the jackpot game to suggest the prediction result.

  The operation effect flag 223h is for indicating that the operation effect is being executed, is a flag that is set to ON when the operation effect is being executed, and the setting status of the operation effect flag 223h. According to the above, the processing contents when the operation means is operated are made different.

  The operation effect flag 223h is executed when it is determined in the fluctuation effect setting process (see S3004 of FIG. 268) that the fluctuation pattern to be executed this time includes the operation effect (S3105 of FIG. 268: Yes). It is set to ON in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3204 in FIG. 269), and referred to in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) (S3304 in FIG. 271) and set to ON. If yes (S3304: YES in FIG. 271), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). Then, it is also referred to in the operation effect management processing (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the effect mode of the operation effect based on the presence or absence of the frame button 22 operation is set for the operation effect being executed. .

  The operation effect type storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of operation effect to be executed, and stores the effect type of the operation effect determined in the operation effect setting process (see S3106 in FIG. 269). The information shown is stored (see S3203 and S3207 in FIG. 269). The effect type of the operation effect stored here is referred to when determining what the operation effect currently being executed is in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502 and S3509 in FIG. 273). ). As a result, different processing can be executed depending on the type of operation effect. Further, the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation effect ends (when the corresponding variation pattern effect ends).

  The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operating means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is a thing.

  The pressed flag 223k is determined when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed while the operation effect flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 271 (S3304: Yes), is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271), and is referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, S3518 in FIG. 273). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is turned off (S3505, S3513, S3520 in FIG. 273).

  In this control example, as the operation effect, there are a case where the effect mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operation means, and a case where the effect mode is changed after a predetermined period has elapsed. In such a case, by using the pressed flag 223k, the effect mode of the operation effect can be reliably changed based on the operation result of the operation means.

  The holding effect information storage area 223m is a storage area for storing various information set to execute the prefetching effect, and four storage areas corresponding to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, and the second It is formed from four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and is configured to store information indicating a reservation rank, a reservation mode, and a treasure box mode in each storage area. Then, when a new special symbol variation is started, various information stored in each storage area is configured to shift similarly to the winning information storage area 223f.

  In this control example, by using the information stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m, the special symbol variation starts the information set when the winning command is received (for example, the information indicating the holding rank). Since it can be held until it is performed, the prefetching effect using the information can be executed at any timing. As a result, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that is surprising to the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In addition, in the present control example, the prefetch effect is configured to be executed at the timing when the effect mode of the prefetch effect is determined, but other than this, for example, the effect mode of the determined prefetch effect is stored in the pending effect information. It may be stored in the area 223m and configured to execute the prefetching effect using the stored effect mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. With this configuration, for example, by using the winning information included in the winning command received during the period in which the execution of the prefetching effect is prohibited due to the prefetching effect being performed for another reserved symbol. It is possible to determine an effect mode of the prefetching effect in advance and execute a new prefetching effect based on the completion of the prefetching effect executed for another reserved symbol.

  Further, when the process of setting the presentation mode of the prefetching effect is executed once, the process of setting the production mode of the prefetching effect is executed again for a predetermined period (for example, until the variation of the special symbol is executed twice). (Period of period) When using a prohibition process, information defining the prohibition period may be stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m, or a hold indicating a special symbol change to be executed next. Configured to set prohibition information specific to a specific storage area on the storage area side so as to prohibit the execution of prefetch effect based on the hold effect information stored in the storage area where the hold effect information corresponding to the symbol is stored You may.

  The operation effective timer 223n is a timer for measuring an operation effective period (a period during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)) during the operation effect, and the operation effect is executed. When the time is up, a value is set to time the corresponding period. The operation valid timer 223n is periodically subtracted from the value set in the counter updating process (S2113) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The effect counter group 223p is a counter group having a plurality of counters used for selecting various effects. The contents of various counters included in the effect counter group 223p will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect counter group 223p. As shown in FIG. 230, in the present control example, as the effect counter group 223p, the holding rank counter 223p1, the holding mode counter 223p2, the treasure box mode counter 223p3, and the other counter 223pz are provided, and each counter is "0. It is composed of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "99".

  Each counter of the effect counter group 223p is updated by 1 every time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without being synchronized.

  The pending effect flag 223q is a flag for indicating that a pending effect, which is one of the prefetching effects, is being executed, and is set to ON when the pending effect is being executed. The on-hold production flag 223q is set to ON in the holding mode selection process (see S2405 of FIG. 261) (see S2506 of FIG. 261), and when set to ON, a new holding mode is not set. Reference is made (see S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop processing (see FIG. 266), when it is determined that the special symbol variation that is the target of the holding effect has stopped (S2957: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to OFF (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the holding effect from being simultaneously executed for a plurality of holding symbols, so that the player pays attention to the look-ahead effect executed for the specific holding symbol. be able to. Further, when the winning command indicating that the winning / judging result is a hit is received in a state where the pre-reading effect with the winning / failing judgment result already being executed is executed, the pre-reading effect is executed for the winning information corresponding to the winning command. Since it is possible to suppress, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect in which the variation result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the prefetching effect has not been executed becomes a big hit.

  In the present control example, it is configured to suppress the prefetch effect for a plurality of reserved symbols by using the pending effect flag 223q, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, 2 It may be configured to execute the look-ahead effect up to one reserved symbol, and there is winning information indicating a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the look-ahead effect being executed. When it is determined that the reserved symbols to be the target of the prefetch effect may be switched.

  The treasure box effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the treasure box effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects, is being executed, and is set to ON when the treasure box effect is being executed. This treasure box production in progress flag 223r is different only in that the target of the above-mentioned holding production in progress flag 223q is replaced with a look-ahead production in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. To do.

  The pseudo-winning order storage area 223s is stored in the pseudo-attacker 165 calculated for the balls won in the respective winning openings (the right general winning opening 163, the specific outlet opening 166, and the specific winning opening 65a) provided in the special winning device 550. This is a storage area for temporarily storing the order of arrival (pseudo winning order). In the pseudo-winning order storage area 223s, in the pseudo-attacker effect process (see S2812 of FIG. 265) executed in the right attacker jackpot-related process (see S2702 of FIG. 264), it is determined that a ball has won in each winning opening. When the command shown is received, the winning-down order to the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated by adding the ball downflow period from each winning opening to the pseudo attacker 165, and the calculation result is stored (S2903 in FIG. 265). . Then, the winning order stored in the winning order storage area 223s is referred to when setting the specific effect mode (overflow effect mode) for the pseudo prize information of 10 or later. The information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared each time one round game is completed (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

  The universal figure production possible flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed, and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol selected per long opening is executed. If set to on. Thereby, while the charging effect is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to determine whether or not the effect mode can be changed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. . In addition, when it is determined that it is not possible to replace the effect mode of the charging effect when the fluctuation pattern command indicating that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed is received ( In S2305 of FIG. 259: No), it is never set to ON.

  The public figure production prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of the general figure production (production in which the production mode of the charge production is changed based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol) is prohibited, Is set to ON when it is determined that the execution of is prohibited. In the winning information related process (see S2209 of FIG. 260), this universal figure production prohibition flag 223u is determined when there is winning information indicating that the special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won (Figure 260 (see S2407), and is set to ON (see S2408 in FIG. 260).

  Then, in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), the reference is made when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the long opening of the normal symbol (per normal figure length) is received (S2305 in FIG. 259), and the reference result is obtained. Based on this, the setting status of the universal figure production possible flag 223t is changed. This ordinary figure production prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF when a special symbol indicating a win (big hit, small hit) is stopped and displayed.

  By configuring in this way, if there is winning information indicating the special symbol hit (big hit, small hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the long opening of the normal figure, special based on the lottery result of the normal symbol It is possible to prevent the variable effect of the symbol from being changed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from providing an incomprehensible effect by executing the effect based on the general figure length hit while the look-ahead effect is being executed based on the winning information indicating the hit. be able to.

  In this control example, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won, the general drawing effect prohibition flag 223u is turned on. Alternatively, the general-purpose production prohibition flag 223u may be set to be turned on under other conditions, for example, the general-purpose production prohibition flag 223u is set at a timing other than during the high-speed change of the variable effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. May be set to ON. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having an uncomfortable feeling that the variation effect being executed is suddenly switched.

  Furthermore, in addition to the timing at which the variation pattern corresponding to the long opening of the universal figure is received, the universal figure production prohibition flag 223u is set to ON based on the timing at which the game is executed per long universal opening. Is also good.

  The general figure effect flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the general figure effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the general figure effect is being executed. This in-progress effect flag 223v is set to ON when executing the inspiring effect in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). Then, in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the stop timing of the special symbol, it is referred to in the stop process (see S2213 of FIG. 266) executed when the stop command of the special symbol is received (FIG. 266 S2952). Further, it is also referred to for setting the variation pattern of the variation effect set in accordance with the variation start of the special symbol (see S3103 of FIG. 268).

  Continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that the universal symbol effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, and when the universal symbol effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. It is set to on. The continuation flag 223x is turned on when it is determined in the charge effect setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270) that the normal figure fluctuation time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time being executed (S3224: Yes in FIG. 270). It is set (see S3231 in FIG. 270). Then, in the stop process (see S3103 of FIG. 266) (see S2953 of FIG. 266), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2953 of FIG. 266: Yes), the general effect (charge effect) is performed. A process for displaying the reduced third symbol for reducing and stopping the third symbol to continue without a feeling of strangeness is executed.

  In this way, while performing the charge effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol, when performing the process of changing the effect mode of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the variation stop of the normal symbol is stopped. Even when the timing is after the variation stop timing of the special symbol, by using the continuation flag 223x, it is possible to execute the charging effect across the variation stop timing of the special symbol. In addition, when the charge effect is executed across the variation stop timing of the special symbol, it is more difficult for the player to determine the stop display mode of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol than the normal stop display mode. By variably setting to, it is possible for the player to execute the charging effect without feeling uncomfortable.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 237) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored at the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first starting opening 64a is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 35). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", an image showing it is stopped of the variable effect. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any concern that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images showing "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 231, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 provides the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first starting opening 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so the electric symbol is usually a big hit and the electric accessory is opened, and the ball is the second starting opening. The easier it is to enter 64b, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set as time passes. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) corresponding to the background mode by the rear surface type, the player selects one of the backgrounds by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 236). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 236).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 236, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 35 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276 (b)). If the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 276 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 276 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 of FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 237) in which the contents of the image drawing instructions are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 237) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 237) that describes the instruction content of the image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 276 (b )), The pointer update processing (see S7305 of FIG. 284 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 237), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 38, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all the sprites used for drawing one frame of the image based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 276 (b )), The clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 of FIG. 286). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7810 in FIG. 286). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed (see S7902 of FIG. 287).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 238 to 255. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

  Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special-winning random number counter C1, the special-winning type counter C2, and the normal-winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values become maximum values (in this embodiment, 299, 99, and 239, respectively). When reached, clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and thereafter. A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) to the first starting opening 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After the through-gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is larger than 0 (S204), and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S205), and the holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of S207 is executed, the processing of S213 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (N1) is acquired. Yes (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is 1 Subtracting (S210), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set a holding ball number command (S211). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223a of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) and a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIGS. 240 and 241. When this special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) or special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) is executed, it is common to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. A lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the provided execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the special symbol, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). Then, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208), or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) It is determined whether or not the result (the result of the lottery this time) is a big hit for the special symbol (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). After that, the values of the probability variation counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the big hit medium flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the big hit (S217: No), the small hit setting process (S222) is executed. The small hit setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a game state update process (S223) is executed. The game status update processing (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, while performing a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (whether winning or not), the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in (1).

  In the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired. Yes (S251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability game state) (S252). The determination as to whether it is during the probability variation period is performed by determining whether the probability variation counter 203m is on. The probability variation counter 203m is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game based on the jackpot D and the jackpot E is finished. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S252: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S253. In the process of S253, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained. It is acquired (S253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a one by one. As described above, six random numbers "5 to 10" are set as the random number value that is the big hit of the special symbol in the probability variation game state (special game state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these values. When the random number value to be a hit matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S255.

  On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state of the special symbol (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a one by one. As a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol in the normal game state (low probability game state), five pieces of “0 to 4” are set, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number that becomes a hit between them. When the numerical values match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S255.

  In the process of S255, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S253 or S254 is a big hit of the special symbol (that is, the value of the special bonus random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a which are acquired. (S255), if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S255: Yes), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 Based on, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, and the special symbol big jackpot ((( Of the jackpot D and jackpot E)), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is the big hit D (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit E. (See FIG. 223 (c)).

  In the process of S256, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (S257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big symbol symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol fluctuation is defined in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the determined big hit types are big hit A, big hit B, and big hit D, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach, "51 to 250" If it is in the range of “”, the variation pattern of super reach is determined.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the win / fail judgment result, and notifies it to the voice lamp control device 113. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the judgment. Even if the main controller 110 is in the display mode of the out-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-display mode not to be the reach display mode as long as the variable time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for dislodging, various types of "short deviating", "long deviating", "disconnecting normal reach", and "disengaging super reach" are defined. As a variation pattern for the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot D, various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of position (S255: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is set. Based on, the variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach, the supermarket is reached based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Decide the variation time of the symbol variation such as reach.

  When the processing of S257 or the processing of S259 is completed, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S257 or the processing of S259 is set (S260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S261). When the process of S261 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, while performing a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (whether winning or not), the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed in (1).

  In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S214), like the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, which is acquired by the process of S271, is stored in the execution area. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

  Next, at present, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the probability variation period (high-probability game state) (S272) If it is determined that the gaming state is during the probability variation period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. Since the state is the probability change state, the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 11 random numbers “5 to 10” are set as the random number value for the special symbol big hit, and the value of the special random number counter C1 and the random number value for these hits match. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is acquired, the process proceeds to S275.

  On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a one by one. As a random number value to be a big hit of the special symbol, 5 pieces of “0 to 4” are set, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match, the special symbol Determined as a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is acquired, the process proceeds to S275.

  In the process of S275, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S273 or S274 is determined whether it is a big hit of the special symbol (S275), and when it is determined that it is the big hit of the special symbol (S275: Yes), based on the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S276). More specifically, the value of the special bonus type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpot of four types of special symbols (bonus) A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), and the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is the big hit A (6R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 68”, the big hit B. It is determined that it is (16R probability variation big hit), if it is in the range of "69 to 98", it is determined to be a jackpot C (8R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "99", it is a jackpot C. (See FIG. 223 (c)).

  In the process of S276, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the regular variation pattern selection table 202b1 (S277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol fluctuation is defined in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the determined big hit type is the big hit A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the variation pattern of super reach.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the win / fail judgment result, and notifies it to the voice lamp control device 113. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the judgment. Even if the main controller 110 is in the display mode of the out-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-display mode not to be the reach display mode as long as the variable time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

  For example, the variation patterns for disengagement are defined as "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection superreach", and "disconnection special reach". ing. As a variation pattern for the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot D, various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined.

  In the process of S275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out (S275: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is set. Based on, the variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach, the supermarket is reached based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Decide the variation time of the symbol variation such as reach.

  When the process of S277 or the process of S279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S281). When the process of S281 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the small hit setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the small hitting setting process (S222). This small hitting setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the, to determine whether it is a small hit, for determining the scenario of a small hit performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Processing.

  In the small hit setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit (S301). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S301: Yes), a small hit scenario is set based on the small hit scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small hitting medium flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S301, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (S301: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the game state update processing (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the game state update processing (S223). This game state update process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the values of the probability variation counter 203m and the time saving middle counter 203j are set. It is a process for executing a subtraction process and updating the game state based on the subtracted value.

  In the game state update process (S223), first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203m is larger than 1 (S351). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203m that has been subtracted is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), it is the timing to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating a normal state is set (S354), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 1 (S355). When it is determined that it is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S355: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating the transition to the latent probability state is set (S358), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S357, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is not 0 (S357: No), this process is directly terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64, and if there is a starting winning, It is a process for executing a pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the respective values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the changing type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, regarding S408 to S414, in each of the processes of S401 to S406 described above, only the process for winning the first winning opening 64 is changed to the process for winning the second starting opening 64b. Since similar processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second winning opening 640, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 is acquired even when stored as a reserved ball, and the corresponding special symbol 2 It is stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, by obtaining the respective values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 similar to the first special symbol for the second special symbol. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the winning probability can be made constant even for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  After executing the processing of S413, the prefetch processing is executed (S414). The details of the prefetching process (S414) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 245, but based on the values of various counters acquired for the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Then, a process of previously determining each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

  In this embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the ball entered, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203, since there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the respective counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the win / fail judgment at the time of entering the ball can be acquired, and the counter not related to the win / fail judgment can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be kept while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a pre-reading process (S414) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S414).

  In the pre-reading process (FIG. 36, S414), first, based on the acquired value of the special winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the variation is started (S421). Whether or not the winning or failing judgment at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming status (low probability) or the probability variation gaming status (high probability gaming status) when the fluctuation starts is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is determined based on the hit determination and the hit type of the variable displayed prior to each counter value stored.

  In the processing of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the processing of S421 is a hit (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a win (S422: Yes), it is determined whether the hit type is a big hit A or a special hit type counter C2 (S423). When it is determined that the hit type is the big hit A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating the big hit A is set (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot is the jackpot B is set (S425). In addition, in the processing of S422, when it is determined that the result of the determined hit / miss determination is a miss (S422: No), a miss winning command is set (S426).

  As described above, before the fluctuation start, the result of the determination of whether or not the hit is made in advance is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the hold ball is established. It is possible to recognize in advance whether or not the result of judgment is valid and the type of hit. Therefore, by the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, a notice effect for notifying the player in advance of the judgment result of the winning or losing of the reserved ball (for example, the color of the reserved symbol can be changed to a color for notifying the winning or judgment result or , An effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the hit determination in the holding ball) can be executed. Further, as for the winning command, one winning command is output to the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the prefetching process (S407) which is one process of the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S407).

  In the prefetching process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502).

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502: Yes), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1 and the small hit random number table 202e. Then, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S502: No), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202d2, the lottery result, The jackpot type is acquired (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the second incident port 640 associated This is a process for controlling the opening time of the one electric accessory 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included while being done. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process ends. The normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S609). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S637 or the process of S638 in FIG. 38 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S609, if the variation time has not elapsed (S609: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S609, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 of FIG. 247, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is the second symbol display. The device 83 is set so as to be stopped (lighted). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S713 in FIG. 247, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the process of S610, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1307) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Ending, in the display mode set by the process of S707 of FIG. 38, the process of S710, or the process of S713, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S611). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S612), and the normal symbol hit operation command is set. Then (S613), the present process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 is set by the process of S612, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1306) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, The opening / closing control of the accessory 640 is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 247, the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). This normal symbol variation start process (S608), the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is set in the variation start of the normal symbol This is a process to be executed.

  Now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a big hit (S701). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S701: Yes), the process proceeds to S704.

  In the process of S701, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S702). If the probability change is not in progress (S702: No), the process proceeds to S704.

  If the probability change is in progress (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the midst of a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. And a normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S703). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the high hit probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the process of S704, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 of FIG. 246 and Based on the low-probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S704). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the low hit probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 222 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that the short symbol of the normal symbol is hit, and if it is in the range of "6", the long symbol of the normal symbol is hit. It is determined that there is, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 205-239", it is determined that it is a deviation of the normal symbol (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery for the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 is This is because it is possible to prevent the ball, which has been opened, from trying to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second winning opening Many balls enter 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning port 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S703 or S704, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S705), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S705: Yes) , It is determined whether or not the type of hit of a normal symbol is a long time hit (S706). When it is determined that the type of hit of the normal symbol is long time hit (S706: Yes), the display mode of long time hit is set (S707). In the process of S707, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. Next, the variation pattern command per universal figure length is set (S708), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric auditors product 640 are set to 2 seconds × 2 times (S709), and the process proceeds to S715.

  In the process of S706, if it is determined that the type of winning of the normal symbol is the normal winning (S706: No), the display mode of the normal winning is set (S710). Next, a variation pattern command per ordinary drawing is set (S711). The opening period of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S712), and the process proceeds to S636.

  In the process of S705, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S705: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disengagement is completed, the universal figure dislocation variation pattern command is set (S714), and the process proceeds to S715.

  In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S715), and if the probability is changing (S715: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716). , This process ends. On the other hand, if the change in S715 is not in progress (S715: No), the change time of the change display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S717), and this process ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening for a long time are the same as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the state of varying probability and the time saving state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of times of opening are different. It may be configured to set.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 238), and it is judged whether or not the ball passes through the first through-gate 66. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the first through gate 66 is detected over three times of the timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S803: No), the process proceeds to S806. On the other hand, the ball passes through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S805), and the process proceeds to S806. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, the universal figure prefetching process (S806) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the universal figure prefetching process will be described (S806). FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the contents of this general picture prefetching process (S806). In the universal figure prefetching process (S806), first, pre-determination is executed based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S901). Specifically, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary hit random number table 202c.

  Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, the winning preliminary determination result and the variation time determination result are acquired (S902). After that, the universal figure winning a prize information command is set (S903), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 250, the other winning process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing the contents of the other winning process (S109). This other winning process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether there is a ball in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific outro, and if there is a ball, This is a process for setting a command.

  In the other winning processing (S109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001). When it is determined that there is a prize in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001: Yes), the specific winning command is set, and the process proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, in the processing of S1001, when it is determined that there is a winning in the specific winning opening (S1001: No), the processing of S1002 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1003.

  After executing the processing of S1001 or S1002, it is next determined whether or not there is a ball in the specific outro (S1003). If it is determined that there is a ball in the specific outro (S1003: Yes), a specific out ball input command is set (S1004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that there is no ball in the specific outro (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and this process is ended.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 253. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is similarly performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the processing shifts to S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the state command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S909). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S911, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1301 to S1307 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1310 and S1311 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1301). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S131 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) and the start winning process (see FIG. 244) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. In addition, the winning command set in the starting winning process and the prefetching process (see FIG. 245) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, when the special symbol is in the small hitting state, the small hitting effect is executed, and the small hitting control process for opening or closing the third winning opening 82 of the third electric accessory is executed (S1305). In the big hit control process, the third winning opening 82 is opened for each round of the small hitting state, and whether the maximum opening time of the third winning opening 82 has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have been won in the third winning opening 82. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the third winning opening 82 is closed. The opening and closing of the third winning opening 82 are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1305). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, if the opening / closing control start of the first electric auditors product 640a is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), the opening / closing control of the first electric auditors product 640a is started. . The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S709 of FIG. 247 or the processing of S712 in the normal symbol variation start processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1306). In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240) or the process of S259, or the process of S277 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241) or the process of S279 When the variation pattern is set, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240) or the process of S259, or the process of S277 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241) or the process of S279. When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 ends and the process of S256 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 208) or In the display mode set by the process of S258, or the process of S276 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241) or the process of S278, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. (Lights up).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1307). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S716 or the process of S717 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1309). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process proceeds to S1301 and the above-described respective processes after S1301 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed from the start of the main processing this time (S1309: No), the initial period is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1310, S1311).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1310). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1302 (S1311).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1301 to S1307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , The normal value of the random number counter C4 per normal) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the processing of S1308, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1312 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1312), and a power-off command indicating that the power supply is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1313). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1314), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1315), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1308 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1301 to S1307 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1310 and S1311 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1301. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1301 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1301 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control processing (S2204) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 257), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1401). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1401: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1403). ). More specifically, in the process of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1403, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the jackpot scenario opening. It is determined whether the value corresponds to.

  In the processing of S1403, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: Yes), the opening command for jackpot is set (S1404), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1403: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

  In the processing of S1405, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a during jackpot is set (S1406), and the number of newly started rounds is set. The round number command shown is set (S1407), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: No), it is next determined whether or not the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S1408). Here, in the present control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1408: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S1409 (the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed). The solenoid is turned off so that the closed state is established), and this processing ends. Note that the above-described determination processing of S1405 to S1409 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S1409: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1410) and the ending effect. If it is the start timing of (S1410: Yes), the big hit ending command is set (S1411), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S1412). Here, the jackpot end timing refers to a case where the ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the processing of S1412, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412: Yes), the value of the hour saving medium counter 203j is set based on the jackpot type of this time (S1413), and the probability is changed based on the jackpot type. The value of the counter 203m is set (S1414), the big hit medium flag 203n is set to OFF (S1415), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that it is not the timing of ending the jackpot (S1412: No), the present process is directly terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the small hit control process (S1305) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the content of this small hit control process (S1305).

  In the small hit control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S1501). Specifically, the processing of S1604 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed to determine whether the small hit scenario is set. In the process of S1501, if the small hit scenario is not set (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if the small hit scenario is set (S1501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the process of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of.

  In the processing of S1503, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S1503: Yes), the opening command for small hits is set (S1504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit scenario (S1503: No), it is then determined whether it is the round start timing of the small hit scenario (S1505).

  In the processing of S1505, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S1505: Yes), the opening of the third winning port 82 is set (S1506), and then the round start command is set (S1507). ), And this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small hit scenario (S1505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508). Here, in the present control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, five balls) are won in total while the third winning opening 82 is opened, or the opening period of the third winning opening 82 is a predetermined time. When it has passed, it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1508, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the third winning opening 82 is set to be closed in the processing of S1509, and the The process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the third winning opening 82 is not satisfied (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for starting the ending effect (S1510).

  In the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1510: Yes), the small hitting ending command is set (S1511), and the present process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit is started on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512). Here, the end timing of the small hit refers to a case where the ending effect execution period has elapsed.

  In the process of S1512, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203g is set to OFF (S1513), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1513: No), this processing is ended.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Unit 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 273. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2119 (see FIG. 257) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the current startup processing. ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), the power-off process in S2119 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2119 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2118 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2119, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 259). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2119 is executed, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process. Then, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2012). The status command is a command set in the process of S1208 of the startup process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the process of S2012, when it is determined that the status command is received (S2012: Yes), the information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area 223g, and the process ends (S2013).

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command capable of determining whether or not the symbol is normally hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. You can

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are already cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is performed through the processes of S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2101 this time has been executed (S2101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2113 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2114, the variable display setting process of S2115, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. That is, by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, the command determination process is performed. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later is set (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, the special lamp 1 holding ball number counter 223a, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 223b, and the process of turning on the holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the normal holding ball number counter 223c Is done.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. The frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2108), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 272.

  When the process of S2110 ends, the operation effect management process is executed (S2111). This operation effect management process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 273, but the effect mode displayed during the operation effect is determined according to whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated. The process for changing is executed.

  After the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), operation control of various effect movable auditors provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the various movable objects for effect is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22), the game result during the jackpot game, and the like. Since it is executed according to the content of the operation scenario of the movable movable object for use, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the process of S2112 ends, the counter updating process is executed (S2113). In this counter updating process (S2113), a counter (timer) for timing information necessary when executing various effects, for example, a process for updating the value of the operation valid timer 223n is executed.

  When the process of S2113 ends, the command determination process is executed next (S2114). This command determination processing (S2114) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 258. After executing the command determination process (S2114), the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267.

  When the process of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are both turned on (S2118), and the power-off process is executed (S2119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 257) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

  In the command determination processing (S2114: FIG. 258), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation pattern reception process is executed (S2202), and this process is ended. Details of the fluctuation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2203). When the stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this processing ends. .

  When the stop type command is not received in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command is received (S2206). When the number of holding balls command is received (S2206: Yes), the number of holding balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 holding ball The number is stored in the number counter 223b) (S2207), and this processing ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 223b. Is stored. Further, when the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is received, the information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary reserved ball number counter.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2206, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not a winning-related command is received (S2208). When a winning-related command is received (S2208: Yes), winning information-related processing is started (S2209), and this processing is ended. The details of the winning information-related processing (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260, but a winning command output from the main control device 110 (a winning command corresponding to a special symbol, a winning command corresponding to an ordinary symbol). Based on the, the prize information included in the prize command is pre-determined, the process of executing the effect (prefetch effect) based on the result of the pre-determination, and the process of temporarily storing the result of the pre-determination are executed. To be done.

  In the process of S2208, if the winning-related command is not received (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit-related command is received (S2210), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2210: Yes). , Hit-related processing is executed (S2211), and this processing ends. The hit related process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2210, when it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that the stop command is received (S2212: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2213), and the process is hunted. This stop processing (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) which is one of the commands in the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception processing. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), a variation pattern (variation effect) of a special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received variation pattern command. Further, when the variation pattern command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is received, it is determined whether or not the variation effect of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol can be executed.

  In the variation pattern reception process (S2202: FIG. 259), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received this time is for a special figure (S2301), and the variation pattern command for a special figure, that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol is shown. If it is determined to be a command (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the received command. Then (S2303), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received this time is not for special drawing, that is, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command for general purpose drawing is received (S2301: No), then, It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for the universal figure received this time is a variation pattern command indicating that the universal figure length per win (per long opening) has been won (S2304). In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the variation pattern command indicating that the winning is for the general figure length (per long opening) is received (S2304: Yes), then the general figure production prohibition flag 223u is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not set to ON (S2305), if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S2305: No), the universal figure production possible flag 223t is set to ON, and this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that a command other than the fluctuation pattern command indicating that the winning is per winning (long opening) is received (S2304: No), or in the processing of S2305, the rendering effect is prohibited. If it is determined that the flag 223u is set to ON (S2305: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the universal figure production possible flag 223t to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the winning information related process (S2209) which is one of the processes in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the winning information related processing (S2209). The winning information-related processing (S2209) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the prize information-related process (S2209), first, it is determined whether the received prize information command is a command indicating the prize information of the special symbol (the prize information command for special symbols) (S2401), and the prize information command for special symbols. If it is determined to be (S2401: Yes), the winning information included in the received winning information command is read (S2402), the winning / deciding result included in the read winning information, and the obtained value of the reserved rank counter 223p1. The reservation rank is selected based on the reservation rank selection table 222b using and (S2403).

  Then, the holding rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m at a location corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S2404). After that, the reservation mode selection process (S2405) and the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the hold mode selection process (S2405) is a process for setting a prefetch effect (hold effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold symbol based on the winning information read this time. Detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. Further, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is a process for setting a pre-reading effect (treasure box effect) for changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information read this time, and details thereof. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S2406 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the winning information read this time includes the winning information (S2407), and if it is determined that the winning information is included (S2407: Yes), the general figure effect is produced. The prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S2408), the received winning information is stored in the corresponding position of the winning information storage area 223f (S2409), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the winning information command received this time is for a normal symbol (general drawing) (S2401: No), the processing of S2402 to S2408 is skipped and this processing is ended. Although detailed description is omitted, in the prize information-related process (S2209), if a prize information command for a general figure is received, whether or not the received prize information command includes winning information, And, if the hit information is included, it is configured to determine whether or not the hit information for executing the long open hit game is included, and further determine the universal figure fluctuation time. The result is stored in the ordinary drawing area of the winning information storage area 223f.

  As a result, it is possible to determine in advance how many seconds the game will be executed per long opening depending on the ordinary symbol, so that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol can be spread over multiple ordinary symbol variations as with the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect (universal picture look-ahead effect) suggested by. It is also possible to determine whether or not the game is executed per long opening during the special symbol fluctuation period being executed, so that, for example, the effect based on the general symbol fluctuation is interrupted during the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol. It is also possible.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which lottery of a plurality of different symbols (lottery of special symbols and lottery of normal symbols) is executed in parallel, the variation is based on the symbol variation on the side which is the lottery result advantageous to the player. Since the effect (variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81) can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the variation effect based on the lottery result (missing) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the content of the holding mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the content of the reservation mode selection process (S2405). In this hold mode selection process (S2405), a process for setting a hold effect, which is an effect for changing the display mode of the hold symbols based on the winning information received this time, is executed.

  When the hold mode selection process (S2405) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pending effect flag 223q is set to ON (S2501), and when it is determined that the pending effect flag 223q is not set to ON. (S2501: No), that is, when it is determined that the hold effect is not currently set (executed), it is in a state where a new hold effect can be set, and therefore, S2502 for setting the hold effect. The process of S2506 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the pending effect flag 223q is set to ON (S2501: Yes), it is in a state in which a new pending effect cannot be set (executed), and thus, the above-described state is performed. The processing of S2502 to S2506 that has been performed is skipped and this processing ends.

  When the processing of S2502 is executed, the holding rank stored in the holding effect information storage area is read (S2502), and the holding rank read in the processing of S2502 and the acquired value of the holding mode counter 223p2 are used. The hold mode is selected based on the hold mode selection table 222c (S2503).

  Then, the display hold command corresponding to the selected hold mode is set (S2504), the selected hold mode is stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m (S2505), and the hold mode for changing the display mode of the hold symbols is selected. If so, the pending effect flag 223q is set to ON (S2506), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the winning information is acquired, the holding effect of changing the display mode of the holding symbol can be executed. Further, by using the pending effect flag 223q, it is possible to prevent the pending effect from being set redundantly.

  In this control example, while the holding effect is being executed (set), a new holding effect is not executed (set) based on the newly received winning command, so that the look-ahead effect (holding effect) is performed. ) Is performed so that it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult to understand, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of times (for example, It may be configured such that the holding effects are overlapped and executed with the upper limit of two).

  Further, in the present control example, the processing for selecting the holding effect is executed without fail when the holding effect in-progress flag 223q is not set to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning command When a predetermined lottery is executed in the prize information-related processing (see S2209 in FIG. 260) executed when the winning lottery is received, the above-mentioned holding mode selection processing is executed when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result. It may be configured to. By configuring such that the process for setting the hold effect is executed at random, the hold design for which the hold effect was not executed is not executed for the hold effect even though the hold mode selection process is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the hold mode selection process is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable effect of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the suspended symbol has not been executed.

  Further, when the holding effect is executed once, then a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10, or a condition that is satisfied when 10 minutes have elapsed). It is also possible to provide a discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not the condition is established, and to prevent the new holding mode selection process from being executed until the discriminating unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to intentionally set a period during which the holding effect is not executed.

  In addition, in the present control example, when a holding effect that changes the display mode of the holding symbol is selected in the holding mode selection process (when a value other than “-” is selected by the holding mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)) It is configured to set the on-hold production flag 223q to on. However, for example, the on-reproduction flag 223q is set to on even when the display mode of the hold symbol is not changed in the hold mode selection process. You may. In this case, it is advisable to provide a period during which the above-described hold effect is not intentionally executed. With this configuration, it is possible to more randomly set the period during which the display mode of the reserved symbols is not changed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the content of the holding mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection processing (S2406). In the treasure box mode selection process (S2406), a process for setting (executing) a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)) that is an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information received this time. Is executed.

  When the treasure box mode selection processing (S2406) is executed, it is first determined whether the treasure box production in progress flag 223r is set to ON (S2601), and it is determined that the treasure box production in progress flag 223r is not set to ON. (S2601: No), that is, when it is determined that the treasure box effect has not been set (executed), a new treasure box effect can be set, and therefore, S2602 to S2606 for setting the treasure box effect. The process of is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, when it is determined that the treasure box production in progress flag 223r is set to ON (S2601: Yes), it is in a state in which a new treasure box production cannot be set (executed), and therefore The processing of S2602 to S2606 is skipped and this processing is ended.

  When the process of S2602 is executed, the notification determination result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then the holding mode is changed from the information stored in the holding effect information storing area 223m. Information indicating the presence or absence (information indicating whether or not the holding effect is a holding symbol to be executed) is read (S2603). Then, based on the treasure box mode selection table 222d using the hit / no judgment result read in the process of S2602, the information indicating the presence or absence of the holding mode change read in the process of S2603, and the value of the acquired treasure box mode counter 223p3. A treasure box mode is selected (S2604).

  Then, the lamp treasure box command corresponding to the selected treasure box mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure box mode is stored in the corresponding location of the holding effect information storage area 223m (S2606), and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is set. When the treasure box mode to be changed is selected, the treasure box in-production flag 223r is set to ON (S2606), and the present process is ended.

  The display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is variably controlled based on the lamp treasure box command set in the process of S2605. The voice lamp control device 113 may have a means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750, or a control device different from the voice lamp control device 113 may be used.

  As described above, in the present control example, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406 of FIG. 262) is performed in the winning information related process (S2209 of FIG. 260) similarly to the holding mode selection process (S2405 of FIG. 261) described above. Configured to perform). Then, when selecting the treasure box mode in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed in the treasure box mode selection processing, based on the determination result of whether or not the display mode of the target reserved symbol is variably displayed. The treasure box mode is configured to be selected. Further, in one prize information related process (S2209 of FIG. 260), after the holding mode selection process (S2405 of FIG. 261) is executed, the treasure box mode setting process (FIG. S2406 of 262) is executed. As a result, it is possible to surely set an appropriate effect.

  Next, the contents of the hit related process (S2211 of FIG. 263) will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit related process (S2211). The hit related process (S2211) is executed by the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 258), and is related to the win (big hit, small hit) from the main controller 110. It is executed when a command is received.

  In this control example, the third electric auditors article 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left side area of the game board 13 is opened when the big hit C is won by the special symbol lottery and when the small hit is won. When the winning game (left hitting game) to be executed is executed and the jackpots A, B, D, and E are won by the special symbol lottery, the variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. The hit game (right hit game) is configured to be executed, and in the hit related processing (S2211 of FIG. 263), a display command for displaying information about the hit game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The processing and the winning effect that varies depending on the type of winning game to be executed are configured to be executed.

  When the hit related process (S2211 of FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to the big hit C or a small hit, that is, a command related to the left hit game (S2701). ). Here, when it is determined that the command is related to the big hit C or the small hit (S2701: Yes), the processes of S2703 to S2709 are executed to set various display contents related to the left hit game. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command received this time is not the command related to the big hit C or the small hit, that is, the command related to the right hit game (S2701: No), various display contents related to the right hit game are displayed. In order to set, right attacker jackpot related processing is executed (S2702), and this processing ends. The contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264, and first, the processes of S2703 to S2709 for setting various display contents regarding the left hit game will be described.

  When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a hit start command indicating the start of hit (S2703). If it is determined that the command is a hit start command (S2703: Yes), the hit type The roulette effect (see FIG. 213) corresponding to is determined (S2704), the display command corresponding to the determined roulette effect is set (S2705), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 213 is an effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and when a small hit game is executed, the small hit game period (5 seconds), That is, the small hit game is executed using the opening period (2 seconds), the round game period (1.5 seconds), and the ending period (1.5 seconds). Also, when the jackpot (jackpot C) game is executed, 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, that is, the opening period (2 seconds), a part of the first round game period (from the start of the round game) 3 seconds).

  In this control example, the same hitting motion is executed during the period in which the roulette effect is being executed, regardless of the special symbol lottery result. That is, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C, the opening period is set to 2 seconds and, as the first round game, the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the round game is started. After a closing period of 3 seconds (a period for closing the third electric accessory 82a), a round game in which the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds is set.

  With this configuration, while the roulette effect is being executed (the small hit game, or the first half period of the big hit game corresponding to the big hit C is being executed), the contents of the hit game being executed Based on, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the hit game currently being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. Further, as described above, as the first round game in the jackpot game, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has elapsed. Thereby, since the third electric auditors object 82a is not opened from the time when the effect result of the roulette effect is displayed until the player recognizes the effect result, the effect effect can be enhanced.

  Note that, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the player is informed of the type of the winning game being executed by the roulette effect, but in addition to such roulette effect, the hit being executed is performed. It may be configured to execute a roulette effect (gasell-roulette effect) that notifies the player of a hit type different from the game type. In this case, although the jackpot game is actually executed, , It is advisable to display the effect result indicating the small hit game as the effect result of the gasell-uret effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 263, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2703, when it is determined that the command received this time is not the hit start command (S2703: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is the round number command (S2706), and the round number is determined. When it is determined that the command is a command (S2706: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S2706, when it is determined that the command received this time is not the round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2708), and it is determined that it is an ending command. In the case (S2708: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2709), and this processing ends. Also. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S2708 (S2708: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, in the hit related process (see S2701 of FIG. 263), when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is a command related to the big hits A, B, D, and E (S2701: No of FIG. 263), the command is executed. The contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702).

  In this control example, when the jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 in the right side area of the game board 13 is executed, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. (See FIG. 219). Then, in the right attacker jackpot-related processing (S2702), processing necessary to correspond the effect contents of the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 to the jackpot game (right hit game) that is actually executed is executed.

  When the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) is executed, it is first determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2801), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes). , A jackpot start command for display is set (S2802), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S2801, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), it is next determined whether the command received this time is the round number command (S2803), which is the round number command. If it is determined (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2804), an opening operation for opening the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2805), and this processing ends. . When the opening operation is set in the process of S2805, in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 257), a solenoid (not shown) for operating the pseudo attacker 165 is shown. No.) is set to ON, and the pseudo attacker 165 is variably operated from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state in which the ball is easy to enter.

  In this way, the actual jackpot is configured by performing the opening operation of the pseudo attacker 165 at the timing when the round number command indicating that a new round game is started is received from the main control device 110. Since the game content and the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 can be made similar to each other, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the processing of S2803, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S2803: No), it is then determined whether the closing command is received (S2806), and when it is determined that the closing command is received. (S2806: Yes), the closing operation of the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2807), the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared (S2808), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2806, when it is determined that the closing command is not received (S2806: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S2809), and when it is determined that the ending command is received (S2809). : Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2810), and this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S2809, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2809: No), it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2811).

  Here, the prize-related commands are various commands that are output when a player wins a ball at a winning opening where the player can win a prize (ball) when he or she plays a right-handed game during a jackpot game. Specifically, a specific winning command for indicating that a ball has won the specific winning opening 65a, a specific general winning command for indicating that a ball has won the specific general winning opening 163, and a specific out opening 166. Indicate a specific out entry command to indicate that the ball has entered.

  In this control example, whether or not there is a winning (ball entry) of a ball in both the winning opening that gives a prize ball based on the entry of the ball and the entrance (out opening) that does not give a prize ball Although the main controller 110 is configured to perform the determination, the present invention is not limited to this, and a means for determining that a ball has entered the specific outlet 166 is provided on the voice lamp controller 113 side. Is also good.

  That is, in the case of a winning opening to which a prize ball must be awarded when the ball wins (wins), the main control device 110 wins the ball in order to execute the process for granting the prize ball. Since it has a configuration for determining, the configuration can be used. On the other hand, since there is no particular processing that main controller 110 has to perform when a ball enters specific outlet 166, the configuration for determining that a ball entered specific outlet 166 is a voice lamp controller. It may be provided on the 113 side. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load of control processing of main controller 110.

  In the process of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command is received (S2811: Yes), the pseudo attacker effect process is executed (S2812), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, the contents of the pseudo attacker effect process (S2812) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo attacker effect process (S2812). In the pseudo attacker effect process (S2812), a process for setting various effects executed during the pseudo jackpot effect for opening the pseudo attacker 165 is performed.

  When the pseudo attacker effect process (S2812) is executed, first, whether the command received this time is a specific winning command, that is, the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether a command indicating is received (S2901). When it is determined that the specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), the pseudo winning effect is set 0.5 seconds later (S2902).

  When the pseudo winning effect is set in this process, a winning sound is output from the voice output device 226 based on the setting information, and a ball to the specific winning opening 65a is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Acquisition information 831 is displayed to indicate the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning. Further, the various winning devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 are caused to perform effects in the variable winning device 65 to indicate that the ball has won.

  When the processing of S2902 is finished, the timing at which the pseudo winning effect set this time is executed is stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2903). Here, the processing of S2903 will be described in detail. In the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the timing at which the pseudo winning effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the ball wins (reaches) the pseudo attacker 165 is arranged in time series. This is a storage area for storing. The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is provided with an area capable of storing 20 pieces of timing information corresponding to the order in which the pseudo winning effect is executed, and the timing at which the pseudo winning effect is executed is set. For each time, the timing information is stored in each region in the execution order of the pseudo winning effect (pseudo winning order).

  In the present control example, since the distance from each winning opening (ball entrance) provided in the special winning device 550 to the pseudo attacker 165 (falling distance of the ball) is different, each winning hole ( There are cases where the order in which the balls are won in the winning opening and the order in which the balls reach the pseudo attacker 165 (winning) are, for example, 0.2 seconds from the time when the balls are won in the specific general winning opening 163. When a ball is subsequently won in the specific winning opening 65a, the winning ball of the specific winning opening 65a that has won later will reach the pseudo attacker 165 first.

  Therefore, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores the information stored in each area so that the timing information set later can be stored so as to interrupt the order of the plurality of timing information already stored. It is configured to be easily shiftable. Furthermore, the upper limit number (30 pieces) of the timing information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be larger than the winning number (10 pieces) which is the closing condition of the round game executed during the jackpot game. However, the timing information (normal timing information) stored in the number of winnings (10 pieces) which is the closing condition of the round game, and the timing stored outside the number of winnings (10 pieces) which is the closing condition of the round game It is configured to identify information (overtiming information).

  As a result, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the ball that has won (winning) the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166 Correspondingly set timing information can be surely stored.

  When the processing of S2903 is finished, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the timing information stored in the area where the winning order to win the pseudo attacker 165 is 10 or later, that is, The over-pseudo winning award effect is set for the timing information (S2904), and this processing ends.

  As the over-pseudo winning effect set in the process of S2904, for example, changing the sound mode of the winning sound output from the sound output device 226, or over-winning the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An effect corresponding to displaying a display mode indicating, or executing an effect indicating that an over-winning has been performed on various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 is applicable.

  In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the specific winning command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the specific general winning command (S2905), and the specific general winning command is received. If it is determined to be a command (S2905: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1.5 seconds (S2906), the above-described processing of S2903 and S2904 is executed, and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the received command is not the specific general winning command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the specific out-ball entering command (S2907), and the specific command is determined. When it is determined that the command is an out-ball entry command (S2907: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1 second (S2908), the processes of S2903 and S2904 described above are executed, and this process is ended. In the process of S2907, when it is determined that the specific out-entry command has not been received (S2907: No), this process is directly terminated.

  In addition, in the present control example, when a ball is won at the specific winning opening 65a and when a ball is won at the specific general winning opening 163, the winning ball is configured to be awarded, and When a ball is won in 166, the prize ball is not awarded. Therefore, in the pseudo winning effect (S2902, S2906 of FIG. 265) set based on the fact that the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a and the specific general winning opening 163, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is In the pseudo winning effect (S2908 of FIG. 265) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and set based on the fact that a ball has entered the specific outlet 166, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls is The three-symbol display device 81 is configured not to be displayed.

  With this configuration, the display mode of the acquired information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot production using the pseudo attacker 165, and the number of prize balls actually paid out to the player It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large error between and. In addition, during the pseudo jackpot production, many balls win the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, the game does not have to be executed to update the display mode of the acquisition information 831 for each ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. It is possible to update the display mode of the acquisition information 831 without giving a person a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, in the present control example, when the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated, the minimum unit (for example, if it is a numerical value if the value displayed in the acquisition information 831 reaches the value corresponding to the set display mode). It is configured to be updated every "1"). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which ball the winning mode of which the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is displayed is based on, and thus it is possible to provide the player with a less unnatural effect. .

  As described above, in the present control example, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated based on the fact that the ball has won in the winning opening in which the prize ball is generated, as the pseudo jackpot effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without, for example, storage means for storing the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game, and the acquisition information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. Updating means for executing the updating process of 831; and a judging means for judging the number of prize balls (the number of unannounced prize balls) for which the process by the updating means is not executed among the prize balls stored in the storage means, May be provided, and when the number of unannounced prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls), the updating process may be periodically executed by the updating unit.

  Further, the pseudo attacker 165 is provided with a detecting means for detecting that a ball has won, and when the detecting means detects the ball, the updating means is executed based on the number of prize balls stored in the above-mentioned storage means. It may be configured as described above, or may be configured to execute the update process based on detecting that a ball has won in each winning opening of the special winning device 550.

  Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2213). In this stop process (S2213), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation stop timing of the special symbol is executed.

  When this stop processing (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation (special figure variation being executed) corresponding to the current stop command is variation per special figure (big hit variation, small hit variation). (S2951), if it is determined that there is no variation per special figure (S2951: No), then it is determined whether or not the flag for general-purpose drawing production 223v is set to ON (S2952), and the flag for generating general-purpose image production is set. If it is determined that the 223v is set to ON (S2952: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953).

  That is, in the processes of S2951 to S2953 described above, a process for determining whether or not the general figure effect is executed across the current special figure stop timing is executed. In the process of S2953, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953: Yes), that is, if the universal figure effect is continuously executed even after the special figure variation stop, the reduced third symbol Is set (S2954), the corresponding stop display of the third symbol is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

  In this way, when the general figure effect is continuously executed even after the special figure fluctuation stop, the reduced third symbol is configured to be displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to understand the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Therefore, the charge effect being executed for the player (see FIG. 212) is executed based on the special symbol lottery, or is executed based on the normal symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether or not it is possible to enhance the effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2951, if it is determined that there is a variation per special figure (S2951: Yes), or in the process of S2952, the general figure production flag 223v is not set to ON (set to OFF). )) (S2952: No), it means that the charging effect was not executed during the change of the special symbol being executed, so that the process proceeds to S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

  Further, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON in the process of S2953 (S2953: No), that is, if the universal figure effect is completed during the current special symbol change, the normal third symbol is set. Since it suffices to perform the stop display, the flag 223v during the universal figure production is set to OFF (S2956), and the process proceeds to S2955.

  In the process of S2957, it is determined whether or not the special symbol change this time is a change subject to the holding effect (see FIG. 210 (a)) or the treasure box effect (see FIG. 210 (b)). Here, the determination is performed based on the information stored in the holding effect information storage area 223m. If it is determined that the change is the target variation (S2957: Yes), the pending effect flag 223q and the treasure box effect flag 223r are set to off (S2958), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2957 that the target variation is not a target variation (S2957: No), this process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus, in S3006. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set to It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3003).

  Next, a variation effect setting process is executed (S3004), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. It is set to do so (S3005). The contents of the variable effect setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG. 268.

  In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although illustration is omitted, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3006.

  In the process of S3006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3006). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3006: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is changed to It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010.

  In the process of S3010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3010). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the content of the variable effect setting process (S3004) which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (S3004). In the variation effect setting process (S3004), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is executed.

  When the variation effect setting process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state (S3101). Here, based on the information set in the state setting area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the probability change state. In the processing of S3101, when it is determined that the current state is the probability changing state (S3101: Yes), the display pattern command which is undergoing the probability changing is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S3102), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current state is not the probable variation state (S3101: No), then it is determined whether or not the general-purpose production effect flag 223v is set to ON (S3103), and it is set to ON. If it is determined that, that is, that is, the general production effect (charge effect based on the result of the ordinary symbol lottery) is executed in the variation effect corresponding to the previous special symbol variation, and the ordinary symbol effect spans this special symbol variation. If it is executed later (S3103: Yes), the charge effect setting process is executed (S3104), and this process ends.

  The details of this charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270, but based on the remaining period of the general effect and the change time (change pattern) of the special symbol change this time, A charge effect which is continuously executed and a change effect effect mode after the charge effect is set are set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the general-purpose production effect flag 223v is not set to ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern acquired this time has an operation effect (S3105), and the operation is performed. If it is determined that there is an effect (S3105: Yes), the operation effect setting process is executed (S3106), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

  In the process of S3105, when it is determined that the operation pattern is not included in the variation pattern acquired this time (S3105: No), then the charge effect (the charge effect executed based on the special symbol lottery) is included. It is determined whether or not the charging effect is included (S3107), and when it is determined that the charging effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charging effect flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and this processing is ended. Here, by setting the charge effect flag 223y to ON, it is possible to determine that it is a timing at which the universal figure effect can be executed.

  Then, in the processing of S3107, when it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time does not include the charge effect (S3107: No), the hold mode selection process is executed (S3109), and the treasure box mode selection process is executed ( (S3110), the present process ends. In the hold mode selection process (S3109), the same process as the hold mode selection process (S2405) described above is executed, and in the treasure box mode selection process (S3110), the same process as the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) described above. Is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, in this control example, the look-ahead effect (holding) at the timing of receiving the winning command of the special symbol and the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, the timing at which the number of holding symbols corresponding to the special symbol is changed. It is configured to execute production (treasure box production).

  Next, the content of the operation effect setting process (S3106) executed in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 of FIG. 268) will be described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the content of the operation effect setting process (S3106). In this operation effect setting process (S3106), a preparation process according to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

  When the operation effect setting process (S3106) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation effect is the first operation effect (see FIG. 214) (S3201), and when it is determined that it is the first operation effect (S3201) S3201: Yes, the operation command corresponding to the first operation effect is set (S3202), the first operation effect type is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3203), and the operation effect flag is set to ON (S3204). ), And this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that it is not the first operation effect (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (S3205), and when it is determined that it is the second operation effect ((3320)). (S3205: Yes), the effect command corresponding to the second operation effect is set (S3206), the second operation effect means is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3204. If it is determined in the process of S3205 that it is not the second operation effect (S3205: No), an effect command corresponding to other operation effects is set (S3208), the process of S3204 described above is executed, and the present process To finish.

  In this control example, the first operation effect is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation effect. Then, the determination is made in the descending order of the set frequency. With this configuration, the processing speed can be increased.

  Next, the content of the charge effect setting process (S3104) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 268) will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the content of the charge effect setting process (S3104). When the charge effect setting process (S3104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a win (big hit, small hit) (S3221), and when it is determined that it is a win (S3221) : No), the universal figure production possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3222), and this processing is ended.

  With this configuration, the charge effect (normal figure effect) that indicates that the result of the normal symbol is a winning result (normal figure effect) is a special symbol lottery that may be more advantageous to the player than the normal figure effect. The priority is set to be lower than that of the variable effect for indicating the result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance of the player's most interesting effect (for example, the effect for showing that the jackpot is won) from being hindered by the other effects.

  If it is determined in the process of S3221 that the lottery result is not winning (missing) (S3221: No), the special map change time extracted from the current special map change pattern and the remaining period of the general map change at the present time Is executed (S3223), and based on the result of the judgment in S3223, it is judged whether the universal figure fluctuation time is longer (S3224). In the process of S3224, when it is determined that the figure change time is shorter, that is, the figure change which is the target of the figure effect ends during the special figure change period of this time (S3224: No), then, If the difference is determined to be 3 seconds or more (S3225), if it is determined to be 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), a variation that temporarily stops the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 in accordance with the universal symbol variation end timing. A pattern (variation effect) is determined (S3226).

  Then, a variation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the general figure production flag 223v is set to ON (S3228), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3225, when it is determined that there is no difference between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol for 3 seconds or more (S3225: No), from the universal symbol fluctuation end timing to the special symbol fluctuation end timing. A change pattern for temporarily stopping the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is determined, and the process proceeds to S3228.

  That is, in this control example, when setting the variation effect corresponding to the new special symbol variation, it is determined whether or not the effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol fluctuation being executed (general pattern effect) is being executed. When the general-purpose production is continuously executed, the variable production corresponding to the general-use production is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily set the variation effect (general figure effect) corresponding to the universal figure fluctuation executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

  In addition, the display mode of the identification information (charge symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the universal symbol production and the identification information (charge symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are the same (including some errors) display Since it is configured to execute the general figure effect by using a part of the special symbol variation effect (for example, charge effect), the effect result of the charge effect (charge It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol display) is displaying the special symbol lottery result or the normal symbol lottery result.

  Furthermore, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), after the end of the general symbol production, the special symbol lottery The special figure variation effect for showing the result is configured to be executed. Thereby, the player can be surely notified of the lottery result.

  On the other hand, in this control example, if the time from the variation stop timing of the normal symbol to the variation stop timing of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), it is assumed that the special symbol variation effect is executed for a short period of time. Also, because it is only difficult to understand the variation effect is performed, without performing the special figure variation effect, it is configured to display the symbols indicating the lottery results of the ordinary symbols for a long time (temporary stop display). There is. Returning to the processing of FIG. 270, the description will be continued. In the process of S3224, when it is determined that the universal figure fluctuation time is shorter, the fluctuation pattern for continuing the charging effect is determined, and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2107) which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the execution of the notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107: refer to FIG. 271), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S3301), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S3301: No). , And this processing is finished as it is. When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the current operation is in the valid period (S3302). In the process of S3302, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S3106 of FIG. 269), the operation effective period corresponding to the type is set in the operation effective timer 223n, and the operation effective timer 223n. It is determined whether or not the value of indicates the operation valid period.

  In the process of S3302, if it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3303), and the pressed flag 223k is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not (S3303: No), it is determined whether the operation effect flag 223h is on (S3304), and if it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is set on (S3304). : Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON, and this processing ends.

  In other words, in the present control example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are set among the operation effects, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the operation effective period, it is already pressed. The flag 223k is set to ON, and the effect mode is set according to the progress of the first operation effect and the second operation effect according to the setting status of the pressed flag 223k. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the effect based on the operation immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, or to execute the effect based on the operation within a predetermined period after the frame button 22 is operated. Can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is not set to ON (S3304: No), the operation mode corresponding to the set operation valid period is determined (S3306), and the determination is made. The display command corresponding to the operated mode is set (S3307), and this processing ends. Further, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (S3302: No), or when it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is ON in the process of S3303 (S3303: Yes), This processing is ended as it is.

  In addition, in this control example, an example is shown in which the variable condition for changing the effect mode of the operation effect is satisfied based on the frame button 22 being operated (pressed) once, but the invention is not limited to this. The variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or operation means having a plurality of operation methods is provided, The variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated by a specific operation method.

  Further, in this control example, the fact that the operating means has been operated is indicated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the operating method for the operating means. Alternatively, it may be configured to show different operation results, and the effect mode of the operation effect may be changed according to the type of the operation result.

  Further, in this control example, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is described as an example of the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means).

  In the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is executed, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period is determined. Although it is configured as described above (see S3306 in FIG. 271), other configurations may be used.

  Specifically, the operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively discriminated is set within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. Then, a storage unit that stores the set length of the operation valid period and a calculation unit that calculates the remaining period of the operation valid period based on the value of the operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation unit is operated are provided. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

  With such a configuration, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time when the operation means is operated), so that various effects can be provided to the player. Can be provided.

  In addition, one operation valid period is determined from a plurality of operation valid periods, and the operation valid period setting means that can be set within the production period of the display effect, and the operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operating means is operated. It is also possible to provide a calculating means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation valid period based on the value of. With such a configuration, different operation effective periods can be set for the display effects of the same display mode, and further, based on the set operation effective period length and the timing of operating the operation means. According to the calculated progress rate of the operation valid period, that is, the length of the entire operation valid period as 100, the rate of the period that has already elapsed (or the period that has not elapsed) calculated as a percentage (%), The operation mode to be executed can be different.

  Thereby, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing with reference to the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that the player is provided with various effects. be able to.

  Furthermore, the operation mode is not set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, but is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculation means. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1 to 100". That is, when the operation mode is set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, in the case where the length of the operation valid period can be set to 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds is set. When the operation means is operated at 3 seconds when the setting is made (remaining time 3 seconds) and when the operation means is operated at 7 seconds when the setting is 14 seconds (remaining time 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between and, different operation modes are set.

  Further, in any of the above-mentioned examples, since the operation means is operated at the midpoint of the operation valid period and the same operation difficulty level is set, the operation is performed when the same operation mode is set. It is necessary to define the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the effective period but also on the set length of the operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is.

  In this case, if the length of the operation valid period is set to be variable to a plurality of lengths, the capacity of the above-mentioned data table will be significantly increased, and the data capacity will be compressed. . On the other hand, as described above, by configuring the operation mode by using the percentage value, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation effective period. Therefore, the operation mode is selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for doing so.

  In addition, as the dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into “1% to 50%” and “51% to 99%”, "1% to 10%", "11% to 20%", "21% to 30%", "41% to 50%", "51% to 60%", "61% to 70%", and "71" % -80% "," 81% -90% ", and" 91% -99% "are provided with a second sorting means, and based on whether or not a predetermined condition such as a special symbol lottery result is satisfied. Determining means for deciding which sorting means to use is provided, the dividing means determined by the deciding means divides the percentage value calculated by the calculating means, and selects the operation mode based on the divided information. It may be configured to do so.

  Further, in the case of using the configuration in which the operation mode executed thereafter is changed in accordance with the operation timing of the operation means, for example, a pachinko machine as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means. It is advisable to use an effect in which the effect movable accessory provided in 10 is moved. Accordingly, the operation effect can be executed without having to worry about the period of the operation effect executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display unit.

  Next, the content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the effect mode of the special figure variation effect. A process for replacing an effect based on a normal symbol lottery (general drawing effect) is executed.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the charging effect flag 223y is set to ON (S3401), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S3401: Yes). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure change currently being executed is a change (S3402). In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the hit variation is not occurring (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the universal figure production possible flag 223t is set to ON (S3403), and it is set to ON. When it is determined (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether the present time is within the production interchangeable period (S3404).

  In this control example, a period in which the special symbol fluctuation is changing at high speed (a period in which none of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed), and only the third symbol Z1 which is first stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. Only during the period, the effect mode of the variable effect set based on the special symbol lottery result is configured to be replaceable with the effect mode based on the result of the normal symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, the variation effect of the special symbol progresses, and after the player enters the state in which the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the reach state), the effect mode of the variable symbol is replaced. It is possible to prevent the production that is difficult for the player to understand from being performed.

  In the process of S3404, when it is determined that it is within the production interchangeable period (S3404: Yes), the universal figure production possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3405), and the universal figure production in progress flag 223v is set to ON. (S3406), the replacement display command is set (S3407), other liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3408), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the charging effect flag 223y is not set to ON (S3401: No), if it is determined in the process of S3402 that the hit variation is occurring (S3402: Yes), S3403. When it is determined in the process of No. that the universal figure production possible flag 223t is not set to ON (S3403: No), when it is determined in the process of S3404 that it is not within the production interchangeable period (S3404: No), Since it is in a state in which the universal figure production cannot be executed, the process directly proceeds to S3408.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the content of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during the period in which the operation effect is being executed.

  When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3501). Then, when it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, it is determined that the operation effect is not currently being performed (S3501: No), the present process is ended as it is. When it is determined that the operation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3501: Yes), the first operation effect is executed based on the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i. If it is determined that the first operation effect is being performed (S3502), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503).

  When it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), and the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3505). The process related to the first operation effect is ended and the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3503: No), then a display mode indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect. Are coincident with each other (in the present control example, the timing when the remaining period of the operation-equipped transition period is 1 second) is determined (S3506).

  If it is determined that it is the coincidence timing (S3506: Yes), the fusion effect display mode for changing the button display that has not been operated at this time to the fusion button display is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the coincidence timing is not reached in the process of S3506, the process directly proceeds to S3509. As a result, in the state where the first operation effect is being executed, if a predetermined condition is satisfied without operating the frame button 22 for a plurality of operation effects, a fusion operation effect that combines a plurality of operation effects is executed. Will be. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

  Next, in the process of S3509, it is determined whether or not it is the second operation effect (see FIG. 216). When it is determined that the second operation effect is being performed (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether the present time is during the first operation period (immediately corresponding button operation period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation effect of the present control example, the operation effective period of 10 seconds is set, and the first 8 seconds of the effect result immediately corresponds to the operation of the frame button 22. Is set as a period during which is displayed (immediately corresponding to button operation), and the remaining 2 seconds are periodically (0.5 second intervals, 1 second intervals) determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated. It is set as a period (button operation regular correspondence period) in which the effect result is displayed based on the determination result.

  In the process of S3510, when it is determined that the first operation period is in progress (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is ON (S3511), and the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON. If it is determined to be true (S3511: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3511: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3512), and the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3513). ), And this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3510, when it is determined that the present operation is not in the first operation period (S3510: No), it is then determined whether it is the first operation period elapse timing (S3514). If it is determined that the first operation period has passed (S3516: Yes), the automatic press effect mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether the second operation period is currently set. (S3516). If it is determined in S3516 that it is during the second operation period (S3516: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to determine the operation status of the frame button 22 (whether a predetermined period has elapsed) (S3517), If it is determined that it is not the determination timing (S3517: No), the present process is terminated.

  In the process of S3517, when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3518), and the pressed flag 223k is turned ON. If it is determined that it has been set (S3518: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3520), and the process proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, in the process of S3518, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3518: No), the automatic press effect is set (S3521), and the process proceeds to S3522. In the process of S3522, the display effect command corresponding to each of the set effect modes is set, and the process is ended.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 274). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) (S6105), the execution of the boot program ends, and the boot process ends.

  In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 include all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Also, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the simple command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) indicated by is drawn. (See S6308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. The player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, so that there is a ball (start prize) in the first starting opening 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp controller. If it is through 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 237) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notification command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous notification. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used for the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305). 237 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S6307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command, The stop type counter is compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the processing of S6304. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (FIG. 277, S6302), as shown in FIG. 277, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area (S6401). (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described below with reference to FIG. 278 (a). FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation control having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S6506), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set by the process of S6504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described below with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), , V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the execution, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S6603). Then, the process returns to S6401 of FIG. 277.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display advance notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that the display preview display command has been received (S6408: Yes), the preview effect display process is executed (S6409). The details of the notice effect display process (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the expectation to the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. And setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of the fact that it is a big hit.

  Here, the notice effect display processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing the notice effect display process (S6409).

  In the notice production display process (FIG. 279 (a), S6409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for advance notice for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received advance notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S6702).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S6703), and based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the variation time is measured. The counter 233h is set (S6704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

  In this way, the advance notice display is set based on the advance notice display command for display output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is displayed, it can be shown to the player as if they are different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content of the notice display and the display timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 executes the selection of the notice display. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the display data table that has already been set up and overwrite it. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, when it is determined that there is no display preview display command (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display variation replacement command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If it is determined that there is a display variation replacement command (S6410: Yes), a variation replacement display process is executed (S6411). The fluctuation replacement display process (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b).

  Here, the fluctuation replacement display process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b). FIG. 279 (b) is a flow chart showing this fluctuation replacement display processing (S6411).

  In the fluctuation replacement display process (FIG. 279 (b), S6411), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display fluctuation replacement command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). The transfer data table is determined by determining the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for variable replacement for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the variable replacement display indicated by the received variable replacement command for display. The data is set in the buffer 233e (S6802).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is measured. The counter 233h is set (S6804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

  In this way, the fluctuation replacement display is set based on the display fluctuation replacement command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is displayed, it can be shown to the player as if they are different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content of the variable replacement display and the display timing, but the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the content of the variable replacement display. It may be configured to do so.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the display data table for fluctuation replacement is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation replacement display may be set and overwritten on the already set display data table. You may comprise.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, when it is determined that there is no display variation replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display operation effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If it is determined that there is a display operation effect command (S6412: Yes), operation effect display processing is executed (S6413). This operation effect display process (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (a).

  Here, the operation effect display processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 (a) is a flowchart showing this operation effect display processing (S6413).

  In the operation effect display process (FIG. 280 (a), S6413), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display operation effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the operation effect for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the operation effect display indicated by the received display operation effect command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The setting is made (S6902).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6903), and based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is measured. The counter 233h is set (S6904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

  In this way, the operation effect display is set based on the display operation effect command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is displayed, it can be shown to the player as if they are different display modes.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the content of the operation effect display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection of the operation effect display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. You may comprise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the operation effect is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation effect display is configured to be overwritten on the already set display data table. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, when it is determined that there is no display operation effect command (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display button fusion command (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), button fusion display processing is executed (S6415). The button fusion display processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 (b).

  Here, the button fusion display processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing this button fusion display processing (S6415).

  In the button fusion display processing (FIG. 280 (b), S6415), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display button fusion command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for button fusion for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the button fusion display indicated by the received display button fusion command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is set (S7002).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S7003), and based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is measured. The counter 233h is set (S7004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

  In this way, the button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is displayed, it can be shown to the player as if they are different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 selects the content and display timing of the button fusion display, but the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the fusion button display. You may comprise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for button fusion is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button fusion display is set and overwritten in the already set display data table. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6414, when it is determined that there is no display button fusion command (S6414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display pseudo winning command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a display pseudo winning command (S6416: Yes), a pseudo winning display process is executed (S6417). The pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 281, the pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the pseudo winning display process (S6417).

  In the pseudo winning display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display pseudo winning command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the pseudo winning is set for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo winning display indicated by the received display pseudo winning command, and is determined in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is set (S7102).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S7103), and based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is measured. The counter 233h is set (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

  In this way, the pseudo winning display is set based on the display pseudo winning command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is displayed, it can be shown to the player as if they are different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 selects the content of the pseudo winning display and the display timing, but the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is not limited to this, and the selection of the pseudo winning display is executed. You may comprise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the pseudo-winning prize is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-winning display is set and overwritten on the already set display data table. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display pseudo winning command (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6418), and the error command is detected. If (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7201). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), And the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 35, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S7302), and then S7303 to S7304. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is then End information. Is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address where the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7503), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7506), this process is complete | finished and it returns to a display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 283, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task process, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7306 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced, and it is the time to produce the confirmation display. First, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is set (S7310), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), and returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect changes according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S7315, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is on instead of off (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S7317), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The display data table that defines that the image (FIG. 35) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7601: YES), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the image controller 237 is set with a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (b). FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S7602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7701: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7702). In the process of S7702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S7702 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7702: No), the image controller 237 is continuing the image transfer processing. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the processing of S7701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the processing proceeds to S7703.

  In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), it is determined that the resident target image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data for transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 of FIG. 276 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device. At 81, a normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting processing (S7603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

  Further, in the processing of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the processing of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7805. In the processing of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S7806 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7806: Yes), the process moves to S7807. Further, as a result of the processing of S7805, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7805: No), the processing proceeds to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7808), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7807: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S7809, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). The determination in the processing of S7809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7809 (S7809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7809, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7810). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S7810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a sub as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the fanfare production can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the plug-in process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114, and when the command is received by the display controller 114, the display controller 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, after that, the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, in use). ) And are provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident signal is used. It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is notified of the information from the image controller 237 at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, whether the scanning is in the blank period, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237, or a notification from the image controller 237. If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 may be determined to be unused. Thereby, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 causes the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to transfer data that is not Null data to the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and the process of transferring to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the drawing of that sprite The image data that is not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be always stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in the display control device 114 are not performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237, but simply by specifying the address, the address can be specified. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be directly connected to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 and the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this, and is composed of a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. It is also possible to store a part of the boot program to be executed by the. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after system reset is released. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1, and a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). It is also possible to provide a first program storage area in the memory, and to store a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. In, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, a case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. It may be directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be used. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is configured by a 1-port type (1 input / output port) DRAM has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-port type is also possible. Type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, while reading image data from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, the data is read from the character ROM 234. It is possible to perform parallel processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I / O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 is not necessarily limited thereto. Based on a command received from the third symbol display device 81, when the image to be displayed is greatly different, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above-described embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is stored is stored in advance. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after input, before the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is confirmed. If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, the image data may not be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for restoration from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a whose reading speed is slow, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary blackout or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. In addition, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Also, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used for power-on. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, The image data to be made resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Further, the main image at power-on and the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and are stored in the normal video RAM 236 at the power-on main image and at power-on. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button. The case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the rear image and the super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change, or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114, The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110, The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image setting process is performed (see FIG. 284 (a)), the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from being flown into the ball entrance intentionally due to the flow of the ball being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp controller 113, when the voice lamp controller 113 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is output. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display controller 110, the display controller 113 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display controller 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor. May turn on the error occurrence flag and turn on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is displayed as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 Corresponding to an address in which the time (20 msec in this embodiment) for displaying an image for a frame is defined as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed and the sprite after the change in the sprite The color information specifying the color tone may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by substituting the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is made to correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table is included in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added to each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2” ...) For identifying the additionally displayable effect. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player is selected. Although the explanation has been given for the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. With this, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may define not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "advance notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for one frame at which the drawing process ends will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. Alternatively, the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main controller 110 transmits the audio lamp controller 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received, the case where the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d Although described, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d as the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continue to display the finalized display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect is described as a case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not attached, is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image which is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on after the transfer is completed on the third symbol display device 81, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control unit 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be used in the operation check in the player, the hall personnel, or the factory at the time of manufacture. You can immediately check that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn (drawing contents) at that time and the contents to be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 236 stores the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to check whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. May be stored. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. Alternatively, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” of the plurality of rear images is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

  In the above-described embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer command of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 causes the transfer command to be transmitted at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case has been described where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is configured to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally output from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time has been described, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. Further, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes in color tone over time, and instead of such a back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is used. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 uses the information of the various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning prize, which is notified to the voice lamp controlling device 113, as the reserved ball number command. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information of the various counters (special random number counter C1, special prize type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning the start prize is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

  In the above-described embodiment, when performing the variable effect, a case has been described in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed at high speed fluctuations that scroll at high speeds so that the player cannot visually recognize them, but instead of displaying this high speed fluctuation. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one first starting opening 64a is provided in the game board 13 to start the lottery of the special symbol when the ball has entered has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. Instead of one, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 13. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the variation effect held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110, when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, when the value increases or decreases, respectively) The case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first start opening 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be variably displayed based on the winning in the first starting opening 64a is a numeral in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of balls to be reserved. A mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the vertical The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 306. In addition to the contents described with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the second control example, an effect of giving points to the player is executed, and the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is awarded is executed depending on the points. An example of a control in a configuration in which the player can consume and select the reach contents and the like will be mainly described. The description of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. Further, in the second control example, there is a part described in the control process in which the effects and the like described in the first control example are deleted, but this is omitted for convenience of description, and naturally, the first control example. The configuration of the second control example may be added to all the contents described in the above. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description are omitted.

  An example of the point acquisition effect and the point consumption effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 291. FIG. 288 is an example of a point acquisition effect. In this control example, as a privilege to be given to the player, in addition to the prize ball that is paid out to the player when the game ball enters the jackpot game or the general winning opening, points (numerical privilege) as a special benefit Is given, and a point effect in which the given points are accumulated is executed.

  288 (a)-(b) is one of the variation patterns determined by the voice lamp control device 113, and shows a part of the display mode in the point acquisition production variation pattern in which execution of the point acquisition production is set. It is a figure. This point-acquisition effect variation pattern is a variation pattern determined by lottery based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 when the hit / miss determination result is hit or miss. In the case of winning, it is composed of a fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) displayed by a symbol (combination of the same 3rd symbol) that finally informs that it is a hit, and in the case of deviation Is composed of a variation pattern that is finally displayed as a symbol for notifying that it is out (a third symbol is a combination of interstitial patterns other than the uniform pattern).

  FIG. 288 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the point acquisition effect is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. This point acquisition effect is set to be started in the middle of the execution period (dynamic display period) of the variation pattern, regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, and the displayed third symbol is hidden or The point acquisition effect that is displayed in a semi-transparent state is displayed in an easily visible state, and along with the display of the tornado, the information values (numerical symbols) indicating a plurality of point values are rotated and displayed like a tornado. In the same display area, the character of the hero is displayed facing the tornado, and a plurality of (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of FIG. 288 (a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is informed that the player can obtain the point value by the sword piercing the point value with respect to a large number of point values displayed by rotating with the tornado. Further, in the lower part of the display area, the characters “GET POINTS !!” are displayed as a notification mode suggesting that the player can earn points, and the player can play with the tornado. It is intelligibly notified that it is an effect that any one of the rotating point values is notified to the player. Further, the total value of the point values currently acquired by the player is displayed in the lower left part of the display area (the upper part of the display area Ds of the pending symbols being executed) (in the example of FIG. 288 (a), currently). Point is 500 points).

  FIG. 288 (b) shows that in the point acquisition effect, the sword displayed above the hero's head is released toward the point value (the flying effect is performed), and the effect in which each sword pierces the point value is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of.

  In the example of FIG. 288 (b), the sword a1 sticks to a point value of 100 points, the sword a2 sticks to a point value of 20 points, the sword a3 sticks to a point value of 50 points, and the sword a4 sticks to a point value of 70 points. The case is shown. The total point value acquired by the four swords is displayed below the display area with the characters "240 points GET !!".

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which points are awarded to the player is mainly during the variation period of the special symbol, and the timing at which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (variation display period) Is displayed in accordance with the period in which the notice display suggesting the lottery result is executed before the period from just before the end to the time of confirmation). The point value is selected as one of the selection information, which is the result (pre-reading result) of the lottery result of the special symbol that has started to change or the lottery result of the special symbol that has been stored and stored before the start of variation, and the game is played. The notice effect given to the person is executed.

  When the variable display or the stored hold determination result is a hit, a higher point value is more easily determined than when it is a miss. With this, by displaying the notice mode of the high point value, it is possible to expect that the special symbol that is being changed or the lottery result of the special symbol that is held and stored is a hit, and the change of the special symbol. Not only that, it is possible to make a game with the expectation of winning even for the reserved balls already stored. That is, the notice display effect that gives the player the point value displayed as the notice display is not only the displayed special symbol of the variation, but also the lottery result of the special symbol that is variably displayed over a plurality of variations. Is a notice display effect for, and it is possible to make the player have an expectation corresponding to the notice effect for a longer period.

  In addition, even if the point value is given, if there is nothing that hits the fluctuation or the lottery result of the special symbol that has been held and stored, the given point value is accumulated and given later. It can be used for performances that use point values (performances that use the point value to select the reach mode, etc.), and the larger the total value of the accumulated point values, the higher the jackpot expectation level. The player can select a high reach display mode using the point value.

  As a result, when the reach selection variation pattern that allows the player to select the type of the reach display mode using the point value is executed in the state where the total value of accumulated point values is large, the player is notified. You can have a high expectation for jackpot games. Therefore, the effect to which the point value is given is not only for notifying the player of the variation of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol that is held and stored, and the first winning opening 64 Alternatively, it is also used for informing a future lottery result in which a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and a lottery is executed, and it is possible to give the player an expectation for a long period.

  Note that, as will be described later in detail, the display data of the point value displayed together with the tornado of the point acquisition effect displayed in FIG. It is set to 114, and when it becomes the display timing of the point acquisition effect by the voice lamp control device 113, the sword (a1 to The point values that are pierced by a4) are determined.

  Specifically, the first basic point value, the second basic point value (low), and the second basic point value (high) are used as the basic point values at the change start timing of the point acquisition production variation pattern (variation pattern of the point consumption production). ) Is determined. At the start of fluctuation, the point value is determined based on the total of the current accumulated point value, the changing result of the special symbol that is fluctuating (the result of the judgment), and the lottery result of the special symbol that is held and stored (winning information). To be done.

  However, in the configuration of the present control example, since the advance of the special symbol is started at random timing, the notice effect for giving the point value is executed, so at the timing when the point acquisition effect is actually executed, The total value of the point values that have been raised is that the look-ahead result of the reserved ball that has risen or has newly won (a new reserved ball that has been memorized by winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640) Changes such as winning are occurring. It is necessary to determine the present point value and the state of the lottery result again and determine the point value to be given at the timing at which the notice effect for giving the point value is executed.

  Here, in the present control example, the point value determined when the point acquisition effect variation pattern is executed is the first basic point (a part of the point value to be given is distributed to one or both of the two swords). , A second basic point (low), which is a point value less than the value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the planned point value, and a second basic value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the planned point value By determining two point values, that is, points (high), when the accumulated points are increased by a reference value or more (for example, 500 points or more) at the execution timing of the point acquisition effect, compared to the time of determination. , A display command indicating the first basic point and the second basic point (low) is output to the display control device 114.

  Further, even when the cumulative point value is higher than the reference value by more than the determination time, the first basic point and the second basic point (high) are shown when the winning reserved ball is stored. The display command is output to the display control device 114.

  In this way, since the two patterns of point values are determined in advance at the time of determination, it is possible to reduce the control load when executing the point acquisition effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 289 to FIG. 291, the point effect in this control example will be described. First, FIG. 289 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the execution of the point acquisition effect on the reserved ball is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. In FIG. 289 (a), the change of the special symbol is executed, and the currently acquired total points (900 points in the example of FIG. 289 (a)) are displayed in the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm. , The points already acquired are informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Then, in the sub-display area, the currently-executed symbol m0, the first reserved symbol m1 and the second reserved symbol m2 are displayed, and the second reserved symbol m2 shows a reserved ball written as 500p. There is. In this way, in the present control example, the result of determining the lottery result of the special symbols stored and stored before the change starts (prefetch result), the point value is given to the second change from the change is used as the hold ball. It is possible to inform the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the point value can be obtained not only by the result of the variation but also by the variation of the special symbol that is held and stored. In addition, the point-giving effect using the reserved balls is not limited to the reserved balls stored and stored, and may be displayed for the symbol m0 being executed. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while expecting unexpected points.

  FIG. 289 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect in which the player can select a desired reach in the next change by consuming the point value that has been acquired so far.

  In the example of FIG. 289 (b), the currently acquired point value is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289 (b)), and using this, the player selects the reach of the next change. can do. A reach pattern that can be selected this time is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a left choice 822e, a middle choice 822f, and a right choice 822g are displayed. At the upper part of the main display area Dm, the characters "Bring a reach!" Are displayed, and the player is informed that the next variation reach can be selected using the current point value. It A cursor ka is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. As will be described in detail later, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves below the options 822e to 822g, and the player selects the option ka by moving the cursor ka to the option desired by the player. be able to.

  Reach contents and required point values are displayed in each of the options 822e to 822g. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), "A reach 500 points" is set for the left selection 822e, and "B reach 800 points" is set for the middle selection 822f. In the right option 822g, "SP reach 10,000 points" is displayed. The player can select the reach based on the display contents of the respective options and the current acquired point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of FIG. 289 (b), since the current point value is 1800 points, the player can select "A reach" and "B reach" of the left selection 822e.

  As described above, by configuring the player to select the variation pattern of the next variation according to the current value of the acquired points, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point acquisition game, and the interest of the game is increased. Can be increased. Further, in the present control example, the reach that cannot be selected with the current point value is configured to be displayed like the right option 822g, but it is configured to display only the reach that can be selected with the current point value. Good. With this configuration, the player can play the game without feeling disappointed that the desired reach cannot be selected.

  290 is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents that can be changed again by using points when the pseudo change of the special symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the example of FIG. 290 (a), the result of the deviation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. 7 is displayed on the left symbol Z1, 7 is displayed on the right symbol Z3, and the reach is displayed, but 4 is stopped on the middle symbol Z2, and the display pattern is disengaged and temporarily stopped. Then, in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, the character "Re-change using 500 points !!" is displayed, and the special symbol is changed again by using the point value which has been already acquired by the player. It informs the player that he can do it.

  FIG. 290 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the special symbol is changed again from FIG. 290 (a) by using points. In the main display area Dm, 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3, and the middle symbol Z2 is displayed again while changing.

  Thus, even when the pseudo variation is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, by setting the point consumption effect, it is possible to provide the player with a throbbing feeling even after the variation of the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of display contents in which a part of the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed (fixed) using the acquired point value. In FIG. 291 (a), the symbols Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed. Then, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, "2000 points, 3 patterns of left symbol, 7 patterns of HOLD !!" are displayed in characters. In other words, if 2000 points are used, the player is informed that the left symbol Z1 is fixed to 7 symbols that are easy to win the jackpot with a higher expectation during the three variations from the variation.

  FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. In the main display area Dm, a left symbol Z1 in which the symbol is fixed at 7 and a middle symbol Z2 and a right symbol Z3 which are changing are displayed. At the upper part of the main display area Dm, "2 remaining fluctuations HOLD" is displayed, and the player is informed easily of the number of remaining fluctuations to which the left symbol Z1 is fixed.

  With this configuration, the opportunity to execute the point effect is increased, and the player can have a higher expectation for the point effect.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The electrical configuration of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. The second control example is different from the first control example in that a point selection table 222ad, a variable point selection table 222ae, and a consumption point selection table 222af are respectively added in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. . The other configuration is the same as that of the first control example, and therefore its description is omitted.

  The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting a point value to be given to the player in advance notice or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured to be switched between a state where there is a holding ball and a state where there is no holding ball, and there is a holding ball (see FIG. 293). Then, hold effect (effect in which the hold symbol is changed to give points (point value is displayed in the hold symbol)), PUSH effect (point value is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 and effect is given ), Any of the character effects (effects in which the character for notice is displayed while the special symbol is changing and the character gains points) is determined by the acquired effect counter, and the point value set in the table is set. To be done. For example, if the acquired effect counter value is 100, 200 pt is determined for character effect.

  Further, in a state where the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (confirmation timing, etc.), the holding effect is forcibly selected, and for example, if the value of the effect counter is 100, the 200pt holding effect is selected.

  Next, in the state where there is no reserved ball, the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. 294 is selected. The difference is that the holding effect is not selected when there is no holding ball.

  The variable point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting the point value set in the point acquisition effect shown in FIG. 288. The variable point selection table is a table for selecting a first basic point (first) and a second basic point (second (low), second (high)). At the start of fluctuation, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is a point value displayed in the production in any state, and the second basic point value is a high point value depending on the point value or the like held by the player at the actual production execution timing. The second basic point (high) is selected or the second basic point (low) having a low point value is selected. The second basic point (high) is selected when the possessed point is not higher than 1000 pt compared to the time of selection, while the second basic point (low) is displayed when it is higher than 1000 pt. Is configured.

  In this way, the processing load at the time of performance execution can be reduced by making a selection so as to be able to cope with the fluctuation of the point value at the start of the fluctuation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 288 (a), which swords (a1 to a4) and how many point values are to be given are distributed based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295 (b). It is determined. When the obtained effect counter is 100, the first basic point value is distributed to the sword a4 and the sword a3. This distribution is distributed so that it falls within the first basic point value selected by a possible combination with respect to the point value displayed in FIG. 288 (a). For example, when the effect counter is 100 and the holding point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points are selected as the second basic point (low), and 120 points are selected as the second basic point (high). To be done. Further, in the display position table, the first basic point value of 60 points is set to 40 points for the sword a4 and 20 points for the sword a3, for example. Here, the display control device sets, as the display data, the display data of each sword and each point value shown in FIG. 288 (a) individually for each point value, and each sword and each point value data is set. By correspondingly setting and, the point value selected in the variable point selection table is distributed to each sword so that the player can achieve the effect.

  With this configuration, even if the same first basic point is selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be made random, and various effects can be produced. With this configuration, it is possible to execute various point acquisition effects with a smaller number of fluctuation patterns than when setting a plurality of point value effects that can be acquired for each fluctuation pattern.

  The hit consumption point selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the consumption point of each reach in the consumption effect shown in FIG. 289 (b) when the hit determination result is changed in the hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296 (a), the selection is made based on the current possession point and the acquired value of the effect counter.

  The out-of-consumption point selection table 222g is a table for determining the point value to be selected when the out-of-range variable display is executed (see FIG. 296 (b)). Note that the specific configuration is the same as the hit point selection table, and therefore its description is omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 304. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above, that is, a notice setting process (S2131), a special point selection process (S2132), The difference is that a consumption reach selection process (S2133) is added, and a command determination process 2 (S2134) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2114 in FIG. 258). Regarding the other processing, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main processing in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the content of the main process in the second control example. In the main processing in the second control example, after the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S2110) is executed with respect to the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257), the notice setting processing (S2031) and the special point selection processing are executed. (S2132), addition of consumption reach selection processing (S2133), frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) instead of frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2130), command determination processing (S2114). The difference is the command determination process 2 (S2134). Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the command determination processing 2 (S2134) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S2134) in the second control example. In the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example (S2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception is performed. The difference is that processing 2 (S2220) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example. The variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example determines whether or not the variation pattern command received this time is a point acquisition effect, as compared with the variation pattern reception process (S2202) in the first control example. The difference is that selection processing is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (S2220), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received this time and the value of the fluctuation pattern selection counter 223aa ( S2222). Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern determined in the process of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). When it is determined that the determined variation pattern is the point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), the point selection process is executed (S2224), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determined variation pattern is not the point acquisition effect (S2223: No), this process ends as it is.

  Next, the point selection process (S2224) which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the point selection process (S2224).

  In the point selection processing (S2224), first, the value of the point storage area 223ab is acquired (S2321), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322). When it is determined that the variation pattern determined this time is a win (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning information is a hit (S2323). When it is determined that there is a hit in the winning information (S2323: Yes), the point-less effect is set (S2324), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2322, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not hit (that is, it is out) (S2322: No) or when it is determined that the received winning information is not hit ( (S2323: No), based on the current point from the variable point selection table 222ae, the basic point is selected and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, the point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326), and the present process To finish.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) in the second control example. In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example (S2201: Yes). , And the point that the operation processing relating to the selection and determination of points is executed.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S2130), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0, that is, whether the button operation is valid (S2421). When it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S2421: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2421, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then the subtraction is performed in the process of S2422. It is determined whether the value of the operated valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2423: Yes), the display command indicating the reach content corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425. On the other hand, in the process of S2423, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2425.

  After executing the processing of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether or not the selection operation is executed (S2425). When it is determined that the selection operation has been performed (S2425: Yes), the information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), the display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427), This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection operation has not been executed in the process of S2425 (S2425: No), it is determined whether the determination operation has been executed (S2428). When it is determined that the determination operation has been executed (S2428: Yes), the reach command for display of the reach content determined in the process of S2428 is set (S2429), and the point corresponding to the determined reach content is subtracted. Then (S2430), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2428 that the determining operation has been executed (S2428: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the advance notice setting process (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance notice setting process (S2131). The notice setting process (S2131) is one process in the main process (FIG. 297) in the second control example, and when the special symbol is changing, the process of selecting the point value of the point effect from the point selection table 222ad is performed. To be executed.

  In the notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S2511: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing in the process of S2511 (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the execution period of the notice effect (S2512). When it is determined that it is within the execution period of the notice effect (S2512: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2513), and the point selection table is obtained based on the value of the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2513. A point value is selected from 222ad (S2514), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that it is not within the period in which the advance notice can be executed (S2512: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is greater than 0 (S2515). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is greater than 0 (S2515: Yes), it is the period during which the holding effect can be executed, and thus the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2516) and the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2516. Based on the value of, the point of the holding effect is selected from the point selection table 222ad (S2517), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 in the process of S2515 (S2515: No), it is determined that the advance notice cannot be set, and the present process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the special point selection processing (S2132) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special point selection processing (S2132).

  In the special point selection processing (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not the point effect is being changed (S2611). When it is determined that the point effect is not a variation to be executed (S2611: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2611, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of point setting (S2612). When it is determined that it is not the timing for setting the points (S2612: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to set the points (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current point effect is an effect for setting 0 points (S2613). When it is determined that the current point is the effect of setting 0 point (S2613: Yes), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2613 that the effect this time is not an effect for setting 0 points (S2613: No), the process proceeds to S2614.

  After executing the processing of S2613, next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). When it is determined that the winning information storage area 223f is hit (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating the high points of the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615), and the book is set. The process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2614, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223f is not hit (S2614: No), it is determined whether or not the difference between the point acquired this time and the current point is 1000 points or more (S2616). When it is determined that the difference between the point acquired this time and the current point is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the above-described processing of S2615 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2616, when it is determined that the difference between the point acquired this time and the current point is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area are set. The display command indicating the low point is set (S2617), and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the consumption reach selection process (S2133) will be described with reference to FIG. 304. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133).

  In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether or not the consumption reach is executable (S2711). When it is determined that the consumption reach is not executable (S2711: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the consumption reach can be executed (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether it is the reach data selection timing (S2712). If it is determined that it is not the timing for selecting the reach data (S2712: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing to select the reach data (S2712: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713.

  In the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a winning fluctuation pattern (S2713). When it is determined that the current variation is a win (S2713: Yes), the consumption point is set based on the current number of points from the winning consumption point selection table 222af (S2714), and the process proceeds to S2717. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2713 that the current variation is not the hit variation pattern (that is, it is out of alignment), it is determined whether the current point is equal to or more than the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current point is not equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2715 that the current point is equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: Yes), the consumption point is set based on the current number of points from the consumption point selection table 222af for deviation (S2716). ), And proceeds to the processing of S2717. In the process of S2717, the display reach selection command corresponding to the selected reach effect in which the selected consumption point is set is set (S2717), and the present process is ended.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 306. In the process in the display control device 114 in the second control example, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is replaced with the V interrupt process in the process in the display control device 114 in the first control example. 2 (see FIG. 305), and the command determination process 2 (S6311 in FIG. 306) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 277). For other processing, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the V interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V interrupt processing 2. The V interrupt processing 2 in the second control example is different in that the command determination processing 2 (S6311) is executed instead of the command determination processing (S6302). Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the command determination process 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 2 (S6311).

  In the command determination processing 2 (S6311) in the second control example, if it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no display preview display command for this time (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display point command. (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, in the process of S6421, when it is determined that there is no display point command (S6421: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display effect point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display effect point command (S6423: Yes), a point display process (S6424) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6423, when it is determined that there is no display effect point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach command (S6425). When it is determined that there is the display reach command (S6425: Yes), the reach display data table corresponding to the command received this time is set (S6426), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6425 that there is no display reach command (S6425: No), it is determined whether there is a display reach selection command (S6427). If it is determined that there is a display reach selection command. (S6427: Yes), the display data table of the corresponding selected reach is set (S6428), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the process proceeds to S6418.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 319. In the second control example, control in the above-described lower displacement unit 400 will be described. The first control example and the second control example described above may be combined with the third control example, but for convenience, some of the first control example and the second control example are omitted in the description. .

  In the third control example, operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and control in a configuration in which a game ball is launched from the exit opening 400 will be described. The description of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Configuration of Lower Displacement Unit 400 in Third Control Example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example, which is substantially the same as FIG. 66 described above, but with a storage sensor SP5 added. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to be able to detect that a game ball has entered through the opening 451a and also detect whether a game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467. Further, since both tip ends of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged at positions where they can be detected, it is possible to detect the position of the ball receiving portion 467.

  As a method of detecting the position of the ball receiving portion, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position in the direction of the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the ball on the rear side is detected. The tip of the receiving portion 467 is detected. In this case, after the slide motor is driven for 10 steps from the state where the front side storage sensor SP5 is turned on, the stop control is performed to move the ball to the ball receiving position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (b)). It can be moved so that the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned.

  Further, after the storage sensor detects the front end of the ball receiving portion 467, the storage sensor is turned on before the slide motor KM2 is driven for 20 steps, and the game ball is held in the ball receiving portion 467 ( It can be determined that the game ball is in the ball receiving portion 467). Also, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the state where it is moved to the firing position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (c)) to the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 307 (a)), the rear end Although the storage sensor SP5 detects the ball receiving portion 467 first, the method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

  The storage sensor SP5 is composed of a reflection type laser output sensor, and the laser light output from the storage sensor SP5 to the front surface is blocked and the laser light reflected by the detection section of the storage sensor SP5 is detected ( ON state) sensor.

  Therefore, the storage sensor SP5 not only detects that the game ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detects that the game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467, detects the position of the ball receiving portion 467, and is movable. The position of the rack 464 can also be detected.

  In the initial state (at the end of the initial operation after power-on), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. 307 (a). As already described with reference to FIG. 81, at the origin position, the contact plate 464c rotates the bulging portion 543a in the rearward direction to prevent the game ball from being distributed to the opening 451a. By moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307 (b)), the bulging portion 543a rotates forward and the game balls are distributed to the opening 451a. Here, the time required to move the movable rack 363 to the ball receiving position is until the distribution member 540 rotates to distribute the game balls toward the opening 451a and reach the opening 451a. It is configured so that it can be moved in a shorter time than the time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the game ball enters the ball receiving portion 467 before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the ball receiving position and the game ball cannot be received in the ball receiving portion 467.

  When the game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position in the received state, and then the tilting motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to move the lower displacement unit 400 to the first position. It is rotationally driven so as to rise to the one overhang state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit is lifted and driven while the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rotation shaft side of the lower displacement unit 400, and thus the driving force required for lifting can be reduced, and the motor or the like can be driven. The load of can be reduced.

  When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extension state, the player operates the frame button 22 to drive the lower displacement unit 400 in the upward direction. This drive is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven by 30 steps, and when the frame button 22 is operated next, the 30 step slide motor KM2 drives the downward displacement unit 400 to drive. At this time, it is determined whether the lower displacement unit 400 is driven by 30 steps and is detected (detected as ON) by the ascending position sensor that detects that the lower displacement unit 400 is in the position of the first extension state, and it is detected. It is configured to be stop-controlled at timing. Further, when the ascending position sensor is not turned on even after being driven for 30 steps, the slide motor KM2 is driven until the ascending position sensor is further turned on. In addition, when the ascending position sensor does not turn on even after being driven for 15 steps, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position where the ascending position is increased by 15 steps. In this way, it is apparently determined that the ascending position sensor does not turn on, and the game can be played by switching to the control of only the number of steps. In this case, an error may be notified by a lamp, a display, an external terminal, or the like.

  When the ending at the time of big hit is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the ascending position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved toward the launching position, and the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected to the exit opening 471. More game balls are fired. The timing for firing is the timing when the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the effective time of the frame button 22 has elapsed, the firing operation is automatically executed. .

  When the power is turned on, the initial operation described below is also executed in the lower variable unit 400. When the small hit or big hit C is executed in a state where the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the small hit or big hit C that was being executed is restored in the state when the power is cut off. 3 The electric accessory is opened. In that case, the game ball enters the third electric auditors object in a state where the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is not finished, and the game ball moves to the lower variable unit 400. There is a risk of falling.

  In that case, the game ball enters through the opening 451a of the lower variable unit 400 and enters the ball receiving portion 467, or the game ball enters through the opening 451a and the lower variable unit 400. There is a problem that the game ball enters the inside (see FIG. 67 (c)). However, in the third control example, a command (payout command or winning effect (payout award) from the main control device 110 based on the fact that the game ball of the third electric auditors has entered during the period when the initial operation is executed. In order to execute a command) for displaying a value corresponding to the number of balls on the third symbol display device 81), when) is received, monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and an ending command after the initial operation is completed, 2 after receiving one of a fluctuation pattern command and a customer waiting command (a command output from the main controller 110 when the fluctuation is not executed for a certain period or when the fluctuation and the firing handle are not operated for a certain period continues) Monitoring whether the storage sensor SP5 is turned on until a lapse of a second (identifies whether the storage ball SP5 is turned on at every interval (for example, 4 ms) through which a game ball can pass) That) to run.

  With this configuration, the storage sensor during the period in which the game ball can enter the opening 451a even during the period in which the third electric accessory is opened at the timing when the initial operation is executed It is possible to monitor SP5, and it is possible to monitor whether or not the game ball has entered the lower variable unit 400. When the passage of the game ball is detected by executing monitoring of the storage sensor SP5, any one of the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command is output. In the operation of discharging the game ball from the lower variable unit 400 at the timing when a second has elapsed, the discharge operation (after the operation rack 464 moves to the launch position while the lower variable unit 400 is in the original position, the original position The operation of moving up to) is executed, and the operation of collecting the game balls discharged from the emission opening 471 of the lower variable unit 400 from the collection port 411f (see FIG. 43) is executed.

  Thereby, even when the game ball is guided into the lower variable unit 400 during the initial operation, the discharging operation is executed after the game ball does not enter the lower variable unit 400.

  The discharging operation is executed after 2 seconds have elapsed from the above-mentioned commands, that is, the movable rack 464 is moved from the launch position to the origin position, and the distribution member 540 moves the game ball to the lower variable unit 400. The period of 2 seconds is set in consideration of the period from when the game balls are not sorted to when the game balls reach the opening 451a (the game ball which is finally sorted).

  When the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on when the above command output from the main controller 110 based on the entry into the third electric accessory is received during the period when the initial operation is executed. It is configured such that the selection of the effect (variation pattern) that tilts the lower variable unit 400 until the discharge operation ends is prohibited, and the execution thereof is prohibited. That is, the effect using the lower variable unit 400 is prohibited until the end of the discharging operation.

  On the other hand, when the command is received, but the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (that is, OFF), one of the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command. The storage sensor SP5 is monitored until a monitoring period of 2 seconds has elapsed after receiving the message, and an effect using the lower variable unit 400 is applied to the fluctuation started before the execution ends. It is configured to ban.

  With this configuration, the lower variable unit 400 is configured so as not to tilt while the game ball is inadvertently entered into the lower variable unit 400 by the initial operation, so that the game ball is moved to the lower variable unit 400. It is possible to suppress a problem that the tilting motor KM1 is tilted in a state of entering the ball and an excessive load is applied to the tilting motor KM1 to damage the tilting motor KM1.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
In the third control example, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has initial operation data 222ba, firing operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, discharge operation data 222bd, first operation data 222be, and ROM 222 of the first control example. The second motion data 222bf is added. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, description thereof will be omitted.

  The initial operation data 222ba is movable data set to execute the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the motor type to be driven, the driving direction, and the motor stop condition are set for each operation status. The operation status is set from the initial value 0, which is set in the initial operation setting process (S2021, see FIG. 312) executed in the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 executed when the power is turned on. The operation is started and incremented by one, the drive corresponding to the operation status is executed, and the operation status is added every time the execution is completed, and necessary initial operations are sequentially executed. Regarding the drive direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the + direction of the slide motor is the direction in which the motor is driven in the direction in which the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the firing position, and the positive direction of the tilt motor is , The direction in which the lower variable unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) toward the first extended state.

  The launch operation data 222bb is operation data in which the movable rack 464 is driven from the origin position to the launch position and a game ball is launched from the exit opening 471. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the slide motor is composed of data driven in the + direction until the firing position sensor is turned on.

  The origin operation data 222bc is origin return movable data for moving the movable rack 464 and the lower variable unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), after the game sphere is launched from the exit opening 471, the origin position sensor is turned on in the-direction (driving the origin position direction). The tilt motor is driven until the retracted position sensor is turned on (driving toward the retracted position (origin position)).

  Further, when the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position (origin position) and the discharging operation is executed by the operation of the movable rack 464, the setting of the movable data in the tilt motor is not executed.

  The discharge operation data 222bd is operation data for discharging the game ball that has entered the lower variable unit 400, and the same data as the launch operation data 222bb is set.

  The first operation data is operation data for receiving the game ball in the ball receiving portion 467 while the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position, and after moving the movable unit 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position, the origin is set. This is drive data for moving to a position (see FIG. 311 (a)).

  With the second motion data 222bc, the lower variable unit 400 is moved to the raised position (first overhang state), and the frame button 22 is operated next after being raised 30 steps based on the operation of the frame button 22. And data for executing a tilting operation (rocking operation) of lowering the rising sensor until it is turned on. Further, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and in the effect of shooting a game ball from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is operated. The display mode imitating the lower displacement unit can be changed to the first projecting state without being performed, and the effect of the game ball being shot can be displayed in place of the display mode. Further, when swinging the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is changed to the first overhang state, but in the swinging effect, the lower displacement unit 400 is not swung but in the first overhang state. In the third symbol display device 81 on the back side of the lower displacement unit 400, the pattern imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is swung within a predetermined movable range from the stopped lower displacement unit 400. It is possible to display the imitated display mode and combine the display mode and the lower displacement unit 400 to generate the swinging effect. Here, an RTC capable of timing the date and time is installed in the voice lamp control device 113, and after the elapse of a certain period (for example, one year later), the swing effect of the lower displacement unit 400 is not executed, By switching to the swing effect combined with the display mode, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement unit 400 from moving beyond its durability and being damaged. Further, when a failure that does not operate even if the operation data of the lower displacement unit 400 is set is detected, instead of the effect that the lower displacement unit 400 operates, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is variably displayed and substituted. You may do it.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 319. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in the initial operation setting process (S2071) and the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140). ), And the operation control process (S2112) is added. Specifically, processing for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and processing for confirming the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 at the time of start-up processing are added.

  Next, the initial operation setting process (S2071) which is one process of the startup process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for confirming the operation content of the lower displacement unit 400 during the startup process.

  In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether or not the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). When it is determined that the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (S2031: No), it is determined whether the upper left prize ball command is received (S2032). When it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON (S2034), and the processing of S2038 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S2032, when it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the processing of S2033 to S2034 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2038.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the saving sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not "on" (S2035: No), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S2036), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to off (S2037), and S2038 is set. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2035, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035: Yes), the processes of S2036 to S2037 are skipped and the process of S2038 is performed.

  In the process of S2038, it is determined whether the ball discharging operation is completed or the value of the operation status stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the ball discharging operation is not completed (S2038: No), the processes of S2031 to S2037 are repeatedly executed until the operation is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that the operation status is not set to 5 (S2039: No), the operation status is set to +1 (S2040), the corresponding operation data is set (S2041), and based on the confirmed display data table. The time data is set in the clock counter (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, in the processing of S2039, when it is determined that the operation status is 5 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 313, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the main process of the third control example, after performing the same processes as S2101 to S2111 of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example, the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) and the operation control process (S2141). The difference is that and are added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 314. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140).

  In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). When it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (S3901: No), since the ball is not stored in the ball receiving unit 455, the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl is larger than 0 (S3902). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether the ball ejection flag 223bj is on (S3903). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3904). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3904: Yes), the ball ejection flag 223bj is set to on (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the processing of S3904 (S3904: No), The process of S3905 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3906.

  In the process of S3906, it is determined whether any of the big hit ending command, the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command is received (S3906). When it is determined that the ending command of the jackpot, the variation pattern command, or the customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), the value of the waiting counter corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the big hit ending command, the variation pattern command, and the customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is larger than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the ball ejection flag 223bj is on (S3908). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3909). When it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3909: Yes), the ball ejection flag 223bj is set to on (S3910), and the process proceeds to S3911. On the other hand, in the process of S3908, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908: Yes), or when it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the process of S3904 (S3909: No), The process of S3910 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3911.

  In the process of S3911, the value of the standby counter 223bl is decremented by 1 (S3911). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl subtracted in the processing of S3911 is 0 (S3912). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913). When it is determined that the ball ejection flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), ejection operation data is set (S3914), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3912, when it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S3912: No), or in the processing of S3913, the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on. When the determination is made (S3913: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the operation control process (S2141) which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in the third control example will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the content of the operation control process (S2141). In this operation control processing (S2141), processing for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 is executed according to the game state.

  In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether the small hit medium flag 223ac or the big hit medium flag 223ab is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is a small hit or a big hit (S4001). When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223ab or the large hit medium flag 223ab is turned on, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and the present process is ended.

  Here, the first motion setting process (S4002), which is one process in the motion control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the content of the first operation setting process (S4002). In the first operation setting process (S4002), a process for controlling the operation of the ball receiving unit 445 is executed when the game state is a small hit or a big hit.

  In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it is determined whether the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4102), and the operation data is set to the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is defined in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310 (a)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM drives and drives in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, when the first sensor is set to ON, it stops. By driving in this way, it is possible to drive to a position where the ball that has flowed in from the third winning opening 82 can be received by the ball receiving portion 467.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4101, it is determined whether the operation status is 1 (S4104). When it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether the second position sensor is on (S4105). When it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), the ball receiving unit 445 is not driven to the second position, so the processes of S4106 to S4107 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4108. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the second position sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4106) and the operation data is set (S4107). In the operation status 2, the waiting is set until the balls are accumulated from the third winning opening 82 to the ball receiving portion 467.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4104, when it is determined that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4108). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S4109). When it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), since the balls entering from the third winning opening 82 are not stored, the processing of S4110 to S4111 is skipped and the processing of S4112 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, when it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. To do. In operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the slide motor is driven in the minus direction. Then, when the origin sensor is set to ON, it stops. That is, the ball receiving unit 445 is controlled to once return to the origin position when the ball is stored from the third winning opening 82. Then, the spheres stored in the ejection operation setting process (S4004) and the firing operation setting process (S4008) described later are ejected.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4108, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4112). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4113). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation is continued. In the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223bb or the large hit medium flag 223ba is not on (S4001: No), it is determined whether the small hit ending flag 223bd is set on (S4003). . When it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223bd is on (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the discharge operation setting process (S4004), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the content of the discharge operation setting process (S4004). In this discharge operation setting process (S4004), a process for controlling the operation of discharging a ball from the ball receiving unit 445 at the timing of ending the small hit is executed.

  In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether the origin operation flag 223bh is on. When it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not on (S4201: No), the discharge operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the firing position sensor is set to ON (S4203). When it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is off (S4201: No), the processes of S4201 to S4205 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4206.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4206). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to off (S4207), the small hitting ending flag 223bd is set to off (S4208), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4206, when it is determined that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation is continued. In the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223bd is off (S4003: No), it is determined whether the big hit round is the eighth round (S4005). When it is determined that the big hit round is the eighth round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the second operation setting process (S4006), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second operation setting process (S4006). In the second action setting process (S4006), in the eighth round of the big hit, the lower displacement unit 400 is raised to the firing position, and when the player presses the frame button 22, the upper and lower tilting effects are executed. This is a control process.

  In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it is determined whether the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4301: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4302), and the operation data is set to the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). The operation status 1 is defined in the second operation data 222bf (see FIG. 310 (b)), but when the operation status is set to 1, the tilt motor is driven and driven in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, when the lift sensor is set to ON, it stops.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is not 0 in the process of S4301 (S4301: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 1 (S4304). When it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the rising sensor is on (S4305). If it is determined that the lift sensor is not on (S4305: No), the lower displacement unit 400 has not been driven to the first position, so the processes of S4306 to S4307 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4308. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lift sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4306) and the operation data is set (S4307).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the operation status is not 1 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4308). When it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether the rising sensor is on (S4309). If it is determined that the lift sensor is not on (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the standby state at the origin position, and therefore the processes of S4310 to S4312 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4313. On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is determined that the lift sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S4310). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4310: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning opening 82, the tilt motor is driven in the plus direction. Then, the lower displacement unit 400 stops when the ascent of 30 steps is set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4308, when it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4313). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), the lower displacement unit 400 determines whether or not it has moved up by 30 steps (S4314). When it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has moved up by 30 steps (S4314: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has moved up by 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4315: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S4315 (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), the operation data is set (S4317), and the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation is continued. In the process of S4005, when it is determined that there is no big round eighth round (S4005: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit ending flag 223bc (S4007). When it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is on (S4007: Yes), the firing operation setting process (S4008) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit ending flag 223bc is not turned on (S4007: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the firing operation setting processing (S4008) which is one of the operations control processing (S2141) will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the content of the firing operation setting process (S4008). In the firing operation setting process (S4008), in the ending of the big hit, the process for firing the ball stored in the first displacement setting process (S4002) from the lower displacement unit 400 is executed.

  In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the lift sensor is on (S4401). When it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4401: No), the descending 30 step data is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lift sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether the launch effect flag 223be is on, that is, whether the launch effect is set (S4403). If it is determined that the launch effect flag 223be is not on (S4403: No), since the launch effect is not set, the launch effect flag 223be is set to on (S4404), and the launch effect is set (S4405). , S4411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (S4406). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the processes of S4407 to S4410 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4411. When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4406: No), the effect during firing is set (S4407), and the firing effect flag 223be is set to OFF (S4408). Next, the firing motion data is set (S4409), the motion flag during firing production 223bg is set to ON (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

  In the processing of S4411, it is determined whether or not the firing position sensor is on (S4411). If it is determined that the firing position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4412) to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position, and the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on. (S4413) and S4414 are performed. On the other hand, in the processing of S4411, when it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not at the firing position, so the processing of S4412 and S4413 is skipped and the processing of S4414 is performed. Transition.

  After executing the processing of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, that is, the lower displacement unit 400 is at the origin position (S4414). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the big hit ending flag 223bc is set to off (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to off (S4416), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S4414, when it is determined that the origin sensor is not on (S4414: No), this processing ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 to 351. This fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the control content of the main control device 110 is changed, and the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. It is different from the changed point. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  A major difference between the fourth control example and the first control example described above will be briefly described. In the first control example described above, while the control processing of the main control device 110 is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel). In the fourth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are greatly different in that the control process is executed so that they are dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel).

  Further, in the above-described first control example, while the jackpot game is being executed, the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be executed, whereas in the fourth control example. , Is greatly different in that when the latent state is set as the game state, a pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. Furthermore, there is a big difference in that the contents of the pseudo jackpot production are different.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example has a lower first entrance 64D in the lower region of the game board 13 as compared with the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. , A point that a lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entrance 64D is provided, and a second variable winning device 650 (second specific winning port 650a) is provided below the lower first prize hole 64D. The difference is that a special winning device 1550 is provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the right side area of the game board 13.

  The lower first ball entrance 64D is a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball by the lower electric accessory 64Da which is variably controlled from the closed position to the open position where the ball is difficult to enter when the winning is won by the lottery of the ordinary symbol. Is a ball entering means capable of setting a state in which the ball easily enters. When a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64Da, the same process as when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is executed.

  The lower first ball entrance 64D is arranged at a position that is less visible to the player than the first ball entrance 64, and has a shape that is less visible to the player than the first ball entrance 64. It is configured so as not to notify the player that the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the first entrance 64D. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the lottery right of special figure 1 is acquired. In the present control example, the lower first ball entrance 64D is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, and among the balls shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the first ball entrance 64D is entered. By arranging the unplayed ball so that it can enter the lower first entrance 64D, it is possible to enter the ball into the lower first prize opening 64D without making the player feel uncomfortable. However, the disposition position of the lower first ball entrance 64D is not limited to this, and it may be provided above the first ball entrance 64 or in the vicinity of the general prize hole 63 so as not to be noticeable. .

  The second variable winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1, and when the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, it becomes an open state in which a ball easily wins. By closing 650f1, the operation is controlled so that the ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to win a prize. In this control example, when the second variable winning device 650 wins the jackpot that is opened, a jackpot game in which only a small amount (about 40) of prize balls are awarded is executed. Therefore, the jackpot winning of the second variable winning device 650 opening operation is not a jackpot aimed at to win a prize ball, but to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (a latent state in this control example). It is a jackpot to aim at. In this way, even if the number of prize balls awarded to the player by one jackpot winning is small, if the gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is finished, the jackpot game (Big hit) is to give advantageous benefits to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 321, details of the special winning device 1550 provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the above-described first control example in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 1550. As shown in FIG. 208, in the special winning a prize device 1550 in the fourth control example, the position where the specific general winning a prize port 163 is arranged with respect to the special winning a prize device 550 in the first control example (the front of the specific outlet port 166). The second entrance 640 is provided on the left side of the view, the pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second entrance 640, and the pseudo second entrance is provided above the production flow path 691. At the point where the ball inlet 1640 is provided, on the upstream side of the guide channel 690 (around the general ball-sending portion 690a), a channel different from the guide channel 690 (flowing the game ball to the pseudo second ball inlet 1640). A point where a branch portion 694a is provided for branching to the second guide flow path 694) for causing the game ball that has reached the branch portion 694a to flow down to the guide flow path 690 or to the second guide flow path 694. And switch whether to let it flow down That channel switching member 695 is different in that it is provided. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 was provided in the first control example as the second ball entrance 640 was moved to the position where the specific general winning opening 163 was provided in the first control example. The difference is that the position is hollow. Further, it is different in that the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball to the specific winning port 65a is detected is changed to 10.

  As shown in FIG. 321, the second ball entrance 640 in the fourth control example is provided with only the pseudo through gate 1167 above the second ball entrance 640, and is not provided with a structure for preventing the ball from entering. The player can enter the ball at all times by making a right hit. More specifically, about 1/3 of the right-handed game ball enters the second ball inlet 640 and about 2/3 flows into the main route SK1. The branch portion 694a provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 can reach is branched toward the rear side in the front view of the general ball sending portion 690a, and the flow path switching member 695. In the state where is retracted to the retreat position (back side in front view), the game ball flows down along the inclination of the guide flow path 690, so flow down to the second guide flow path 694 via the branch portion 694a. There is no. On the other hand, in the state where the flow path switching member 694a is projected to the projecting position shown in FIG. 321, it becomes impossible to proceed through the guide flow channel 690. Further, since the flow path switching member 695 is inclined in a direction that guides the game ball toward the inner side in the front view at the projecting position, the game ball is guided to the branch portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695. And is distributed to the guide flow path 694. In addition, the flow path switching member 695 is temporarily in the case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the fact that the player has entered the second entrance 640 during execution of the latent effect B described later. It is moved to the overhang position, and the game balls that have triggered the lottery of the second special symbol are sorted to the second guiding flow path 694, and then retracted to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide flow passage 694 is provided with a guide flow passage sensor 694s capable of detecting passage of a game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the guide flow path sensor 694s, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a attached to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is opened for 2 seconds to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. It becomes possible to enter the ball. At the most downstream side of the second guide flow path 694, the game ball that has flowed down the second guide flow path 694 is rolled from the back side in front view to the front side in front view and falls into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. A ball discharging unit 694b that can be driven is provided. The game ball dropped from the ball discharge portion 694b enters the pseudo second entrance 1640, or enters the exit 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second entrance 1640. And is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Since the time required for the second induction flow path 694 to flow down is about 1 second, basically, the game ball flowing down the second induction flow path 694 has a duration of 2 seconds, which is the opening period of the pseudo electric auditors object 1640a. In the meantime, it enters the pseudo second entrance 1640. For the purpose of normally discharging the game ball that has reached the pseudo second entrance port 1640 after the elapse of the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a, the irregularity itself such as a ball clogging occurs in the exit port 1640b. It is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 321, the pseudo second entrance 1640 is provided with a pseudo electric accessory 1640a. This pseudo electric auditors object 1640a is opened / closed as a part of the entertaining effect (latent probability effect B) in the latent probability mode (high probability state of special symbols, and low probability state of normal symbols) most advantageous to the player. Although details will be described later, once the game moves to the latent probability mode, if the second special symbol is missed, there is a high probability that the special winning opening 65a is opened for 1 second (small hit) Becomes As a result, in the latent probability mode, in addition to continuing to make a right hit, in addition to being able to enter the second ball entrance 640 and execute the lottery for the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a small hit occurs in the lottery, the main routes SK1 to SK3 can be made to flow down to enter the game balls into the opened specific winning opening 65a. That is, it becomes an advantageous state that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls. Further, when the jackpot in the second special symbol in the latent probability mode, the game state after the jackpot is set to the latent probability mode again unless the probability variation limit number is reached. That is, the latent probability mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability variation limit number of times is reached. In the fourth control example, since the probability variation limit number of times is set to 36 times, the advantageous latent probability mode and the jackpot are repeated until the jackpot hits 36 times at the maximum (looping the latent probability mode).

  However, the probability variation limit number and small hits are relatively few models installed, and it is a specification that many players are not familiar with, so it becomes difficult to understand the game playability, and the game on the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult. There is a risk that the player will be shunned. Therefore, in the fourth control example, an effect (latent accuracy effect B) that causes the player to recognize the behavior in the advantageous latent accuracy mode in a pseudo manner as if it is a probability variation state of a general model is executed. It is configured. More specifically, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent probability mode (and when the pseudo jackpot effect described later is not executed), the game that triggered the lottery for the second special symbol. The sphere (the game sphere that has entered the second inlet 640) is caused to flow down into the second guide flow passage 694 (that is, the flow passage switching member 695 is moved to the projecting position), and the guide flow passage sensor 694s is used. At the timing when passage is detected, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened, and the game ball flowing down the second guide flow path 694 is inserted into the open second pseudo ball entrance 1640. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot variation display effect is executed after the game ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. Further, the board surface configuration is such that the second ball entrance 640 cannot be entered unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167. By these, the player can be made to think as if the pseudo electric auditors object 1640a was opened based on the fact that the game ball passed through the pseudo through gate 1167. Further, it is possible to perform an effect as if the lottery for the second special symbol was performed based on the fact that the player entered the pseudo second entrance 1640. That is, a behavior similar to the behavior of a probability variation state (a gaming state in which the electric accessory is easily opened and the jackpot probability is high) in a general game machine (in an advantageous probability variation state, a high probability is obtained when passing through a through gate by right-handing). In this way, the electric accessory of the second starting opening is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening, so that it is possible to realize a high probability jackpot).

  In all game states (modes) other than the latent probability mode, the behavior is similar to the normal state (a game state in which the electric accessory is difficult to open and the jackpot probability is low) in a general gaming machine. The presentation mode and the like are set. This makes it possible for a wide range of players to easily understand the game and to achieve a sharp game.

  In addition, in the fourth control example, an effect (pseudo jackpot effect) that makes the jackpots of a plurality of times (for example, five times) appear as if it is one jackpot in the probability variation mode is configured. More specifically, a plurality of rounds in the jackpot (for example, five rounds) are made to appear as if they were one round depending on the effect, so that the number of prize balls in one jackpot is the actual number of prize balls. Can be illusion as if there were more. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to make the player feel more satisfied. Further, as described above, in the fourth control example, once the latent accuracy mode is entered, the jackpot and the latent accuracy mode are repeated until a maximum of 36 big hits occur. Therefore, the actual internal state and the effect contents are linked. If so, the jackpot and the latent accuracy mode are frequently switched, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, since a configuration is performed in which a plurality of jackpots (and latent accuracy modes between jackpots) are displayed as if they were one jackpot (pseudo jackpot effect), a small jackpot is generated. It can make you feel as if you were able to win more prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. In the fourth control example, once the latent probability mode is entered, the latent probability mode is looped until the probability variation limit number of times is reached, so the remaining number of jackpots can be easily made when the latent probability mode is entered. It becomes possible to grasp. This makes it possible to easily determine how many jackpots the pseudo jackpot effect can end when the latent probability mode ends (that is, when the probability variation limit count is reached). . Therefore, the pseudo jackpot effect can be executed in a more natural manner.

  In the fourth control example, in the latent probability mode, and when the pseudo jackpot effect is not being executed, every time a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the entered game is entered. Although the ball is made to enter the pseudo second entrance 1640, it is made to appear as if the variable display effect of the second special symbol was executed as a result of entering the pseudo second entrance 1640. , But is not limited to this. For example, only when the jackpot is selected in the lottery for the second special symbol, the game ball that triggered the jackpot selection may be flown down to the pseudo second entrance 1640. With such a configuration, in the latent probability mode, if the player enters the pseudo second entrance 1640, it can behave as if it were a big hit, so the pseudo second entrance 1640 can be realized. The game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322, a game flow in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to set four game states (normal state, probability variation state, latent probability state, time saving state). Then, when the special jackpot jackpot is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game is over. In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of times the high probability state of special symbols is set consecutively, and the number of times the high probability state of special symbols is set continuously reaches the upper limit (probability variation limit state) In the case where the jackpot is won, the special symbol low probability state (time saving state) is set after the jackpot.

  Further, in the fourth control example, among the gaming states in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player than the probability variation state. Further, once the latent probability state is entered, it is easy to continuously set the latent probability state until the probability variation limit state is reached. With this configuration, the player can play an advantageous game by shifting to the latent state while the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set a small number of times.

  If the normal state is set as the game state, the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed (the special state 2 lottery in the normal state is a long time (for example, 10 minutes) as a variable time) is set. In the special jackpot 1), 99.5% of the winnings are transferred to the probability changing state, and 0.5% are transferred to the latent probability state.

  While the probability variation state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes easier for the ball to win the lower first ball entrance 64D than in the normal state, so the special drawing 1 lottery is performed. It will be easier. Further, the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 is also set higher than that in the normal state, and the transition rate to the latent state when the big hit of the special figure 1 is won is 10 times (5%) that of the normal state. Even when the probability variation state is set, a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 lottery, so during this probability variation state, the lottery of special figure 1 is mainly performed in the gaming state. Becomes

  In the latent state, the variation time of the special map 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the variation time of the special map 2 lottery is set to a short time. The game state is mainly played, and the player is allowed to play the right-handed game. When the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the latent probability state is set again until the probability variation limit state is reached. In addition, in the special figure 2 lottery, it is set to win the small hit in most of the cases where the big hit is not won. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery in the latent probability state is the most advantageous lottery for the player, and the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

  If you win the jackpot in the probability variation limit state, a time saving state is set. In this time saving state, the game state in which the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is mainly performed is entered, and the jackpot lottery of Toku-zu 1 is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special figure 1 lottery is easier to execute than the normal state. In addition, the time saving state continues until a predetermined condition other than the jackpot win (for example, the condition that the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (50 times), a condition to win a predetermined number of wins (1 time) for a small hit, etc.) is satisfied. When the big hit is won in the short-time state, the player has a high probability (95%) to shift to the latent state which is most advantageous to the player. In this way, by shifting (retracting) from the time saving state to the latent state, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the first time of the number of times when the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, It is possible to provide a game to the player.

  In this control example, even if the special figure 1 lottery is won for the small hit, and if the small hit is won, the small hit game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed in the same manner as the big hit win of the special figure 1. is doing. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current number of probability changes (the number of remaining times until the probability change limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 has been opened.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of this control example, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that indicates to the player the current number of probability changes (the remaining number of times until the probability change limit state) based on the fact that a small hit is won. good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 323, of the effects executed in the fourth control example, effects (effect mode) executed in accordance with the set game state will be described. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing transition contents of effects executed corresponding to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 323, in the state in which the normal state and the probability variation state are set, the same effect mode (normal effect mode) is set, and whether the player is currently in the normal state or the probability variation state. Is configured to make it difficult to understand. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to easily grasp the number of remaining probability changes until the probability change limit state.

  In this control example, since the time saving state is set only when the jackpot is won when the probability variation limit state is reached, the normal effect mode is executed without winning the jackpot during the time saving state. Only in this case, the player can be made aware that the current state is normal. Therefore, advantageous game information can be provided only to the player who is playing the game for a long time.

  In addition, in this control example, the variation time set based on the special figure 1 lottery is the same in the normal state and the probability variation state (the same variation pattern selection table is used. Exist). As a result, it is possible to prevent the current game state from being determined by the variation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. In addition, without being limited to this, it is possible to set a variation time that can be set only in the probability variation state or the normal state, and when the variation time is set, it is possible to suggest the current game state. You may. Further, the variation time is set by referring to different variation pattern selection tables according to the current number of probability variations (the number of remaining times until the probability variation limit state), and according to the variation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. The player may be able to determine the current number of probability changes.

  Next, in the state where the normal effect is being executed (normal state, state in which the probability variation state is set), when shifting to the latent probability state, two effect modes are set according to the current number of probability variations. It Specifically, if the number of remaining times until the probability variation limit state is 30 or more in the state where the latent probability state is set, an odd numbered grid (for example, 777) is stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating the big hit. Then, the latent probability effect A mode for executing the pseudo big hit game effect is set in the period from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game executed in the state where the probability variation limit state is reached.

  Then, when the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state is less than 30 in the state where the latent probability state is set, an even numbered pattern (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating a big hit, and During the period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the probability variation limit state is reached, until the jackpot is won a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times), the game effect in the latent state is executed Then, thereafter, a latent probability effect B mode for executing a pseudo big hit game effect is set until a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) of winning the big hit.

  That is, in this control example, a large number of prize balls are given to the player in two states, a big hit game state and a continuous small hit game state (so-called small hit RUSH) in the latent probability state. However, not only do you often win the small jackpot during the tentative state, but you also win the jackpot with a high probability, so you execute the jackpot game production based on the actual jackpot winning, and the jackpot based on the jackpot winning. If it is configured to execute the winning game effect, there is a problem that the effect becomes complicated and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

  On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, in the period in which the latent probability state is set, regardless of whether it is a big hit game or a small hit game, a period during which a pseudo big hit game effect is executed, and a pseudo hit It is configured to set a certain period game effect (small hit RUSH effect) and a period to be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that is easy for the player to understand by suppressing the effect to be performed from being complicated.

  Also, when the probability variation limit state is reached and then the time saving state is set, the pullback mode is set, and a stirrup production is provided to indicate to the player that the game state is a state in which it is easy to shift to the latent probability state. To be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 324, characteristic effect contents in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324 (a), the content of the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode will be described. FIG. 324 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a pseudo-big hit effect (super big hit effect) executed in the latent accuracy effect A mode. The same elements as those of the display screen in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 324 (a), in the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode, a comment indicating that the jackpot is being hit is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the jackpot Acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls given during the performance is displayed. Then, a stored image for displaying to the player with a dynamic image that the acquired information 803 is increasing is displayed in the center. Then, a guide display Dm9 for guiding the player to the right-handed game is displayed.

  Here, during the latent accuracy effect A mode, the prize balls that are awarded during the latent probability state, that is, the prize balls that are awarded when the ball that has been right-handed in the latent probability state has won each winning opening ( All of the balls that enter the second ball entrance 640 and the balls that are awarded based on the balls that enter the variable prize device 65 by the small hit game) are treated as the prize balls that were won during the big hit game. The pseudo jackpot effect is executed on the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) at the embedded position during the latent accuracy effect A mode, and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It is configured so that the balls flow like a ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165.

  As a result, a pseudo jackpot effect in which all winning balls in the latent state are won in the pseudo attacker 165 is executed, and a jackpot game showing that the jackpot game is continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a pseudo big hit effect during the latent state without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 324 (b), of the effects executed in the latent accuracy effect B mode, the content of the pseudo latent probability state game effect will be described. FIG. 324 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the pseudo latent state game effect. As shown in FIG. 324 (b), in the pseudo latent probability state game effect, the character "RUSH" is displayed to indicate that the current state is the latent probability game state, and whether or not the small hit game is executed. (A game in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 and the content of the treasure box 812 is “V” indicates that the player has won the small hit). This pseudo latent probability state game effect is executed during the period when the latent probability state and the jackpot game until reaching a predetermined number of times are being performed. When the game is executed, the acquisition information 803 is notified that the number of prize balls is given during the big hit game and the prize ball is given by the small hit game.

  Here, in the latent probability effect B mode, during the period in which the pseudo latent probability state game effect is being executed, the special map 2 lottery is executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Since it is necessary to show that to the player, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the projecting position, and the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 flows down toward the pseudo electric auditors object 1640a. It is configured to be a ball flow.

  The update timing of the acquisition information 803 displayed in each of the above-described effects and the update timing of the effect mode are pseudo based on the timing at which the ball actually wins, as in the first control example described above. The timing at which the ball reaches the winning opening is predicted, and the timing is set according to the timing based on the prediction result. The detailed contents thereof are the same as those of the above-described first control example, and therefore will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Main Controller in Fourth Control Example>
ROM202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example, the ROM202 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above, instead of the random number table 202a per special symbol, the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol is changed, The variable pattern selection 4 table 202cb is replaced with the pattern selection table 202b, the normal random number 4 table 202cc is replaced with the normal hit random number table 202c, and the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table is replaced with the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1. The difference is that 202cd1 is replaced with the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, and the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd2 is provided, and a small hit random number 4 table 202ce is provided instead of the small hit random number table 202e.

  The RAM of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example is different from the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above in that the probability variation flag 203ca, the game state storage area 203cb, the big hit medium flag 203cc, and the special figure are included. 1 fluctuation stop flag 203cd, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, small hit flag 203cf, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci, probability variation upper limit counter 203cj They differ in points. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 325 (a), the contents of the random number per special symbol 4 table 202ca will be described. This random number per special symbol 4 table 202ca is different from the above random number table 202a per special symbol in that the range of the value of the first per random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol is different. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of "0-4", in the high-probability state of the special symbol, the range of "0-39" is defined in the range corresponding to the jackpot respectively. .

  Next, the contents of the small hit random number 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (b). The small hit random number 4 table 202ce is different from the small hit random number table 202e described above, and each of the special figures 1 and 2 is configured to win the small hit. Specifically, in the case of Toku-zu 1, the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 is "50 to 59", and in the case of Toku-zu 2, the range of "50 to 479" is determined to be a big hit. Stipulated in. That is, in the fourth control example, the small win is won with a probability of about 1/50 in the lottery of Toku-zu 1, and the small hit is won with a probability of about 1 / 1.1 in the lottery of Toku-zu 2. I am configuring.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325 (c), the contents of the normal hit random number 4 table 202cc will be described. This ordinary hit random number 4 table 202cc is that, compared to the above-mentioned ordinary hit random number table 202c, the element for long opening is deleted, and the probability of winning a hit in the low probability state of a normal symbol is lowered, It is different in that the probability of winning per hit in the high probability state of the symbol is increased, and is otherwise the same.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the first attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is opened to set the probability variation state. A, jackpot B), and a jackpot (jackpot C) in which the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and the latent probability state is set are defined in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the jackpot of special figure 2 is won, the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened, and the jackpot (jackpot C) in which the latent state is set is a special jackpot. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb will be described with reference to FIGS. 327 to 329. As shown in FIG. 327, in this control example, the normal probability 4 table 202cb1 normally used when the normal state and the probability variation state are set, and the latent probability use table when the latent probability state is set It has 4 tables 202cb2 and 4 tables 202cb3 for time saving used when the time saving state is set, and the table corresponding to the set game state is referred to.

  FIG. 328 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability change 4 table 202cb1 normally. As shown in FIG. 328, in the present control example, a long-term fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 in the normal state and the state in which the probability variation state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special map 1 is performed.

  FIG. 329 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the latent-intelligence 4 table 202cb2. As shown in FIG. 329 (a), in this control example, a long-term fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of Toku-zu 1 when the latent probability state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special map 2 is performed.

  FIG. 329 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving 4 table 202cb3. As shown in FIG. 329 (b), in the present control example, the long-time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 in the state where the time saving state is set. Therefore, the lottery game of the actual special map 1 is performed. Further, it is usually specified that the length of the fluctuation time selected as the fluctuation pattern of Toku-zu 1 is shorter than that of the probability changing 4 table 202cb1. Therefore, normally, the special figure 1 variation can be executed more efficiently than in the probability variation state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the following configuration is added. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability variation flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, if the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON, as a game state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, One of the normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

  The probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the jackpot type that is won is a jackpot that sets the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot. Then, when the symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special figure high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol (special state high probability state) after the special symbol is set The probability variation flag 203ca may be set to OFF when the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations in special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, in order to set the timing of setting the probability variation flag 203ca to OFF, a storage unit that stores in advance the number of times of variation of the special figure as the special figure high accuracy end condition and a state after the special figure high accuracy state is set. Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end judgment for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high accuracy end condition) stored in the storage means Means may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of special figure high-probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high-probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the special figure high-probability state, and fluctuations of the second special symbol Various special drawing 2 high-probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result for the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result for winning a small hit). Such a special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability variation flag 203ca may be set to OFF when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first entrance 64 is coincident with the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. The special figure 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

  This special figure 1 jackpot flag is on, when the fluctuation time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the symbol is executed. With this, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit occurs on the other while the big hit on the one hand is executed.

  The special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 640 is equal to the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. The special figure 2 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

  With the special figure 2 jackpot flag turned on, when the variation time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol by the symbol is executed. With this, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit occurs on the other while the big hit on the one hand is executed.

  The gaming state storage area 203cb is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set gaming state and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (when the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is off), the winning state of this gaming state storage area 203cb "00H" is stored in the area as information indicating a normal state. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probable state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probable variation flag 203ca is on), the winning state area of the gaming state storage area 203cb , "01H" is stored as information indicating the probability change state. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (when the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is on), the winning state area of the gaming state storing area 203cb is displayed. , "02H" is stored as information indicating the latent state.

  The information stored in the game state storage area 203cb is retained until the end of the big hit, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big hit.

  The small hit flag 203cf is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 640 is equal to the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. This small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit. With this small hit flag 203cf turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is subtracted. The process of stopping) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is started in the lottery of the first special symbol during the small hit of the second special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit. it can.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci, respectively, the 1st special design, and the counter in order to count the fluctuation time of the 2nd special design, 1st special design, and 2nd special When the variation pattern of the symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol is ended by the timing result of this special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch, and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci.

  The big hit medium flag 203cc is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit is in progress. If the big hitting flag 203cc is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and if it is off, it is not a big hit. The big hit medium flag 203cc is set to ON when the big hit start is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hitting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting medium flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hitting state, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not the small hitting state. The small hitting flag is set to ON when the small hit start is set. On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win the small hit with the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag is set to ON), the first It is configured to suspend the variable display of special symbols. In other words, among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery, and the small hit medium flag is set to ON. In the state of being, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Also, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the large hit game being started.

  In addition, in the present control example, the first special symbol is configured to win the small hit as well as the second special symbol described above. Since the processing when the small hit is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is the same as the processing when the small hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with a big hit stop design until the big hit is started. When this special map 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON, even if there is a new ball in the second ball entrance 640, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is avoided. To be done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped with a deviation symbol, and is set to OFF when the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol is avoided. It

  In addition, in the present control example, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is provided in which the target is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce described above. Since the target of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game content of the small hit game is set such that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for 1.5 seconds, and the condition for ending the round established by the winning number is 10 are doing. In other words, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses until 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, because the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the production across the small hit game (the period from the start of fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of fluctuation of other special symbols via the small hit game) The effect period of a series of effects) can be determined in advance. Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, When the state set to ON is set to OFF, the update (subtraction) of the stopped variable time is restarted.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit, and is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 32). It As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state in which the variation display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process, it is set to OFF.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit, the special symbol in which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the fact that the small prize is won is the first special symbol. Although only symbols are provided, if it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  The probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting an upper limit value at which the probability variation state is continuously set. In this control example, the upper limit number of times in which the probability variation state is continuously set after the jackpot is defined (36 times). The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is referred to when determining whether or not the number of times the probability variation state is continuously set has reached the upper limit number. The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 each time the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the normal state or the time saving state is set, the value of the counter is cleared.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, based on the fact that one of the special symbols is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on that the big hit game is executed ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol to stop, and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol stopped with a combination showing a small hit On the basis of this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game ends).

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. With such a configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a big hit), and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that an effect mode storage area 223ca and a probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb are added. ing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing the effect mode that is currently set. In the fourth control example, as the effect mode set when the latent state is set as the game state, a pseudo jackpot effect that simulates the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game (FIG. 324 ( a)) The latent probability effect A mode that executes) and the latent state that is continuously set are divided into a predetermined period (for example, a period until the jackpot is won three times), and pseudo for each division. The latent probability effect B mode for executing the latent probability game effect (see FIG. 324 (b)) is configured to be settable.

  In this effect mode storage area 223ca, the jackpot is won in a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, time saving state) other than the latent probability state, and the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb in the case where the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is over. The effect mode selected based on the value of is stored. Then, while the latent probability state is continuously set, the same effect mode is stored, and the information (effect mode) stored based on the fact that the game state other than the latent accuracy state is set is cleared. It

  The probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set continuously, and the high probability of the special symbol set continuously. It is referred to when it is determined whether or not the number of states (probability change state, latent probability state) has reached the upper limit number (for example, 36 times). The probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is incremented by 1 when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is over, and is cleared when the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is over. It

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 332 to 347. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 332, the content of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S4501), and when it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: Yes) ) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502). In the process of S4502, it is determined whether or not one of the special maps is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, and thus the subtraction of the other special map fluctuation time being changed is suspended. In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. However, (S4503), that is, for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is suspended, the process for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process is ended. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes). (S4504), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4504: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S4508) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509, which executes the variation process related to Toku-zu 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start processing (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 333.

  In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is larger than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4505) is to perform the process in the variation of special figure 1 and its detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 336.

  When the first special symbol variation in-progress processing 4 (S4505) is finished, it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is 0) (S4506) and the variation time. When it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S4507) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, in the process of S4506, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S4506: No), the process of S4507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

  In the processing of S4509 to S4513, the same processing as S4504 to S4507 executed for Toku-zu 1 is executed. When the process of S4509 is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S4509), and the special figure 2 fluctuation If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203ci is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4509, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is greater than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4511) is to execute the process in the variation of special figure 2 and will be described later with reference to FIG. 343.

  When the second special symbol variation in-progress processing 4 (S4511) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is 0) (S4512) and the variation time. When it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S4512, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S4512: No), the processing of S4513 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 333, the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. . FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start processing (S4508).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d is acquired (S4601), and the value of the acquired first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is set. 1 is subtracted (S4603), the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d after the subtraction is set, and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S4604). .

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, the It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S4604 ends, next, the data of the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  When the process of S4605 ends, then the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S4606). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 334, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot, based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S4606 ends, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (see FIG. 335). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is a judgment result of the first special symbol, and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is larger than 0 (S4608: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S4609), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S4608, when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is not greater than 0 (S4608: No), the present processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 334, for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 of FIG. 333) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, during the period in which the variation display (big hit variation) that is won in one of the special symbols is being executed, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery It is configured not to make a determination.

  In other words, one special symbol lottery, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the change time), the other special symbol lottery is won the jackpot, multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured so that it is prevented that the jackpot is won and the privilege is excessively given.

  In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and it is configured by setting the deviation symbol, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S4701). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S4702). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S4702: Yes), the random number value that is the jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S4703). On the other hand, in the processing of S4702, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is off (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S4702: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. It is determined whether or not the defined random number value of the jackpot and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S4704).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S4703 or S4704 is a big hit (S4705), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S4705: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is given to the first special symbol. It is set to ON (S4706), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot (S4707). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of alignment (S4705: No), the out-of-symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and thereafter. , This process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508 of FIG. 333) will be described. FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (S4607).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 of FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606 of FIG. 334), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801). Here, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit depending on whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is turned on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON in the process of S4707 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334).

  In the process of S4801, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S4701 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). The jackpot type is determined from the special hit type 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326 (a)) based on the value of the hit type counter C2 (S4802), and the process proceeds to S4803.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special diagram 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4803.

  In the processing of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S4803). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 329) corresponding to the game state is read (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability variation flag 203ca and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the processing of S4805, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S4805), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S4806).

  After finishing the process of S4806, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S4807), and then the variation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S4808), and the process of S4805. The value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in step S1 is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 336, the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 of FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505). In this first special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4505), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is resumed, and the process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

  When the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901). Here, a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win (small hit). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the main controller 110 executes a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the next time (after 2 ms when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on) special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 332) is executed, a big hit in the process of S4501 Since it is determined that, the first special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, the big hit game (or the small hit game) ends, and it is determined that it is not in the big hit (or in the small hit) in the process of S4501, and the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. Will be. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, is a big hit (or a small hit) game. Is completed, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which had been interrupted by the subtraction of the fluctuation time, is restarted.

  Returning to FIG. 336, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S4902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop is set. The stop flag 203cg is set to OFF (S4903), and the process proceeds to S4904. On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4901: No), the processing of S4902 and S4903 is skipped and S4904. Process shifts to.

  In the process of S4904, the special figure 1 variable time counter 203ch is decremented by 1 and updated (S4904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 337, the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507) which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154 of FIG. 332) will be described. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S4507), first, for the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5002), and the special figure is set. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on is set (S5003). Then, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol (S5004).

  When the process of S5004 is finished, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on (S5006). The storage information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the process of S5006, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is set to OFF (S5006: No), the processes of S5007 to S5008 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5009.

  After executing the processing of S5006 or S5008, a jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck, the probability variation flag 203ca, the time saving medium counter 203j are reset (S5010), the big hit medium flag 203cc is set to ON (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5012. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is not on (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5012.

  In the process of S5012, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed to be stopped is set (S5012). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5013), and this process is ended.

  Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S4507), a process (S5002 to S5009) of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S5001: Yes), a process (S5003, S5004) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being displayed in variation is executed.

  In the fourth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol in the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a detached symbol, It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to achieve a natural effect as compared with the case where the player is forced to stop by coming off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. To do. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510). In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), the process for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process relating to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 333 to 337, the target of the variation is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the elements is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (S5102), and this processing ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag which is set to ON when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on in the process of S5101, the present process is terminated without executing the processes of S5102 to S5107 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S5101: No), the second special symbol execution area Data (various counter values) is acquired (S5103). Next, it is determined whether there is acquired data based on the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5104). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S5104: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that there is data (S5104: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Is executed (S5105). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

  When the process of S5105 ends, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the data acquired in the process of S5103, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 for selecting the variation pattern is executed (S5106). ). Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. After the processing of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5107). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S5108), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is 0, that is, it is not during the hour / hour (S5107: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the second special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S5105) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 of FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. ) Will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105).

  In this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), since the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above is executed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) The differences will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S5201). Then, based on the acquired counter values and the state of the probability variation flag 203ca, the processing of S5202 to S5204 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and the other control is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334). Is executed.

  When the processing of S5203 or S5204 ends, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S5205), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5205: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The processing of S5206-S5208 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In each of these processes of S5206 to S5208, the same process as each process of S4706 to S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5205, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S5205: No), a small hit of the second special symbol, or a stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is set. Special figure 2 deviation processing 4 is executed (S5209), this processing ends. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 (S5209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 (S5209).

  In special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S5203 or S5204 of FIG. 339 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S5301), and the lottery result is small. When it is determined that it is a win (S5301: Yes), the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5302), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small win (S5303). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of the process of S5301 (S5301: No), the out-of-design of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S5305), and thereafter, This process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 ( S5106) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (S5106).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Then, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether the jackpot of the second special symbol is set or not is determined. Yes (S5402). Here, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is something which is set to ON with the processing of S5207 in the above-mentioned 2nd special design big hit judgment processing 4 (figure 339 reference).

  In the processing of S5402, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S5402: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current game state is read. (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S5201 in the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process 4 (see FIG. 339), the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cd2 (FIG. 326 (b )), The jackpot type is determined (S5404).

  When the process of S5404 ends, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S5405), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Yes (S5406). Then, the process proceeds to S5408.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5402, when it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is not set (S5402: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 4 (S5407) is executed, and the processing of S5408. Move to.

  In the process of S5408, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S5408). Next, the variation start of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S5409), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S5405 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci ( (S5410), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 4 (S5407) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 4 (S5407).

  In special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 4 (S5407 of FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5501). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5501). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is on (S5501: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5502). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202ce (not shown) (S5503).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 389) corresponding to the current game state is read (S5504), and the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S5505). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hitting fluctuation pattern is set (S5506), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S5501: No), a variation pattern selection table (figure corresponding to the current game state) 327 to FIG. 389) is read (S5507), and an outlying fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S5508). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation fluctuation pattern (S5509), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) which is one of the special symbol variation processes (see S154 of FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The contents of will be explained. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511). In the second special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4511), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special diagram 2 is resumed, and the process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci is updated by subtracting 1 (S5601), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 The display is updated (S5602), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513). This second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is to execute the process of stopping the fluctuation of special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is set to ON (S5701), and the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is set to ON. If it is determined that there is (S5701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S5703). Next, when the processing of S5703 is finished, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is turned on (S5706). If it is determined that the Toku-zu 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706: Yes), the Toku-zu 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to OFF (S5707), and the stored information for the Toku-zu 1 jackpot is deleted (S5708). , S5709. On the other hand, in the process of S5706, when it is determined that the special map 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the processes of S5707 to S5708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5709.

  In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the toku-zu 2 jackpot flag 203cl, the probability variation flag 203ca, and the time saving medium counter 203j are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot flag 203cc is set to ON (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5712.

  In the process of S5712, the special figure 2 decision command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is decided to be stopped is set (S5712). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5713), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5701, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to ON (S5701: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 4 is executed (S5702), and the above-described S5712, The process of S5713 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 (S5702) which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S4513 of FIG. 344) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 4 (S5702). In this special figure 2 off stop process 4 (S5702), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 being executed is executed.

  In special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801: YES), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S5802). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is turned on is set (S5803).

  When the processing of S5803 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S5804). After that, the small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF (S5805), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S5806).

  When the process of S5806 ends, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S5807). After that, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped by the small hit symbol (S5808), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S5801: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S5809). After that, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is deviated from the second special symbol and stopped changing (S5810), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed. Can be displayed. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

  In this control example, when the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 346, the normal symbol variation process (S156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S156). This normal symbol variation process (S156) is executed in the timer interrupt process, the variable display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, lower electric associated with the lower first ball inlet 64D This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accessory 64Da.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S156 of FIG. 346), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S5901). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D is being performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included during and while the work is being done. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S5901: Yes), it is a state in which a new ordinary symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (execution), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hitting (S5901: No), next, whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing) When it is determined (S5902) and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S5902: No), that is, even when the current symbol is a normal symbol, the variation of the normal symbol If there is no state, that is, if it is determined that it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding of variable display in the normal symbol) The number of times M) is acquired (S5903).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S5904), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is 0. (S5904: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S5905), and normally. The data stored in the symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

  In the process of S5906, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol holding first area → execution area, the normal symbol holding second area → the normal symbol holding first area, the normal symbol holding third area → the normal symbol holding second area, the normal symbol holding fourth area → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal pattern hold third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S5907).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5908). When it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908: Yes), the hour / hour state is in effect, and therefore the lottery result is acquired based on the high probability time random number 4 table 202cc (S5909). ). Specifically, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "205 to 232", the normal symbol is out. It is determined that On the other hand, in the processing of S5908, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5908: No), based on the normal probability random number 4 table 202cc for low probability time. Then, the lottery result is acquired (S5910). Specifically, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number 4 table 202cc of the normal symbol for low probability. If the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 6-232", it is determined that it is a deviation of the ordinary symbol. To do.

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S5909 or S5910 is determined whether it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S5911), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S5911: Yes). ), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S5912), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5911, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S5911: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5913, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process moves to S5914. When the process of S5912 or the process of S5913 is completed, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S5914), and this process is terminated.

  When the process of S5912 or S5914 ends, in the process of S591, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S5911), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving period). If it is determined to be (state) (S5911: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S5913), and then the universal symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S5914), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state of the regular symbol (time saving state) (the low probability state of the regular symbol) (S5911: No), the variation time of the regular symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5902, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S5915). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S5910 or the process of S5912 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S5915, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5915, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S5915: Yes), next, the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S5916). In the process of S5916, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S5912, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as a stop (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S5913, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. The period in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period in which one place in the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. (Confirmed display) is configured. This allows the player to easily recognize that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  After the process of S5916 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S156) However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S5917). When it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S5917: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S5917: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5918).

  In the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is 0, that is, when it is determined that the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol is started is the normal state (S5919). : No), the opening time of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds, and the opening count is set to 2 (S5920), and the process proceeds to S5921.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5918, when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203j is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the game state at the timing of starting the lottery (fluctuation) of the normal symbol this time is the hour / short state. (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric auditors product 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D is set to 1 second, and the opening count is set to 2 (S5924), and the process proceeds to S5923. To do.

  As described above, in the present control example, the timing at which the regular symbol lottery (variation) is executed, and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric auditors product 64Da is set based on the winning symbol of the regular symbol are set. , Are both in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to strictly set the condition for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player, so, for example, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the normal symbol lottery ( (Variation) is executed and the winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the ordinary symbol is set, long opening is set as the operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da. There is nothing to do. Also, in the same way, the winning symbol is won in the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the ordinary state is set as the gaming state until the variation of the ordinary symbol stops. Even in such a case, the long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da).

  Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the lower electric auditors product 64Da from being long opened in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, a lottery of special symbols (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is executed. It is possible to limit the easy period to the time saving state. In this control example, the gaming state at the timing of starting the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol and the timing of setting the opening operation of the lower electric auditors product 64Da is determined, and the gaming state set at each timing. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the lower electric accessory 64Da based on the above, other configurations may be used.

  For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the normal symbol lottery (variation) is started and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set are normal (in FIG. 346). The opening operation set in S5924) may be set (short opening is set), and the long opening (opening operation set in S5922 of FIG. 346) may be set in other states. By configuring in this manner, the advantage (long opening) is provided to the player even with respect to the normal symbol variation executed in the period before and after the time saving state, which is the game state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

  In this way, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short, “10 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64D becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for a ball to enter the lower first entrance 64D. Become. In addition, in the present control example, when the big hit game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, and thus the normal state is set during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time saving state is continuously set unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the small amount executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, in the small hitting game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and the lower electric auditors product 64Da is long opened, and a plurality of winning holes (first specific winning hole 65a, lower first winning ball) This is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter the mouth 64D).

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the lower electric auditors product 64Da and the lower first ball entrance 64D are provided above the first variable winning device 65. However, it is preferable that the balls enter the two winning openings (the V winning device 65a and the lower first entrance 64D) during the small hitting game, whereby the winning balls that can be obtained during the small hitting game. The number can be increased, and it is possible to give a more advantageous privilege to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 346, the description will be continued. In the process of S5920, the opening / closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the first lower entrance 64D is set (S5921), and the process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the lower electric auditors product 64Da is set by the process of S5923, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product is started when the electric auditors product opening / closing process of the main process is executed next, and the process of S5924. Alternatively, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the process of S5922 are completed.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S1451) will be described with reference to FIG. 347. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (S1451). In the jackpot ending process (S1451), a process for setting a gaming state after the jackpot is executed at the end of the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 (S5953). Next, a count command indicating the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process proceeds to S5955.

  In the process of S5955, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj added in the process of S5953 is 35 (S5955). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), the state command before reaching the upper limit is set (S5956), and the process proceeds to S5957. On the other hand, in the process of S5955, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the process of S5956 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5957.

  In the process of S5957, the jackpot type read out this time is executed (S5957). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type read in the process of S5957 is the jackpot C (S5958). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5958 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot C (S5958: No), it is determined whether the read jackpot type is the jackpot B (S5959). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is the jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the gaming state at the time of winning is read from the gaming state storage area 203cb (S5961). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning read out in the process of S5962 is a latent state or a probable variation state (S5962). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state or the probability changing state (that is, the normal state or the time saving state) (S5962: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 10000. Then (S5964), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5962, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the latent probability state or the probability variation state (S5962: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203j (S5963), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5959 that the jackpot is not the jackpot B (S5959: No), the gaming state at the time of winning is read from the gaming state storage area 203cb (S5965). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state (S5966). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S5966: Yes), 0 is set to the time saving medium counter 203j (S5960), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S5966, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (S5966: No), the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 10000 (S5964), and the present processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5951, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not equal to or less than 35 (S5951: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 50 (S5967), and the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is set. The value is set to clear (S5968), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 348 to 351. First, the main process 4 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 348. The main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, in S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120, S2101 to S2113 and S2115 in the main processing (see FIG. 257) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as each process of S2120 is performed. Further, in the main processing 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the command determination processing 4 is performed instead of the command determination processing (S2114, see FIG. 258) in the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257). It executes (S2171) and moves the process to S2115. The command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Details of the command determination processing 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 349.

  FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the above-described command determination processing 4 (S2171). As described above, the command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process that is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Of the command determination processing 4 (S2171) in the fourth control example, in each processing of S2201 to S2213, the same processing as each of S2201 to S2213 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 258) in the first control example is performed. To be executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S2212 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the stop command, (S2212: No), then, it is determined whether or not the status command is included in the unprocessed commands (S2251), and when it is determined that the status command is included (S2251: Yes), the status is A state command for executing control according to the game state notified by the command is executed (S2252). Details of this status command processing (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the state command process (S2252) ends, the effect type and effect of the pseudo effect (pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, pseudo variation effect using the pseudo second entrance 1640, etc.) The pseudo effect setting process for setting the period is executed (S2253), and this process ends. Details of this pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S2251 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the status command, (S2251: No) Next, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a probability variation count command (S2254), and it is determined that the unprocessed command includes a probability variation count command. If so (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive probability variation states notified by the probability variation number command (the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110) is set as the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb. The setting is made (S2255), and this processing is ended. By the process of S2255, every time the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj on the main controller 110 side is changed (every time the jackpot ends and the probability variation state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol is set). The value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb can be updated in synchronization with the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj. Therefore, the number of remaining jackpots until the upper limit of the probability variation state is reached can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In the process of S2251, when it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the probability variation number command (S2251: No), the present process ends.

  Next, details of the state command process 4 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 350. As described above, this state command process 4 (S2252) is a process for executing control according to the type of gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110.

  In this state command processing 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not a change in the gaming state has been notified (S3601), and the gaming state has not been changed (that is, the number of saved times has been decremented by 1). If it is determined (notified) (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change of the game state is notified by the state command (S3601: Yes), whether the changed game state is the normal state (normal mode) or the probability variation state (probability variation mode). (S3602), when it is determined that the normal state or the probability change state (S3602: Yes), the display command indicating the normal effect mode is set, and the process proceeds to S3609. The normal effect mode is, as described above, an effect mode in which an effect that looks like a normal state in a general gaming machine is executed.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the normal state and the probability variation state are both game states in which the game is advanced by performing a left-handed game aiming at the first entrance 64. In addition, even if it is a big hit, if the game state after the big hit does not become a latent state, it is concealed that the big hit itself is, and simply by the game ball entering the general winning opening in the normal state It is configured to appear as if a prize ball was awarded. With such a configuration, the player can play the game without making the player aware of the relatively complicated state transition until the most advantageous latent state (latent mode). In other words, despite the fact that it was a big hit, only a few (40) prize balls could be won, which could discourage the player or make it easier for the lower electric auditors 64Da to open and close due to the transition to the probability change state. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being disadvantageous to the player. As a result, during a jackpot state of a type that does not shift to a normal state, a probability variation state, and a latent state, which are relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player is as if the disadvantageous gaming state continues. Since it can be disguised, it is possible to provide the player with a more understandable effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in understanding the playability, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game with the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3602 that the current state command is not the normal state or the probable state (S3602: No). ), It means that the game state notified by the state command is either the latent state (latency mode) or the time saving state, so next, the game state notified by the state command is the latent state. It is determined whether or not there is (S3604). In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the transition to the latent probability state (latent probability mode) is notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), whether the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is 5 or less. (S3605), it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223b is 5 or less (that is, the number of times the latent probability mode is looped remains 30 times or more before the probability variation limit number is reached). In the case (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the latent accuracy effect A mode is set (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3609. As a result, it is possible to continuously execute the effect (see FIG. 324 (a)) as if the big hit state continues until the latent probability mode ends. It is possible to give the illusion to the player as if the jackpot was executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

  In contrast, in the process of S3605, it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223b is 6 or more (that is, the number of times the latent probability mode is looped before reaching the probability variation limit number is less than 30 times). If so (S3605: No), a display command indicating the latent effect B mode is set (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. In this latent accuracy production B mode, roughly, by the pseudo special 2 variation production, every time the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the pseudo electric auditors object 1640a is opened to the pseudo second entrance 1640. Is set, and a period in which the variable display effect is executed and a period in which the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo jackpot effect, an effect is performed in which a maximum of five jackpots (and a latent probability mode between jackpots) are displayed as if they were one jackpot. Thereby, the lottery for the special symbol is executed based on the entrance to the pseudo second entrance 1640, and the effect operation can be performed as if the jackpot state in which the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed, so that the game is played. It is possible to realize an operation that is easier for the person to understand. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3604, when it is determined that the gaming state notified by the state command is not the latent state (S3604: No), it is determined that the state command has notified the shift to the time saving state (time saving mode). Since this means that the display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S3608), this processing ends.

  In the process of S3609, the information indicated by the received state command is stored (stored) in the state setting area 223g (S3609), and the information according to the effect mode set by any of the processes of S3603, S3606, S3607, and S3608. Is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3610), and this processing ends. By executing this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set the effect mode according to the game state notified from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 351, details of the above-described pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be described. The pseudo effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting the effect operation according to the type of the pseudo effect set in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

  In this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), first, the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is read (S3701), and it is determined whether the read information is information indicating the latent accuracy effect A mode. It is determined (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that the information indicating the latent effect A mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3702: Yes), the discharge for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695. By setting the path switching solenoid to OFF, the flow path switching member 695 is set to the open state (S3703). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is set as the number of rounds of the super jackpot effect (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705. It should be noted that in the super jackpot effect, an effect is displayed in which five rounds of the actual jackpot are displayed as if they were one round. Since the jackpots of the second special symbol are all 10 rounds, as the number of rounds of the super jackpot production, the value of the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit number (36 minus the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb) The value multiplied by 2 is set. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent effect A mode (S3702), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, The process moves to S3705.

  In the process of S3705, it is determined whether the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is the information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705), and it is determined that the information is the information indicating the latent effect B mode. In the case (S3705: Yes), the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is read (S3706), and the effect period of the pseudo jackpot effect is set based on the read counter value (S3707), and the effect period of the set jackpot effect is set. The period outside (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot effect) is set as the effect period of the pseudo special figure 2 variable effect (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709.

  In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, when each of the pseudo jackpots is set to be the actual jackpot 5 times as much as possible, and the remaining jackpot number (the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit number) is a value that is not divisible by 5. In, the jackpot for the remainder number divided by 5 is set as the duration of the first pseudo jackpot effect. More specifically, for example, in the processing of S3705, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is 8, the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variation limit number (the number of jackpots to be won in the latent probability mode this time). ) Means 28 times, so the 1st to 3rd (3 times which is the remainder of 28 times divided by 5) jackpot (and the period of the latent probability mode between jackpots) is a pseudo jackpot production. Set as the production period. Further, thereafter, the pseudo special 2 variation effect period linked to the latent probability mode period between the jackpots and the pseudo jackpot effect period that continues over five jackpots (and the latent probability mode period between the jackpots) are repeated. Set to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent effect B mode (S3705: No), the processes of S3706 to S3708 are skipped. , And the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each of the set effects is set, and the present process ends.

  By executing this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), the effect mode of the pseudo effect executed in the latent probability mode is the number of remaining jackpots (the number of jackpots to be won before reaching the probability variation limit number). It is possible to set the mode according to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the latent probability mode.

  Note that, in the fourth control example, in the latent accuracy effect B mode, the configuration is such that the period of five big hits is as long as possible to be one of the effect periods of the pseudo big hit effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the performance period of each pseudo-big hit effect may be configured to be as close as possible (number of big hits). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is 8, a pseudo jackpot composed of four big jackpot execution periods (and a latent probability mode period between jackpots) as a dummy effect. The effect may be set twice, and the pseudo jackpot effect configured of five jackpot execution periods (and a latent probability mode period between jackpots) may be set four times. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference in the duration of each pseudo jackpot effect and the number of prize balls to be obtained, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Regarding Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in the present modification. In the configuration of the game board 13 of the first control example described above, the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are provided in the right side region (see FIG. 208). On the other hand, the present modification is different in that the second ball entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are provided in the right side region.

  With such a configuration, when the player hits the game while playing the left-handed game, he or she can enter the ball into the second entrance without changing the game method. Therefore, when the effect mode of the charge effect is changed based on the universal figure lottery result, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous lottery result, so that it is possible to pay attention to the effect content to be executed. There is.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (variation) is independently performed are described. However, the game characteristics described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and capable of moving a game ball along with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from a track region outside the displacement member to a track region of the displacement member. In a gaming machine provided with a restricting means for restricting the sending of balls, the displacement member is
The gaming machine A1 is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and capable of moving the game ball along with the displacement in the first direction, and a trajectory region of the displacement member from outside the trajectory region of the displacement member. There is known a gaming machine provided with a restricting means for restricting the sending of a game ball to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, the regulation of the regulation means can prevent more than the prescribed number of game balls from being delivered to the orbital region of the displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the regulating means malfunctions due to, for example, sticking or wear, there is a risk that a prescribed number or more of gaming balls will be delivered toward the trajectory area of the displacement member. Yes, in this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, there is a risk that the game balls exceeding the specified number enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and are caught in the movable part, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction which is the opposite direction to the first direction, the track area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulation means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are sent,
Since the track area of the displacement member is expanded, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be received in the track area. As a result, it is possible to move the game balls in excess of the specified number with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls in excess of the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the problem caused by the game balls in excess of the specified number can be prevented. It can be hard to occur.

In the gaming machine A1, a passage member is provided which is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and the downstream of which is connected to the track region of the displacement member, and the restriction means restricts passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic game machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and having a downstream communicating with the track region of the displacement member is provided, and the restricting means is a game in the passage member. Since the passage of the ball is regulated, for example, even when the regulation means malfunctions and more than a prescribed number of game balls are sent, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number is passed through the passage member to the displacement member. It is possible to reliably send the ball to the orbital area. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a problem due to the game balls exceeding the specified number to occur.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the game ball in the second direction from the reference position. A gaming machine A3, which is formed so as to be displaceable only for a distance exceeding.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of gaming balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and the second position from the reference position. Since it is formed to be displaceable in at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving a specified number of game balls at the reference position, the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the second direction, thereby changing the specified number. It is possible to send the excess game balls to the track region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls in excess of the specified number can be moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds a specified number of game balls, and the specified number of game balls can be sent to the track area, so these specified number of game balls and the specified number of game balls are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacing member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the gambling balls in excess of the stipulated number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacing member holds the stipulated number of game balls It will be possible.

In the gaming machine A3, the displacing member is formed to be changeable in posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed to be changeable in posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position, so that a predetermined number of games are played up to the predetermined position. While making it easy to maintain the state in which the sphere is held by the displacing member, it is possible to prevent the game sphere from falling off the displacing member, while when reaching a predetermined position, the sphere of the displacing member is utilized to change the game sphere. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed in a track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is provided in the recessed portion when displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine A5, which is provided with a protrusion to be engaged with and is formed so that the posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A4 includes a recessed portion that is recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed, the structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion projects from the displacement member in the first direction, and the projecting tip hits the lower half surface of the game ball sent to the track region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being contacted.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion is projected from the displacement member in the first direction, and the projecting tip of the projecting ball is sent to the track region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the lower half surface of the game ball is projected by the protrusion. It can be moved while pushing. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the orbital area of the displacement member (the number of game balls exceeding the specified number). It is possible to secure a gap between the prescribed number of game balls and the prescribed number of game balls, which is equal to the protruding length of the part. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

Further, the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof are also used as the protrusions, so that the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product The cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, the gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so the gaming ball sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member. That is, it is possible to easily pass through the recess when (the number of game balls exceeding the specified number) is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recessed portion. When the game ball sent to the track region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is provided with the wall portion located on the first direction side. A gaming machine A8, which is brought into contact with the displacement member and the displacement member to restrict a change in posture of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A8, in any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is recessed. When the game ball sent to the track region of the displacement member is moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is provided as a wall portion. Since it is formed in contact with the displacement member so that the change in posture of the displacement member can be regulated, only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is maintained while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. It can be easily discharged from the track area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion due to the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved. The lower half surface can be brought into contact with the wall portion so that the game ball can easily pass over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. The posture change can be regulated, and the prescribed number of game balls held by the displacement member can be prevented from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

On the other hand, when the game balls (that is, more than the specified number of game balls) have not been sent to the orbital area of the displacement member, since the game ball is not interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, the protrusion is a concave portion. When engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the specified number of game balls (that is, the game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the restricting means is operably formed in association with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed so as to be operable in association with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to regulate or allow the sending of game balls to the track area of the member. That is, it is possible to switch the regulation or allowance of the sending of the game ball mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that, for example, depending on the sensor device for detecting the position of the regulating means or the detection result of the sensor device. It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of those means, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the restriction means allows the game ball to be sent to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement member being displaced from the reference position in the second direction. Characteristic game machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, the restricting means interlocks with the displacement of the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position, and the game ball to the track region of the displacement member. Since the ball is allowed to be sent, it is possible to reliably send the game ball to the track region of the displacement member and to the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably arranged, and a base member vertically arranged below an end portion of the base member on the first direction side and arranged vertically upward. A gaming machine A11 provided with a recovery member having an opening.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member is disposed vertically below an end portion of the base member on the first direction side. Since a recovery member having an opening vertically upward is provided, a game ball that is moved along with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and is discharged from the track region of the displacement member (that is, the amount exceeding the specified number) A game ball) can be received and collected from the opening of the collecting member.

In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and an opening of the recovery member is at least the first member of the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12, which is formed to have a size positioned vertically below an end on the direction side.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member is formed to have a size that is positioned vertically below the end portion on the first direction side, the base member is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. The game balls to be played (that is, game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received and collected from the opening of the collecting member.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess,
An amusement machine A13, which is provided with an insertion member that restricts engagement of the protrusion with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A13, in any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the gaming machine A13 includes an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recessed portion to restrict engagement of the protrusion with the recessed portion. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to prevent the posture of the displacement member from being changed when the game balls in excess of the specified number are discharged from the track region of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the displaceable member is displaceably disposed, and the insertion member displaces the base member to the retracted position. Then, the game machine A1 is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, and is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.
4.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Along with the above, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the track area of the displacement member, the posture of the displacement member is suppressed from being changed, and the state where the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. While the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the protrusion engages with the recess as the displacement member moves in the first direction. By being combined, the posture of the displacement member can be changed, and a specified number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention with the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downflow passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. In a gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting, a displacing member that is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage is provided, and the displacing member comes into contact with and is displaced by the allocating means. The game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, a downflow passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223).
176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage,
Since it has a structure in which one ball is alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downflow passage are evenly distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage (that is, half each). It is distributed. That is, there is a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, a displacing member is provided and receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacing member comes into contact with the allocating means to be displaced, thereby allocating the allocating member. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B1, the allocating means can be displaced by utilizing the displacement of the displacing member, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the allocating means. it can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in the structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled by utilizing the position detection by the sensor device and the driving by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is deteriorated due to malfunction due to poor detection or poor control. However, according to the gaming machine B1, since the distribution destination by the distribution means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives the game balls from the first branch passage, it is possible to switch the distribution destination of the distribution means to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, thereby making the first branch passage. The game ball distributed to the passage can be reliably received by the displacement member.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacing member is provided with urging means for applying an urging force to the allocating means to maintain the distribution destination of the allocating means in one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. By displacing the distribution means in a direction that opposes the direction of the biasing force, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the other of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the biasing The game machine B2, wherein the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the sorting means,
Since the urging means for maintaining the distribution destination by the distribution means in one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced along with the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing means. It is not necessary for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the sorting means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

In the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the allocating means to maintain the distribution destination by the allocating means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies the urging force to the allocating means to maintain the distribution destination by the allocating means in the second branch passage. It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage when the game ball cannot be received.

In the gaming machine B3, a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position and in which the displacement member is arranged is provided, and in a state where the base member is arranged in the first position, , The displacement member is capable of receiving the game ball from the first branch passage, is capable of abutting on the distribution means, and the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement A gaming machine B4, characterized in that the member is incapable of receiving the game ball from the first branch passage and is incapable of abutting against the distribution means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 includes a base member that is displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member. It is possible to form a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member placed in the first position and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member placed in the second position. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage. In such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the sorting means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution unit from being switched to the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B5 is provided with a second base member formed as a member different from the base member, and the sorting means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, a second base member formed as a member different from the base member is provided, and the allocating means is arranged on the second base member. Therefore, the base member can be prevented from increasing in size.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least in a switching position and a receiving position set to a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In the state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. At the same time, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, and the gaming machine B6
.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be at least displaceable between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, In the state where the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member moves the game ball from the first branch passage. As well as being receivable, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and thus the displacement member There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in excess of the stipulated number that can be received. When the means for restricting the inflow of the game balls into the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the prescribed number (or less than the prescribed number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage. Also,
Since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and resistance imparting resistance to the game ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 comprising means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses that are provided to project or recess on the inner wall surface, and pass through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for imparting resistance to the game ball is provided, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be reduced. Therefore, the time required when the displacement member is displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the displacement member can surely receive the game ball. In addition, since the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be slowed, the output of the driving means can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the allocating means is configured to move the allocating means according to the displacement of the allocating means.
A first projecting / retracting portion and a second projecting / retracting portion formed so as to be capable of projecting and retracting with respect to a branch passage are provided. The second
The second projecting / retracting portion is formed so that it can be distributed to a branch passage,
By being projected on the first branch passage while being located on the downstream side of the branch passage, the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first projecting and retracting portion and the second
The game machine B8, wherein one of the projecting and retracting portion is retracted outside the passage of the first branch passage in a state where one of the projecting portions projects into the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the sorting means has a first projecting / retracting portion formed so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the sorting means. A second projecting / retracting portion is provided, and the first projecting / retracting portion is formed to project to the first branch passage so that a game ball flowing down the downflow passage can be distributed to the second branch passage. It is formed on the downstream side of the first branch passage with respect to the projecting / retracting portion, and by projecting into the first branch passage, the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first projecting / retracting portion is formed. Since the other of the second projecting and retracting portion is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage in the state where one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the allocating means is displaced along with the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the specified number of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage and used as the displacement member. It can be only taken.

That is, when the first projecting / retracting portion is projected, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage is distributed to the second branch passage in the first state, and by the first projecting / retracting portion retracting, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, and a second state in which the second projecting / retracting portion protrudes restricts the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage (stores the game balls). 2 Withdrawal of the projecting / retracting portion causes the game balls stored in the first branch passage to flow down and be received by the displacement member.
The state can be formed, and by combining these states, only a specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, the sorting means includes the first projecting / retracting portion and the second projecting / retracting portion, that is,
Since it is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution unit (the structure for operating the first projecting / retracting portion and the second projecting / retracting portion to exert their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, since the other of the first protruding / retracting portion and the second protruding / retracting portion is retracted outside the passage of the first branch passage when one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, two positions of the displacement member (switching position It is sufficient that the sorting means is also formed so as to be displaceable in two positions according to the (and receiving position). That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the distributing means at two positions. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure of displacing the distribution means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention with the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downflow passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. In a gaming machine provided with a distribution means for distributing, a flow-down state changing means for restricting or allowing the flow down of the game balls in the first branch passage is provided downstream of the distribution means. Gaming machine C1.

Here, a downflow passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, JP-A-2014-223).
176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage,
Since it is only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, there is a problem that it is insufficient to give the player amusement.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the game machine C1 is provided with the flow-down state changing means located downstream of the distribution means and restricting or allowing the flow-down of the game balls in the first branch passage, the game is interesting to the player. Can be given.

That is, by the operation of the flow-down state changing means, the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated to store the game balls in the first branch passage, and the flow down of the game balls in the first branch passage is allowed. The game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (open).
Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage , The operation of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (open) can be formed. As a result, the player can be provided with an interest.

In the gaming machine C1, the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are provided with an integral member, and in the state where the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage In the state where the flow down of the game ball in the is regulated by the flow-down state changing means, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow-down of the game ball in the first branch passage is performed by the flow-down state changing means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being allowed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, since the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are provided with an integral member, the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the distributing means and the flow-down state changing means are formed separately, the number of parts is two, so that the structure for operating these two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in this case, when the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage due to the operation of the integrated member, the flow-down state changing means regulates the flow-down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage to the first branch passage. The game balls are stored in the branch passage, and when the distribution destination by the distribution unit is the second branch passage, the flow-down state changing unit allows the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage and is stored in the first branch passage. The game ball that has been played can be made to flow down (open). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow down of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage, Not only can the operation of flowing down (opening) the stopped (stored) game ball be formed, but these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation.

In the gaming machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in a state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the sorting means is the first unit. The one branch passage is arranged at a position to which the distribution is made, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at a position for restricting the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In a state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is a distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at a position which allows a game ball to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position. , The distribution means is arranged in a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a position that regulates the flow down of the game balls in the first branch passage, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state where the distribution means is arranged at the position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at the position which allows the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage.
By displacing the integrated member at two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the first
It is possible to form an operation of once stopping (storing) the flow down of the game ball distributed to the branch passage and an operation of flowing down (opening) the stopped (stored) game ball, and storing and opening these. The operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the operation reliability.

In the gaming machine C3, the integral member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be retractable in and out of the first branch passage, and the game ball is projected into the first branch passage. The game machine C4 is characterized in that it is formed into a shape that is curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the integral member as the center, while restricting the flow-down.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be retractable from the first branch passage. The flow of the game ball is regulated by projecting to, and the game ball is formed into a shape curved in an arc centering on the rotation axis of the integral member, so that the flow-down state changing means appears and disappears. It is possible to reduce the area of the hole opened in the.

In the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to project (that is, only the tip side of the flow-down state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow-down state changing means is easy to regulate the flow of the game ball. It can be arranged in the direction, and the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

Further, in the state where the flow-down state changing means is projected to the first branch passage to the maximum and restricts the flow down of the game ball, the recess of the flow-down state changing means allows the game ball to be stably held, so that the game ball can be prevented from rampage. .

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a biasing force is applied to the integral member so that the flow-down state changing means biases in a direction projecting to the first branch passage. A gaming machine C6, wherein a distance to the rotation axis of the integrated member is set larger than a distance from the distribution unit to the rotation axis of the integrated member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C6 is provided with a biasing means that imparts a biasing force to the integrated member and biases the flow-down state changing means in a direction projecting to the first branch passage. Therefore, by utilizing such biasing force, the integrated member can be easily maintained in the attitude (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage.

In this case, in the gaming machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state changing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member, so that the flowing down game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even when the same impact force is applied, the flow-down state changing means is likely to sink, and the biasing direction of the biasing means causes the flow-down state changing means to project into the first branch passage. By setting the moving direction to the direction, it is possible to suppress the flow-down state changing unit from being depressed by the amount of the biasing force.

In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects to the first branch passage due to its own weight, the gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects to the first branch passage due to its own weight. The posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects the member into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position)
Easy to maintain. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the flow-down state changing means from being immersed due to its own weight.

Further, even when the urging means is dropped, the integrated component is maintained by its own weight in the posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage, and the game ball flows down into the first branch passage. Can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted by the flow down state changing means, In a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, a game ball flowing down the downflow passage is formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage.
8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow down state changing means. In a state in which a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downflow passage are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that a predetermined number or more of the game balls flow down. When flowing down the passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from remaining in the flowing passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the allocating means (the operation in which the distribution destination is the second branch passage) being obstructed by the game ball stuck in the downflow passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall on the side facing the second branch passage in the downflow passage has a game ball flowing down the downflow passage, the end of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. A game machine C9, which is formed so as to be guided to a side surface of the game ball on the side of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downflow passage facing the second branch passage has a predetermined number of game balls flowing down the downflow passage, which are stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface on the side of the second branch passage in the last game ball of the game balls,
After colliding the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls, it can be easily flowed down to the second branch passage.

The last game ball of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite to the flow-down state changing means). Further, when the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downflow direction of the downstream end of the downflow passage is formed in a different direction from the downflow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downflow direction at the downstream end of the downflow passage is formed in a direction different from the downflow direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the flowing down game ball collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is set to the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the downstream direction of the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball at the end from popping out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed so as to be retractable with respect to the downflow passage or the first branch passage, and the withdrawal position is in the downflow direction at the downstream end of the downflow passage. A gaming machine C11 characterized by being an inner wall on an extension line of.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be retractable with respect to the downflow passage or the first branch passage, and the position of withdrawal is downflow. Since it is an inner wall on an extension line in the downstream direction at the downstream end of the passage, the sorting means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the downstream passage. Therefore,
It is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the sorting means to the downflow passage or the first branch passage until the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably switch the distribution destination by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes the game balls flowing down the downflow path to the second downflow path by being projected into the downflow path or the first downflow path. A gaming machine C12, wherein the projecting direction of the means is set to the directing direction at the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C11, the distribution means projects the gaming ball flowing down the downflow passage to the second branch passage by being projected into the downflow passage or the first branch passage. That is, since the projecting direction of the sorting means is set to the direction that directs the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the game ball flowing down the downflow passage comes into contact with the sorting means in the middle of the projecting operation. Can push such a game ball into the second branch passage along with the projecting operation of the sorting means. As a result, the distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and a game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity so that the game ball can roll, and the flowing state The game machine C13, wherein the changing unit is formed so as to be retractable from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the gaming ball is It is formed so as to be rollable, and the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be retractable from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into and out of the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach the state where the flow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage, and when the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the flow-down state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game balls. The protrusion can be easily made in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be retractable into and out of the first branch passage, and at least in a state of maximum protrusion to the first branch passage, in a protruding direction. A game machine C14 in which a force component is applied from the game ball to the flow-down state changing means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be retractable into and out of the first branch passage, and is projected at least in the state of maximum projection to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of the action is applied from the game ball to the flow-down state changing means, when restricting the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage, the flow-down is caused by the impact of the collision of the game ball. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, the flow down of the game ball can be easily regulated.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a base member having one side displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, a base accompanying displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing a reaction of a member.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceably disposed on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member (for example, , JP2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the extended position overhanging to the game area and visible to the player and the retracted position retracted from the game area, the base member is added. An effect of displacing the displacing member can be performed in a state where the displacing member is arranged in the projecting position.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and therefore, when the displacement member is displaced, the rattling of the base member with respect to the base member with one side as a fulcrum. However, there is a problem that is likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

As the reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, a reaction force generated due to a change in the center of gravity associated with the displacement of the displacement member, or an inertial force associated with an increase or decrease in the displacement speed of the displacement member (change in acceleration) is generated. The thing generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game sphere is emitted is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes a disposing member disposed displaceably on the base member, the displaceable member is formed to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the disposing member is A gaming machine D, which is formed so as to be displaceable when a game ball is emitted from the displacement member.
2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes a disposing member displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable member is formed to be capable of holding and ejecting the game ball. Is
Since the disposing member is formed so as to be displaceable when the game sphere is emitted from the displacing member, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, in a direction that cancels the change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the launch of the game ball. When the configuration of displacing the installation member is adopted, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the base member due to the change of the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction with the launch of the game ball, for example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction associated with the launch of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, an inverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member is provided.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, an inverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member is provided. Since it is provided, it is possible to reduce the change of the center of gravity of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the base member due to the change in the position of the center of gravity.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the displacement of the reverse member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, it is possible to cancel at least a part of the inertial forces of both. As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposing member or / and the reverse member to displace the disposing member or / and the reverse member. A gaming machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposing member or (and) reverse member to displace the disposing member or (and) reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposing member and / or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacing member is provided as an arrangement member or (and)
It can also serve as a driving means for displacing the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced correspondingly, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since it is possible to dispose the mechanical member in synchronism with the displacement of the displacement member and / or to displace the reverse member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and the arrangement is performed according to the detection result. The control of driving the member or / and the reverse member by the driving means can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or / and the reverse member with respect to the displacement member can be reduced. Can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacement from a second position, and the displacement member starts displacement from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. A gaming machine D5, which is formed so that it can be formed, and in which at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member, the displacement is started from the first position.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration becomes maximum,
The base member tends to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacing member starts displacing from the second position, and one side of the base member more than the second position. And a state where at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member overhangs in the game area and is located from the player). At the visible overhang position), the displacement starts from the first position, so that the rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position. Therefore, by setting the first position as the start position of the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member is set to the base position. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the rattling with respect to the base member, and accordingly, the influence of the inertia force when the displacing member is displaced from the stopped state can be made difficult to act on the base member. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

In the gaming machine D5, a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear are provided, and the displacement member is arranged on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear are formed, and the displacement member is provided on the rack member. When the displacement of the displacement member is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is provided on one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be close to the fulcrum of rattling). As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

In the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member, so the displacement member is at the first position. The rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member in the state in which the rack member is arranged. That is, in order to displace the displacement member (rack member) in the direction away from the one side of the base member, the rack member is configured such that the portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is meshed is started after displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be made closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member), and as a result, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. The rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the base member is provided with a support structure for supporting one side of the base member in a displaceable manner, and a drive mechanism for driving the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball, and the drive mechanism limits the displacement of the base member in the direction of the reaction when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 comprising:

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect obtained by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a support structure for displaceably supporting one side of the base member on the base member and a base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed to be capable of holding and ejecting the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in a reaction direction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the restricting means for restricting is provided, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the base member with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, the rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine having a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged to be visible to a player, a gaming machine is provided with a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member. Characteristic gaming machine E1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and has an outer peripheral surface that is visible to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is made visible to the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the player visually recognizes the display of the outer peripheral surface with the rotation or stop of the rotating body member, the effect mode is not significantly changed, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a problem that was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player when the rotating body member is rotated or stopped. In addition to the visual effect aspect to be visually recognized, an effect aspect in which the displacement member is displaced can be formed, and accordingly, the effect effect can be enhanced by changing the effect aspect.

It should be noted that the rotating body member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut along a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the turning drum member may not be the peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and at the first position, a part of an outer peripheral surface of the turning body member is formed by the displacement member. At the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member, the gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is formed by the displacement member, so The outer shape can be reduced, and accordingly, the space required for the rotating body member to rotate can be reduced. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily recognized by the player, and the effect is produced. Can be increased. Further, for example, by rotating the rotating body member in a state where the displacing member is arranged at the first position, and arranging (displaceing) the displacing member at the second position when the rotation of the rotating body member is stopped, A part (displacement member) that is visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the turning body member can be formed in such a manner that it is projected outward in the radial direction of the turning body member, which can enhance interest.

In the gaming machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the turning body member is formed to have an internal space, the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second member.
When displaced to the position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened, and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided,
The rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space.
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside and the displacement member is moved to the first position. By being displaced to one position, the emission to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the turning member and the displacing member. .

Here, in order to rotatably form the rotating body member and displaceably dispose the displacing member on the rotating body member, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body member and the displacing member, which reduces product cost. Bulky. Further, when the drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating body member, the weight of the rotating body member increases, and it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the turning member and the displacing member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform the rotation of the rotating body member and the displacement of the displacement member by also using one driving means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a drive means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating body member, the weight of the rotating body member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body member can be started or stopped smoothly.

In the gaming machine E4, the drive means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational drive force, and the transmission means includes a rotation side transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the rotating body member and the drive means. Displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force to the displacement member, and transmitting the rotational drive force to one of the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means in accordance with the rotational direction of the rotational drive force of the drive means. A gaming machine E5, comprising a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmission means transmits the rotational side transmission for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member. Means, a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the rotational drive force is transmitted to one of the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means according to the rotational direction of the rotational drive force of the drive means. In addition, since the one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off the transmission to the other is provided, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotation direction of the driving unit. That is, it is possible to switch between rotation of the rotating body member and stop of the rotation thereof and displacement of the displacement member and stop of the displacement thereof according to the rotation direction of the driving means, and a plurality of modes can be formed while the structure is formed. Can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train that forms a part or the whole of a transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member, and one gear of the gear train. A gaming machine E6, characterized in that the gaming machine E6 is provided with a gear for a load to be meshed.

Here, in the structure in which the one-way clutch mechanism is used to switch the drive target (rotating member or displacement member) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It becomes a state in which it can be freely rotated or displaced in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the drive means is switched from the rotating body member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate due to inertial force (automatic rotation). May be

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means forms a part or all of a transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member. And a load gear that meshes with one gear of the gear train, even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive means is interrupted, the load (resistance ) Can be used to suppress the continuous rotation of the body member.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the gaming machine E7 is provided with a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in a direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Since it is provided, it is possible to prevent the rotating body member from being reversely rotated due to, for example, deviation of the center of gravity of the rotating body member or collision of a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened, and the internal space is formed. A gaming machine E8 characterized by being communicated with the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member. Is released,
Since the internal space is communicated with the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be caused to flow into the internal space of the rotating body member, or the game ball in the internal space of the rotating body member can be flowed out to the game area. . Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is closed, so that the flow of the game balls between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotation body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 characterized by being projected to an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotation body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side which is to be projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the displacing member has its upper surface inclined downward from the other side toward the one side in a state in which the displacing member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9, in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side. After receiving the flown down game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) to the internal space of the turning member along the descending inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating body member. It is possible to suppress interference with other members around the rotating body member.

In any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting unit that restricts rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and in the rotation restricting member, the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is A gaming machine E12, which restricts the rotation of the spinning drum member when the gaming machine E12 is extended to the game area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11, the gaming machine E12 is provided with a rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the body member, and the rotation restricting member has the displacement member displaced to the second position. , When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted, so that the rotating body member is rotated in the state where the displacement member is extended and positioned on the rotation locus. It is possible to suppress the displacement member from interfering with other members. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation body member from rotating due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be visually recognized by a player, the rotating body member has an internal space formed therein, and the internal space is an external space. A gaming machine F1 having a communication port formed so that a game ball can pass therethrough.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and has an outer peripheral surface that is visible to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is made visible to the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. be able to. However,
In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the spinning body member is insufficiently utilized only as a member for holding a display for visual recognition by the player on its outer peripheral surface.
That is, since the rotating body member needs to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, it is relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the rotating body member increases, the parts other than the outer peripheral surface thereof are not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the rotating body member has an internal space formed therein, and a communication port formed to allow the game ball to pass therethrough while allowing the internal space to communicate with the outside. The game ball flowing down the game area can be flown into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the turning body member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for the game balls or a ball-sending passage, and the turning body member can be utilized accordingly.

The communication port may be formed in only one place of the rotating body member, or may be formed in two or more places. When the communication port is formed only at one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotational position of the rotating body member, so that the game ball can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upwards). It is possible to flow the game ball into the internal space at the same time, and to flow out the game ball in the internal space when the communication port faces downward).

Further, the rotating body member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut along a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the turning drum member may not be the peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine F1, the communication opening includes a first communication opening and a second communication opening formed at a position different from the first communication opening.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the communication opening includes the first communication opening and the second communication opening formed at a position different from the first communication opening. One of the communication port or the second communication port is used as an inflow port for inflowing the game ball from the outside to the internal space, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outflow port for discharging the game ball from the internal space to the outside. Can be That is, the rotating body member can be utilized as a ball-sending path for a game ball without rotating the rotating body member (while maintaining the stopped state). It should be noted that such a rotating body member may be used as a ball feeding passage while the rotating body member is being rotated.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning body member, and is formed as an inflow port for allowing a game ball flowing down a game area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A gaming machine F3, which is formed on an end surface of the rotating body member in a rotation axis direction and is formed as an outlet for letting a game ball flow out from the internal space to a game area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning member, and is formed as an inflow port for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space. , The second communication port is formed on the end surface of the rotating body member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for flowing the game ball from the internal space to the game area. The player can easily see the inflow, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body member is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, the rotating body member, where the outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to the player, the outer peripheral surface,
Since the first communication port (inflow port) is formed, the player can easily see the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, the game ball cannot be discharged from the internal space when the rotating body member is displaced to the rotational position where the communication port is located above. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating body member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating body member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. A gaming machine F4, which is shielded by a member and opens the communication port when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the gaming machine F4 includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. You can switch.

In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and the displacement member is located at the second position. When displaced, the other side, which is the opposite side to the one side, is projected to the game area, and the gaming machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side which is to be projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as the inflow port, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the turning member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the displacing member is arranged such that one side of the displacing member is located more forward than the other side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F5, one side of the displacement member is located more forward than the other side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member, so that the rotating body member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with the member arranged around the rotation body member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacement to the first position). That is, the displacement member interferes with other members and is projected (displaced to the second position) when the rotating body member rotates.
Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotating body member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member on which the rotating body member is rotatably disposed, and a base member supported by the base member and arranged in an internal space of the rotating body member to the rotating body member. On the other hand, a gaming machine F7 characterized by comprising a non-rotating fixing member.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member on which the rotating body member is rotatably disposed, and the internal space of the rotating body member which is supported by the base member. Since it is provided with a fixed member that is not rotated with respect to the rotating body member, by holding the game ball that has flowed into the internal space on the fixed member or rolling the gaming ball on the fixed member toward the outflow port. ,
Along with the rotation of the spinning member, the game ball can be prevented from violently moving in the internal space or hindering the rolling of the game ball and staying in the internal space.

In any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, a gaming machine F8 characterized by comprising displacement setting means for restricting or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to a rotational position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the gaming machine F8 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating body member.
It is possible to suppress the displacement member displaced to the position from interfering with other members around the rotation body member.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the spinning body member is provided, and in the rotation restricting member, the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member moves to the game area. A gaming machine F9, which restricts the rotation of the rotating body member when it is overhanging.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the gaming machine F9 is provided with a rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the body member, and the rotation restricting member has the displacement member displaced to the second position. When the other side is projected to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated in a state in which the displacement member is extended, and other members located on the rotation locus thereof. It is possible to suppress the displacement member from interfering with each other. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation body member from rotating due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, light emitting means that is capable of emitting light and is disposed in the internal space of the turning body member, and the second communication port that is an end surface of the turning body member in the rotation axis direction are formed. A gaming machine F10, characterized in that it has an end face formed with an end face opposite to the end face formed with an opening, and an electric connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, an opening is formed on the end surface of the rotating body member in the rotation axis direction opposite to the end surface on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly caused to flow out through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be facilitated. Moreover, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated from each other to the maximum extent, the internal space is
It is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball rolling to the communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
A displaceable first member and a second member, wherein the first member covers at least a part of the second member invisible and a state in which the first member is disposed at the covering position; Also in the gaming machine formed to be displaceable between the retreat position and the retreat position for reducing the area that covers the second member invisible, the first member is the second member in a state where it is displaced to the retreat position. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that the displacement of the gaming machine is regulated.

Here, a state in which the first member and the second member that are displaceably formed are provided, and the first member covers the at least part of the second member invisibly and the state where the first member is arranged at the covering position There is known a gaming machine that is displaceable between a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first
By disposing the member in the cover position and displacing the second member from the state where the second member is invisible to the player, the second member is exposed to expose the second member to the player. be able to.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and when the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. May occur. Therefore, there is a problem in that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is in the state of being displaced to the retracted position,
Since the displacement of the second member is regulated, the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of production can be secured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, is performed by the second member. It is used as a means to regulate displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1, the second member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the second member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second member is high. Can be increased. That is, the second member does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape that is asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect produced by the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric as described above, the second member may be rotated (rotated) around the rotation center due to its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of restricting the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, which allows the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the effect.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided,
The displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state in which at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and the gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacing member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and at least the first member of the displacing member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so as to be displaceable in the state, when the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the effect of the effect is enhanced by further displacing the displacing member. You can On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move due to the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of restricting the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, which allows the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the effect.

In the gaming machine G3, an outer peripheral surface of the second member is disposed so that a player can visually recognize it, and one side of the displacing member is rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that the other side, which is the opposite side, is formed so as to be able to project to the game area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so that the player can visually recognize it, and the displacement member is rotatable on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Is supported by
Since the other side, which is the opposite side to the one side, is formed so as to project into the game area, it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down in the game area can be facilitated to flow into the inflow port by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retreat position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, whereby the displacement member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be maintained easily.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the cover position, and is outside the area of the game area at the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, in the cover position, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member, so that the gaming machine flows down the gaming area. It is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the second member and rotating the second member. In particular, when the rotational position of the second member is a rotational position that directs the displacement member toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member and the displacement member is opened (tension). Can be suppressed).

Further, since the first member is disposed outside the game area in the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position can secure a space for the displacement member to project into the game area. . Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side), and the player can easily recognize the displacement member.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G6 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable about a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member is also formed. Since it is formed in the shape of a plate that curves along, it is possible to suppress the space required for displacement between the covering position and the retracted position. Therefore, the space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.
In addition, since the first member is formed in a curved manner in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area,
It is possible to suppress the staying on the first member arranged at the covering position and allow the first member to flow smoothly.

Any of the gaming machines G3 to G6 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacing member. .

Here, in order to rotatably form the second member and displaceably dispose the displacement member on the second member, a drive means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which reduces the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the second member
Since the weight of the member increases, it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the second member and the displacing member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform the rotation of the second member and the displacement of the displacement member by also using one driving means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be started or stopped smoothly.

The gaming machine G7 is provided with a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and for interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G7, the displacement member is displaced because it is provided with a coupling means that couples the first member and the displacement member and interlocks the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member. The driving means for moving the first displacing member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the first displacing member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of different driving means,
When the control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. However, since the displacement member and the first member can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, the displacement member and the first member can be synchronized. The interference with one member can be reliably suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including drive means for generating a drive force, a displacement member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the displacement member, the transmission means is A first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and an engagement member arranged between the first member and the second member. When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. In addition, in the predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member, the gaming machine H1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a drive unit that generates a drive force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the transmission state of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is always constant, when the drive means is driven at a constant drive speed, the displacement member also becomes constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and cannot change the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, but the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to dispose a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member, and to increase or decrease the output of the driving means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which causes an increase in product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, and the reliability thereof deteriorates.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, the first member and the second member. An engaging member disposed between the members, the engaging member engaging the first member and the second member when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member. The transmission of the driving force is interrupted while the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and the second member is displaced ahead of the first member in one direction in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member. Therefore, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section, regardless of the driving state of the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be advanced in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means, so that, for example, in the entire displacement section of the displacement member, The drive means can be driven at a constant drive speed, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (that is,
It is not necessary to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means depending on whether it is a predetermined section or another section. As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving unit can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released, and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be brought into a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state is
It can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, it is possible to respectively displace the two members of the displacement member and the other member.

The transmission means is formed so that the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the second member. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, and the center of gravity of the displacement member is eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member causes the second member to move in the one direction. A gaming machine H2, which is formed so as to be operable in a direction of displacement.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, and the weight of the displacement member is the first in a predetermined section. Since the two members are formed so as to be able to act in the direction in which they are displaced in one direction, the second member can be displaced in one direction ahead of the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacement member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of repeating 360-degree rotation about its rotation axis as a center of rotation, the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is equal to that of the displacement member in another section. A mode in which the rotational speed is faster than the displacement speed (rotational speed), that is, the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, and a crank member that is provided so as to project from the main body portion and that has a pin portion that is eccentrically located from the center of rotation of the main body portion. The crank member includes an arm member having a sliding groove formed at one end side through which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted, and an intermediate portion rotatably supported, and the other end side of the arm member is displaced by the displacement. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is provided so as to project from the main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member and the main body portion, and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body portion. Since a crank member having a pin portion and a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted are formed on one end side and an arm member rotatably supporting an intermediate portion is provided, By rotating the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position along with the reciprocal movement of the other end side of the arm member. . That is,
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member accompanies the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member,
Reciprocating between a first position and a second position, during displacement from the first position to the second position, and during displacement from the second position to the first position. A direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is changed from a direction in which the second member is displaced in the other direction to a direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocally moved between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocal movement of the other end side of the arm member, and the first position From the second
During the displacement to the position and the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member causes the second member to move in the other direction. Since the direction in which the second member is displaced is changed to the direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocally moved, no matter which direction the displacement member is displaced, the displacement member moves from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed can be increased. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member reciprocates between an extended position (first position), which is a position that is visibly extended from the player, and a retracted position (second position), which is the extended position and is retracted. When operating the displacement member from the retracted position to the extended position, while displacing the displacement member at a constant displacement speed up to the middle, increase the displacement speed of the displacement member from the middle to make the displacement member vigorous. The displacement member can be extended to the overhanging position, and when the displacement member is retracted from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member can be displaced at a constant displacement speed up to the middle while the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. Then, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and is slanted downward in the predetermined section in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member is the second member. A gaming machine H5, which is formed so as to be operable in a direction in which it is displaced in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in a predetermined section, the displacement member is slanted downward in the direction of slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member is increased. Is formed so that it can act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacing member is used to displace the second member ahead of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

The gaming machine H6 according to any one of the gaming machines H2 to H5, wherein the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the game ball in at least a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In the state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be increased. Further, the weight of the entire displacement member is made different depending on whether the game ball is held on the displacement member or not, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives a game ball that flows down in the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, the receiving portion receives the game ball when the receiving ball receives the game ball. A game machine H7, wherein a force exerted on the displacement member from is formed so as to act in a direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacing member includes a receiving portion that receives the game ball flowing down in the game area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball. Since the force acting on the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to act in the direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. Further, the force acting on the displacement member is made different depending on whether the receiving portion is receiving the game ball, not receiving it, or depending on the flow velocity (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball at the time of receiving. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball moving along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board, and includes a game ball moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the gravity direction, for example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the gravity direction by colliding with a nail, a tulip, or an accessory, or after rolling the stage and jumping out of the stage. As an example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the gravity direction is illustrated.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train that forms a part or the whole of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear that meshes with one gear of the gear train. A gaming machine H8.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train forming a part or the whole of the transmission path of the driving force and one gear of the gear train. Since the load control gear is provided, when the game ball is held in the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving portion in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. Then, the second member is displaced in one direction ahead of the first member (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section), If the game ball is not held in the displacement member or the game ball is not received in the receiving portion, the second member is used with respect to the first member by utilizing the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear. Is displaced in one direction ( Chi, displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined interval is faster) it can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. That is, only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving portion receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. The mode of speeding up can be easily formed.

<Concept of the invention with the back case 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back member, a game machine is arranged between the game board and the back member facing each other. The game machine is provided with a displacement member that is operable on the back side of the game board from the outside between the game board and the back member, and the fixed member has a protrusion that engages with the displacement member. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member, and the fixed member is disposed on the back member.

Conventionally, a game machine including a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back side of the back board is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2004). -3360
3 gazette). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. This prevents the fixing member from being removed from the back surface side of the game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the step of disposing the fixing member on the back surface member includes the step of disposing the fixing member on the back surface member and the step of fastening the fixing member to the back surface member from the back surface side of the back surface member. And the work from the front side of the back member is work from the opposite direction. for that reason,
There is a problem that the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, a displacement member that is disposed between the game board and the back member facing each other and that can be operated from the outside between the game board and the back member on the back side of the game board. (Displacement member 310), the fixed member includes a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member engage with each other so that the fixed member is disposed on the rear member. Since it is provided, the fixing member can be arranged in the back case by a work in one direction from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of turning around to the front side or inverting the back member after working from the back side. As a result, the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

In the gaming machine I1, a first member is provided between the gaming board and the back member facing each other, and the displacement member is provided on the back side of the first member. I2
.

Here, in recent game machines, the first member (which is disposed between the game board and the back member facing each other)
Equipment devices, etc.) tend to be larger. Therefore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the large-sized first member is arranged on the front surface of the fixing member or at a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member. At that time, the first member gets in the way. Therefore, it is difficult to fasten the fixing member with the screw that is inserted from the front side of the back member and dispose the fixing member on the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first is arranged between the gaming board and the back member facing each other.
Since the displacement member is provided on the back side of the first member, the first member is provided between the game board and the back member, while the first board is provided between the game board and the back member. The displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged by operating the displacement member from the outside. Therefore, the fixed member can be provided on the back surface member without being disturbed by the first member provided between the game board and the back surface member.

Further, since the displacement member is arranged between the rear member and the first member facing each other, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be arranged between the rear member and the first member facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress access to the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being unlawfully released and the fixed member from being tampered with (for example, being replaced with an illicit fixed member).

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacing member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to a facing surface of the back surface member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the game board, so that when the displacement member is displaced. The amount of displacement of the back member and the game board in the opposing direction can be set to zero. Thereby, a space for disposing the first member can be secured between the displacement member and the game board. as a result,
The outer shape of the first member in the direction in which the back member and the game board face each other can be increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member includes a bottom wall portion facing the game board, and a side wall portion erected from the edge portion of the bottom wall portion to the game board side. The bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, an opening is formed in the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is an operation element that is inserted into the opening portion and protrudes from the inside of the back surface member to the outside. A gaming machine I4, which is equipped with.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected from the bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and the edge of the bottom wall portion to the gaming board side. And a side wall portion that is formed into a box shape, and has an opening formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted from the inside of the back member to the outside through the opening portion. Since it has a protruding operator, operate the operator from the outside of the back member (outside the facing from the game board to the back member),
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even if the first member is arranged inside the rear member (between the game board and the rear member facing each other), the displacement member can be displaced without being disturbed by the first member. .

The gaming machine I4 includes a biasing unit that biases the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member in a state where the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged. Gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine I4, in the state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released, the displacement member is urged in the direction to release the engagement with the fixed member. Since the urging means is provided, if the displacement member and the fixed member are forgotten to be engaged with each other, or if the displacement member and the fixed member are incompletely engaged, the displacement member is engaged with the fixed member. It can be displaced in the releasing direction. Therefore, the operator can determine whether the displacement member and the fixed member are properly engaged with each other at the position where the operator protruding outside the back member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the displacement member and the fixed member.

The urging means may include a spring or rubber disposed between the displacing member and the back member to urge the displacing member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member or the weight of the displacing member. An example is a mode in which the displacement member is acted in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member.

The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, and an inner shape of the outer frame is an outer shape of the game board and the back member in a front view. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating elements are formed substantially the same, and in a state in which the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged with each other, the operating element is arranged outside the facing portion from the game board to the back member. I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4 or I5, the gaming machine I6 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the back member. Of the outer shape when viewed from the front of the displacement member and the fixed member in a non-engaged state,
Since the manipulators are arranged on the outer side between the game board and the back member facing each other, if the game board and the back member are housed in the outer frame when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged, the outer frame The operator can be brought into contact with the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, when forgetting to dispose the fixing member on the back member or forgetting to engage the displacement member and the fixing member, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in the state where the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back member or the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten.

In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a gaming machine I7 is provided, which is provided with a restraining unit that restrains the operation member from being operated in a direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. .

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is provided with the suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member due to the operation of the operator. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being released by using the operator.

As a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operating element in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, the operating element is pivotally supported in the releasing direction of the engagement. A form in which a protruding tip of a manipulator is formed on an inclined surface projecting in a direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, and a form in which the manipulator is arranged between the displaced member and the fixed member Etc. are illustrated.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member is an elastic piece that is elastically deformable,
A first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, the fixed member includes a housing portion that is opened in a displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in a displacement direction of the displacement member, The accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes in a displacement region of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion is the first protrusion when the displacement member is displaced in one direction. The elastic piece can be displaced by abutting, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, so that the displacement member and the fixing member can engage with each other by abutting on the first member. A game machine I8.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastically deformable elastic piece and a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is A housing portion that is open in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; the housing portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes in the displacement region of the first protrusion; The two protrusions contact the first protrusion to displace the elastic piece when the displacement member is displaced in one direction, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction to contact the first member. Since the displacement member and the fixed member can be brought into contact with each other to be engaged with each other, the displacement of the displacement member in one direction can be permitted and the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction can be restricted by the second protrusion. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement member in both the engagement direction with the fixed member and the disengagement direction can be restricted.

In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged with each other. A gaming machine I9, in which is housed.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, the accommodation section is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is stored in the storage portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the storage portion when the displacement member and the fixed member are engaged with each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being elastically deformed by being operated from the outside of the housing portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being illegally released. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (the base end portion of the accommodated portion) located outside the accommodation portion.

In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be stored in the storage section, and the storage section is set to a size that can store a plurality of the elastic pieces. Machine I10.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be housed in the housing portion, and the housing portion is set to a space that can accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (the proximal end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the accommodation portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the back member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is inside the accommodation portion. The displacement member (elastic piece) that is not cut in that state can be housed inside the housing portion. Therefore, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) can be accommodated and left inside the accommodation portion, so that the number of displacement members accommodated in the accommodation portion and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member can be compared. Then, when the fixing member is illegally removed and changed to an illegal fixing member, the number can be different, so that the operator can be made aware that the gaming machine has been illegal.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates displacement of the displacement member in a direction of releasing engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member engages with the fixed member. A gaming machine I11, which is provided with a restricting means for controlling.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member engages with the fixed member, regulation that restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member Since the means is provided, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member when a force acts in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member by illicit. Therefore, when a force acts in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to improper operation, it is possible to prevent the force from being concentrated on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to prevent the displacement member or the fixed member from being damaged by the force input by.

Further, since the first member is provided with the restricting means, when removing the fixing member from the back member,
By removing the first member from the back member, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement member by the restriction means can be released. In this case, since the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed by removing the first member, the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

Examples of the restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member include a mode in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engagement recess to restrict elastic deformation of the displacement member, and a mode in which the protrusion engages with the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention with the general winning opening unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side and a decoration for forming a front face of the base member
In a gaming machine provided with a decoration means and a second decoration means for forming a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in a front view, the first decoration means and the second decoration means have a front-back direction in a front view. A game machine J1 characterized in that the game machine J1 is arranged at a position adjacent to the game machine.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, a first decoration means arranged on the front surface of the base member and having decorations formed on the front surface, and a first decoration means arranged on the front surface of the first decoration means. A gaming machine is known that includes one member and a second decoration means that is disposed on the front surface of the first member and that forms a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in a front view (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007
-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be secured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the second decoration means, the first decoration means is disposed in front of the first member, so that the second decoration means is equal to the thickness of the first member from the first decoration means. It is placed in a distant position. Therefore, depending on the position at which the player visually recognizes the base member (the direction of the line of sight), the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are visually deviated by the thickness of the first member, and the base is visually recognized. There is a problem that the design of the member is deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, so that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged. The distance between the front and rear can be reduced. Thereby, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means It is possible to suppress the deviation from being visually recognized. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily made visible to the player as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decoration means may be anything that forms a decoration, for example, a sticker member obtained by printing a decoration on a plate-shaped member is attached to the front surface of the base member, or a decoration is formed on the front surface of the base member. Is to be printed.

When the second decoration means is attached (adhered) to the front surface of the first decoration means, the operator may attach (adhere) the second decoration means while visually observing the decoration of the first decoration means. it can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the worker who attaches the second decoration means to the first decoration means.

In the gaming machine J1, a front member, which is formed of a light-transmissive material and has a larger outer shape than the outer shape of the second decoration means in front view, is provided on the front surface of the second decoration means, and the front surface is provided. The member includes a recessed portion on a surface facing the second decoration means, the recessed portion having a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the recessed dimension of the recessed portion is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means. Is also set to a large value, the gaming machine J2.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is formed of a light-transmissive material and has an outer shape that is larger than the outer shape of the second decorating means in front view, and is arranged in front of the second decorating means. The front member is provided with a concave portion that is recessed in a shape that is larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is the second decorative means. Since it is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the front member, the front member can be arranged on the base member in a state where the second decoration means is accommodated in the recess. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second decoration means from falling off between the base member and the front member.

Moreover, since the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means,
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decoration means. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent dust or dust from being caught between the front member and the first decoration means and making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means.

In the gaming machine J2, an inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorating means, and the second decorating means is disposed by being bonded to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. A gaming machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is arranged by being bonded to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Will be installed,
By disposing the second decoration means along the concave portion of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decoration unit, it is possible to suppress the second decoration unit from being sandwiched between the edge portion of the front member and the first decoration unit facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the first decoration means and the front member, and dust or dirt is caught between the front member and the first decoration means so that the decoration of the first decoration means is visually recognized. It can be suppressed from becoming difficult.

In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from a surface facing the base member, and the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. A game machine J4, wherein the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, the front member has a protrusion protruding from the surface facing the base member toward the base member side, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by including the portion and the protrusion being inserted into the opening, it is possible to prevent the position of the front member from being displaced with respect to the first decoration means. Further, the second decoration means is positioned with respect to the front member by the concave portion of the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to prevent the first decoration means and the second decoration means from being displaced from each other. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily made visible to the player as one decoration.

In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the recessed bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating to a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the recessed bottom surface of the recess, and the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the protrusion is inserted into the hole, the second decoration means can be easily arranged with respect to the front member.
That is, only by disposing the second decorating means inside the recess of the front member, it is necessary to dispose the edge portion of the second decorating means along the recess, whereas the second decorating means has the protrusion. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

Further, since the projection for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decoration means with respect to the first decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means are positioned at the same portion (projection). Therefore, the positioning accuracy of the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily made visible to the player as one decoration.

In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that inclines toward the first decoration means side toward an outer edge in a front view, and the second portion is provided on the back side of the inclined portion.
A gaming machine J6, characterized in that an edge portion of the decoration means is provided.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means, it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the decorations. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the positions of both decorations are displaced in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the two decoration means, there is a problem that a front-back misalignment may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that inclines toward the first decoration means toward the outer edge in the front view. Since the edge portion of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the portion, the displacement of the decoration due to the difference in the front-rear direction arrangement between the second decoration means and the first decoration means is caused by the inclined portion of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for the player to recognize.

More specifically, the light reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means and passing through the inside of the front member and emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the light passage direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is smaller than the inclination angle of the front surface of the base member in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion, the inclination angle of the light emission direction from the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is the base angle. It is smaller than the inclination angle of the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the member. Therefore, the connecting portion of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction of the intersection angle smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light visually recognized by the player can be brought close to the overlapping direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation between the front and rear.

In the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and at least the inclined portion and the second decoration means are provided. A game machine J7, characterized in that the non-adhesive surfaces are provided at opposing positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and rear of the first decoration means and the second decoration means The player may recognize the positional deviation of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means is
A front surface member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member;
Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position facing at least the decoration means, a gap is formed between the second decoration means and the front member (sloping portion) on the non-adhesion surface and passes through the non-adhesion surface of the front member. The reflected light can be totally reflected. This makes it possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the decoration of the end portion of the second decoration means when the player visually recognizes the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclination part through the inclination part. . As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion through the inclined portion, it is difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the second decorative means. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation of the decoration in the front-rear direction between the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of the cross section in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in a front view is convexly curved toward the outer edge of the front member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the end portion of the second decoration means is arranged closer to the center of the front member in front view than the substantially middle position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion. J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has the outer edge of the cross section in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view projected toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end portion of the second decoration means is arranged closer to the center of the front member in front view than the substantially middle position of the straight line that is formed in a curved arc shape and that connects the ends of the inclined portions to each other. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, light is refracted due to the bending of the inclined portion, and the center of the front member is obtained. The direction of the light passing through the side can be brought close to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. In addition, the second portion is provided closer to the center side of the front member than the substantially middle position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion.
Since the end portion of the decoration means is provided, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation between the first decoration means and the second decoration means in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the second
The decoration of the decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the concave portion is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward toward the first decoration means side in a front view, and the second inclined portion is the base. A gaming machine J9, wherein the inclination angle of the member with respect to the front surface is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is the first
A second inclined portion is formed which is inclined outward in a front view toward the decoration means side, and the inclination angle of the second inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. Therefore, the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decoration means visually recognized through the inclined portion and the second inclination portion is the decoration of the first decoration means visually observed without passing through the inclined portion and the second inclination portion. It is possible to approach the position of (real image). As a result, when the first decoration means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decoration means from being difficult to be visually recognized due to refraction of light through the front member.

<About the concept of the invention with the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a game board having a game area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the game board and having a path for guiding the sending of a game ball flowing down the game area, the path unit includes: A first path for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in a front view, and a game ball sent from the first path in a horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path. A second route for sending to the other side, and a third route connecting one side of the first route and one side of the second route, the third route is a front side or a back side with respect to the game board. A game machine K1 characterized in that guide means for sending a game ball to at least one of the above is provided on at least one of the inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine including a game board having a game area on the front side, and a route unit disposed on the game board and having a route for guiding the sending of a game ball flowing down the game area. (For example, JP, 2015-131046, A). According to this gaming machine, by guiding (rolling) the game ball that has flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit along the route of the guide route, it is possible to entertain (roll down) the game ball. Can have

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to secure a predetermined ball-sending distance in the path unit, the first path for sending the game ball to one side of the game board, and its first path. If a second path for sending the game ball sent from one path to the other side of the game board and a third path connecting one side of the first path and one side of the second path are formed, the first path Since the speed of the game ball rolling around is maximized at the communicating part with the third route (downstream end of the first route), the game ball is on the inner wall of the third route where the direction of the ball is changed. Collisions and bounces more easily. Therefore,
The game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third route may return to the first route, or may swing (shake) in the ball feeding direction of the first route (horizontal direction in front view) inside the third route. Therefore, the first
Since the game ball sent from the route to the third route swings on the third route, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball sent to the third route in a certain direction, and the game ball is sent to the third route. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball.

In this case, by lengthening the route of the third route, the throwing direction of the game ball sent from the first route is smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second route, and the game ball passing through the third route. However, since the third path is formed longer, the size of the entire path unit becomes larger accordingly, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for disposing the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the route unit has a first route for sending the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in the front view, and a game ball sent from the first route. First
A second path for sending the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the path, the first path and the second path.
And a third path connecting one side of the path, the third path is a front side of the game board with guiding means for sending a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board. Alternatively, since it is provided on at least one inner wall on the back side, the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-back direction of the game board in front view). By moving the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball accelerated by rolling on the first path can be delayed on the third path, and the game ball colliding with the inner wall of the third path is correspondingly delayed. It is possible to prevent the player from returning to the first route or swinging (shaking) in the ball-sending direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first route on the third route. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball sent from the third path in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third route.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board in the front view, that much of the third route connecting the first route and the second route. It is not necessary to lengthen the route to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and it is possible to shorten the route of the third route. As a result, the route unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and the installation space of the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

As the guide means for guiding the game ball, switching of the rolling direction of the game ball due to unevenness or disposition of a displacement member at the path switching portion and displacement of the displacement member guides the game ball to the second route. The method of doing is illustrated.

In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a concave portion that is recessed in the inner wall of either the front side or the rear side, and a convex portion that is protruded in the other inner wall of the front side or the rear side. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, the guide means has a concave portion provided in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side, and the other inner wall of the front side or the back side. It is composed of a convex portion that is projected on, and the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, so that the game ball is partially displaced in the middle of the route of the third route, and the game ball is formed. The throwing speed can be slowed. Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to easily fit the route unit within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and it is possible to secure a space for disposing the route unit with respect to the game board.

In the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , It is possible to easily bring the game ball, which flows down the third path and is sent to the guide means, into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. As a result, the game ball that flows down the first route and is sent to the third route can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and the rolling speed thereof can be easily reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third route from returning to the first route or swinging in the direction different from the ball feeding direction of the third route on the third route. As a result, the player can easily recognize the game ball passing through the third route.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the rear side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the rear side with respect to the game board. Therefore, the thickness of the front side of the route unit can be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily see the inside of the route unit through the front of the route unit, and the player can easily see the game ball that is thrown inside the route unit. Further, by forming the concave portion on the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from projecting to the front of the route unit, and accordingly, the route unit is arranged on the player side, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the route unit.

More specifically, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is necessary to make the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit larger than the recess depth of the recess. Therefore, as the plate thickness on the front side of the route unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent on the back side. Further, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is conceivable to curve the plate on the front side of the route unit along the shape of the recess, but in this case, the amount of the curve to the front side allows the game to be played. A space from the glass plate forming the front surface of the area is required, and the entire game board must be arranged on the back surface side. Therefore, as the player moves away from the player to the back side, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the route unit.

Further, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is possible to open the portion where the concave portion is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the route unit becomes low because the opening is formed,
The route unit is easily damaged. Further, if an opening is formed on the front surface of the route unit, there is a risk that the opening may pass through and the person may be tampered with.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, since the concave portion is formed on the back side of the route unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness of the entire front side of the route unit from increasing. The inside of the route unit can be made easier by visually recognizing the game ball passing through the inside of the route unit, and by suppressing the partial protrusion to the front side of the route unit and disposing the route unit on the front side of the gaming machine. You can easily see the game ball passing through.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed such that a cross section in the gravity direction is formed in an arc shape in a front view, and an axis of the arc is set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed to have an arc-shaped cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially. The separation distance can be made constant. As a result, the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion can be suppressed from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the inside of the route unit can be prevented from being sandwiched between the convex portion and the inner wall. it can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension line of a rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the first path in a front view, so that the game rolling on the first path Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, it is possible to prevent the center of the game ball sent from the first path to the third path to be sent above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball sent from the first path to the third path can be sent inside the recess.

In any one of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position spaced apart from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the third path in a front view by a radial dimension of a gaming ball. .

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recessed portion is formed at a position spaced apart from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the third route in the front view, more than the radial dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both side surfaces of the path unit in the horizontal direction in a front view and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the game ball sent along the inside of the recess can be smoothly sent to the second path.

In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess is provided so that a cross section of the first path in the ball-sending direction in a front view is arcuate in cross section with a center in the horizontal direction of the third path as a center. The game K8, wherein the convex portion has a rectangular cross section in the ball-sending direction of the first path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion is provided with a concave cross section in the ball feeding direction of the first path in a front view, and the convex portion is the front surface. Since the cross section of the first path in the ball-sending direction in the view is provided to project in a rectangular shape, the guide means
The distance between the concave portion and the convex portion facing each other is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the ball-sending direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball sent inside the recess to swing in the ball sending direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third route.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is provided so as to extend downwardly and obliquely to one side in a direction opposite to the ball feeding direction of the gaming ball of the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and obliquely to one side in the direction opposite to the ball feeding direction of the game ball on the second path in the front view. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex portion when flowing down the three paths can be guided in the direction of inclination of the convex portion. As a result, it is possible to guide the game ball that is in contact with the convex portion along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side separated from the second path.
As a result, the game ball flowing from the third route to the second route can be rolled in the ball-sending direction of the game ball of the second route, and the game ball can be smoothly introduced from the third route to the second route. it can.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route is provided with a second guide means at a connecting portion with the third route, and the game ball sent from the first route is provided by the second guide means. A gaming machine K10, which is capable of being guided by the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route is provided with the second guide means at the connecting portion with the third route, and the first guide is provided by the second guide means. Since the game ball sent from the route can be guided to the guide means, the game ball sent from the first route to the third route can be easily sent to the guide means of the third route. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly send the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since it is possible to easily send the game ball sent from the first route to the guide means, the flow of the game ball from the third route to the second route can be made smooth. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the sending of the game balls of the entire route unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means is provided with a second convex portion protruding on one of the front side and the rear side of the first path, and a concave portion provided at a position facing the second convex portion. A game machine characterized in that it is composed of two recesses, and that the second recess is set to have a large width dimension in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K10, the second guide means has a second convex portion projecting on one of the front side and the rear side of the first path, and the second convex portion. It is composed of a second recessed portion provided at a position facing each other, and the second recessed portion is set to have a large width dimension in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view. Therefore, the game ball sent along the first path can be easily received in the second recess. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly send the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since it is possible to easily send the game ball sent from the first route to the guide means, the flow of the game ball from the third route to the second route can be made smooth. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the sending of the game balls of the entire route unit.

In the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is such that the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball of the first path. .

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball of the first path, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess is set. , Can be made to flow into the third route from the first route on the far side. As a result, the game ball flowing from the first route to the third route can be easily fed to the inside of the recess, and the game ball can easily flow from the third route to the second route.

<About the concept of the invention with the special winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a game board having a game area on the front side; and a flow-down direction changing means for changing the flow-down direction of a game ball arranged in front of the game board and flowing down the game area. Is a first member arranged on the front surface of the game board, a second member arranged on the front surface side of the first member with a predetermined gap, and at least the first member or the second member. An adjusting means for displacing one side, and a game ball that flows down between the facing portions of the first member and the second member by changing the interval between the facing portions of the first member and the second member by the adjusting means. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the flow direction of the game machine is adjustable.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine including a game board having a game area on the front side and a nail that is driven in front of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the angle of the nail that is hit on the gaming board (bend the nail) and adjust the flow direction of the game ball that flows down the game area. However, in the case where the angle of the nail is changed to change the flow direction of the game ball, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, which is disadvantageous to the player (the game ball is less likely to flow into the advantageous flow path). When the player recognizes that it is the angle of the nail), the player stops playing with the gaming machine judged to be unfavorable, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow-down direction changing means is provided with a first member arranged on the front surface of the game board and a first member arranged on the front surface side of the first member with a predetermined space therebetween. Two members and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member are provided, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing surfaces of the first member and the second member, Since the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members facing each other can be adjusted, the flow-down direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front-back direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, with respect to the front view of the game board, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the flow-down direction changing means and determining that it is disadvantageous or advantageous, rather than the nail that changes the flow-down direction of the game ball by the distance in the horizontal direction. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and by the adjusting means,
A game machine L2, wherein the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means. It is possible to hide at least a part of the first member arranged on the back side by the two members so that the position of the first member is hard to be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the gap between the facing portions of the first member and the second member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing a game with the gaming machine, which is determined to be disadvantageous from the distance between the facing members of the first member and the second member, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, the game board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the fastening member that inserts the first opening from the back side of the game board is the first member. The gaming machine L3, wherein the first member is disposed on the gaming board by being fastened to.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L2, the gaming board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is arranged on the game board, so that it is not necessary to form a fastening portion for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and accordingly, the front The outer shape of the first member as viewed can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing other members on the front surface of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board in a state where the downflow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illegally operated and the position of the first member from being illegally changed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board side and is inserted into the first opening portion, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion, thereby First
A game machine L4, wherein members are disposed on the game board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the first member has a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. By doing so, the first member is arranged on the game board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be housed inside the first opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion with the fastening member from projecting to the front side of the first member, and thus it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the gaming machine L4, the first member is slidable and displaceable on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjusting means, and the first opening is the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. A gaming machine L5 which is characterized by being opened.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L4, the first opening has the same size as the displacement region of the projecting portion, so that the first member is projected when the position of the first member is displaced. The part can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when displacing the position of the first member, the first member
It is possible to suppress the member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction in which the adjusting unit is displaced). As a result, it is possible for the worker to simplify the work for adjusting the position of the first member.

The gaming machine L6 according to any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, wherein the gaming board includes a second opening portion that opens at a position different from the first opening portion.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board is
Since the second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening is provided, it is possible to operate the fastening member that is fastened to the back surface side of the game board through the second opening. As a result, it is possible to simplify the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means.

That is, on the back side of the game board, the accessory device and the case member for accommodating the accessory device are arranged. Therefore, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device or the accessory device is operated. Where it is necessary to remove the case member accommodating the accessory device from the game board, the second opening allows the fastening member to be operated from the front side of the game board, so that the operator can move it to the rear side of the game board. Since it is not necessary to remove the accessory device provided and the case member that accommodates the accessory device, the work process of the operator can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-back direction in front view by the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-back direction in front view, so that the second member is provided with respect to the first member. It is possible to suppress the position of the second member in the front view from being changed, as compared with the case where the position is changed to the left and right or the up and down direction in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the advantage or disadvantage due to the change of the position of the second member in the front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than the first member, and the first member is in front view. A gaming machine L8, which is covered by the second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than the first member,
Since the first member is covered by the second member in the front view, the first member is not covered by the second member in the front view.
It can be hidden by a member, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the facing portions of the first member and the second member, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member projects to the other of the first member and the second member. A gaming machine L9, which is provided with a protruding portion that does.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member is the first member. Or, since it has a projecting portion projecting to the other side of the second member, it is possible to change the ball sending direction by bringing the game ball sent between the facing portions of the first member and the second member into contact with the projecting portion. it can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the member is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means can adjust the position of the other one of the first member and the second member with respect to one of the first member and the second member stepwisely. A gaming machine L10 comprising means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means sets the position of the other of the first member and the second member with respect to the one of the first member and the second member. Since the step adjusting means capable of adjusting stepwise is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position stepwise. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

In addition, as means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member in a stepwise manner, the first member or the second member may be provided with respect to a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the projecting convex portion, the position of the first member or the second member is changed, or in the plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board, the first An example is shown in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of the convex portion protruding from the other of the member and the game board.

<About the concept of the invention with the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a game area in which a game ball flows down, and a route unit having a plurality of guide paths for guiding the sending of a game ball flowing down in the game area, and a route unit arranged in the game area,
The path unit is formed of a material that can transmit light and is provided on the front side of the game area, and a second guide path is provided on the back side of the first guide path. And a guide route, the first guide route includes a first winning opening through which a game ball can enter, and the second guide route includes a second winning opening through which a game ball can enter. A gaming machine M1 comprising: a gaming ball that enters the first winning opening, and a gaming value higher than that of the gaming ball that enters the second winning opening.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is provided in which a route unit having a plurality of guide routes for letting a game ball flow down is provided in a game area, and a player sees the game ball flowing down inside the unit to improve the interest of the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to allow the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the guide route to improve the interest of the player, there is a tendency that the handling of each guide route is complicatedly formed. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which route of the respective guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game value of the game ball flowing down the guide route is different,
It becomes difficult for the player to judge whether the player is passing an advantageous (high game value is given) or disadvantageous (low game value is given) route, and the player's interest is caused by the game ball flowing down the route unit. However, there is a problem in that it cannot be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the route unit is a first guide route formed of a material that can transmit light and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a back face of the first guide route. And a second guide route disposed on the side, the first guide route includes a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide route enters a game ball. With a possible second prize hole, the game ball entering the first prize hole is given a higher game value than the game ball entering the second prize hole.
It is possible to make the player easily gaze at the game ball flowing down the first guide route. Further, when the game balls flow down to the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route including the second winning opening having a low game value is on the back side of the first guide route. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide route including the first winning opening having a high game value. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball to which a high game value is added, which makes it easier to improve the player's interest.

The predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball is inserted into the first or second winning opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide path is a first path that sends a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in a front view, and a game ball sent from the first path is a game ball of the first path. The second path for sending the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of, and the connection path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the gravity direction, the connection The game machine M2, wherein the path is formed by curving in a semi-circular shape toward the back side of the game area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in front view, and a ball is sent from the first path. A second path for sending the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the game ball on the first path, and one side of the first path and the second path in the gravity direction. And a connecting path for connecting, and the connecting path is formed by curving in a semi-arcuate shape toward the back side of the game area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. It is possible to increase the number of bends in the throwing path more than in the case of As a result, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be gradually reduced at the curved portion, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking) in the connection path. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed into the second route from the first route, so that the player can easily see the sending of the game ball from the first route to the second route.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking),
It is possible to increase the internal space of the connection path in the ball-sending direction of the first path to prevent the game balls from repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the connection path. In this case, the internal space of the connection path is The connection path is projected in the horizontal direction as viewed from the front because the connection path is enlarged in the ball-sending direction of one path. Therefore, since the route unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to fit the route unit within the predetermined range in the front view.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connection path is curved in a semi-circular shape toward the back side, the outer shape of the path unit in front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore,
When the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the range visually recognized by the player can be contained within a predetermined range (outer shape of the route unit). As a result, the player can easily recognize the game ball flowing down the route unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the route unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the game area in the front view, and the connection route is formed on one side in the horizontal direction of the route unit in the front view. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M2, the route unit is disposed on the other side in the horizontal direction of the game area in the front view, and the connection route is one of the horizontal directions of the route unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player who is located in front of the game board. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is sent to the back side by the connection route, the player can easily recognize the game ball passing through the connection route.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the first winning opening is arranged between the first route and the second route in a front view.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is
Since it is arranged between the first route and the second route in a front view, the first winning opening is formed in the first guide route by utilizing the dead space forming the first route and the second route. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the outer shape of the route unit when viewed from the front. as a result,
The range in which the player visually recognizes the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any one of the gaming machine M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connection path has a third winning opening into which a game ball can enter at two points of a connection portion with the first path and the second path, and the third winning opening. And a displacement member that is displaceable to a position for closing or opening the winning opening, and a gaming ball that is inserted into the third winning opening is the same as a gaming ball that is inserted into the first winning opening. A gaming machine M5, which is provided with a gaming value.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connection path is a third winning opening through which a game ball can enter at two points of the connection part with the first path and the second path. , Those third
And a displacement member that can be displaced to a position to close or open the winning opening, and a game ball that is inserted into the third winning opening, has the same game value as the game ball that enters the first winning opening. Is added,
The game ball sent from the first route to the connection route can be easily made to enter one of the two third winning openings, and the game ball flowing down the connection route provides the player with amusement. It can be made easier.

That is, between the third winning opening on the upstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first passage and the third winning opening on the downstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting passage and the second passage. Since the connecting path can be disposed in the third winning port, the third winning port is closed by the displacing member when the displacing member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to a position that closes or releases the third winning port. At this time, the game ball sent from the first path to the connection path is allowed to flow down the connection path curved to the back side to secure a time until the third winning opening is released, and the third side on the downstream side. Can be made to flow into the prize hole. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the game balls sent to the connection path to flow into the third winning opening, so that the game balls flowing down the connection path can easily provide the player with interest.

Also, since the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connection path (the connecting portion between the first path and the second path), respectively, It is possible to lengthen the time available for the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player an interest, and it is possible to easily increase the interest of the player.

In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detecting means for detecting passage of a gaming ball is provided outside the connection path, and the gaming machine M6.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect that any of the gaming machine M2 to the gaming machine M5 has, a detecting means for detecting passage of the gaming ball is arranged in the connecting path, so that the gaming ball is blocked in the connecting path. In this case, the game machine can detect the error by continuing the detection by the detection means. Further, since the detection means is arranged outside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the detection means, as compared with the case where the detection means is arranged inside the connection path, and the game is accordingly increased. It is possible to prevent the balls from being clogged in the connecting path.

Further, since the detection means is arranged outside the connection path in which the rolling of the game balls is delayed, it is possible to easily detect the number of game balls passing through the connection path accurately. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detecting means is larger than the number of balls to be won in the first winning opening or the third winning opening, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that the fraud is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the injustice by notifying that the injustice is being performed by a warning sound or abnormal lighting.

In the gaming machine M6, the connection path has an inner wall facing dimension of the inner wall in a front view set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall of the first path faces in a direction orthogonal to the ball feeding direction of the game ball. A gaming machine M7 characterized by being set smaller than the space dimension.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M6, the connecting path is set such that the dimension of the inner walls facing each other in front view is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is orthogonal to the ball feeding direction of the gaming ball. Since it is set to be smaller than the facing dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball having a diameter equal to or larger than a predetermined size (a diameter larger than the regulation) is fed, the game ball is retained in the connection path. Can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball having a diameter larger than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in the connection path, when the game ball having a diameter larger than the regulation stays (is clogged) in the connection path, the detection means causes the game machine to play. Can be made to detect an error.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is formed with an opening that opens at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semi-circular shape toward the back side. A gaming machine M7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path has a predetermined diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path curved in a semi-arcuate shape toward the back side. Since an opening that opens with the value of is formed, when a game ball with a diameter less than a predetermined size (a diameter smaller than the specified) is sent, the game ball is moved from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path. Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball having a diameter smaller than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

The opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which is the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the connection path. Therefore, when the diameter of the game ball flowing down the connection path is smaller than the prescribed value, You can easily discharge the game ball.

The gaming machine M8 is provided with a box-shaped accommodating portion that projects from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating a game ball. ,
A gaming machine M9, which is formed in the detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a box-shaped housing portion that projects from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicates with the opening. Since it is formed in a size capable of accommodating a sphere and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, a game having a diameter equal to or smaller than a predetermined dimension (a diameter smaller than a regulation) discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path. The sphere can be stored inside the housing. Further, since the housing portion is formed in the detection range of the detecting means, the game balls stored inside the housing portion can be detected by the detecting means. As a result, when the game balls are stored inside the accommodation portion, the detection means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inlet of the game ball on the first guide route and the inlet of the game ball on the second guide route are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in a front view. A gaming machine M10 characterized by being formed into a.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inlet of the game ball on the first guide route and the inlet of the game ball on the second guide route are provided. Since they are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board is the first.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which of the guide route and the second guide route the flow should take until immediately before the flow. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily gaze at the game ball that flows down the game area and is sent to the route unit. As a result, it is possible to make the player more entertaining.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a ball sending path formed as a space capable of sending a game ball flowing down the game area are provided. In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by a fixing means that is fastened from the back side of the base member. A gaming machine N1.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, and a ball-sending path formed on the front side of the base member and formed as a space capable of sending a game ball flowing down the game area
There is a game machine including a member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member is provided with an extending portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface (contact portion with the base member) on the base member side, and the extending portion. By screwing a screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the screw is installed in a state of being in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to arrange the first member in a state of being in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for inserting the. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the ball sending of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the ball sending space of the game ball, and the extension portion where the opening is formed is located outside the ball sending space. Need to be formed. Therefore, since the extended portion is formed at the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as the ball-sending path is smaller than the outer shape of the first member, and the ball-sending path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is arranged on the base member in a state of being biased to the rear surface side with respect to the base member by the fixing means that is fastened from the rear surface side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be arranged in close contact with each other by the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back surface. Further, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means that is inserted from the back side of the base member, the fastening margin with the base member (the opening through which the fixing means is inserted is formed on the front side of the first member. It is no longer necessary to form an extension part to be formed. Therefore, the entire area of the outer shape of the first member when viewed from the front can be used as the ball-sending path. As a result, the ball-sending path of the first member can be increased.

Moreover, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being unlawfully removed, and the fastening portion can be visually recognized by the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

In the gaming machine N1, the second is arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member.
A second member, and the second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means that is inserted from the rear surface side of the second member to the first member side and fixed to the first member; A gaming machine N2, wherein the gaming machine N2 is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap between the member and the member.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, a second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted from the first member side to the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is disposed in the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When the first member and the second member are fastened together, a force biased to the back side can be applied to the first member by the predetermined gap.
Further, since the force biased to the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member due to the force of sandwiching between the first member and the second member.
It is not necessary to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, and the fastening of the second member can be simplified accordingly.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction in front view. With this, when the first member and the second member are fastened together, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member due to the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a protrusion protruding inside the first opening. A gaming machine N3, characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member is the first
The first member has a first opening formed at a position facing the member, the first member has a protrusion protruding inside the first opening, and the fixing means is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. Since the first member is arranged on the base member, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be arranged inside the first opening. Thereby, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be suppressed from being arranged on the front side of the base member, and the fastening portion of the fixing means can be suppressed from being formed in the ball feeding space of the first member. As a result, the first
It is possible to secure the size of the ball-sending space of the member.

Further, since the protrusion allows the fastening margin (insertion depth) of the fixing means to be secured, it is possible to prevent the fastening of the fixing means from being disengaged from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the biasing force acting on the first member to the back surface side.

In the gaming machine N1, the second is arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member.
A first member, and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other, the base member having a first opening formed at a position facing the first member. The third member has a dimension in the front-back direction in front view smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction in front view of the base member, and is disposed inside the first opening. The member is arranged in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member has a predetermined gap with the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. A gaming machine N4, which is fastened to the back side of the third member in a state.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, the second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member and the facing portion between the first member and the second member are arranged. A third member that is provided, and the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member,
The dimension of the third member in the front-rear direction in the front view is set to be smaller than the dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction in the front view, and the third member is disposed inside the first opening portion, and the first member is the front surface of the third member. The second member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by a fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. The urging force to the back side can be applied to the first member via the third member. Therefore, the urging force to the back side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the urging force that acts on the contact portion of the first member with the base member, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first member.

Further, since the third member is in close contact with the back side of the first member, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entire first member from elastically deforming due to the urging force acting on the back surface of the first member, and thus deforming the ball-sending path of the game ball formed on the first member. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stably fed.

In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. A gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening portion opened in the base member. Therefore,
The urging force acting on the third member can be used as a force for urging the frame-shaped member toward the back side. Therefore,
The frame-shaped member can be easily arranged in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

In addition, the urging force to the back side acting when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means,
Since it can be applied to the contact surface between the frame-shaped member and the base member, the force acting on the contact portion between the first member and the base member can be reduced, and the first member can be prevented from being damaged. it can.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is a displacement member capable of displacing the ball-sending space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive disposed on the back side of the first member and driving the displacement member. Means, the third member is provided with a third opening which is opened to a size capable of inserting the driving means, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. A game machine characterized by being disposed on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is disposed on the rear surface side of the first member and a displacement member capable of displacing the ball sending space of the game ball. And a driving means for driving the displacement member, the third member has a third opening opened to a size capable of inserting the driving means, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. Since it is arranged on the back side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. As a result, it is possible to suppress access to the drive means by an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire inserted from the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving unit from being illicit.

In the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected to the first member side, communicates with the ball sending space of the first member, and the game ball sent to the ball sending space of the first member is sent to the second member. A gaming machine N7, comprising a communication part capable of sending a ball, wherein the communication part is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected to the first member side, communicates with the ball-sending space of the first member, and is sent to the ball-sending space of the first member. Since the communication part that can send the ball to the second member is provided and the communication part is arranged outside the third opening, the third member can be arranged between the communication part and the driving means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the driving of the driving unit to act on the communication portion. As a result, the speed of the game ball sent to the communication section passing through the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means becomes slow, or it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping at the communication section. It is possible to stabilize the delivery of the game ball to the member.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member projects from at least two positions on the back surface side of the first member. A first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and passes through the first opening; and a bend at the end of the first piece that is outside the first opening. A second piece extending toward the front side, and a raised portion protruding toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in a front view, the first piece in the front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion has a dimension between the rear surface of the first member and the rear portion that is the same as the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction in a front view or The bending tip of the second piece is set small, The base member by being fastened to the serial fixing means,
A gaming machine N8, wherein the first member is arranged in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a back surface of the first member. A protrusion that protrudes from at least two locations on the side, the protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and a first piece that bends at the end of the first piece. The first piece includes a second piece that extends toward the outside of the opening and a ridge that bulges on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in a front view, and the first piece in the front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the height of the raised portion between the first member and the back surface is set to be the same as or smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction in front view. , The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means. By this, the first member is disposed in a state of being biased to the back surface side with respect to the base member, so that it is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening the fixing means (for example, a screw) on the back surface side of the first member. , It is possible to secure a space for sending a game ball formed in the first member. As a result, since the ball-sending space can be increased, the ball-storing direction of the game ball to be sent to the first member can be changed, and the ball-sending can be easily provided with interest.

Further, since the screwed portion of the fixing means can be the base member, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of the ball feeding space of the first member due to the urging force acting on the screwed portion of the fixing means. as a result,
It is possible to prevent the first member from elastically deforming and slowing down the speed of the game ball sent from the ball sending path of the first member.

In the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A gaming machine N9, comprising: the first opening and the second opening communicating with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in a front view and a front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the first opening portion and the second opening portion communicate with each other, the projecting portion is arranged inside the first opening portion using the opening of the second opening portion. Can be installed. Therefore, the work of disposing the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driven member coupled to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, a driven direction of the driven member. The displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position is provided. A first displacement region for displacing the third position and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position, wherein the driven member has the displacement member from the first position. By being displaced to the second position, the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, and the third driven position which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position is displaced from the first driven position. From the first driven area and the third driven position A second driven region for displacing a second driven position, wherein at least a part of the second displaced region and the first driven region are set in the same region, and the displacement member defines the second displaced region. When displaced, the restricting means restricts swinging of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction, and the gaming machine O1.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driven member that is coupled to the displacement member and that is driven by the displacement of the displacement member, are driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A game machine for displacing a member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-02984).
No. 9). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to restrict the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the rocking of the driven member other than the driven direction, when the restricting device that restricts the rocking of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed, Since it has to be formed in two places, the shape becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulation unit that regulates swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces a third position that is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position. , The displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, so that the displacement member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and the intermediate position between the first driven position and the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven region that displaces the third driven position and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second displacement region and the first driven region is present. When the displacement member is set in the same region and the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the regulating means is used. The direction of oscillation of the other direction of displacement of the position member is restricted,
The same part of the restricting means can be used to restrict the swing of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since the regulating means only needs to be formed at one place, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the swing of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated by using the same portion of the regulation means, it is not necessary to form the driven member, the displacement member and the regulation portion of one regulation means, respectively. Therefore, the regulation means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine O1, the restriction means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is the base at a position overlapping at least a part of the base member in a front view. It is slidable on a plane parallel to the member, and a region overlapping with the base member in front view is gradually reduced as the first driven position is driven to the second driven position. Gaming machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1, the restriction means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in a front view. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at the position where it overlaps
As the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member in the front view is gradually reduced. Therefore, in the second driven position, the driven member projects to the outside of the base member in the front view. The area is made larger than the first driven position. Therefore, since the driven member projects to the outside of the base member, it is difficult to restrict the swing by the restricting means arranged on the base member. Therefore, the driven member is more likely to swing toward the base member as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. However, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member that is coupled to the driven member, the restricting means operates. It is possible to increase the number of restricted portions and make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging of the driven member when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long in front view,
A rotatable shaft is provided on one side in the longitudinal direction and is rotatably disposed on the base member. In the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation shaft,
The gaming machine O3, wherein the other side of the driven member is disposed above the rotation shaft in the gravity direction.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long in a front view, has a rotatable rotary shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, and has a base member. The driven member is rotatably disposed, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction,
When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation shaft, and the other side of the driven member is arranged above the rotation shaft in the gravity direction. When the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, the first driven position rotates and the longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, the load of the driven member is more likely to act on the rotary shaft as much as the driven member is erected, and the load of the driven member acts in the swinging direction of the driven member, so that the driven member is more likely to swing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member that is coupled to the driven member, it is possible to increase the number of regulated locations by the regulating means and make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging of the driven member when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

Further, when the driven member is driven in the first driven region that requires a force to lift the other end side of the driven member, the restriction from the displacement member is released from the first position to the third position (first displacement region). However, since the restriction member releases the restriction in the first displacement region, the operation of the displacement member can be prevented from being delayed by the restriction unit. Therefore,
The displacement force of the driven member can be secured when the displacement force of the driven member is required.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member is provided with a protruding portion that is protruded at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. And the displacement member is set to be displaceable in a space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is disposed in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall portion. At least a part of the game machine O3 overlaps the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member includes a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the wall portion. The displacement of the driven member is restricted by the displacement member, and the displacement member is set to be displaceable in the space between the driven member and the wall portion in the displacement region at the end, and at least the displacement member is disposed in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall portion. Since a part of the displacement member overlaps the driven member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall portion, and when the displacement member is displaced, swinging can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to combine the role of contacting the wall portion with the protruding portion to restrict the displacement of the driven member and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a displaceable space for the displacement member and the driven member.

In the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member. Is set in a direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.
.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and the displacement member is connected to the displacement member when the displacement member is arranged in the second driven position. Since the displacement direction of the part is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member, when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, the displacement member can be suppressed from being displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be a dead center relationship, and thus the displacement member can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, the second
It is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is The game machine O7 is characterized in that the direction in which the reaction force due to the abutment of the protruding portion and the displacement member acts and the combined direction are set toward the axial center of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, Since the direction in which the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the protruding portion and the displacement member act are combined is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member, the load of the driven member is When acting on the displacement member, the displacement member can be suppressed from being displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member is directed toward the axial center of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is rotated about the pivotal support portion. It is possible to suppress the generation of force. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by the external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap with the wall portion, and is brought into contact with the wall portion by contact with the displacement member. Machine O8.

Here, if the protruding portion of the driven member and the wall portion are always in contact with each other, there is a risk that it will become a resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and it will be difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the protruding portion is provided with a predetermined gap with the wall portion, and the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion when the displacement member comes into contact therewith, so that the displacement member comes to the second driven position. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging when displaced, and it is possible to prevent the projection and the bulging portion from becoming a resistance during the displacement.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
In a front view, at least a part of the decorative member formed of a light-transmissive material that can transmit light on the back side, and the rear side of the decorative member is disposed in a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front surface.
In a gaming machine including a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a game ball, the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the decorative member, and is capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving portion. The means is arranged on the back side of the receiving portion or between the decorative member and the receiving portion, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion. A game machine P1 characterized in that the light amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially varied by being blocked or reflected.

Conventionally, a decoration member, at least a part of which is transparent to light on the back side when viewed from the front, and a decoration member disposed on the back side of the decoration member in a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front surface. There is known a gaming machine that is provided with a receiving portion that can receive and hold a game ball (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, after the game ball is received and held in the receiving unit, the receiving unit is moved, so that the game ball can be moved along with the movement of the receiving unit.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the receiving portion is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the position of the receiving portion and the game ball received in the receiving portion. Therefore, when the receiving part moves after the game ball is received (held) in the receiving part,
It is difficult for the player to know in which direction the receiving part and the game ball received (held) by the receiving part move, and it is difficult for the player to know the position of the game ball accepted by the receiving part. There was a problem.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 is provided with a light emitting means which is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and is capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the receiving portion or the decoration. The light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked or reflected by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion, which is disposed between the member and the receiving portion, and the light amount of the light emitted from the decorative member is partially , The amount of light emitted from the receiving member or the decorative member located on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving unit, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member at other positions, By making them different, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion having the different light amount.

More specifically, when the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion, thereby receiving the receiving portion or the receiving portion. The amount of light emitted from the decoration member on the front side of the game ball received in can be made darker than other portions of the decoration member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
The player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the (dark) portion.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion, thereby receiving or It is possible to make the amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving portion brighter than the other portions of the decorative member. As a result, a large amount of light is emitted from the decorative member (
The player can recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the (bright) portion.

In the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game sphere held in the receiving portion in the gravity direction, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the game sphere held in the receiving portion. A light emitting portion is arranged at the height of the above, and the light transmitting portion of the decoration member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in the structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decoration member, and the light is emitted or emitted from the light emitting means in the structure in which the light is reflected or blocked by the receiving part or the game sphere received in the receiving part. Not only the light is radiated to the receiving unit, but the light is likely to be reflected or blocked by the receiving unit. Therefore, the brightness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, and the shape of the light and darkness becomes a shape different from the outer shape of the game sphere, and the amount of light emitted to the player. There is a possibility that it may be difficult to recognize that the game ball is arranged on the back side of the different part.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the gravity direction, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving portion. The light emitting portion is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball to be held, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, the light and dark of the light emitted by the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion is transmitted through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Can be suppressed from being formed on the front side of the decorative member. As a result, the light-dark shape of light formed by transmitting the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game sphere. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is arranged in a portion where the light intensity is different.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving portion is formed of a light transmissive material, the gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving portion is formed of a light transmissive material, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Can be suppressed. Thereby, when the game ball is not received in the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of a portion having a different light amount of light in the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without the player being aware. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member in the positioning operation or the returning operation of the receiving portion, and to allow the player to pay attention only to the displacement operation of the receiving portion when the player wants to gaze.

The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member formed of a non-light-transmissive material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving section, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section. The connecting member is arranged such that the dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member to displace the receiving portion. Along with this, the gaming machine P4, which is projected or retracted between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes a connecting member formed of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means receives the light. Is disposed on the back side of the displacement region of the portion, the coupling member is set to have a dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. With the displacement, the light emitting means and the decorative member are projected or retracted between the opposing surfaces, so that the emission area of the light from the decorative member can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the light radiated from the light emitting means to the decorative member can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area blocking the light can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are projected and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member so that the light emitting area of the light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is made small, so that the player can easily recognize the light receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion that emits a small amount of light from the decorative member.

In the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of drive means for driving the receiving portion, and the gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, so that the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the receiving portion and the light emitting means. The connecting member can also serve as a role of blocking the light emitted from. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing the drive means for driving the receiving portion.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from a game ball received in the receiving portion, and the displacement is performed. The member is made of a non-light-transmissive material and is displaceable at a position projecting or retracting between the light emitting means and the decoration member, and the game ball is received in the receiving portion, A gaming machine P6, characterized in that the gaming machine P6 is projected between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a game ball received by the receiving portion. A more displacable displacement member is provided, and the displacement member is made of a non-light-transmissive material, and is displaceable at a position projecting or retracting between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other. When the game ball is held in the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball block the light emitted from the light emitting means because the light is projected and the light emitting means and the decoration member face each other. Then, the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without the player's knowledge. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from a game ball received in the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is made of a non-light-transmissive material and is displaceable at a position projecting or retracting between the light emitting means and the decoration member, and the game ball is received in the receiving portion, A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the game ball.
.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a game ball received by the receiving portion. A more displacable displacement member is provided, and the displacement member is made of a non-light-transmissive material, and is displaceable at a position projecting or retracting between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other. When the game ball is held in the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means, because the light is projected from the facing portion between the light emitting means and the game ball. Thus, the position of the game ball can be recognized by the player in the bright part (the part where the amount of light is larger than the others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without the player's knowledge. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally formed of a metal material having a higher light reflectance than the resin material, or the outer surface thereof is coated with metal. This makes it easier to reflect the light radiated to the displacement member, clarifying the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member,
The player can easily recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decorative member side. In doing so, the reflected light can be made difficult to diffuse (light can be easily collected). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decoration member, it is possible to clarify the difference in the light amount of the light and make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed by bulging in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, since the decoration member is formed by bulging in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decoration member is prevented. Can spread easily. As a result, the player can recognize the position of the game ball received by the receiving section because the player can recognize the area where the light amount of the light formed by the game ball received by the receiving section is different. It can be made easier.

In the gaming machines 01 to P9, the gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means is capable of emitting at least two colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors. Can be changed.

For example, when the first region of the first emission color and the second region of the second emission color are used to separate the light emission and the receiving part is arranged in the first region, the expectation of the big hit is higher. Make it higher as a result,
This makes it easier for the player to gaze at the position of the game ball held in the receiving section.

In this case, since the range of the first area and the range of the second area can be changed only by changing the emission color, a plurality of forms of effect are formed by changing the range of light emission. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest.

<Characteristic Q group> (Be sure to take a firing sensor when descending due to vertical tilt)
Movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, a movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means, and the movable means at the first position. In a gaming machine having a first position detecting means capable of detecting the position, the movable control means moves from the first position to the second position when moving from the first position to the second position. The moving means is stopped after moving the moving means based on predetermined moving data for moving to the second position. When moving from the second position to the first position, Moves the movable means based on movement data for moving the second position in the direction of the first position, and stops the movable means when the movable means is detected by the first position detection means. What you do Game machine Q1 characterized by Rukoto.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, the effect of notifying the player is executed after the lottery result is variably displayed for a certain period of time, and the effect is moved within the period in which the effect is executed. Thus, a gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the player of various presentation modes (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, the above-described gaming machine executes stop control for stopping a movable object at a predetermined stop position when moving the movable object. However, when stopping the movable object, it can be stopped at the predetermined stop position. There was a problem that the stop position could not be achieved and could vary. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of stably controlling the movement of a movable object in the gaming machine described above.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, by moving based on the movement data, the control load is reduced as compared with the case where the movement position is detected while being detected. Despite the controllable structure, when the movable unit is moved from the second position to the first position, the movable unit is stopped and controlled based on the result detected by the detection unit. Therefore, the movable unit moved to the first position is controlled. Even if the position is actually varied, it can be stopped and controlled at a more accurate first position, and the variation when moved to the first position becomes large depending on the number of movements. It is possible to prevent the above, and to stably control the movable object.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the movable means has a launching means capable of launching a game ball, and the launching means launches the game ball while being moved to the first position. A gaming machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball is launched in a state of being moved to the first position. Therefore, by accurately moving the gaming ball to the first position, the launch accuracy of the gaming ball varies. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that occurs.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, a base member for movably fixing the movable means is provided, and the movable means has a shaft portion pivotally supported by the base member at one end side, and from the one end side. At least the moving means for moving the game sphere to the other end side, and the opening for causing the game sphere to be launched by the launching means on the other end side, the movable means is the first time from the origin position. Is movable to the first position, which is set at a position rotated in the first direction about the shaft with an amount of movement, and the shaft is rotated from the first position with the second amount of rotation. A gaming machine Q3, which is configured to be movable from the origin position to the second position set at a position rotated in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the center of gravity of the movable means is changed by the movement of the game ball by the moving means, which makes stop control difficult. Since the structure is such that it can be accurately stopped at the first position, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems due to stop control of the movable means.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the moving means starts moving the game ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the movable means starts moving control from the origin position to the first position. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q3, the gaming ball moves to the other end side before turning to the first position, so that the weight of the other end side becomes heavy and the movable load increases. This has the effect of suppressing the inconvenience. Further, by moving the movable control to the first position after the start of the movement control, there is an effect that the game ball can be moved to the other end side in accordance with the timing when the movable means is moved to the first position. is there.

<Characteristic R group> (Detection of sensor when power is restored)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a movable means movable to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a game ball entering the ball entering means to the movable means. With the guiding means capable of guiding with, the movable means holds the opening means into which the game ball guided by the guiding means can enter and the game ball entered from the opening means. It has a holding means capable of moving, and a moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means, wherein the gaming machine moves the game ball entered from the opening means to the movable means. A gaming machine R1 having a discharge control means capable of causing the moving means to execute a discharge operation capable of discharging the outside of the game machine R1.

  In the past, game machines such as pachinko machines move a movable object to a position where the player can see it as one of the effects to notify the result of hit determination such as a hit, and give the player a novel impression. There has been proposed a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that a malfunction occurs due to the movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects in the gaming machine described above.

  According to the gaming machine R1, even if the movable means is configured to be able to enter the game ball and move the entered game ball, the game ball entered in the movable means is discharged to the outside by the discharging operation. Since it is configured to be possible, even if the game ball excessively enters the movable means, the game ball can be discharged and normally operated, and an effect can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R1, main control means capable of executing game control, sub-control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the ball entry means. And a ball detection unit capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the main control unit is configured to detect that the game ball has entered by the ball detection unit. On the basis of this, there is an output means for outputting a ball entry signal to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means is capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening means, and the movable means. Movable control means capable of movably controlling the means, and initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial operation with respect to the movable means when the game machine is powered on. And the initial operation is executed When the ball input signal is received during a certain period, at least the period until the initial operation is completed is based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the opening detection means, A gaming machine R2, comprising: an initial discharging operation control means to be executed by the discharging control means.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, when there is a possibility that a game ball will enter the movable means during the initial operation, monitoring by the opening detection means is executed. By entering the ball, the discharging operation is executed after the completion of the initial operation, so that it is possible to suppress a defect in executing the initial operation.

  In the gaming machine R2, when the moving means is moved to a predetermined position, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the game ball entered from the opening means. R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the gaming ball entered through the opening means by being moved to the predetermined position by the moving means. There is an effect that the acceptance of the game ball can be controlled by limiting the timing that the holding means can hold.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, when the entrance signal is received during the period when the initial operation is being performed, the opening detection means is used until a predetermined period elapses after the initial operation is completed. A gaming machine R3 having a determination control execution means for executing determination control for determining whether a game ball is detected.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, when the ball entry signal is received during the period when the initial operation is executed, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the opening detecting means. Therefore, in a state where the game ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R3, the predetermined period is a period until a predetermined number of seconds elapses after receiving a specific control signal from the main control means, the gaming machine R4.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R3, the discharging operation can be performed at a constant timing by being executed after outputting a specific control signal, and the discharging operation is performed at an appropriate timing. The effect is that the operation can be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control means includes a determination means capable of executing determination, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means. , A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In this case, the game machine R5 is characterized by having special state setting means capable of changing the ball entering means into a special state in which a game ball can easily enter.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, when the judgment result becomes a specific judgment result, the game ball easily enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that the player can be given an opportunity to enter the ball and a novel effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine R5, the specific sub-control signal is a signal output based on the end of the special state, the gaming machine R6.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R5, the discharging operation can be performed after the special state ends, so that the discharging operation is performed after the gaming ball is difficult to enter the movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect can be further suppressed.

<Characteristic S group> (Sound effect when winning special electric accessory)
First ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter, first detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering by the first detecting means When it is detected, a first signal output means for outputting a first signal, a first flow path through which a game ball entering the first ball entering means can pass, and one of the first flow paths In a gaming machine having a visual recognition section for visually recognizing a game ball passing through the section, a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball not entering the first ball entering means, A second detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and outputs a second signal when the game ball has been detected by the second detecting means. A second signal output means, a first flow path guiding means for guiding the game ball entering the second ball entering means to the first flow path, and the first signal A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on a lapse of a first period after receiving the message, and a second time based on a lapse of a second period after receiving the second signal. A game machine S1 comprising: a second effect executing means for executing an effect.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that during the privilege game, the player gets tired of the game in which the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine, which can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine S1, since the second effect is executed at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means without entering the first ball entering means also passes the visual recognition portion, There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the effect together with the first effect caused by entering the ball, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine S1, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, a display means for displaying information corresponding to the ball entering, and the information displayed on the display means are 1 update means for updating corresponding to the game ball entered into the ball entering means, and the updating means updates the information at least at the timing when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine S2 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1, it is possible to make the player think that the information has been updated for the gaming balls that have not entered the first ball entering means. There is an effect that the player can be made to think as if he / she entered the ball entering means including the game ball that entered the ball means.

  In the gaming machine S1 or 2, third guiding means for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means to the first guiding path, and the third guiding means. A game machine S3, comprising: a third effect executing means capable of executing a third effect at a timing when the game ball guided by the player reaches the visual recognition part.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the game ball guided to the third guiding means is also guided to the visual recognition portion to execute the third effect, so that the game ball is entered to the ball entering means. It is possible to make the game ball that entered the ball pass through the visual recognition portion in a pseudo manner, and to make the player think that many game balls are entering the ball entering means. is there.

  In the gaming machine S3, the updating means updates the information at least at a timing when the third effect is executed, the gaming machine S4.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S3, the information is updated in accordance with the timing at which the third effect is executed, so that the game that has not entered the first and second ball entering means. There is an effect that the ball can be made to appear as if it is entering the first entering means, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be equal to or longer than a first downflow period required for the game ball entering the first ball entering means to reach the visual recognition portion. Yes, the second period is set to be equal to or longer than a second downflow period required for the game ball entering the second ball entering means to reach the visual recognition portion. S5.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the effect is produced in accordance with the timing when the visual recognition portion is reached, so that the visual recognition portion is made to appear as a ball entry means. The effect is that you can.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening into which a game ball can enter is formed as a part of the first flow passage in the first flow passage in the visual recognition portion, and the opening is formed in the opening. A gaming machine S6, characterized in that a game ball entering the ball is visible.

  According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the opening formed in the visual recognition portion can be made to appear as a ball entering means, and more game balls enter the ball entering means. It has the effect of making you feel as if you were in a sphere.

<Characteristic T group> (pseudo jackpot production during latent condition)
Discrimination means for performing a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information for showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information for showing the first discrimination result on the display means. Is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, a first game state, and a first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means are completed. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than a game state, and a privilege game effect capable of executing a privilege game effect when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means. And a pseudo bonus game effect execution unit capable of executing the bonus game effect in a pseudo manner when the second game state is set by the game state setting unit. Game machine T1 which is characterized.

  Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There was a game in which a privilege game in which many prize balls could be given was executed. Further, as a game state in which the above-mentioned lottery is executed, a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be set, and the second game state is set. In that case, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a special game capable of giving a prize ball to a player can be easily executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine can give the player a prize ball by the special game and the special game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the special game is aimed at. Since it is necessary to execute a game and a game aiming at a special game, there is a problem that the playability becomes complicated and the player's willingness to play is lowered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the gaming motivation and improves the interest of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine T1, since the pseudo privilege game effect is executed when the game state which is advantageous to the player is set, the contents of the effect executed in the state advantageous to the player are unified. be able to. Therefore, by executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the privilege game effect can be simulated in addition to the case where the privilege game is being executed, it is possible to make the player think that a lot of privilege games are being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T1, a variable ball entry means that can be varied between a first state in which the ball can enter and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter than the first state, and at least the variable ball entry means Pseudo-ball entering means capable of entering a game ball that has been balled, and variable control means for changing the variable ball entering means to the first state when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine T2, characterized in that the pseudo-ball entering means is for entering a game ball when the pseudo privilege game effect executing means executes the pseudo privilege game effect.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T1, an effect of entering the game ball into the pseudo ball entering means is executed when the pseudo privilege game effect is executed, so that a realistic effect is produced. It has the effect of being able to execute.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the second game state is set by the game state setting unit, the game state setting unit has a production condition determination unit that determines whether a predetermined production condition is satisfied, and the pseudo bonus game production. The game machine T3, wherein the executing means executes the pseudo privilege game effect when the effect condition determining means determines that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the predetermined effect condition is not established, the pseudo privilege game effect is not executed even during the second game state. With such a configuration, for example, when the period in which the second game state is set is short (shorter than the execution period of one privilege game), etc., it is suppressed that the pseudo privilege game effect is executed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect to be executed.

  In the gaming machine T3, the upper limit value setting means for setting the upper limit value of the number of times the second game state is continuously set after the jackpot game is finished, and the second game state is continuously set by the game state setting means. A setting number measuring means for measuring the set number of times, and the effect condition determining means determines the effect condition when the number of times measured by the setting number measuring means is less than a predetermined number. A gaming machine T4, characterized in that it is determined that is established.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, the following effects are produced. That is, the upper limit number of times that the second game state can be set continuously is set, and it is determined how many times the second game effect is currently set continuously. Then, the effect condition is satisfied when the number of continuous setting in the second game state is less than the predetermined number. As a result, a stable pseudo bonus game effect can be executed in a state in which the period in which the second game state is set is secured, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T4, when the effect condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is larger than a predetermined number, a second game state effect different from the pseudo privilege game effect is executed. A game machine T5 having a possible second game state effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T4, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the number of times the second game state is continuously set is larger than the predetermined number, the specific second game state effect is executed without executing the pseudo privilege game effect, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It has the effect that it can be executed.

<Feature U group> (Point consumption production)
Displaying a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the means, dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and determination result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, based on establishment of a predetermined condition, Numerical value production executing means capable of executing numerical performance for giving numerical information to the player, and numerical information storage means capable of accumulating and storing numerical information of the numerical performance executed by the numerical performance executing means. Can be operated by the player Capable operating means and at least a part of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means in correspondence with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to the player. A game machine U1 comprising: a dynamic display mode determination control means that can be determined by operating an operation means.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are variably displayed, and the lottery result is informed by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. As a production other than the design, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice production is performed to notify the player of the lottery result before the design is stopped. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the effect performed until the result of the lottery is won. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine U1, since the contents of the dynamic display mode relating to the notification of the determination result can be changed by the numerical value information accumulated by the numerical effect to be executed, the numerical effect is executed and the numerical value information is accumulated. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game machine at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine U1, when the part of the modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination control means, the corresponding numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. The gaming machine U2, which is updated and stored as described above.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the accumulated numerical information is subtracted by determining the dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, and therefore the compensation using the numerical information is paid. As a result, the effect of providing the dynamic display mode can be executed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine U1 or U2 has a notifying means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical value information stored in the numerical value information storing means.

  In addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, which is not dependent on the gaming machine U3, information corresponding to the stored numerical information is notified, so that the player can easily recognize the state of the numerical information accumulated. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, it has a numerical value information deciding means for deciding the numerical value information given to the player by the numerical value effect executed by the numerical value effect executing means, and the numerical value information deciding means, A gaming machine U4, which is configured to be capable of determining numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored by the numerical information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines U1 to U3, it is possible to determine the numerical value information provided by the numerical effect corresponding to the numerical value information stored in the numerical value information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the numerical information can be given in accordance with the numerical information held by the player.

<Characteristic V group> (common acquisition processing for button press timing)
Operation means operable by the player, operation effect execution means for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the operation means, and an effective period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means A gaming machine having an effective period setting means for setting and an effect setting means for setting an effect mode of a predetermined period including the effective period set by the effective period setting means, wherein the operating means is provided during the effective period. When is operated by the operation effect execution means based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means and the operation timing calculated by the calculation means based on the effective period set by the effective period setting means A gaming machine V1 comprising: a production mode setting means for setting a production mode of the operation production to be executed.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a winning lottery and execute a variable display effect for showing the result of the lottery on a display device. Further, a plurality of suggestive effects for suggesting the lottery result are provided, and as a part of the plurality of suggestive effects, the gaming machine that executes a specific suggestive effect based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-283442). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the specific suggestive effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated, the player's motivation to operate the operating means is reduced, and the player can quickly However, there is a problem that the game gets tired of playing.

  According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to set the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation timing of the operation means during the effective period, so that it is possible to provide the player with various effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game machine at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine V1, the calculating means calculates the ratio of the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period at the timing when the operating means is operated, the gaming machine V2.

  The gaming machine V2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1. That is, the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the ratio of the effective period and the remaining period of the effective period calculated by the timing when the operation means is operated. Thereby, since the operation effect is set based on the length of the set effective period and the operation timing of the operation means, it is possible to set various operation effects and enhance the effect. There is.

  When the configuration of the gaming machine V2 is used, it is preferable that different valid periods are set for the same effect mode set by the effect setting means. With such a configuration, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing with respect to the effect mode being executed, different calculation results of the calculating means can be obtained by changing the set effective period. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the operation presentation.

  The gaming machine V1 or V2 has display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and movable means capable of executing a predetermined movable effect, and the effect setting means executes the effect mode on the display means. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect using the movable means.

  The gaming machine V3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1 or V2. That is, when the effect operation means is operated while the effect displayed on the display means is being executed, the operation effect for moving the movable means is executed, so the operation means is operated at any timing within the effective period. Even if an operation is performed, the operation effect can be executed without changing the effect content displayed on the display means. Therefore, the control for executing the operation effect can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine V2 or 3, the effective period setting means is capable of setting different effective periods when the same effect mode is set by the effect setting means.

  The gaming machine V4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V2 or 3. That is, even when the operating means is operated at the same timing with respect to the effect mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculating means is changed by changing the set effective period, and the effect of the operation effect is produced. The mode can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player who always operates the operation means at a constant timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In any one of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the proportion calculated by the calculation means is divided into a first division means by a first condition and a second division means by a second condition different from the first condition. And a division determination means for determining whether to divide the ratio by the first division means or the second division means, and the effect mode setting means is determined by the division determination means. A gaming machine V5, characterized in that a rendering mode of the operation rendering is set based on contents.

  The gaming machine V5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V2 to V4. That is, since the ratio calculated by the calculating means is divided under different conditions and the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the divided contents, even if the calculation results of the calculating means are the same, different operations are performed. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Characteristic W group> (Preliminary look-up result for jackpots is announced)
A game ball that can enter a game ball, an acquisition unit that can acquire information based on the game ball that entered the game ball, and a memory that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Means, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, When identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit, a privilege game executing unit capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and the privilege game executing unit executes the privilege game. A gaming machine having a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the game machine having the privilege game type determining means prior to the determining means. Means of storage Based on the stored information, the preliminary determination means for performing the preliminary determination, and the preliminary information for indicating the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, the determination result corresponding to the previously determined information A prior notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating, and a determination result determined by the bonus game type determination means when the determination means determines a specific determination result Shows a privilege game type pre-determination unit that determines in advance the information stored in the storage unit before the type of privilege game is determined by the determination unit, and a determination result by the privilege game type pre-determination unit. A prior privilege game type informing means for informing the prior game information before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determined information is started. Gaming machine W1, characterized in that.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by a plurality of types of players are set in the privilege game to be executed, and in the case of winning, one privilege game type is determined, There has been proposed a gaming machine that makes the player's interest different depending on the type of privilege game being executed even in the case of winning (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has been required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest for winning or losing, but also the interest for the type of privilege game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine W1, since advance game information corresponding to the type of privilege game executed in the case of a win is also informed, it is possible to provide the player with an effect combined with the informed result of the advance determination. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W1, it has a symbol display means for displaying a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judging means on the display means, and the advance notification means is the symbol. A gaming machine W2, characterized in that the display mode of the symbol displayed by the display means is varied to notify.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine W1, it is possible to identify the information related to the determination result by the design in a state where the information is stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed, Not only the determination result of the dynamically displayed identification information but also the determination result stored in the storage means can be of interest, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. effective.

  In the gaming machine W1 or W2, the effect means for executing an effect when the privilege game is executed, and the advance privilege game type notifying means are for causing the effect means to execute a specific effect. A gaming machine W3.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the notification about the privilege game type is executed at an early stage by the effecting means that executes an effect when the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to.

  In the gaming machine W3, the advance privilege game type notifying means makes a notification in response to execution of the notification for indicating the preliminary determination by the prior notifying means. Machine W4.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W3, the privilege game type is also notified in advance in response to the execution of the prior notification related to the determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to perform advance notification in combination with the notification content.

<Characteristic X group> (Small hit notification and charge pattern)
A game ball that can enter a game ball, an acquisition device that can acquire information based on the game ball that entered the game device, and the information that is acquired by the acquisition device are stored. The storage means, the first determination means for performing the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means for displaying, and privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. If the second determination means capable of executing the second determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition and the second determination result by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the game is entered in the ball entering means. It is possible to change the ball so that it is easy to enter In a gaming machine having variable means, the specific second determination result is a first determination type for changing the variable means to the easy-to-enter state, and the ball entering means rather than the first determining means. A second determination type for setting the variable means into a special easy-to-enter state so that a game ball can be easily entered is set, and the privilege game execution means is set to the specific determination result by the determination means. Is a special special game different from the privilege game when the special special judgment result is determined, and the identification information is special as a stop display mode for indicating the special first judgment result. When the special game determined to be the specific second determination result corresponding to the second determination type is executed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the special information is displayed. Dynamic display before playing a game Gaming machine X1, characterized in that by switching the identification information of the special identification information is intended for the temporary stop display.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for notifying the lottery result are variably displayed, and the lottery result is informed by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. As a production other than the design, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice production is performed to notify the player of the lottery result before the design is stopped. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the effect performed until the result of the lottery is won. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special identification information is displayed, and the special identification information is displayed so that the player is tired of playing the game until a specific determination result is notified. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine X1 has a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display mode determining means is a dynamic mode. A gaming machine X2, which determines whether the special game is executed during the dynamic display, and determines a dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X1, it is possible to easily set the special identification information by determining the execution of the special game before the dynamic display.

<Characteristic Y group> (Multiple button effects notify the end of the effective time at the same timing)
Corresponding to the operation means operable by the player, the operation effect setting means for setting the operation effect executed corresponding to the case where the operation means is operated, and the operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. In the gaming machine having a valid period setting unit that sets a valid period determined to be valid when the operating unit is operated, the operation effect setting unit can set a plurality of operation effects. The effective period setting means determines one effective period for the plurality of operation effects set by the operation effect setting means, and the plurality of operation effects are set to one within the effective period. Based on the operation being performed by the player, the one operation effect is executed in a predetermined order, and the notification means individually corresponds to each of the plurality of operation effects. Gaming machine Y1, characterized in that the identification information for indicating the individual valid period that is to broadcast in response to the set the expiration time.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. When the lottery result is notified, the symbols for notifying the lottery result are variably displayed in the fluctuation time determined by the lottery, and then stopped and displayed in combination with the symbols showing the lottery result. A game machine has been proposed in which, during the period in which the variable display is executed, the player operates an operation unit that can be operated to perform an effect in which a notice display related to the notified lottery result is displayed ( For example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, it has been required for the above-mentioned gaming machine to further enhance the enjoyment of the game by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, even when a plurality of operation effects are set, since the operation effective period is informed respectively, it is possible to recognize a period during which the operation means can be operated as an individual operation effect, and the entertainment of the game is interesting. There is an effect that can improve.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the identification information is notified by sequentially changing the individual valid period in correspondence with the predetermined period in response to the decrease in the valid period. Machine Y2.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y1, the operation information is variably displayed in the order of execution in the identification information indicating the individual effective period, so that a plurality of operation effects are executed for the player. The effect is that the order can be identified.

  In the gaming machine Y2, when the valid period elapses in a state in which the plurality of operation effects are set, the respective identification information to be notified is informed that the valid period has elapsed at the same timing. A gaming machine Y3, which is variable as follows.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y2, it is possible to inform the player that the individual effective period will also be passed along with the elapse of the effective period, and to be able to correctly inform the elapse of the effective period. There is.

  In the gaming machine Y1 to the gaming machine Y3, when the identification information is changed corresponding to the decrease of the effective period, the identification information is updated and changed after the blinking display. Gaming machine Y4.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, since the identification information is changed after the blinking display, it is possible to make it difficult to understand even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant, which is effective. This has the effect of facilitating the control for informing the time.

<Characteristic Z group> (Automatic press of button effect)
The operation means operable by the player, the operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect executed when the operation means is operated, and the operation effect when the operation effect is set by the operation effect setting means, An effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation by the operation means is determined to be effective, and when the effective period is set by the effective period setting means, the identification information corresponding to the set effective period is notified. In the gaming machine having the notifying means, the notifying means notifies a specific notifying mode when the valid period is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period, the gaming machine Z1.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a lottery is awarded for the game, and if the result of the lottery is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. When the lottery result is notified, the symbols for notifying the lottery result are variably displayed in the fluctuation time determined by the lottery, and then stopped and displayed in combination with the symbols showing the lottery result. A game machine has been proposed in which during the period in which the variable display is executed, the player operates an operation unit that can be operated to perform an effect in which a notice display regarding the notified lottery result is displayed ( For example, JP 2012-217766 A). By the way, it has been required for the above-mentioned gaming machine to further enhance the enjoyment of the game by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, since the specific notification mode is notified when the valid period reaches the predetermined period, it is possible to notify the player of the specific period in an easy-to-understand manner, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. The effect is that you can do it.

  The gaming machine Z1 has a suggestion mode display means for displaying on the display means a suggestion mode for suggesting to the player that it is a period in which the operating means is operated during the period in which the valid period is set, and the suggestion mode is displayed. The means variably displays the suggestion mode to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means, and the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. Even if the operation means is not operated, a pseudo operation mode indicating that the operation means has been operated in a pseudo manner different from the operated completion suggestion mode is displayed. A gaming machine Z2.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z1, the pseudo operation mode is displayed, so that the effective period has elapsed even if the operation effect is automatically executed with the elapse of the effective period. Is effective in making it easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine Z2, the suggestion mode is configured by a pattern simulating the shape of the operation means, and the pseudo operation mode is configured by an effect mode for operating the pattern. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Z2, there is an effect that it is possible to easily inform that the operation effect has been executed due to the elapse of the effective period.

  In any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode. Game machine Z4.

  According to the gaming machine Z4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible for the person to feel that the effect has been executed by the operation.

  In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a gaming machine γ1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In the past, game machines such as pachinko machines move a movable object to a position where the player can see it as one of the effects to notify the result of hit determination such as a hit, and give the player a novel impression. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from getting tired of the game in an early stage (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130802).
By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that a malfunction occurs due to the movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects in the gaming machine described above.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter and a movable means movable to a first position and a second position different from the first position. , A guiding means capable of guiding the game ball entering the ball entering means to the movable means, wherein the movable means can enter the game ball guided by the guiding means. Opening means, holding means capable of holding the game ball entered from the opening means, and moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means, the game The machine has a discharge control means capable of causing the moving means to execute a discharge operation capable of discharging the game ball entered from the opening means to the outside of the movable means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and executes the control of the game based on the main control means capable of executing the control of the game and the control signal output from the main control means. It has sub-control means capable of doing, and a ball detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the ball means, the main control means, the ball detection means Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by, the output means for outputting a ball input signal to the sub-control means, the sub-control means, the game ball is input from the opening means. Aperture detection means capable of detecting that a ball has been struck, movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means, and predetermined when the game machine is powered on. Initial movement for executing the initial movement by the movable control means When the ball input signal is received while the control means and the initial operation are being executed, it is detected by the opening detection means that the game ball has entered the ball at least until the initial operation is completed. Based on the fact, the initial discharge operation control means for causing the discharge control means to execute the discharge operation is provided.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, and when the moving means is moved to a predetermined position, the holding means can hold the game ball entered from the opening means. It is composed of.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, wherein the predetermined period is a period until a predetermined number of seconds elapses after receiving a specific control signal from the main control means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the main control means is a determination means capable of executing a determination and an identification for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information on the display means, dynamic display manner determining means for determining the dynamic display manner of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the specific one for the display means Special state setting means capable of changing the ball entering means to a special state in which a game ball can easily enter when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a game ball can enter a ball entering means, a movable position movable to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the ball entering. There is a guide means capable of guiding the game ball entered into the means to the movable means, and the movable means, the opening means into which the game ball guided by the guide means can enter, The game machine has a holding means capable of holding a game ball entered through the opening means, and a moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means. It has a discharge control means capable of causing the moving means to execute a discharge operation capable of discharging the game ball entered from the opening means to the outside of the movable means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the main control means capable of executing the control of the game, the sub-control means capable of executing the control of the game based on the control signal output from the main control means, and the game ball to the ball entering means. Has a ball-entry detecting means capable of detecting that a ball has entered, and the main control means is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the ball-entry detecting means. It has output means for outputting a ball entry signal to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means moves the opening detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening means, and the movable means. Movable control means capable of controlling, initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial operation with respect to the movable means when the game machine is powered on, While the initial operation is being executed, When a ball signal is received, the discharge control means executes the discharge operation based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the opening detection means at least until the initial operation is completed. And an initial discharging operation control means for controlling the initial discharging operation.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the moving means is moved to a predetermined position, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the game ball entered through the opening means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined period is a period until a predetermined number of seconds elapses after receiving a specific control signal from the main control means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means is capable of performing a determination, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display means for executing the determination. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a game for playing the ball entering means when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. And a special state setting means capable of changing the state to a special state in which a ball can easily enter.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)

Claims (2)

Main control means capable of executing game control,
In a gaming machine having sub-control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Entry detection means capable of detecting that a game sphere has entered the entry means,
Movable means movable to a first position and a second position different from the first position;
And a guide means capable of guiding the game ball entering the ball entering means to the movable means,
The movable means is
An opening means into which the game ball guided by the guiding means can enter,
Holding means capable of holding the game ball entered from the opening means,
And a moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means,
The gaming machine may have a discharge control unit that can be executed by the moving means the discharge operation capable of discharging the game balls that ball entrance from the opening means to the outside of the movable means,
The main control means has an output means for outputting a ball entry signal to the slave control means based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the ball detection means.
The sub control means is
An opening detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the opening means,
Movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means,
Initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial operation for the movable means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
When the ball input signal is received while the initial operation is being executed, at least until the initial operation ends, based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the opening detection means. And an initial discharge operation control means for causing the discharge control means to execute the discharge operation, and a gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means for displaying a display mode for notifying a predetermined determination result.

Images